Home

SURPAC for Windows XP/Vista/7 Version 5.37, Release 01

Contents

1. Ground Before Source Polifin_Base_PC Cloud 5 Empty cells interpolate X Ceil After Source Polifin_Surface PC Cloud x Empty cells interpolate x Grid step 1 000000 gt Edit grid size 335 x 355 Projection dir z cell height average height X Results Update the grid first Num precision 3 F ER 95 cane Ensure that the Base file is set as the Source for the Ground Before model and that the Surface file is set as the Ciel After model These can be interchanged by clicking on the up down arrows For both models set the Empty cells option as interpolate unless you have any reason for wanting these cells to be ignored The Step value can be left as 1 0000 or changed to any more appropriate value After all items have been set click on the red bar labelled Update Volume calculation B Ground Before Source Polfin fiase PG Goud x Empty cells interpolate x ight above ground 51 606 48 292 TL Ceil After 44 978 Source Polifin_Surface_PC Cloud x 41 663 Empty cells interpolate x 38 349 35 035 Grid 31 720 step 1 000000 gt Edit grid 28 406 size 335 x 355 projection dir z 25 092 cellheight average height x 21 777 pdate 18 463 Results 15 149 Volume 1 323 805 840 11 835 Surface 118 925 000 FNS See an 8 520 Matching cells 100 0 Non matching cells ground 0 0 5 20
2. 24760 1 21812 Creating theoretical Points by duplicating surveyed Points Method 2 In both Methods the theoretical Point s source Point from which its data were derived will be shown in the Alternate Name column NB These theoretical Points will not be shown on either a General Plan Sheet a Working Plan Sheet a General CAD Sheet or in a GP Data Sheet When creating a theoretical Point SURPAC will automatically allocate the Point Description of 22C Calculated Point To suppress the display of these theoretical Points in the printed Co ordinate list uncheck the Category Calculated Points before printing the file Page 285 of 312 Running the AutoPlan GP Creation function Load the General Plan CAD programme and go through the normal Sheet Set Up process Select the AutoPlan GP Creation menu item found under the Data menu heading or press Ctrl P SURPAC AutoPlan Creation 2s Auto Data Creation Options Auto Draw and Store Stand Lines Yes No Auto Write and Store Stand Data Yes No Auto Name the Stand Points Yes No Further Options Store Areas to the Sheet Area File Yes No Add Data to the Shape Polygon File Yes No Centre and Print Stand Number Yes NoO Centre and Print Stand Area Yes O No Select Accuracies for Area calculation Directions To the nearest PO HC 10 Cc 0 1 C Distances To the nearest mO O01mC 001m imm 0 1
3. Once all Bend Points have been entered select the required Interpolation Interval for the section and then Click the Proceed button Page 202 of 312 G SURPAC Ver 537 for Wir Horiz Scale 1 20000 vertScale 1 15000 Cha Level Grid interval 20mm 1 20000 VERTICAL HORIZONTAL 4 15000 DESCRIPTION DESIGN LEVEL GROUND LEVEL CHAINAGE lt Ee A SURPAC Long Section through Lion s Head Table Mountain and Devil s Peak using a Path and Heights imported from Google Earth General Programme Modifications Transforming Lo Cape Datum gt WG WGS 84 1 The search for the nearest common Trig Beacons has been improved The programme will now select common control points using a combination of the nearest Control points plus a spread of Control points in each of the four principle quadrants If you use the standard Nearest 5 Control points when transforming then the programme will automatically select the nearest Control point in each quadrant plus t
4. 3000 Series Total Station SURPAC now supports this Total Station for the downloading of both Observation data and Co ordinate data plus the uploading of Co ordinate data General Plan and Sectional Title CAD Programmes Removal of Error 9 problem The annoying Error 9 error message that would appear after an hour or so of running one of these programmes has now been hunted down and eliminated General Plan and Sectional Title CAD Programmes Line Generate Command The Line Generate Command was not always drawing the defined Line from the current cursor position This has now been corrected General Plan and Sectional Title CAD Programmes Point Circles in Insets When creating Insets by using the Frame Zoom Command the included Point Circles were also zoomed making them too big This has now been corrected All CAD Programmes Frame Copy Command Arcs and Circles that were included in the Frame were displayed on screen when the Frame Copy Command was given but the items were not stored This problem has now been rectified Co ordinate Editing Programme Use of the Ctrl and Shft Keys The use of the Ctrl and Shft keys in this programme have been improved To highlight random data lines to be used for Copying Deleting etc hold down the Ctrl key and then click on the data lines required To highlight a block of lines to be used for Copying Deleting etc hold down the Shft key and then
5. Directions To the nearest 10 wO 10 1O 0 1 C Distances To the nearest mO O4mC 001m 1mm 0 1mm C Display the Point Definition information Form f The F11 Auto Write Stand Data and Area Command Select check the option Always set the Number to the next available Set all other options as required and then click the OK button Once the required Stand Data have been displayed move the cursor into the Stand that has the next consecutive Stand Number and press the Mouse MB Data for this Stand will then be displayed Move the cursor into the next consecutive Stand Number and again press the Mouse MB Continue in this manner until all Stands in the Block are complete Finally press the F12 SFK Command to Auto Write the Block Data Page 299 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 8 Version 5 65 unning SIIR Aa lindo r ft Windonwe 1i Running SUR e und soft Windows 10 SURPAC Ver 5 65 has been tested when running under Microsoft Windows 10 and appears to be completely compatible The only problem encountered was with the Mouse Scroll button Windows 10 has a new and rather strange setting for the Mouse wheel function and this new function is set as being the default when Windows 10 is installed This default setting prevented the Mouse Scroll function from working in any of the SURPAC programmes Fortunately there is a straight forward resolution to this problem as follows Cha
6. Sort the List by Direction Sort the List by Name C Y WG 27 x Centre 47275 57 3244404 87 De See N View List on Google Earth Display of selected Trig Beacons in the North Western area of Lesotho Page 306 of 312 Fa 9700001 Lesotho WGS 1984 System System WG 27 Y 48717 89 X 3243652 63 Lat 29 18 33 3710S Lon 27 30 05 3303E SURPAC Surveying Software SMO OOA eona 97 0007 3 EA mag A wa va i yi ae Ge Display of sample Trig Beacons for NW Lesotho on google Earth F497 0007 2 E Running the Programme The programme may be loaded in any of three different ways namely 1 Using the Locate and Add the Nearest Trig TSM Beacons Menu ltem under the Conversions Menu or 2 In the Co ordinate Editing Programme click the Mouse RHB and from the displayed Menu select the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons Item or 3 In the Co ordinate Editing Programme click the Options Button select the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons option and then From the Conversions Menu select the Locate and Add Nearest click the OK Button Page 307 of 312 Volume Calculations using Cloud Compare Improved Following a request made to the author of Cloud Compare Software am pleased to report that the function for determining volumes between two surfaces or a surface and a plane in Cloud Compare has been considerably improve
7. Export Data to a GPX File for GPS systems C Use Spell Check facility in CAD Programmes Switch Co ord System from WG 23 to wG Maximize Screen Display for CAD Programmes Select the Multi Polar Tolerance Limit 0 100 Te MO Transform this File s Data into an Lo 23 File O aN Google Earth Options a Set View Google Earth Display Options Select Points to be Highlighted by Description O Compare File and Google Earth Heights import interpolated Google Earth Heights C ESRI Point Shapefile Options Create a Point Shapefile from this file import Co ordinates from a Point Shapefile The File Options form showing the ESRI Point Shapefile options In the Co ordinate File Editing programme click on the File Options menu item found in the Actions bar at the left of the co ordinate display The two new Point Shapefile options are shown at the bottom of the above form Double click on the Create a Point Shapefile from this file option The programme will prompt for the name of the new Shapefile and then display the following set up form Page 231 of 312 6 Creating an ESRI Point Shapefile xs Select Point Shapefile Export Options Co ordinate File Ellipsoid WGS 1984 1 Co ordinate File System Hartebeeshoek94 Co ordinate File Central Meridian 23 East 2 gt Convert Y X values to Latitude Longitude values x Change the Sign of the
8. FIGURE NET VOLUME 661917 Cu m Highest Elevation for the Current DTM 1494 53 Lowest Elevation for the Current DTM 1467 29 pe A ee The resultant net Volume from SURPAC is 661 917 m Hence the difference in net Volume between SURPAC and CloudCompare for this survey is 661 917 662 885 968 m or 0 15 NB Warning The CloudCompare Volume calculation results must be treated with caution For stockpile measurements for example the Surface and Base DTMs must have the same minimum height value otherwise the two volumes will not refer to the same base level Creating Contours in CloudCompare Another useful function in CloudCompare is the creation of Contours This feature can be used either for comparison with the SURPAC created Contours or for generating new Contours from a Point Cloud file that has not been crearted in SURPAC Using the same example as above follow the steps In the Database tree Click on the required file for Contour creation e g Page 270 of 312 DB Tree amp Then follow the menu path 4 V Polifin_Surface_PC asc C SurpacCloudView Datafiles Tools Projection Rasterize and contour 4 V Polifin_Surface PC Cloud plot U Polifin_Surface_PC Cloud mesh f 4 V Polifin_Base_PC asc C SurpacCloudView Datafiles On the displayed form you need to enter a 4 V Polifin_Base_PC Cloud Grid Step value This value must be V Polifin_Base PC Cloud mesh re
9. Layer s The Point Circles and Point Names of all points lying on the current sheet are placed in the Layers called Point_Circles and Point_Names respectively This allows for the display of the Point Circles and or the Point Names to be switched on or off in AutoCAD For the Working Plan CAD programme there are three Layers used for Point Circles and three Layers used for the Point Names These are called P0O1_ Point_Circles Page 125 of 312 P02__Point Circles and P04 Point Circles for the circles and PO1 Point Names P02 Point_Names and P04__ Point_Names for the names These six Layers cater for the three different Pens that are used for Point Circling and Point Naming in the Working Plan CAD The optional Co ord Points Layer When creating a DXF or DWG file Users can now specify whether or not all the Co ordinate Point values of the Points lying on the current sheet where applicable are to be included as POINT information in the AutoCAD Layer called Co ord_Points These Points are sent with the cross as the standard symbol Symbols may then be changed or turned off within AutoCAD Support for New Zealand Grid Systems SURPAC now provides support for the following New Zealand Systems 1 The New Zealand Geodetic Datum 1949 NZGD49 This Co ordinate Reference System is defined by the following parameters Ellipsoid International Hayford 1924
10. Move the cursor onto the beginning lower left corner of the Direction or Distance Text Item on the GP Sheet that relates to the Stand Erf boundary line going in a clockwise direction from the selected Point to the next Stand Erf Point and then click the Mouse LHB NB If the displayed Direction you want to select is 180 out of bearing click the Mouse RHB when selecting the item instead of the LHB When the Mouse RHB is used for selecting a Direction the Direction is automatically changed by 180 There is also a Button on the form that allows you to change an existing Direction that is 180 out of bearing The order of selecting Direction and or Distance is immaterial as the programme is able to differentiate between these two types of data items You should now see the Text Item selected displayed under the appropriate heading on the Area amp Consistency form Repeat the above for the other necessary Polar element Direction or Distance Once both a Direction and a Distance have been selected for a boundary line the programme will compute the Y and X or E and N co ordinates and then use these values to search the Co ordinate File for the Point nearest to this position It will then compute the DY and DX values Y and X differences between the computed position and the stored Point position The Point Name and stored co ordinates will be displayed along with the DY and DX values NB If no stored Point can be located
11. The Height of Instrument Collimation If this value is measured from a Roof Peg then the value must be entered as negative The Height of the two Buttons at both the Back Pegs If these values are measured from a Roof Peg then the values must be entered as positive The programme allows for both manual entry of field book observations or automatic loading of the data from a General Observation File without any prior reductions or abstracting of the observations An example of an Observation File used for this programme as well as the Double Button method programme is the file called Twin Raise Examples wob file included Page 63 of 312 The entry of the data may also be loaded from a pre determined ASCII file of type pg3 containing the information in a set format Viewing the file C1984 pg3 file included shows the format of a PG3 type ASCII file Printing the results is an option available after the required data entries have been made and checked and the Set Up Peg calculated NB After installing the SURPAC Upgrade the above included data files will be in the C Surpac98 folder or the folder in which SURPAC is installed If you want to use these examples first copy these files into the required data folder 3 Co ordinate File Printing Cadastral Format When printing a Co ordinate File a new Show Categories option has been provided for files in the Cadastral Format The available categories a
12. The polar values of the differences between two compared Points were showing the Directions incorrectly The values were displayed in Deg decimal format instead of the usual Deg Min Sec format This has now been corrected Locate and mean Point Groups in a file Height differences not displayed The programme was only showing the DY and DX values The DZ Height differences values have now been added Page 154 of 312 Diagram Creation CAD Programme When using the PD Point Display command the programme now displays the File Name as well as the Diagram Name Y Co ord X Co ord and Description of the found Point In order for this function to work correctly the current Co ordinate file must be the same file as used for the Diagram construction The Ctrl M Figure Move Scale Swing command has also been improved for when the figure is swung The Line and Text items located inside the drawing area for a figure are now defined and manipulated more efficiently General Plan CAD Programme The use of the F11 Auto Write Stand amp Area command has been improved As before when you first give the command the command s form is displayed allowing you to select various options If you then use the Mouse MB to repeat the command the form is no longer displayed with the next default Stand Erf number being applied for the calculation Therefore To start a series of Auto Write Stand amp Area actions use the F11 co
13. a 6 378 388 000 m b 6 356 911 946 m e True Origin Latitude 41 00 00 S Longitude 173 00 00 E e Origin False Eastings 2510 000m E Shifts False Northings 6 023 150m N e Scale Factor 1 000000 e Projection Non standard complex e Unit International metre e Ordinates Eastings Northings E N e Heighting MSL Orthometric Heights 2 The New Zealand Geodetic Datum 2000 NZGD2000 This Co ordinate Reference System is defined by the following parameters e Ellipsoid GRS80 WGS 1984 a 6 378 137 000 m b 6 356 752 314 m e True Origin Latitude 0 00 00 Longitude 173 00 00 E e Origin False Eastings 1600 000m E Shifts False Northings 10 000 000m N e Scale Factor 0 999600 e Projection Transverse Mercator e Unit International metre e Ordinates Eastings Northings E N e Heighting MSL Orthometric Heights Page 126 of 312 3 The Mount Eden Circuit 1949 This Co ordinate Reference System is defined by the following parameters Ellipsoid International Hayford 1924 a 6 378 388 000 m b 6 356 911 946 m e True Origin Latitude 36 52 47 5150 S Longitude 174 45 51 6217 E e Origin False Eastings 300 000m E Shifts False Northings 700 000m N e Scale Factor 0 999900 e Projection Transverse Mercator e Unit International metre e Ordinates Eastings Northings E N e Heighting MSL Orthometr
14. for General Plan sheet at a scale of 1 250 8848370 X 56353 09 Z T z ii Fj A General Plan Sheet Layout determined graphically using the General CAD programme NB n the above shown example the General Plan sheets are to be at a Scale of 1 250 Fitting the 8 General Plan sheets as shown requires that each General Plan sheet has a Swing of 25 By using the diagonal construction Sheet 2 has a Centre of Y 88366m and X 56488m Tip 2 Calculating the Sides Directions and Areas on a General Plan Sheet The quickest way of calculating and Writing the Sides Directions and Areas for Stands on a General Plan sheet is by initially using the F11 SFK Command Auto Write Stand Data Most Users are aware of this but then do not follow by using the Mouse MB Command to repeat the previous Command The best way of using the F11 Command is as follows Move the cursor into the lowest number Stand in a Block and then press the F11 SFK The following form will be displayed Page 298 of 312 amp GP Stand Area Calculation Options Select Area Storage Options Always set the Number to the next available Stand Erf Name or Number 37 X Store Area to the Sheet Area File YesO No Add Data to the Shape Polygon File Yes Centre and Print Stand Number Yes YesC Add Sub Areas to this Area YesC Select Accuracies for Area calculation
15. parameter on the file import form that will be displayed By default this value is 1 000000 However if the incoming data is known to be in millimetres for example then a scale factor of 0 001 may be applied to convert the incoming data to metres With the previous versions of SURPAC the A parameter was being re set back to 1 000000 if the decimal separator was specified as being a comma know this sounds a bit weird and it took a while to locate the bug but it has now been given the Doom treatment Page 122 of 312 Merging data from a SURPAC Co ordinate File in another Folder Co ordinate File Editing When the required source Co ordinate File was located in another Folder the programme would merge the requested data but would then open a Co ordinate File having the same name as the current file but in the Folder of the source file and then use this file as the current Co ordinate File This problem has now been corrected The Cancel button on the Merge Options form was dead and has now been activated Co ordinate File Listing Options Co ordinate File Listin When printing the current Co ordinate File the Set Y Co ordinate Limits Set x Co ordinate Limits and Set Point Name Limits options were not working This has now been corrected General Plan CAD programme Export to DXF and DWG Files The point symbols for Reference Marks Town Survey Marks and Trig Beacons have been m
16. 6 377 563 3964 m b 6 356 256 9096 m e True Origin Latitude 49 00 00 N Longitude 2 00 00 W e False Origin 400 kms West of True Origin 100 kms North of True Origin 400 000 000 m 100 000 000 m e Co ordinates Easting of True Origin Northing e Scale Factor 0 9996012717 on Central Meridian 2 West e Projection Transverse Mercator e Unit International metre e Ordinates Eastings Northings E N e Heighting MSL Orthometric Heights based on System Ordnance Datum Newlyn ODN Transformation functions using the National Grid U T M Transformations menu item found under the Conversions main menu include Geographical Airy 1830 Longitude Latitude to National Grid Eastings Northings Geographical WGS84 Longitude Latitude to National Grid Eastings Northings National Grid Eastings Northings to Geographical Airy 1830 Longitude Latitude National Grid Eastings Northings to Geographical WS84 ETRS89 Longitude Latitude ETRS89 WGS84 Eastings Northings to National Grid Eastings Northings National Grid Eastings Northings to U T M Eastings Northings OSTN97 and OSGM91 Compatibility The National Grid to ETRS89 and the ETRS89 to National Grid conversions use algorithms and shift data provided by the U K Ordnance Survey and are fully OSTN97 and OSGM91 enabled In order to use these transformations however the files called OSTN97 DAT
17. Importing Google Earth Placemarks There are various ways by which a Point Name can be held in a KML Placemark Prior to this Upgrade SURPAC could only locate the Point Name if it was stored in a particular location This routine has now been expanded so as to locate the Point Name regardless of the storage format Storing and Retrieving data from My Stations files Users may now specify the path where the My Stations files are to be located One of the files is for storing Lo Stations and the other for storing WG stations To use this option when in the Co ordinate File Editing programme click on the File Options button on the left of the form You will see a new option on the displayed options form that allows you to select the required path When disconnected from the network SURPAC will automatically re set the location to the C Surpac Software folder When re connected to the network SURPAC will re set the location to the network drive previously selected Storing My Nearest Stations data The file s Y X Z constants were being ignored This has now been fixed General Plan CAD Programme The number of General Plan outside Figure Points has been increased to A99 B99 Z99 General CAD Programme There was a problem when importing Google Earth KML Polygons This has now been resolved The Hatch colours Imported from DXF and DWG files has been improved so as to more closel
18. Modified Polar Programme When calculating a Polar to an existing Point the option to Cancel the current calculation was not working correctly This has now been corrected Page 106 of 312 Modified Data Traverse Programme Four new buttons have been added to the programme s form These can be found on the right hand side of the form These buttons allow for the addition or subtraction of 90 or 45 from a currently displayed Direction Please note that any entered angle may be applied to an existing Direction as long as the entered angle is preceded by either a or a sign This applies to any of the SURPAC programmes Refer to the Help Pages topic Entering Angular Values Modified Current File Printed Pages Many Users seem to be unaware of the useful set of functions that can be displayed and selected by Clicking the Mouse RHB on the Current File Printed Pages form The displayed menu allows the following options Clear All Pages Delete a Page Re Print Current Page New Item Re Print all Pages Copy Pages to Clipboard Load Saved Pages Save Current Pages The new item Re Print Current Page allows for the re printing of the currently displayed calculation Page should this be necessary Please refer to the Help Pages topic Displaying the Current File Printed Pages Information for an explanation of the other items available Modified Co ordinate File Security Lock The fun
19. Not used Reserved by Windows F11 The Areas from Co ordinates programme F12 The Areas from Co ordinates with Co ord Checking programme The above settings do not apply when using any of the CAD programmes as these programmes have their own usage for the Special Function Keys The above settings are the default settings and can be changed to individual requirements by using the Set the Function Key Allocations function found under the File main menu heading Page 128 of 312 8 The problem that sometime occurred with the U Command Write Line Distance in the General Plan CAD programme has been fixed up This problem could occur when a single long line had been broken into a series of smaller connected lines and then had some of these smaller lines deleted leaving a line blank line blank effect 9 Users will notice that SURPAC has now been given more of a Windows XP look All Buttons and Scroll Bars have been changed to follow the Windows XP standard appearance SURPAC also has three standard Colour Schemes to automatically match either the Windows XP Blue default Olive Green or Silver colour schemes Although these colour schemes have been designed to closely match the Windows XP colours Users can modify these schemes by using the Set the Screen Display Colours function found under the File main menu heading Page 129 of 312 New Minimum Screen Resolution for SURPAC Software
20. Options The following form will be displayed Point Cloud Creation Options Create Surface DTM Point Cloud Create Base DTM Point Cloud Create both Surface and Base DTM Point Clouds Point Cloud 3D Display Options Display Surface DTM Point Cloud C Display Base DTM Point Cloud Display both Surface and Base DTM Point Clouds Display Contour and Surface DTM Point Ciouds O Display Contour and both DTM Point Clouds Point Cloud Creation Options Create Surface DTM Point Cloud Create Base DTM Point Cloud Create both Surface and Base DTM Point Clouds Point Cloud 3D Display Options Display Surface DTM Point Cloud Display Base DTM Point Cloud C Display both Surface and Base DTM Point Clouds Display Contour and Surface DTM Point Clouds Display Contour and both DTM Point Clouds If both the Surface and Base DTMs exist select the third Point Cloud creation option If only the Surface DTM exists select the first option The time taken to create the Point Cloud file s depends on the size of the area surveyed and the size of the selected grid interval and the processing speed of the computer Generally the file creation takes from a few seconds to a few minutes Once the files have been created again click on the Point Cloud button Options The form will again be displayed as shown below The available options now allow for the display of the Poin
21. Page 302 of 312 This programme will automatically search and extract the required TrigNet information from the above Source file Since the Source file positions for the TrigNet stations are stored in Lat Long format any Degree Square boundaries become irrelevant to the programme Surveys can be located close to any Degree Square boundary and the programme will still generate its own set of Points centred about the Survey or any defined Point in the Survey Data may be drawn from different Degree Squares for any given Survey The programme offers User options for both the selection of TrigNet stations and the display mode used namely e The Search Centre position may be User selected e The number of located TrigNet stations displayed may be set according to a required maximum number a required maximum search radius or the total number of stations e The display of located TrigNet stations may be in order of Distance Direction or Point Name e Any of the located TrigNet stations in the displayed list may be tagged as not required to prevent them from being added to the Co ordinate file or displayed on Google Earth e An output of the displayed list of located TrigNet stations may be made to the Printer an ASCII file an Excel file or the Clipboard e The located TrigNet stations in the displayed list that are marked as required i e the selected Bench Marks may be added to the current Co ordinate File
22. SURPAC Version 5 35 Release 02 Programme Modifications SS Further Functions for SURPAC Interfacing with Google Earth The following new functions have been added to SURPAC to improve and extend its interfacing with Google Earth Setting the Google Earth Display Options The following options have been added Line information sent from SURPAC to Google Earth can have the following options set e Users can set the Lines to be sent using their defined Line Thickness values e Users can set the Lines to be sent using their defined Line Colour values e f Lines are to be sent using a Single Colour then this colour can be User defined Transferring a Google Earth Placemark position to a SURPAC Co ordinate File Creating a Placemark in Google Earth In Google Earth ensure that the Toolbar and Sidebar are displayed Move the Google Earth display to show the required area at the required scale To create a Placemark click the appropriate toolbar icon or select the Placemark menu item found under the Add menu heading The new Placemark Dialog Box appears and the cursor changes to a flashing square drawing tool Enter the properties for the Placemark and give it an appropriate Name Since SURPAC will use the Placemark Name as the name for the imported Point use a SURPAC friendly name i e up to 8 characters in length Move the cursor onto the flashing drawing tool and then drag the tool to the required screen position by holding
23. TIFF files have the extension of either tif or tiff and PNG files have the extension png Although these formats seem to offer no obvious space or image clarity advantages over the JPEG jpg image file format many application use these formats especially the TIFF format and for this reason they have been added to SURPAC s list of supported image formats Page 138 of 312 General Plan CAD Programme Ctrl C function Extended The Ctrl C function Data Consistency check using Co ordinates in the General Plan CAD programme has been extended to display separate DY and DX values for 1 The accumulated line side data and 2 The current line side data This makes the identification of any data error somewhat easier and also reduces the possibility of errors being undetected in the case of compensating errors being present in the data Due to the additional data columns displayed the form used for the Ctrl C function is naturally wider and takes up more screen space To prevent this becoming a problem ensure that the screen display setting for the PC Laptop is at least 1024x768 pixels My thanks to Hendrik Kroep of Potchefstroom for the original suggestion The General CAD Programme Listing Linked CAD Sheets It is possible to have a number of General CAD Sheets that are associated linked to the same Co ordinate file By default SURPAC will load the CAD Sheet having the same name as the Co ordinate file w
24. The option of Replacing Null items such as blank Descriptions with a User defined value was not working correctly This has now been corrected The option of displaying a list of Points restricted to a User defined Description was also not working correctly and this has now been corrected Modified All CAD Programmes The Reset Text Attribute function found under the menu Heading Text has been modified to make it easier to switch the Font of all existing Text items If no editing of any of the Text attributes is requested then the function now allows you to define a new Font that will be applied to all existing Text items This function would be very useful when needing to change the Font of Text items in the case of switching the plot from an Inkjet plotter to an Page 108 of 312 older Pen plotter Pen plotters can only support the SURPAC Line Font whereas Inkjet plotters support any of the True Type Fonts In this case this function can be used to quickly switch the Font of all the Text items to the SURPAC Line Font Page 109 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 23 Release 02 Modified All CAD Programmes Graphic Memory Allocation All SURPAC CAD programmes have been modified so as to improve the usage of available graphic memory Please _note that this modification is only available for computers running the Microsoft Windows XP Home or Professional Operating System In the past Users have had t
25. When creating a New Diagram you will be given the option of selecting one of five methods of creating the Diagram which are 1 Create Diagram Information using Co ordinate File Points Previous Normal method 2 Create Diagram Information using current CAD Plot Sheet 3 Create Diagram Information using the current Working Plan 4 Generate Diagram from a SURPAC type DXF File 5 Generate Diagram from an AllyCAD type DXF File 1 Create Diagram Information using Co ordinate File Points On selecting this method the Diagram Data Entry form will be displayed This Form allows you to enter basic information for a Diagram such as the Points making up the main figure identifying the required Trigonometrical Beacons Servitude information Connecting data etc At the bottom of the Diagram Figural Data Entry Form is a Point Name Display Window from which Points may be selected by clicking them 2 Create Diagram Information using current CAD Plot Sheet On selecting this option SURPAC will display the current CAD Plot Sheet If no CAD Plot Sheet has been defined during the current session a CAD Plot Sheet having the same name as the current Co ordinate file will be loaded If you want to use a CAD Plot Sheet other than this default Sheet then you must first run the CAD Drawing amp Plotting programme through which you can define and load the required CAD Plot Sheet Page 36 of 312 The cursor will be set to the SURPAC dig
26. and will not be added to the current Co ordinate file Clicking a Point s red cross will reverse the above process Click the Print List Button to send all those located and selected Bench Marks to the SURPAC Printing form From this form display this list may then be sent to the current Printer to a User defined ASCII file to an Excel file or to the Windows Clipboard When the Store and Exit Button is clicked all located Bench Marks displayed in the list and having the green tick symbol next to them will be added to the current Co ordinate File In the form area designated Google Earth options it is possible to either import interpolated heights for the Bench Mark positions by interrogating the Google Earth DTM or to send the list of selected Bench Marks to Google Earth for a spatial view of the set of Bench Marks By Page 246 of 312 clicking on a Bench Marks symbol on the Google Earth display the Bench Mark s co ordinate and height information is displayed along with the Height Difference if applicable and any information related to the Bench Mark If the Google Earth DTM heights are displayed the programme form will display the Mean Google Earth Height Shift and its Standard Deviation for all selected ticked Bench Marks G SURPAC Locate Nearest Bench mark Points _ z2 lt a pan w Co ordinate System WG 23 AE Hartebeesthoek94 Datum WGS 84 No Name Y X BM Height GE
27. programme are called FileName_CAD_Sheet kml and FileName_CAD_Sheet png where FileName is the name of the current Co ordinate file KML files saved for Lines and Points from the General Plan programme are called FileName_GP_SheetX_Lines kml where FileName is the name of the current Co ordinate file and Xis the current GP Sheet number KML and PNG files saved for Sheet overlays from the General Plan programme are called FileName_GP_SheetX kml and FileName_GP_SheetX png where FileName is the name of the current Co ordinate file and X is the current GP Sheet number KML files saved for Lines and Points from the Working Plan programme are called FileName_WP_SheetX_Lines kml where FileName is the name of the current Co ordinate file and X is the current WP Sheet number KML and PNG files saved for Sheet overlays from the Working Plan programme are called FileName_WP_SheetX kml and FileName_WP_SheetX png where FileName is the name of the current Co ordinate file and X is the current WP Sheet number KML and PNG files saved for Sheet overlays from the Contour CAD programme are called FileName_Contour_Sheet kml and FileName_Contour_Sheet png where FileName is the name of the current Contour file Compressed zipped KMZ files for third party use Another file format that can be used for sending data and overlays to Google Earth is the KMZ format This is a zipped format of a KML file and is a handy format when s
28. 22C revsrwov 905 048 306 01P Ve EL 164 AAA 70 629 450 905 307 503 22C 2 B 70 423 027 905 108 815 01A 71 599 973 905 591 211 01P 167 C 70 418 732 905 116 620 01A 168 D 70 485 313 905 346 456 01P 169 E 70 493 114 905 350 755 01P 70 701 783 905 290 302 01P 171 HH1 70 683 057 905 292 557 01P 172 HH2 70 724 174 905 321 713 01P Printer Set Up for Calculations Set Text File vpg as Printer Display Current Calc Pages i fe a l f i il Maygeaaye w He Hekeke PELE BEI HELENE IEE _ Co ordinate File C Surpac98 Samples L5952 youngsville township 14 57 43 08 41 2007 25 jl Once this is done a form will be displayed that allows you to select which of the available columns or elements are to be visible utilized for the current Co ordinate file On the same form drop down lists are available which allow you to allocate the required headings for the two new Label Fields In the example shown above the two Label Fields have been labelled as Trig Names and Point Source respectively The drop down lists provide various other headings for User selection Page 153 of 312 AEE E a a a T a When this form is displayed check or un i check the elements that are to be displayed or Co eee FIE Pomen eee OF hiidden Note that the
29. If you do decide to leave the Screen Display Area set as 800X600 you will find that some of the Actions Bar Menus are too large to completely fit on the screen resulting in the necessity to use Up and Down arrows to navigate through the Menu With the exception of the General Observation Load Edit programme these Up and Down arrows only appear if the Menu is too large for the Screen The arrows will appear on the right hand side of the Menu bar and clicking on them moves the Menu display in the appropriate direction Below is a SURPAC programme display showing the on screen information layout when using a 1024X768 pixel resolution in Windows XP Actions Bar Calculator Menu Navigation Bar See Page 76 Printer Display File General Conversions LeastSquares Topographical Engineering Mining Cadastral Help Name Y Co ordinate X Co ordinate Height Aux Height Description F B Calc Edit 21A 70488 127 2905124 193 1421 591 01P 13 Constants 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 Sys Lo 29 42 FA1 14656 175 45090 998 1234 330 22C 43 FA2 14187 113 45264 148 1235 484 220 44 FA2Q 14093 289 45298 811 22C 45 FA2X 14093 270 45298 846 1391 663 220 46 FA2Y 14468 550 45160 318 001 99 47 FAS 144221 742 45357 960 1245 330 03F 48 FA3Q 14127 919 45392 628 22C
30. International metre e Ordinates Eastings Northings E N e Heighting Ellipsoidal Heights System Transformation functions using the ETRS89 U T M Transformations menu item found under the Conversions main menu include Geographical WGS84 Longitude Latitude to ETRS89 Eastings Northings ETRS89 Eastings Northings to Geographical WGS84 Longitude Latitude National Grid Airy 1830 Eastings Northings to ETRS89 Eastings Northings ETRS89 Eastings Northings to U T M Eastings Northings OSTN97 and OSGM91 Compatibility The National Grid to ETRS89 and the ETRS89 to National Grid conversions use algorithms and shift data provided by the U K Ordnance Survey and are fully OSTN97 and OSGM91 enabled In order to use these transformations however the files called OSTN97 DAT for Eastings Northings and OSGM91 DAT for heights must exist in the SURPAC application folder If not they may be downloaded from the SURPAC Internet site www surpac Cco Za Further routines to convert to or from ASCII files and various Total Station Loggers also exist These routines may be found by selecting the Options button when running the Co ordinate File Editing Programme 2 Using a 1000 s Separator when displaying Co ordinates and Distances The display of Co ordinate and Distance values may now be modified by selecting a Separator Character to be inserted between the thousands value and the
31. NB Stations having duplicate Names can be stored in the My Stations files as long as they originate from different Source files The term Station is used throughout this discussion however any Point such as a Reference Mark Outside Figure Point etc may be stored in either of the My Station files Using the Locate and Add My Nearest Stations programme NB This programme forms a part of the Conversions Module and this Module must be an active part of the SURPAC License in order to be able to access the programme The programme is loaded from the Conversions Menu when selecting the Locate and Add My Nearest Stations Menu Item Page 252 of 312 If the current Co ordinate File is empty the programme will display a warning message and abort as the Co ordinate File must contain at least one Point in order for this programme to work The Co ordinate File should have appropriate constants set If no constants are used then both the Y an X ordinates must have their full values As a starting default the programme will assume the Y X or E N search position as being the centre of gravity of all existing Points in the current Co ordinate File The programme will use the further defaults of a Search Radius of 20Km and the Number of Points to display as 25 The results of this default search will be displayed You may now change any of the search parameters required as mentioned on the previous page NB Th
32. RAINA Thickness 1 50 mm Thickness 2 00 mm Thickness 3 00 mm Change to the Default Values _ Keep Line Thicknesses Constant k At the bottom of the displayed form you can select or de select the Line Thickness Display option Co ordinate File Editing The top left hand grid cell of the Co ordinate File display can be used as a Highlight All or Mark All function This is the cell to the left of the Constants display and which contains the small downward arrow Clicking in this cell will cause all Points to Page 208 of 312 be Highlighted Note that this produces the same result as selecting any one Point and then with the cursor still in the grid display area pressing the Ctrl A keyboard keys If you then want to Delete all the file s existing Points for example then click the small check box under the green arrow and select the option Delete Point s The file will be cleared and purged Or if you want to Copy all Points in the file click the small check box under the green arrow and select the option Copy Point s All Points will be placed into the Windows Clipboard Diagram CAD Programme The Line intersect function has been added to the Diagram CAD programme Users are now able to use the Line Arc Intersect LIA Line Point Intersect LIP Line Splay Intersect LIS and Line Parallel Check LIC Commands as used in the General CAD and General Plan CA
33. The data is streamed to the control centre at NGI using dedicated land line connections The relative positioning of the TrigNet base stations is of high precision and the stations cover the whole of South Africa The data is processed at NGI and made available to users for either post processing or real time applications Post processing data is made available in the Receiver Independent Exchange RINEX format and real time data is made available in the Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services RTCM format and as the names imply both formats are independent of any specific receiver manufacturer Real time data is made available to users via the cell phone connections to the internet while in the field Currently this programme is limited to the geographical area of the Republic of South Africa and to surveys whose co ordinate system is defined as being in the WG WGS 84 Ellipsoid System in South Africa the Hartebeesthoek94 Datum It is not necessary for the User to define any source file for the location of the TrigNet stations as SURPAC has a built in Source file called TrigNetValues tnv This file must exist in the folder in which SURPAC Software is installed usually the folder C Surpac Software The above Source file contains the double precision geographical positions Latitude and Longitude the Abbreviated Names Full Names Heights and Antenna description of all existing TrigNet base stations
34. Using the default colour range black to white creates the model as shown on Page 16 Other useful CloudCompare functions 1 The current Display in CloudCompare can be saved as an Image file by using the Menu path Display Render to File Page 278 of 312 2 The Surface Area of a Mesh file can be computed using the Menu path Edit Mesh Measure Surface 3 A display model of a Point Cloud can also be generated using the Menu path Plugins Poisson Surface Reconstruction 4 Once a Mesh file has been developed it can be save using any of the formats supported by CloudCompare See pages 17 and 18 5 The background colour and colours of other display items can be reset using the Menu path Display Display Settings 6 Refer to the PDF manual CloudCompare v2 61 User Manual for a full description of the available CloudCompare commands and functions Other SURPAC Modifications 1 Corrections have been made to the Gyro Calibration programmes for Northern Hemisphere using UTM systems 2 Printout of the Co ordinate List The number of characters for the Descriptions has been increased 3 Contour CAD programme DXF DWG Output of Smoothed Spline Contours now uses the Polyline method 4 General Plan CAD Naming of Main figure Points extended to include 1A 1Z 2A 2Z etc 5 Modification of the Diagram CAD Programme to cater for Zambian A4 and A3 Diagrams 6 The problem encountered when importing co
35. e False Origin 200 kms West of True Origin 250 kms South of True Origin 200 000 000 m 250 000 000 m e Co ordinates Easting of True Origin Northing e Scale Factor 1 000035 on Central Meridian 8 We st e Projection Transverse Mercator e Unit International metre e Ordinates Eastings Northings E N e Heighting MSL Orthometric Heights based on System Malin Head Vertical Datum Transformation functions using the Irish Grid U T M Transformations menu item found under the Conversions main menu include e Geographical Longitude Latitude to Irish Grid Eastings Northings e Irish Grid Eastings Northings to Geographical Longitude Latitude e Irish Grid Eastings Northings to U T M Eastings Northings Further routines to convert to or from ASCII files and various Total Station Loggers also exist These routines may be found by selecting the Options button when running the Co ordinate File Editing Programme Finally two Programmes have been added which provide for converting Irish Grid values to and from the Irish Local Grid System These two Programmes may be found by selecting either the Irish Grid to Local System or Local System to Irish Grid menu items found under the Conversions main menu Page 17 of 312 The U K National Grid OSGB36 and ODN This Co ordinate Reference System is defined by the following parameters e Ellipsoid Airy 1830 a
36. for Eastings Northings and OSGM91 DAT for heights must exist in the SURPAC application folder If not they may be downloaded from the SURPAC Internet site www surpac co za Further routines to convert to or from ASCII files and various Total Station Loggers also exist These routines may be found by selecting the Options button when running the Co ordinate File Editing Programme ETRS89 European Terrestrial Reference System 1989 National GPS Network This Co ordinate Reference System is fundamentally the WGS84 epoch 1989 0 system and is also referred to in the U K as the National GPS Network For clarity it should be noted that ETRS89 system differs to the ITRS International Terrestrial Reference System to the order of 0 30 m in the U K The two systems were identical at the 1989 0 epoch but are moving apart due to tectonic plate movements at a rate of approximately 025 m per annum This Co ordinate Reference System for the U K is defined by the following parameters e Ellipsoid WGS84 aka GRS80 a 6 378 137 0000 m Page 18 of 312 b 6 356 752 3141 m e True Origin Latitude 49 00 00 N Longitude 2 00 00 W e False Origin 400 kms West of True Origin 100 kms North of True Origin 400 000 000 m 100 000 000 m e Co ordinates Easting of True Origin Northing e Scale Factor 0 9996012717 on Central Meridian 2 West e Projection Transverse Mercator e Unit
37. hundreds value and between the millions value and the hundred thousands value of a number Co ordinate or Distance To set a required separator you need to display the Set Co ordinate File and DataBase Information form To display this form either e Select the Reset Co ordinate File System item from the File main menu or e When in the Co ordinate File Editing Programme click the System Set Button or e When in the Co ordinate File Editing Programme click the Mouse Right Button and select the Set Check the Current File System item from the displayed pop up menu Once the form is displayed click the down arrow on the 1000 s Separator List Box and then click either Space Point Comma or None for the required separator Notes e you cannot set the Separator to be the same character as that defined as the Decimal Indicator e The Separator allocated to existing prior to the installation of SURPAC Version 5 05 Co ordinate Files is None e The Separator allocated to a new Co ordinate Files will default to the same Separator as that used for the last Co ordinate File opened Page 19 of 312 Examples of allowable numeric display formats are 2 845 355 234 2 845 355 234 2 845 355 234 2 845 355 234 2845355 234 2845355 234 3 Point Off Line Calculations new Least Squares Line of Best Fit Option This programme has been extended and now offers the Opti
38. in Layer 001 The Sheet may contain any other Line and Text information on any of the other Layers but Layer 001 is reserved to be used solely for the theoretical Construction Grid Line information In Layer 001 solid Lines must be constructed along each theoretical Grid Line going from terminal to terminal If required these Lines may extend beyond the theoretical terminal limits Each Grid Line then needs to be labelled also in Layer 001 by means of adding the appropriate Text item at one or both ends of the each Grid Line Each Grid Line Label must be close to its corresponding Line terminal and should not be more than 1m at true scale from the terminal The size orientation and font of the Text Label are irrelevant The Text Label itself can be any mix of alphanumeric characters with a maximum length of eight characters The Field Co ordinate file The second file Known as the Field file contains all filed check Survey data made in a cyclic manner The Co ordinate file itself holds all beacon values resulting from the individual check Surveys Each observation Cycle must be allocated a Layer or Description so that the cyclic information data are kept apart This allows each check Survey to be analyzed individually As the Engineering format of a SURPAC Co ordinate file allows for up to 300 Layers this means that up to 300 check Surveys can be held in one Co ordinate file 3 Compare Field file Da
39. or E N co ordinate values and saved into the current Co ordinate file using the Placemark name as the new Point name Page 177 of 312 Transferring a Google Earth Path or Polygon to a SURPAC General CAD Sheet Creating the Path or Polygon in Google Earth In Google Earth ensure that the Toolbar and Sidebar are displayed Move the Google Earth display to show the required area at the required scale To create a Polygon click the appropriate toolbar icon or select either the Path or the Polygon menu item found under the Add menu heading The new Path or new Polygon Dialog Box appears and the cursor changes to a square drawing tool Enter the properties for your drawing and give the Path or Polygon an appropriate Name You can change the style and or colour for the line or polygon from the default white to better visualize the shape you are about to draw You can also enter an appropriate Name for the Path or Polygon to be created Click in the viewer to start the drawing creation and use the following method to achieve the desired shape Regular shape Click and release method Move the Mouse to a new point and click to add additional points In this mode the cursor remains a square drawing tool whilst the Path or Polygon being drawn is displayed up to the last clicked position Polygons will automatically be closed back onto the defined starting position Whilst drawing the last clicked position can be deleted by clicking the M
40. or E N and H values The Beacon Latitude and Longitude Interfacing SURPAC CAD programmes with Google Earth These functions apply to the General CAD Contour CAD General Plan CAD Sectional Title CAD and Working Plan CAD programmes Note that the Contour CAD programme only has the Viewing a SURPAC CAD Sheet on Google Earth option available Viewing a SURPAC CAD Sheet s Lines and Points on Google Earth Note Before proceeding view and or reset the Google Earth options in SURPAC see above If the Point Display option is On then only the Points that have been Named by using the PN Command will be displayed on the Google Earth overlay All Lines will be shown in red Colours such as black green and blue do not show clearly when transferred to Google Earth All Points will be marked by either the SURPAC Point marker or in the case of Trig Beacons and TSMs the appropriate contro point symbol 1 In the CAD programme click on the File main menu heading and then select the View Lines and Points on Google Earth menu item Note f the Point Display has been turned Off then this menu item will read View Lines on Google Earth 2 Once the CAD sheet Line and Point data have been transferred Google Earth will shift its location to the centre of the imagery covered by the data and will display the data viewed from an appropriate height The Orientation is set to North and there is no Tilt applied
41. pending Data and Consistency checks the Sheet can be protected locked whilst these checks are being carried out The Sheet Protection menu item can be found under the programme s Edit menu heading Protecting a Sheet requires the entry and check entry of a password Unprotecting unlocking the Sheet can only be done by entering the same password so be careful If a Sheet does get locked and the password forgotten or misplaced you can send the GP Sheet data files through to me and will be able to unlock the Sheet Thanks to Hennie Maartens of Kempton Park for the original idea LP Line Perpendicular This Command allows for the construction of a new Line starting at a defined Point or Line terminal and intersecting a defined existing Line at the perpendicular First the LP Command must be given It is not important where the Cursor is at this stage The Cursor should then be positioned near to the Point or Line terminal from which the new Line is to be drawn and the Mouse LHB clicked Next move the Cursor close to any position of the Line to which the perpendicular Line is to be drawn and again click the Mouse LHB If the new Line meets the existing Line at a position outside the limits of the existing Line then the existing Line will automatically be extended to this new junction position Thanks to Hendrik Kroep of Potchefstroom for the original idea Point Circle Sizes The Circle Size to be used for Naming Poi
42. will be shown in the information bar near the top of the screen Page 184 of 312 e Dragging the Left Hand Button Holding down the LHB and moving the mouse will cause the screen display to pan across the sheet e Using the Middle Scroll Button Scrolling the MB will zoom the display either up or down e Clicking the Right Hand Button If the RHB is clicked the cursor will jump from its current position to the menu bar The last used menu will be displayed This option should be used for example if you want to change a Point s Name position Move the cursor onto or close to the required Pint click the RHB and then select the required command a ae Toe Gae i ere Curea Lanet Sees eee h ee QG ie Gessa Sheet Sire Sheet Orientation Sheet Plotting Scale Sheet Viewing Scale Flipse Scale Point jema Pan Text theme oan Yuspa x 2eepies 7 sgu ST teu Sheet Vieng Scale i 20000 A Example of a Least Squares Network plot showing the Error Ellipses General Changes made to SURPAC Software Creating Google Earth KML files It is now possible to create Google Earth KML files even if SURPAC is unable to locate the Google Earth installation SURPAC will warn you that it cannot locate Google Earth but that it will create the required KML file and then store this in the usual C Surpac_GE folder This facility is mainly for Users running a 64 bit version of Windows Vista or Windows 7 SURPAC is a 32 bit applicatio
43. will cause the Screen display to be re plotted at twice the current display Scale For example if the current Screen display Scale is 1 1000 the new Scale will become 1 2000 Page 14 of 312 Insert Zoom to a User Defined Window Selecting this Command from the General or F Key Main Menu or pressing the Insert keyboard key will enable you to define a Zoom Window on the current Screen display that will be used to define both a new Screen display Position and a display Scale Once this Command has been given move the Cursor to the Top Left position of the required Zoom Window and click the Mouse LHB As the mouse is moved down and to the right a purple rectangle will be displayed following the Cursor position Note that the shape of the rectangle Zoom Window may not be changed only its size The shape is defined by the current Sheet width and height parameters When the Zoom Window is of the required size click either the Mouse LHB or RHB The Screen display will be re plotted being centered and Scaled by the defined Zoom Window Home Zoom to the Full Sheet Scale Selecting this Command from the General or F Key Main Menu or pressing the Home keyboard key will cause the Screen display to be re plotted at a Scale that allows for the entire Sheet to be displayed on the Screen This is a useful Command when used in conjunction with the Insert Zoom to a Window Command see above For example if
44. 3 Create Contour Cloud Contour Cloud Creation Options Set the Vertical Scale Exaggeration Set as for the DTM Cloud a 1 50 2 00 Set the Contour vertical shift above the DTM Model m 0 50m OK Option form for creating a Contour Point Cloud Page 261 of 312 The above option form will be displayed The Vertical Scale Exaggeration value allows the display of the contours to be exaggerated in the Z axis This often helps the visualization for the surveyed area It is important to set the same Vertical Exaggeration for both the Contour and DTM Point Clouds If the two values are set differently the contours overlaying the DTM will not appear to be correct This can be changed once CloudCompare is running but it is advisable to set the values correctly before displaying the data The Contour Vertical Shift is sometimes required to ensure that the contours are visible above a DTM Surface If no DTM Surface is to be displayed along with the Contours then the shift can be left at 0 00 By default the programme shifts the contours upwards by one contour interval The generation of the Contour Point Cloud file should only take a few seconds Once complete you can then select the menu item File Display the Contour Point Cloud File This will instruct SURPAC to load and run the CloudCompare software and to open the Contour Point Cloud O EET PNET roe Ret haeAhAan j Name Polifin Show name in
45. 34363 893 34359 167 Co ordinate File Editing 0 000 2765786 159 2765771 294 2765812 424 2765848441 2765848 441 2765819 702 2765819 211 2765864 854 2765864 854 2765848441 2765864 854 2765892 712 2765853 963 2765901 879 2765862 078 2765856 028 2765899 880 2765903 099 2765863 870 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P 01P Sys Lo25 X Co ordinate Descriptions Alternate Name a Add 24759 4 24758 2 o1 P i _4 Constants 24755 1 24755 4 24755 1 247554 23783 4 23783 3 23783 2 23783 1 a Creating theoretical Points by duplicating surveyed Points Method 1 Method 2 e Load either the General CAD the General Plan CAD programme e Display the Stands as shown by the existing surveyed points e Right Click on or close to the Point 24758 2 and from the Point menu heading select the item Add a new Point e On the displayed form change the default Name to 24759 4 e SURPAC will then create a Point called 24759 4 and allocate to it the co ordinate of the existing Point 24758 2 Method 2 above has the advantage of being able to use the Mouse MB as a repeat last command option This allows for more rapid creation of the theoretical Points Page 284 of 312 SURPAC Ver 5 63 for Windows XP Vista 7 8 General CAD Programme 24759 24758 24759 247584 M585 57 28 24758 1
46. 35 Mapping Scale 1 750 The figure AB C DA repres ents 716 square metres 24735 of the Village Kingray Estste Gaborone Surveyed in July 2015 by me ALAA W A van Vuuren This diagram is annexed to The parent diagram is D S M No Transfer Registrar of Deeds Make any necessary editing that may be required On completion click on the File menu heading and select the Unload the diagram Programme option SURPAC will then return you to the General CAD programme where you can simply click on the next Stan Number to generate the next Diagram All Stands for which Diagrams have been generated during the current session will be outlined in purple This allows Users to quickly see which Diagrams still need to be generated On completion of this Method be sure to again click the Auto diagram Creation Mode to return the General CAD programme back to its normal mode Page 292 of 312 New Diagram Templates for Zambia New A4 and A3 Diagram templates have been created for Zambia These formats closely follow the requirements of the Office of the Surveyor General Zambia Examples of these new formats are GOVERNMENT SURVEYOR ra nmmoour Page 293 of 312 A B C D MiddleofRiver E F A Other SURPAC Additions and Modifications 1 General CAD programme New function Line Data Traverse This function allows Users to create a series of contiguous Lines using entered polar data and to check the
47. 49 FA3W 14221 737 45357 950 1245 327 BROEDER 25145 50 FA4 14690 805 45184 811 22C 51 FAIO 14596 987 45219 497 22C 52 FA5 14468 550 45160 258 004P 53 FAS 14374 737 45194 3888 04P 54 FA7 14280 925 45229 518 1452 370 22C 55 FATX 14280 930 45229 520 22C 56 FAB 15236 890 45225 478 22C 57 FAS 15289 540 45335 780 220 58 FA10 14572 426 45119 152 22C 59 FATI 14543 599 45132 6171 22C 60 FA11X 14779 682 45039 596 22C 61 FAI2 14524 836 45139 534 22C 62 FA13 14506 073 45146 458 22C 63 FA14 14487 309 45153 381 1388 557 22C 64 FA15 14468 546 45160 305 1388 557 22C 65 FA16 14449 783 45167 228 1388 557 22C 66 FAA 14345 147 45259 168 22C a 67 FAB 14345 146 45259 169 22C 121 68 FAC 14345 146 45259 169 22C 119 69 FACX 14345 1465 45259 169 22C 99 70 FACZ 14345 146 45259 169 22C 99 71 FAP 14553 485 45144954 22C 12 72 FAX 14495 826 45150 186 22C 73 FB1 14362 480 45306 068 oP 74 FB2 14686 491 45050 066 01P 75 FBS 14452 254 45048 263 o1P 76 FB5 14659 313 45032 911 01P Co ordinate File C Surpac385S amples General_test_file SURPAC application display using an Actions Bar Menu and a Navigation Bar Screen Display at the recommended 1024x768 pixel resolution Page 75 of 312 New Navigation Bars for File Display Programmes The major SURPAC programmes that show File Lists now include a Navigation Bar These programmes include The Co
48. A4 AO DXF Files For Users wanting to convert their AllyCAD files to SURPAC they will first have to use AllyCAD to create DXF formats of the required drawing files This has been necessitated due to the owners of AllyCAD being unwilling to release the data storage format of their drawing sheets The C A D Drawing and Plotting Programme includes a specific Import option for AllyCAD DXF files The transformation variables have been preset in the programme so that the imported data are correctly oriented positioned and scaled when viewed in SURPAC Step 1 Create or load a dummy Co ordinate File whose Name includes the word AllyCAD e g AllyCAD DXF Import The file s System should be set as Local The file should contain 2 Points whose values are Y1 1000 X1 1000 Y2 1000 X2 1000 This will provide a plot area centered at the Point Y 0 and X 0 Step 2 Load the C A D Drawing and Plotting Programme If the Programme loads an existing Plot Sheet then go to the Programme s File menu and select the Open Create a Plot File Sheet item Step 3 Using the Browse Button on the Sheet SetUp Parameters information form set a required Sheet Name Other Sheet parameters should be Sheet Size A4 unless you know that the DXF file contains a Sheet of another size Sheet Orientation Portrait unless you know it should be Landscape Page 34 of 312 Sheet Scale 1 1000 Sheet Swing 0 unless you
49. All viewing settings can be User modified from within Google Earth Clicking on a displayed Point will show a text balloon containing the Point s values and information Page 171 of 312 Example of a new township layout showing Lines and Named Points on Google Earth V N iewing a SURPAC CAD Sheet on Google Earth otes Before proceeding view and or reset the Google Earth options see above One problem associated with using a CAD Sheet as an overlay is that of the Meridian Convergence Since a CAD Sheet is always oriented to Grid North the True North at the Central Meridian of the projection and not to True North at the Sheet position SURPAC has to swing the CAD Sheet display so as to re orient it to True North Before the image of a CAD Sheet is sent to Google Earth as an overlay you will notice it being re drawn in SURPAC This is to both re orient the Sheet for Meridian Convergence as explained above and to set the Sheet scale to the defined plotting scale This latter action is too ensure a clearer Sheet image on Google Earth For the Windows Vista operating system which has better graphic memory handling the scale is set to half the defined plotting scale to provide an even clearer overlay image 1 In the CAD programme click on the File main menu heading and then select the View Sheet on Google Earth menu item 2 Once the CAD sheet has been transferred Google Earth will shift its location to the
50. Button or the Enter Button Note that the Period is always in Months the Interest Rate is the Annual Interest Rate Present Value This function calculates the Present Value of a future Lump Sum and or Monthly Payments using a fixed Interest Rate and over a given Period Reply to each prompt by entering the appropriate value and pressing either the Button or the Enter Button Note that the Period is always in Months the Interest Rate is the Annual Interest Rate Page 39 of 312 Interest Rate This function calculates the Interest Rate that would need to be charged in order to pay off a present Loan Amount or Lump Sum using a fixed Interest Rate over a given Period Reply to each prompt by entering the appropriate value and pressing either the Button or the Enter Button Note that the Period is always in Months and the calculated Interest Rate is the Annual Interest Rate Currency Unit Use this function to enter a required User currency symbol e g R P etc This User symbol will be stored for future use Survey Functions Join Calculation This function carries out the standard 2 dimensional Join calculation between two Points These may be Points existing in the current Co ordinate File in which case their values will automatically be loaded or Points unrelated to the current Co ordinate File in which case you will be prompted to enter their values When prompted for a Point Name input the Name if the Po
51. Command All CAD programmes The Write Text WT command now uses the last Direction calculated when using the Line Dimension LD command as the default direction If you want to write a Text item parallel to perpendicular to or at 45 to a given line then first move the cursor close to the required Page 114 of 312 line and then give the LD command Then move to the require location for the start of the Text item and give the WT command The WT input form now includes buttons that allow for changing the displayed Direction by either 904 909 453 and 45 degrees In all cases of Text Direction calculation the programme will adhere to the normal GP principles of the Text being written from left to right For example if you have a displayed Direction of 196 2 and you Click the 90 button the ne w Direction displayed will be 286 2 and not 106 2 If you want to use a Directi on of 106 2 then you have to enter this value manually Modified Single Point Fix Manual entry of Measured Distances for Trilaterations This function applies to the Least Squares Adjustment Single Point Fix by Trilateration programme Users may now elect to manually enter distances directly into the calculation form or as before read the data from a pre loaded Observation file Regardless as to which direction the measurements were actually made forward or back with manual data entry the calculation will take the form of a Set Up Point wit
52. Cut Keys for File Editing When editing a Co ordinate file an Observation file or a Tacheometric file it is now possible to use the Windows style short cut keys for the editing functions as listed below Short Cut Keys Function Ctrl C Copy Ctrl V Paste Cirl X Cut Cirl A Select All Delete Delete The Ctrl C CTRL X and Delete functions are applied to those highlighted points rows at the time the command is given To highlight Selected Points in the Co ordinate file click on the first required Point then holding down the Ctrl key Click one at a time on the remaining required Points To highlight a Block of Points in any of the above mentioned files click on the first Point of the required Block then holding down the Shift key Click on the last point of the required Block Page 157 of 312 Addition of Internal Beacon Category for the General Plan CAD Programme A new category has been added for the General Plan Data Sheet output This new category with the heading of Internal Beacons is to cater for cases where a road is defined as an erf or stand i e a part of the township and not as a public road This is applicable in cases where access to individual erven or stands within the township is to be made by means of a private communally owned road and not by a public road In order to define a Point on a GP as being an Internal Beacon it must have a Description Code of 28 e g 28P 28F etc All Points def
53. DTMs in CloudCompare A useful benefit from creating Delaunay Mesh files for the Surface and Base DTMs is the ability to compute the Volume between these two surfaces This is done in two parts First the Volume for the Surface DTM model is calculated This volume is determined from an X Y plane set at the lowest height of the model To do this make sure that the highlighted entity in the Database tree is the Mesh file of the Surface DTM ne Bee The figure on the left shows the highlighted 4 V Polifin_Surface_PC asc C SurpacCloud selected entity as the Mesh file for the file 4 F Polifin_Surface_PC Cloud Polyfin_Surface_PC 7 Polifin Surface PC Cloud mesh 4 7 Polifin_ Base PC asc C SurpacCloudVie A Volume for this model can now be calculated 4 V Polifin_Base_PC Cloud using the CloudCompare function W Polifin_Base_PC Cloud mesh v Polifin_Contour_PC dxf C SurpacClou Now follow the menu path Edit Mesh Measure Volume The result of the volume calculation will be displayed in the Console at the bottom of the screen If a message appears in red in the Console stating that the Mesh model has holes you will need to check in SURPAC that the DTM does not in fact have any missing triangles If you are satisfied that there are none then ignore this message In the Console a message such as V 1 62421e 06 cube units for the Surface DTM Will be displayed Now
54. DWG files up to and including the current AutoCAD version 2010 2011 Versions of DXF and DWG files currently supported by SURPAC for data importing AC1004 Release 09 AC1006 Release 10 AC1009 Release 11 amp 12 AC1012 Release 13 AC1014 Release 14 AC1015 AutoCAD 2000 2002 AC1018 AutoCAD 2004 2005 2006 AC1021 AutoCAD 2007 2008 2009 AC1024 AutoCAD 2010 2011 These SURPAC importing routines are compatible with AutoCAD generated DXF and DWG files Note that DXF or DWG files generated by other third party applications may not be compatible The changed DXF and DWG import routines apply to the General CAD programme the General Plan CAD programme the Sectional Title CAD programme the Working Plan CAD programme the Diagram CAD programme and the Co ordinate File Editing programme for Point import from DXF DWG files General Programme Modifications Observation File Security Users can now apply a Security lock to all Observation Files accessible from a given computer Once a Password has been allocated all Users of that computer would be required to enter the Password in order to modify Edit Insert or Delete any data lines on any Observation File accessed from that computer This would for example allow a Chief Surveyor the ability to set a Password protection on all computers being used by staff members but leaving his own computer free to modify any required Observation Files The default Password for Observatio
55. Distance adjustment or A Bowditch Proportional DY DX DZ adjustment The Helmert Transformation method uses the non common traverse Start and End Points to determine an Orientation Swing and a Linear Scale Factor to be applied to the surveyed data The traverse is then re computed using these modified data The Bowditch Proportional Distance method applies an adjustment to the DY DX and DZ components of each traverse leg the DZ component only applies to Field Traverses The adjustment used is a fraction of the total DY DX and DZ mis closure of the traverse with this fraction being calculated as a ratio between the distance of an individual traverse leg and the distance of the total traverse The Bowditch Proportional DY DX DZ method also applies an adjustment to the DY DX and DZ components of each traverse leg the DZ component only applies to Field Traverses The adjustment used is a fraction of the total DY DX or DZ mis closure of the traverse with this fraction being calculated as a ratio between a scalar component DY DX or DZ of an individual traverse leg and the scalar sum of all the corresponding components in the traverse For the Field Traverse the simultaneous Least Squares Adjustment technique is also available by using the Least Squares Planimetric Adjustment programme to adjust the Y X values and the Least Squares Trigonometrical Height Adjustment programme to adjust the heights 5 Importing Data from AllyCAD
56. File My thanks to Andr Van Der Walt of Pretoria for the original suggestion Page 139 of 312 The Co ordinate File Listing Programme Editing the Printer Output When sending a output of the current Co ordinate file data to a Printer the Clipboard an ASCII file or to an Excel file it is now possible to make modifications to the output information before the printing or file creation takes place There are two ways of calling the Co ordinate file output routine Either click the main file heading General and then select the menu item Print the co ordinate File List or whilst in the Co ordinate File Editing programme click the Print File button in the Actions Bar Menu After selecting the required Co ordinate file listing options the display of the listing will be shown on screen as it was before The only obvious difference will be a blue information line at the head of the listing with the caption Click on any data line to enable editing of that line Press Enter to accept changes Press Esc to cancel You can now click on any displayed line that you want to edit and the line will be highlighted Whilst focussed on that line the cursor will change to the I Beam style indicating that editing can take place Move the cursor along the line to the beginning of the item that is to be edited and then enter the required changes Note that the overwrite mode is not available Changes must be entered and then the non requ
57. File Data Base for WG values The SURPAC Control Files used for automatic transformations between Lo and WG have been extended by the addition of the WG values of all TSM s in the Ladismith George Mosselbaai and Senekal areas plus the Lo values for Senekal For Ladismith George Mosselbaai areas these TSM s cannot be used for system transformations due to lack of the Lo values but they can be used in the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons programme when the current Co ordinate file is defined as being in the South African WG system Thanks to Willem Knoetze of Sedgefield and Michael Van Niekerk of Welkom for the above data Page 141 of 312 Page 142 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 24 Release 05 All CAD Programmes Importing Exporting Images using TIFF World Files All SURPAC CAD programmes now have the ability to both Import and Export graphic images using parameters from associated TIFF World Files TFW These small text files are normally attached to TIF or TIFF graphic files and contain parameters which are used to automatically position rotate and scale the image on the Sheet or plan into which it is imported This saves a lot of User time normally spent on ensuring that an imported graphic image is correctly situated on the sheet or plan Please note that the information stored in a TFW file does not constitute complete geographical pos
58. Height Hght Diff Direction Information OK 1 xvb56a 70 427m 2817 529m 1033 189 1 040 321 118 44 41 2 bray 63 70 821m 2818 148m 1040 962 1050 232 348 08 36 3 xvby 70 961m 2818 118m 1041 474 1048 532 7 06 331 01 03 Nie Genivelleerd 4 xvbx 70 890m 2818 167m 1041 394 1051 325 9 93 340 51 47 Nie Genivelleerd 5 xvb57 71 233m 2817 639m 1034 361 1 042 029 7 67 263 57 49 6 xvb56 70 203m 2818 264m 1044 994 1051 906 6 91 42 26 21 7 xvb57a 74 782m 2817 080m 1033 299 1 039 995 6 70 239 53 32 8 xvb55a 69 905m 2818 882m 1049 508 1054 996 34 35 54 9 xvb58 72 474m 2816617m 1040 345 1048 331 238 24 06 10 xvb59 72 502m 2816 639m 1040 442 1049 690 239 19 42 11 xvb60 72511m 2816 623m 1040 667 1 049 397 239 04 33 12 xvb55 69561m 2819593m 1051 133 1055 622 31 29 51 13 xvb60a 73173m 2816 798m 1041 919 1 046 899 4 98 249 55 15 14 xvb54a 69 141m 2820 220m 1 052 040 1056 000 3 96 32 05 03 15 xvb61 73 798m 2817 274m 1036 325 1 042 069 5 74 262 14 26 16 xvb61a 74417m 2817 748m 1037 504 1042 705 5 20 270 51 31 47 xvb54 68 739m 2820 859m 1052 526 1056 924 4 40 32 06 08 Y SearchCentre X Mean GE Height Shift 70 725m 2 817 693m 6 66 1 86 View Bench Mark Information fJ T Sort Options Search Options AQ Google Earth Options i i Set the Search Y X Centre Position i A tees a Sort th
59. Landscape mode These values are derived by taking the known size of an AO sheet 1189mm x 849mm and multiplying each dimension by 250 1000 Step 5 Use the FC Figure Copy Command to grab a copy of the rectangle and then move this item to the required location and if required at the required swing Refer to the Help Figure Commands document found under the General CAD Help menu to see how a Figure is Copied Moved swung etc Step 6 Repeat Step 5 above for all required General Plan sheet positions Bear in mind the sheet overlaps need to be allowed for as well as for the sheets margins Step 7 The Sheet centre values can now be easily determined For example draw the two diagonals of a sheet use the LU Line Subdivide Commands on one of these diagonals and then Snap onto the centre point created by the diagonals to read the sheet Centre values Finally the Sheet Centre values and Sheet Swings can then be used in the General Plan programme to set up the various Sheets Once this done all Line work can then be imported into each of the General Plan Sheets from the General CAD Sheet See the example on the next page Page 297 of 312 SURPAC Ver 5 64 for Windows XP Vista 7 8 General 1 a O 4 Ea E ab VEZE gy A 44 dq 1B Ay K Scale 1 3200 Swing 00 Layer Layer 001 12mm Round Iron Peg ao Click Mouse RHB for Pull Down Menu Display N Sheet 2 Centre DUMMY A0 SHEET
60. Level Network Trigonometrical Height Network Adjustment programme This programme has been amended to handle up to 100 sightings per Set Up The previous limit was 60 Longitudinal Sectioning programme This programme has been amended to include the option of fitting a Spline Curve through the section positions as opposed to just joining the positions with a series of straight lines This option can be selected deselected via the Set Options button on the Actions menu bar The default value is selected Sectional Title CAD programme The problem with the Mid Wall calculation routine has been fixed Page 112 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 23 Release 04 Opening Creating Deleting a Co ordinate File A new option has been added for Opening Creating or Deleting a SURPAC Co ordinate File Using this option a more informative file layout is displayed by the programme Drive Display List Folder Display List File Display List Highlighted File Details File General Conversions Least quares Topographical Engjneering Mining Cadastral Help Acti ee 7 7 x Sas Name Co ordinate X Co ordinate leight Description Calc is Pg None 2 z e 4 Edit M1 50 619 233 6 350 038 127 282 22C a EE nmm L AEN 50 619 233
61. Lines are being checked Once the required Command has been given LIA LIP LIS or LIC indicate the two Lines to be intersected or checked by moving the Cursor close to the first Line and then pressing the Mouse LHB or the Enter Key and then repeating this procedure for the second Line Page 102 of 312 Modified All CAD Programmes SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 23 Release 01 All SURPAC CAD programmes have been modified to allow more efficient Line identification for commands such as LD Line Dimension A Area etc In the past the existence of Text Items Point circles or Marks Contours Grid Lines etc all tended to disrupt the location of Lines if these items were drawn using the same colour as the Line The new technique employed allows the Line search routine to see through all non Line items regardless of which colour they are drawn in The one exception to this is when large Mark Points e g Circles Squares etc larger than 3 5mm are used in the General CAD Programme In this case it may still be necessary to Hide turn off the display of the Mark Points when carrying out Line location commands Modified The General CAD and General Plan Programmes The following Command has been added to the Draw or Line menu Fixed Area Calculations Ctrl S As the name implies this function will generate Polygons or Stands or Erven that have a User defined Fixed Area
62. Mercator projection for the derivation of the planar rectangular Y X or E N co ordinates from their respective ellipsoidal geographical Latitude and Longitude positions The main problem related to transforming from the Lo System to or from the WG System comes about due to the Trigonometrical Station and Town Survey Mark co ordinates in the latter system having been re adjusted by using upgraded triangulation and trilateration with the inclusion of Doppler and GPS Station fixes plus an astronomically observed baseline between Hartebeeshoek and Sunderland This naturally results in co ordinate adjustment shifts between Trig Beacons and TSMs which are over and above the shifts scaling and orientation changes brought about by the switching of ellipsoids Since the above adjustment shifts are mainly random in nature it is not possible to produce a single set of transformation parameters that would satisfy co ordinate transformations to the degree of accuracy required by Surveyors Transformations need to be localized using common control Points close to the required position or positions of transformation to ensure that that the local control Point random adjustment differences are correctly compensated for Page 43 of 312 This brings up the topic of the transformation itself Since the systems under particular discussion the Lo System the WG System and the UTM Systems are all planar rectangular systems a standard non w
63. Meridians for example transforming from Lo 27 to WG 29 or transforming from UTM Zone 35 on WGS 84 to Lo 29 on Clarke 1880 Modified 2 Source data which may derived form either of the following sources From manually entered Y X or E N co ordinates From a SURPAC Co ordinate File From an ASCII file containing co ordinate data From an ASCII file containing Lat Long data 3 The setting of the programme Options namely e The type of Weighting required None Inverse Distance or Inverse Distance Squared e The number of Control Points to use The User can instruct the programme to search for the group of nearest common control Points for each Point to be transformed A group of control Points can consist of between 2 and 20 Points e lf a SURPAC Co ordinate File has been selected as the Source Data then the programme will search for the existence of any associated CAD files such as General Plans Working Plans Sectional Title Sheets and or Plot files that may need to be transformed An appropriate Check Box will be displayed if any CAD files are found By selecting this Check Box all associated CAD files will be transformed using the same transformation Options as set for the Co ordinate file Selecting this option provides a quick method of re creating all the files in a survey with the re created file data being positioned sized and oriented in the New System e Finally If a SURPAC Co ord
64. Network Adjustment programmes have been modified so as to better highlight excessive observation adjustments that might have been generated by the network adjustment These programmes use the Normal distribution Tolerance statistic of 2 5 X Standard Deviation of Unit Weight to create an acceptance threshold Statistically Observation Distance and or Height Difference adjustments that exceed this Tolerance have a 95 probability of being Gross Errors rather than Observational Errors Observational Errors are classified as acceptable errors that arise due to sources such as instrumental inaccuracies human errors weather variability etc Gross Errors are considered to be blunders or mistakes and normally should not be allowed to influence the network adjustment process These programmes now highlight any adjustment that exceeds the derived Tolerance level by marking such an adjustment with a double asterix e g 1 234 Page 95 of 312 This makes it easier for Users to pinpoint observations that require investigation or possible elimination from the network For planimetric networks the Distance adjustments are converted into their arc angle equivalent values Seconds in order to compare them with the network Directions The one proviso applied to Distance adjustments is that if a distance adjustment is less than the User defined a priori relative accuracy Zero error plus parts per million factor then it will not be consid
65. Password are not required Unless otherwise stated you can use the User Name and Password issued for the last official Upgrade e g with Version 5 40 Release 01 Before downloading and installing the intermediate modification s you can view these changes and decide if they affect you When SURPAC displays the form below you can 1 Click the What s New button to see what changes have been made 2 Select the reminder interval required for Upgrade checks 3 Click the Yes button if you want to install the Upgraded version of SURPAC or 4 Click the No button if you want to ignore these Upgrades for the time being SURPAC Software Upgrade Available W o e Upgrad The Version of SURPAC that you are currently running is Version 5 40 0102 The Version of SURPAC on the SURPAC Upgrade site is Version 5 40 0103 Do you want to Download and Install this latest SURPAC Upgrade NB You must have a current and valid SURPAC Software Maintenance Contract and the required Password issued on 06 12 2012 with Version 5 40 Release 01 Upgrade z me every time SURPAC runs What s New g Remind me once each day Only remind me again in 10 days time Do not show this reminder message again Page 218 of 312 General CAD and General Plan CAD Programmes Check for Lines whose Terminals are not correctly Trimmed or Snapped This new function LC Line Check Trimmed allows for the display of all Line Terminals that ha
66. Polygons for Exporting to Google Earth In the Upgrade for Version 5 50 explained how it is possible to set up a Hatched Image Polygon in the General CAD programme used for creating a KML file and exporting it to Google Earth This same routine may be used for creating standard Hatched Polygons without any image or document attachments as follows In the General CAD programme Click the Hatch Flood menu heading and then select the menu items to set the required Hatch Colour and Hatch Type and then Hatch the selected Polygon From the File menu heading select the item Create a KML Google Earth Image Polygon Enter the required Name for the Polygon and when the Image and Link file option form is displayed just Click on the Proceed button Page 255 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 8 Version 5 62 In the past year or so have been asked by a number of SURPAC Users if it is not possible to run SURPAC on a small hand held tablet Up until now have had to say that it was not possible However with the advent of small 10 inch notepads tablets running under Microsoft Windows 8 1 this has all changed recently purchased an ASUS Transformer T100 in order to see how it runs in general and in particular how it runs SURPAC The 1T100 s tablet is detachable from the keyboard making it both portable and flexible The 10 inch Windows 8 1 tablet is just the right size to use as a tablet and it weighs only 1 2 kgs T
67. SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 24 Release 02 Please note that the minimum screen desktop resolution for the correct viewing of SURPAC forms and menus is now 1024 x 768 pixels If you are still operating a PC or Laptop at the old 800 x 600 pixel resolution you will need to change this to 1024 x 768 Running SURPAC on a PC or Laptop with the screen set lower than the 1024 x 768 pixel resolution will cause forms to be partially hidden and menus to be truncated To reset the screen resolution do the following Click the Mouse RHB anywhere on the desktop display 1 On the displayed menu select Click the Properties item Page 130 of 312 On the displayed form Click the Settings tab Set the Screen Resolution to 1024 x 768 or higher if you want 4 Reset the Color Quality to Medium 16 bit This is because Windows XP has the nasty habit of unilaterally setting the Color Quality to High 32 bit whenever you change the screen resolution New SURPAC Menu Structure and Display Options SURPAC has a new Menu structure to make it more visually compatible with Windows XP and applications such as Office 2003 On running SURPAC you will notice that the software menus defaults to the Office 2003 look Apart from the normal main Menu Heading at the top of the display a new main Menu fixed Toolbar is now also displayed The main Toolbar provides rapid access to a number of the more common programmes within SU
68. SURPAC will now query if the Nikon is Ready to Receive Co ordinate Data e Click the Yes Button e Once SURPAC has started to transmit co ordinate data it will display the Point Names as they are being transmitted e On completion SURPAC will return you to the normal display of co ordinates of the Co ordinate File Editing Programme 3 The U K National Grid OSGB36 OSTNO2 and OSGM02 Compatibility SURPAC now offers full support for the new OSTNO2 and OSGMO2 data shift files as supplied by Ordnance Survey UK These data are used for transformations to from the OSGB36 System Airy 1830 Ellipsoid and the ETRS89 System WGS 84 Ellipsoid OSTNO2 and OSGM02 Compatibility The National Grid to ETRS89 and the ETRS89 to National Grid conversions in SURPAC use algorithms and shift data provided by the U K Ordnance Survey and are fully OSTNO2 and OSGM02 enabled In order to use these transformations however the files called OSTN02 DAT for Eastings Northings and OSGM02 DAT for heights must exist in the SURPAC application folder These files are in a compacted SURPAC format and are not in the same format as those issued by Ordnance Survey Users in the UK need to download these files from _www surpac co za Page 58 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 06 Release 02 1 Diagram CAD Programme modifications 1 1 The problem with Line Servitude diagrams has been fixed Previously multi line line
69. There was a problem when attempting to Erase Inset Points from a Working Plan sheet This has now been rectified General Plan CAD Circles within a Data Block that had been added to the General Plan by using the Import form a GP Data Sheet menu option or by using the Frame Copy Command were not being stored and hence were not shown on a printout of the General Plan This problem has now been resolved Creating PDF files for CAD Sheet Outputs Finally Users are once again warned against using PDF Writing applications that offer no support or upgrade features These are usually applications that are downloadable free of charge from the Internet In the last couple of months have had 3 instances where Users have had erroneous PDF documents generated by such applications These normally involves missing graphics such as signatures or text items written in mirror image and or printing in the opposite direction Remember Goedkoop is duurkoop so rather pay a few Rand and obtain a reliable application with a good reputation and with good back up Page 189 of 312 SURPAC Version 5 36 Release 02 Programme Modifications General Programme Modifications Long Section Creation When creating a new Long Section by reading or interpolating points from a Tacheometric file the programme was not starting the section from Chainage 0 000 even when this was specified as the starting chainage This has now been fixed Importing
70. Users may now elect to manually enter observations directly into the calculation form or as before set the programme to read the data from an Observation file The observations must be manually pre oriented and entered as oriented forward Directions Manual data may be entered for fixing Points in Y X or E N or Y X Z or E N H Note that in the case of manually entered data these data will not be stored for any future use Once the calculation has been completed the entered observational data will be lost The purpose of this new option is to provide the User with a quick calculation for a Point to be fixed by forward intersection Users downloading observations from a Logger or Total Station are advised to use the existing method of loading raw un oriented data from an Observation file Modified Sending data to the Windows Clipboard The amount of data that may be sent to the Windows Clipboard has been substantially extended This applies to all programmes that are able to send data to the Clipboard These new limits are applicable to Windows XP Professional and Home versions and Windows 2000 Users still operating under Windows 98 however might not be able to take advantage of these new extensions Using a USB gt RS232 Converter Cable for Downloading Observations and Co ordinates Most Laptops now appearing on the market do not have an RS232 communications port These have been replaced by the more fl
71. Wall Layer 005 Paint Mark on roof Layer 006 20mm iron pipe in concrete Layer 007 12mm Hole in Concrete Layer 008 Iron Standard Layer 009 Corner of House Layer 010 12mm Hole in Wall Layer Selection option in the General CAD Cadastral file format A further new feature for the Layer display box has been added Making a right Click Mouse RHB on this box is the same as pressing the keyboard F3 SFK This is the Change Layer and or Layer Active settings option This function allows you to 1 Change the current Layer 2 Define which of the other Layers are to Active for the Current Layer 3 Set whether the Lines Text Items etc are to be shown in a light grey colour or hidden altogether 4 Set whether the Images are to be shown in a light grey colour or hidden altogether Cursor Snap Options Users are now able to set a number of Snap options when using the General CAD programme which are Snap to Points and or Lines This is the default Snap option After selecting a Sheet position by clicking the Mouse LHB SURPAC will first search for the nearest Point within range of the currently set Snap Radius If no Point can be found SURPAC will then search for the nearest Line terminal within range of the currently set Snap Radius If no Line terminal can be found SURPAC will adopt the current cursor position i e there will be no Snap function Page 222 of 312 Snap to Points On
72. an U Ground Peg Fix Code 9 Defines a New Peg to Set Up Peg Observation for an U Ground Peg Fix Determining SURPAC Observation Codes from a Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Total Station The Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Total Stations only allow for the input of a single Code block As this Code Block in the Instrument is referred to as the Description Code this function has been maintained when transferring data to a SURPAC Observation File Users are reminded that in SURPAC a Point Description Code is a number in the range 0 499 or an alphanumeric value of up to 6 characters As there is no direct transfer of an Observation Code from these Nikon Instruments SURPAC has to use the approach of comparing the Names of downloaded Points with those of Points existing in the current Co ordinate File in order to attach the most logical Observation Code to each data line This works as follows For Set Up data lines the programme will search the current Co ordinate File to see if the Named Set Up Point already exists If it does then the Observation Code 2 Set Up at a Point with known co ordinates E g a Fixed Point will be allocated If the Point does not exist then the Code 1 Set Up at a Point with unknown co ordinates E g a Free Point will be allocated For Observation lines the programme will also search the current Co ordinate File to see if the Named observed Point already exists If it does then the Observation Code 3 will be alloca
73. and Pan options without the necessity of pressing any keyboard keys Once these Mouse operations have been mastered Zooming and Panning a Screen display is much simpler and quicker than using the Scroll Bars or keyboard commands To Zoom the Screen display to show a defined rectangle at an enlarged Scale Press and hold the Mouse RHB and then drag the cursor towards the right and or downwards A rectangle will be Page 22 of 312 displayed as the cursor is moved Once the cursor is the required position release the Mouse RHB A new screen will then be displayed showing the area defined by the rectangle This is similar to the ZW Zoom Window Command To revert the Screen display to the previously used Scale Press and hold the Mouse RHB and then drag the cursor to the left and or upwards After the cursor has been dragged a short way about 5mm the programme will automatically re display the Screen at the previously used Scale This function may be repeated for as many previous scales as have been used during the current session To Pan move about within the available Screen Display Press and hold the Mouse LHB and then drag the cursor in the required direction As the cursor is moved the position of the Screen Display will change in response to the cursor movement The Screen Display can be moved to any position within the limits of the Horizontal and Vertical Scroll Bars Once the required location has been reached rel
74. and the list below covers a few of the more important modifications Horizontal Curve Alignment This programme now allows for the input of the Start and End point co ordinates of the defined Centre Line by allowing the entry of Names of the points if they exist in the current Co ordinate File This programme has also been modified to accommodate Centre Lines that consist of one straight line between the defined Start and End points Plotting CAD Sheets to a Network Printer Previously SURPAC would not recognise a plotter printer attached to a network computer unless the C drive of that computer had been mapped on the computer sending the CAD Sheet to be plotted Mapping of a computer hard drive is done via the Tools Map Network Drive menu option of the Windows Explorer application have done various test using my own local network and this problem seems to have been resolved However if you still experience problems plotting to a network printer please let me know Please note that a temporary solution to the problem if it persists is to first output the CAD Sheet to a PDF file and then plot the PDF file via Adobe Reader Naming Points on General Plan and Working Plan Sheets A Point Name may only be positioned on up to 4 different General Plan sheets and up to 3 different Working Plan sheets at any one time Although this is normally sufficient this sometimes led to a Naming confusion which Point Names tha
75. are able to run SURPAC by double clicking on the icon of any SURPAC Co ordinate file wer file From Windows Explorer display the folder containing the required Co ordinate File and double click its icon SURPAC will then load and display this file as the current Co ordinate File Standard Helmert Transformations Transforming non common Points When Saving the transformed Points to the current Co ordinate File you now have the further option of changing the Name of the Point to be stored if another Point with the same Name pre exists in Page 206 of 312 the file For example if a Point named A34 is being transformed and a Point A34 already exists you have the following options e Reject the transformed values and keep the existing values e Overwrite the existing values with the transformed values e Adopt the means of the existing values and the transformed values e Change the Name of the transformed Point e g A34x and Save this as a new Point thereby retaining both sets of values Tacheometric file Editing There was a problem with the Remove Duplicate Point function when trying to remove delete Points in a Tacheometric file within a User given radius of an existing Point This problem has now been fixed up General CAD Programme 1 There was a problem when Naming Points using either the N1 N4 or N7 commands The Point Names were overwriting the Point Mark when the Mark Point Display Size was held constant Refer
76. are available Point Marking CAD Plotting programme only The CAD Plotting programme allows for displaying Mark Symbols at co ordinate Point positions Mark symbols include circles double circles triangles squares Trig Symbols and Reference Mark symbols For any Mark the User may specify a Mark Colour a Mark Background Colour and a Mark size Points are Marked by setting the required Mark type colour and size and then using the normal Name Command N1 N2 etc Marks can be set en masse if required Another variation of a Mark Symbol is the Spot Height Points can be displayed as Spot Heights if they have associated Heights This can be done individually or en masse Spot Height colours and sizes may be User set Line to Point Conversion CAD Plotting programme only The CAD Plotting programme includes a function for converting Line terminals to Points stored in the current co ordinate file This can be done a Point at a time or en masse Page 3 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 03 Release 02 1 Creation of GSI 8 bit ASCII file for Co ordinate data This additional programme allows for the conversion of co ordinate data from a SURPAC Co ordinate file to a Leica Wild GSI 8 bit format ASCII file e Whilst in the Co ordinate File Editing programme select the Options button then select the Export Data to an ASCII Text File option and click the OK Button OR e Whilst in the
77. are followed General Point Naming Protocol First this structure requires that each Stand or Land Parcel must be allocated a number before the field survey begins It does not matter if these Stand numbers are not the final numbers that may be allocated by the Surveyor General or Director of Surveys as they can be changed in SURPAC at a later date Secondly the surveyed Points must be given Point Names each of which has two important features These features define which Stand the Point relates to plus its position in a clockwise direction in the Stand Naming Option 1 Using this option the two Name elements are separated by a decimal point The first part of the Point Name must be the same as the Stand Number a corner of which is defined by that point The second part of the Point Name i e after the decimal point is that Point s order in the Stand definition It does not matter which Point is regarded as the first or starting Point but all Point numbering must follow in a clockwise direction For example for a five sided Stand whose number is 24738 the Point Names would be 24738 1 24738 2 24738 3 24738 4 and 24738 5 Naming Option 2 Using this option the two Name elements are simply the Stand Number a corner of which is defined by that point followed by a character of the alphabet from A to Z This character defines that Point s order in the Stand definition It does not matter which Point is regarded as the
78. are shown at the bottom of the form 3 2 View 3D Contours amp DTM on Google Earth Once all the contours have been generated and edited using the Surface Triangulation method you can view the contours alone or the contours and the solid 3D model created from the surface triangulation in situ on the Google Earth surface Using this Option Click on the File main menu heading and then select View Contours amp DTM on Google Earth menu option On the displayed form first read the help information by clicking on the icons to see the implications and use of the available options especially with regard to the two Surface Options These options allow for the display to be clamped to the Google Earth surface or to have it shown as a free standing 3D model The former method would be used for Contours that represent the natural earth surface and the latter for both Contours and DTMs of manmade features such as stockpiles dumps and earthworks NB Google Earth will not display any imported KML data that lie below its own surface Trying to display an excavation for example is not possible if the excavation Contours and DTM lie below the natural surface Page 198 of 312 amp Displaying 3D Contour amp Triangle DTM data to Google Earth Options for 3D Google Earth Display l Surface Options Display both Contours and Triangle DTM on Google Earth Display only the Contours on Google Earth Data D
79. at any future time The Multi Polar Peg File may be used to view both the summary of a the result of a Peg calculation and also for viewing the full details of the Peg calculation by displaying the relative ASCII file To View an ASCII Peg File for an Underground Peg when running the Edit Multi Polar Peg File programme click on any part of the Grid Line that contains the Name of the required Point Peg The programme will then display the names of all the existing SURPAC ASCII Peg Files file of type pg1 or pg2 in the currently defined Data folder and whose file names contain the name of the Point defined NB When an ASCII file is created using one of the Underground Peg Calculation programmes the file is by default given a name like E5798 30 07 02 where E5798 is the Peg s Name and 30 07 02 is the User given Date for the calculation normally the date the observations were made Users may modify these file names but the file name should always contain the name of the Peg in order for this function to work correctly Further leaving the date as displayed will make identification as to which ASCII file relates to which Point determination a lot easier when using this programme In the Edit Multi Polar Peg File programme a Point Peg determination may only be deleted if the correct Password is given This is to prevent any unauthorized removal of Peg information This is the same security Password as requi
80. be Printer Document files pdf or standard ASCII files txt The input boxes directly below the heading Placemark Link Files or Polygon Link Files at the bottom centre of the form allow for the selection of up to 5 Link Files NB For Image Polygons SURPAC automatically generates and adds a text file that contains the Polygon Points system co ordinates geographical co ordinates the distances and directions between Points and the Polygon Area This file will automatically be included in the KML file s list of hyperlink Link Files The file will not be shown on the above form but the hyperlink will be visible as a part of the KML file information in Google Earth On clicking on any of the available 5 input boxes for Link Files The file selection box on the right hand side of the form will display all pdf and txt files in the current folder path The folder path can be changed by selecting the required path using the Drive and Directory selection boxes above the file display The Link File type displayed can be selected using the file Type selection box below the file display Double Click on a file Name in the File selection box to select this file as a Link File The file s name will appear in the selected Link File input box Clear the Current Image Button This button will clear the currently displayed Image Only use this option if you want the current Image to remain blank unused If you just want to change the
81. be clicked at that position Once a Point Name is displayed running the cursor up or down the Navigation Bar will show successful Point Names in the pop up text display Clicking anywhere in the Navigation Bar will cause the File Listing to change its position so as the show and highlight the Point Line relative to the position clicked New Undo Buttons for SURPAC CAD Programmes All SURPAC CAD programmes now include two Undo functions aka Blond buttons Undo Previous Task The first of these two functions allows the User to backtrack or Undo up to 9 Drawing Tasks carried out in the current programme session A Drawing Task is any screen activity that modifies data on the current drawing e g Lines Arcs Circles Text Items Hatching Contours Graphic Items etc Activities such as changing Scale Orientation etc are not considered as drawing tasks as these may be changed at any time by the User Page 76 of 312 To Undo a Drawing Task either 1 From the CAD programme s Edit Menu Heading select the item called Undo Previous Task or 2 Use the keyboard Ctrl Z function i e press and hold down the Ctrl key and at the same time press the Z key Once a maximum of 9 Undo operations have been done the Undo Previous Task menu item will be greyed out made non active indicating that no more Undo tasks can be undertaken This menu item will become re activated when you perform
82. be printed to a physical Printer the SURPAC VPG file the Windows Clipboard an ASCII file or a Microsoft Excel file My thanks to Albert Coetzee Land Surveyor for originally suggesting this feature SURPAC User s Manual Book 3 SURPAC Google Earth functions have collated all the currently available SURPAC Google Earth functions into the SURPAC User Manual 3 This manual is in PDF format and may be downloaded as follows Copy the URL below and Paste it into your web browser s URL window www surpac co za Demo 20Install Download 20Demo htm Scroll to the bottom of the displayed web page and click on the image to the left of the Download SURPAC User Manual Book 3 for Google Earth functions There is no charge for this download If you don t already have SURPAC User Manuals 1 and 2 SURPAC User Manual Book 1 covers all the basic SURPAC functions plus the programmes in the Lite Module This book written by R Oelofse costs R150 00 to purchase in PDF format SURPAC User Manual Book 2 covers all the SURPAC Cadastral CAD functions in both the Cadastral Modules This book written by M Matthews costs R220 00 to purchase in PDF format Page 259 of 312 General Modifications Pretoria Local System for WG29 Previously this function was only available for converting from the Local System to Lo 29 Clarke 1880 Modified Conversions can now carried out from the Local system to WG 29 WGS 1984
83. be shifted in the Y and or X directions to get a good fit with any existing Sheet data If this is required right Click on the Image click the Image menu heading and then select the Shift a Sheet Image menu Page 179 of 312 option On the displayed form enter the Y and or X movement required for the Image This option can be repeated to ensure a good fit Adjusting the Image Brightness and or Contrast Images required for background information may need their brightness and or contrast adjusted to avoid the Images interfering with the display of Lines and Text To do this right Click on the Image click the Image menu heading and then select either of the Adjust Image Brightness or the Adjust Image Contrast menu options On the displayed form use the slide bars to set the required brightness and contrast values Page 180 of 312 SURPAC Version 5 35 Release 03 Programme Modifications Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System As most Users are now aware Microsoft has officially launched its new operating system called Windows 7 As with earlier systems Windows 7 comes in various flavours such as Home Home Premium Professional and Ultimate These editions are also available in either 32 bit or 64 bit format have tested SURPAC for both installation and operation on Windows 7 Home Premium 32 bit and am pleased to report that no problems were encountered If you have a SURPAC for Windows XP Vista inst
84. calculated by entering sufficient and correct Data to close the polygon the Print Area Button will become active and allow for the printing of the Area and Consistency information Setting SURPAC to run on a PC having a Limited Account User Many companies require that their PC Users have only limited access to sensitive folder and files on the PC Microsoft operating systems such as Windows 2000 and Windows XP provide the facility of setting up Limited accounts which restrict their users from modifying files in certain folders such as the WinNT folder for Windows 2000 or the Windows folder for Windows XP As SURPAC normally locates its security files in these folders it is necessary to get SURPAC to carry out certain file modifications to enable Users with Limited accounts to run SURPAC If you intend setting SURPAC for use from a Limited account please do the following 1 Installing SURPAC Software The installation must be done using an account that has Full Administrator rights on the computer This is important as the installation process will require access to the C Windows or C WinNT folder in order to correctly install the SURPAC components Trying to install SURPAC from a Limited account will cause the installation to fail 2 Remaining in the Full Administrator account run SURPAC software Click on the File main menu heading and then select the menu item Set SURPAC for Limited Account use The
85. can download for free just Google it to open and then re saved it in standard non compressed TIFF format The size of the file now ballooned to 65Mb thereby causing the problem in SURPAC when trying to print You can use IrfanView or any other graphics software to half the number of pixels in the file and re saved the image in standard TIFF format Doing this to the above example produced a file of 48 5Mb repeated the exercise of importing the file into the General CAD sheet and again plotted the sheet to a PDF file The image on the resulting PDF file was now correctly positioned and scaled A word of caution When using Geo Referenced images you need to adjust the image file s associated tfw file where is the name of the image to be imported This file contains the position values and scaling factors required to automatically place and size an imported image A tfw file which is a text file could for example look like this 1 1000106 0 0 1 1000106 65083 701875737628 NB The last two values can be in either Y X in Metres or in Lat Long 2843626 040160913000 The 1st and 4th values represent the Metres per pixel for Y and X directions respectively Where the problem arises is if you RESIZE the image by using a graphic editing application as discussed above then these two values must be reset For example if you resize the image to 50 of its original size then you need to double the Metres per pixel
86. centre of the imagery covered by the Sheet and will display the Sheet viewed from an appropriate height Notes The Sheet Orientation is set to True North regardless of the Sheet Swing used and there is no Tilt applied All view settings can be User modified from within Google Earth The Sheet overlay will be locked to the terrain covered by the Sheet Hence when viewed in 3D the Sheet will drape itself over the terrain much like a table cloth laid over a piece of rocky ground If the Sheet background has been set as fully transparent see Google Earth Options then only the Sheet data such as Lines Text Hatching etc will be shown Otherwise the Slide on the Google Earth Sidebar can be used to change the Sheet overlay transparency Page 172 of 312 DigitalGl Se sie Atia jy Example of a SURPAC Township layout Sheet with partial transparency on Google Earth Example of a layout with full background transparency on Google Earth Page 173 of 312 Example of a 3D semi transparent CAD Sheet Overlay plus Trigs on Google Earth File type used for Interfacing SURPAC with Google Earth Interfacing with Google Earth is done via KML files Keyhole Markup Language KML files employ HTML XML type grammar and may be used for modelling and storing geographic features such as points lines images polygons and models for display in Google Earth Google Maps ESRI ArcGIS Explorer AutoCAD etc Once you have defin
87. click on the data lines required Observation File Loading Editing Programme Field Book Printing When printing Field Book information from an Observation File the Inactive data lines were included in the Field Book instead of being omitted This has now been corrected Points Off Line Calculations Programme Naming of Re calculated Points The programme would sometimes change the Name of a Point that had been re calculated to its on line position This has now been corrected Page 149 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 31 Release 02 This latest SURPAC Upgrade has been designed for Users running SURPAC under either the Microsoft Windows XP or the Microsoft Windows Vista operating systems Other Users running any of the older Windows operating systems such as Windows 98 Windows NT or Windows 2000 may still install this Upgrade However should any problems result from the installation of this Upgrade please revert to the previous Upgrade used No guarantees can be given that Version 5 31 or any later version will run correctly under the older Windows operating systems This is another reminder to all Users that the installation of SURPAC on a PC Laptop running Microsoft Windows Vista requires a SURPAC for Windows Vista XP Version 5 31 or later installation CD You cannot install SURPAC from a pre Version 5 31 installation CD and then upgrade to Version 5 31 There are numerous fundamental system change
88. clicked If any station is not required then click on that TrigNet station s green tick The symbol will be changed to a red cross and the TrigNet station s co ordinate display will be changed to an italic font This TrigNet station will now be flagged as not required and will not be added to the current Co ordinate file Clicking a Points red cross will reverse the above process Click the Print List Button to send all those located and selected TrigNet stations to the SURPAC Printing form From this form display this list may then be sent to the current Printer to a User defined ASCII file to an Excel file or to the Windows Clipboard When the Store and Exit Button is clicked all located TrigNet stations displayed in the list and having the green tick symbol next to them will be added to the current Co ordinate File In the button designated View List on Google Earth you can send the list of selected TrigNet stations to Google Earth for a spatial view of the set of TrigNet stations By clicking on a TrigNet stations symbol on the Google Earth display the TrigNet station s co ordinate and height information is displayed along with the Latitude Longitude and Height of the station e 2 gt SURPAC Locate Nearest TrigNet Points a T D we p 5 ep a Co ordinate System WG 27 gt Hartebeesthoek94 Datum WGS 84 No Abb Name Full Name La
89. compatibility with the previous versions of the SURPAC General CAD programme basic colours such as Black Red Blue Green etc are allocated to the first 14 Layers of a newly created Co ordinate file When a previously created General CAD Sheet is loaded in the current version of the programme all Lines Text etc using Pen 1 Black will be allocated to Layer 1 All Lines Text etc using Pen 2 Red will be allocated to Layer 2 etc A Defined Layer A Defined Layer is a Layer that has a defined Layer Description and for an Engineering format Co ordinate files a defined Layer ID An Occupied Layer An Occupied Layer is a Defined Layer which contains any drawing elements such as Lines Arcs Circles Text Points Topo Symbols Images Figure Hatching or Figure Flood items The Current Layer The Current Layer is the Layer which is currently defined as the primary drawing Layer The Current Layer is displayed in the Layer List box at the top of the Sheet drawing area The Layer List box contains a list of all the Defined Layers for the current Sheet By clicking on the small down arrow next to the Layer List box you can select any other Defined Layer to be the new Current Layer 7 5 amp Setting Sheet Layer Display Options x 1 Select a Defined Layer to be used as the Current Primary Layer 001 Cadastral Data Pen 1 bd 2 Set the Layers to be Active and Visible when displaying the above Current Layer Number Description Laye
90. completed curve will be drawn in the colour of the current Pen This function should only be carried out when the Diagram figure has a normal 0 swing Problem when Editing the VPG pages In the last Upgrade it was noticed that there was a problem with the editing of the VPG virtual pages file associated with a Co ordinate file This problem has now been sorted out Problem when Copying a Co ordinate File Listing to the Clipboard Copying a Co ordinate file to the Windows Clipboard could sometimes cause the listing to be aborted if one or more of the Label Fields were displayed This problem has now been rectified The Copied listing now also strips all trailing blanks from all lines for easier editing of the data Problem when SURPAC is Maximised mode and Label Fields are displayed When one or more of the Text Label Fields were displayed for a Co ordinate file and the SURPAC application was set to the Maximized mode an error 384 cannot move or size a form when Minimized or Maximized was displayed This problem has now been fixed up Page 156 of 312 SURPAC Version 5 32 Release 03 Programme Modifications New functions added to SURPAC Software Co ordinate Text Label Fields New function The two text Label Fields can now be used to display the Latitude and Longitude values of Points when an appropriate Co ordinate System has been selected When setting the Display Elements for a Co ordinate file you can now set L
91. conflict in the use of the F5 SFK there is a Check Box on the Form which allows the F5 SFK Entry of Data completed function to be disabled If you intend allocating a Programme to the F5 SFK then it is advisable to make sure that this Check Box is checked Using CAD Programmes The SFK Programme allocations will not work when running any of the SURPAC CAD Programmes with the exception of the DTM Programme This is because the CAD Programmes have their own internal usage for the SFKs Programme Operation From the File Main Menu heading select the Set the Function Key Allocations menu item The programme Form will then be displayed The Form consists of A list of the 12 SFKs on the left hand side of the Form with the current SFK allocation for each of the keys shown in a list of Text boxes The F2 SFK will be highlighted in red indication that is the default SFK for editing On the right hand side of the Form is a Programme List that shows all the Programmes that may be linked or allocated to an SFK A line trace will show the current SFK Programme link To change an SFK allocation click either the SFK button or the Text box containing the current Programme allocation Both the SFK Button and its associated Text Box will be displayed in red and line trace will change to show where the selected Programme is in the Programme List If you want to use the F5 SFK for access top an allocated Programme t
92. data base of Trig Beacon and TSM co ordinates for both systems remains that as supplied by the Chief Directorate National Geo spatial Information Mowbray The WGS 1984 values WG values are the Hartebeeshoek94 Datum values as supplied in 2005 The Clarke 1880 Modified values Lo values are the last issued values dated 1995 1998 depending on the area Transformation between the two systems in South Africa is of a high order of accuracy normally in the region of 0 03m This is due to the large number of common points covering the country in the order of 50 000 The Standard Deviations shown for transformed points are due more to the effects of the re adjustment of the Hartebeeshoek94 rather than to any transformation uncertainty There has been some discussion recently on the use by SURPAC of the term WG for the Hartebeeshoek94 system e g WG 27 have used the term WG xx in SURPAC instead of official Lo84 xx My reason for this was to try to visually emphasize in which of the two systems the current file lies Many non Surveyors use information shown on Diagrams and co ordinate lists and the significance of the difference between Lo 27 and Lo 84 27 could be lost on people without a survey training background Nonetheless SURPAC does allow Users to change the headings of co ordinate file lists GPs Diagrams etc so that headings such as WG 27 can be changed to Lo 84 27 should this be required when su
93. data importing All decimal markers are forced to decimal points regardless of what the setting is in SURPAC for general data display and printing The required number of decimal places may also be set Downloading Data from a YOM 3Ta Total Station ASCII File 3 1 Downloading Observation Data At this stage transferring Observation data from a YOM 3Ta Total Station is done via an ASCII File create read routine Before running the appropriate SURPAC Programme use the YOM 3Ta to download an ASCII file To ensure that all Observation Data conform with the SURPAC Observation Code Format used for all General Observation Files certain information related to Station or Beacon Status must be included with the normal observation entities such as Horizontal Angle Vertical Angle Slope Distance Instrument Height Target Height and Point Description Code Setting the SURPAC Observation Codes and Point Description Codes Page 32 of 312 The YOM 3Ta allows for seven discreet data Blocks per Line of downloaded information The First Block or measurement tag contains information which allows SURPAC to deduce whether the current data Line is a Set Up Line Code 01 or Code 02 an Orientation Line Code 04 or a Measurement Line i e Polar or Tacheometric Point Code 05 If other Codes are required such as Code 03 or Code 06 then these must be edited in SURPAC once the download is complete SURPAC will allocate a Code 02 if a Set Up Po
94. defining an Image in Google Earth In Google Earth ensure that the Toolbar and Sidebar found in the Layers Panel are displayed Move the Google Earth display to show the required area at the required scale On the Sidebar set the Terrain option to OFF This is important If Google Earth is viewed using the Terrain option images become distorted due to terrain height differences Use the Navigation Control displayed at the top right corner of the Google Earth display to set the orientation to True North click the N symbol at the top of the Navigation Control This is important If Google Earth is not viewed in True North orientation the image will be distorted when sent to SURPAC Page 178 of 312 Now create a Polygon as described above by carefully clicking on the four corners of the Google Earth display area The Polygon created should show four lines running around the outside edge of the displayed image i e the image to be saved NB f the Polygon is displayed as a solid figure instead of the four boundary lines click the Style Color tab of the Polygon Dialog Box and change the Area Color to Outlined Save this Polygon as a KML file as described above normally into the C Surpac_GE folder NB After creating and saving this Polygon it is important that the Google Earth display is not changed in any way until the current image has been saved Click on Google Earth s File menu heading then select the Save menu it
95. displayed on Google Earth Page 170 of 312 Displaying selected Points from the Co ordinate File on Google Earth 1 First run the Co ordinate File Editing programme from the General main menu heading 2 Mark i e highlight the Points required for viewing on Google Earth a You can mark a block of Points by either clicking on the first Point in the block and then dragging the cursor onto the last Point or by clicking on the first Point in the block then holding down the Shift key and simultaneously clicking on the last Point in the block b You can mark individual Points by clicking on the first required Point and then whilst holding down the Ctrl key click on any other required Points c You can mark Points by Description by clicking on the File Options button and then selecting the Select Points to be Highlighted by Description option and then selecting the required Descriptions from the displayed list 3 After selection Click the Google Earth button on the Actions Bar menu The Points selected will be displayed at their surface positions on the satellite imagery by Google Earth Either a Point a Trig Beacon or a TSM symbol icon will be used to mark the displayed Points as is appropriate To obtain a Point s information click on the Point required A balloon text display will appear showing The Point Name The Point Description The Co ordinate System e g WG29 The Beacon Y X and Z values
96. e The displayed list of TrigNet stations may also be displayed on Google Earth Using the Locate and Add Nearest TrigNet Stations programme NB This programme forms a part of the Conversions Module and this Module must be an active part of the SURPAC License in order to be able to access the programme The programme is loaded from the Conversions Menu when selecting the Locate and Add Nearest TrigNet Station RSA Menu Item If the current Co ordinate file is empty the programme will display a warning message and abort as the Co ordinate file must contain at least one Point in order for this programme to work The Co ordinate file should have appropriate constants set If no constants are used then both the Y an X ordinates must have their full values As a starting default the programme will assume the Y X search position as being the centre of gravity of all existing Points in the current Co ordinate file The programme will use the further defaults of a Search Radius of 200Km and the number of Points to display as 5 The results of this default search will be displayed You may now change any of the search parameters required as mentioned on the previous page Page 303 of 312 Each displayed TrigNet station will initially have a green tick displayed next to it This implies that the TrigNet is a required TrigNet station and which would be added to the current Co ordinate file when the Store and Exit Button is
97. files recently this programme was generating an Error 9 Subscript out of range error for areas in the Western Cape This problem has now been fixed up Using the new electronic Help pages system Windows Vista prevents the use of the type of electronic Help pages that were previously included with SURPAC Software via the F1 special function key Therefore the Help file has now been changed into to a new Vista compatible format The information can still be accessed via the F1 file as before If after pressing the F1 key the Help information is placed behind the SURPAC forms i e is not visible just click the appropriate icon in the Windows Task Bar normally at the bottom of the screen Page 152 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 32 Release 01 Co ordinate File Addition of Point Text Label Fields This is the first time since the introduction of SURPAC for Windows in 1998 that the Co ordinate file structure has been modified With the new format it is now possible to allocate One or two Text Label Fields to each of the Points displayed in a Co ordinate file Using the Set Co ordinate File Elements function it is now possible to define one or two new columns elements for a Co ordinate file and to also define the headings for these columns To define these columns either Click the SURPAC main menu heading File and then select the menu item Set the Co ordinate Fil
98. form can be displayed by selecting this menu item from the Topo Symbols menu heading Least Squares Planimetric Network Adjustment programme The calculation of provisional co ordinates within the programme has been extended so as to include provisional Point calculation by means of a resection if applicable There was a bug in the routine for calculating provisional co ordinates that limited the process to a single iteration instead of a multi iteration one This could have resulted in the programme reporting that Provisional Co ordinates for Point XXX could not be calculated Page 111 of 312 forcing the User to generate provisional values from some other routine This has now been fixed Level Observation File Edit Load and Spirit Level Network Adjustment programmes Both of these programmes have been modified to allow the level readings and height differences to be displayed to up to 5 decimal places Users can now select an accuracy of 2 3 4 or 5 decimal places with the default being 4 decimal places The required accuracy setting options can be found near the bottom of the Level Observation File Load Edit programme form This setting should be made before downloading from an instrument or importing from an ASCII file When running a Spirit Level Network Adjustment the programme will detect the accuracy setting in the associated Level Observation file and use this same accuracy for the calculation and display of the
99. have and who responded positively To the very few who did not bother to respond a big SIS enjoy the efforts and contributions of others To protect the data supplied by contributing Users these files use a random binary structure and their data are stored in a double precision Lat Long format These data also have variable false origin shifts applied to them making them unusable except for the purposes of this programme To carry out a transformation it is only necessary to have co ordinate or Geographical Lat Long data related to one of the two Ellipsoids and lying within the geographical boundaries of South Africa These data may be contained in a SURPAC Co ordinate file an ASCII Co ordinate file an ASCII Lat Long file or be written data that are to be entered manually The transformation carried out is by using either a Weighted Helmert transformation or a Standard non weighted Helmert transformation with a User determined number of common control Points Due to the number of common control Points 38 000 the transformations are extremely localized and provide the highest accuracy of transformation possible between the two Ellipsoids Tests have shown Page 42 of 312 that typical Standard Deviations resulting from transformations vary between 0 01m and 0 07m Accuracies in high density urban areas tend to be higher due to the larger number of common Points in these areas This programme is designed to satisfy th
100. idea Modified All SURPAC CAD Programmes A global Text Deletion function has now been included This function allows Users to identify the Text items required for deletion by selecting from a number of listed criteria These criteria include A text String A text Direction A text Size A text WTH Ratio A text Style and A text Pen Number Users may select any or all of the above criteria when defining a global Text Deletion To use this function select the Reset Text Attributes item from the Text menu When the form is displayed select the Action option DELETE All Text items satisfying the selected Criteria Once you have entered the required criteria Click the OK button and the Text items fitting your selection will be deleted If you make the incorrect selection remember the UnDo Ctrl Z button which will restore the Text items that were deleted in the above action Thanks to Andr van der Walt of Pretoria for the original idea Modified The General Observation Programme For Users of the Psion Workabout or Psion Organiser with Handi Data s Booker software the General Observation programme will now display the Date and Time for each Set Up This information will also be displayed for Raw Data and Field Book printouts of an Observation file Observation files that were downloaded before this current version of SURPAC will also display the Set Up Date and Time as long as they were o
101. in the Landscape orientation If neither of these two criteria is met SURPAC will report an appropriate error and you will then need to re define the Default Printer via the Window s Control Panel e f you want to change the Printer for the Calculation Pages at any time whilst SURPAC is running then do this by changing the Default Printer through the Window s Control Panel e When you want to send a CAD plot from any of the SURPAC CAD programmes to a Plotter AQ A4 use the normal SURPAC routine of selecting and setting the required Plotter After completion of the output of the plotting information to the designated Plotter SURPAC will resume the sending of any further Calculation Page printing to the Default Printer This at least is an improvement on the previous method where the Printer for the Calculation Pages had to be re defined after a Plotter output Modified Grid Mesh for General CAD and Contour CAD The construction of a Grid Mesh when using either the General CAD or Contour CAD programmes has been modified When requesting a Grid Mesh display the programmes now include a new prompt which allows you to either e Cover the entire CAD Sheet with the Grid Mesh or e Restrict the Grid Mesh to a User defined rectangular area If the second option is chosen move the Cursor to the Top Left position of the rectangle required to be covered by the Grid Mesh coverage and then Click the Mouse LHB Then move the Cu
102. in the background or minimize it whilst you generate the next view If you have multiple views displayed any of these may be temporarily removed by un checking their display names in the Temporary Places section When you do close Google Earth you will be queried as to whether you want to save the temporary view in the My Places section If you want the views to be permanent then reply Yes other wise they will be deleted Finally my thanks to Land Surveyor Henlu du Preez of Lichtenberg for first suggesting the SURPAC interface with Google Earth Page 175 of 312 General SURPAC Modifications SURPAC General CAD Programme A new option has been added to the Topo Symbols menu This is the menu item called Place Symbols at All Points This option allows you to select both a Point Description and Topo Symbol The programme will then place the selected Topo Symbol at every Point having the selected Point Description The form also allows for selection of the Topo Symbol attributes such as size orientation colour etc Displaying the Meridian Convergence for any Point in the current Co ordinate file When in the Co ordinate File Editing programme right click on any Point in the list of displayed Points This will display a pop up menu containing various routines and functions applicable to the Co ordinate file The fist item displayed on the menu will be the Point s Meridian Convergence Page 176 of 312
103. means that when this Deletion Command is given only the Contour Label Text Items will be Deleted and not any other Text Items such as Headings or Grid Labels Creating Tacheometric ASCII Files This new function can be found under the Option Button of the Tacheometric File Editing Programme Various ASCII format files may be created depending on the User requirement First select the required file Name and Extension from the displayed File Open dialogue box Next from the displayed screen options selected the required Number of Decimal Places the ASCII File Type and if required either the Geodimeter 610 Format option or the Leica GSI 8 bit format The Fixed Column option creates ASCII files in which all data are listed in set column positions i e the decimal point or comma will always be vertically aligned for all items of the same type The Comma Separated option creates data lines in which data items are separated by commas and no attempt at vertical alignment is made All decimal markers are forced to decimal points regardless of what the setting is in SURPAC for general data display and printing The TAB Separated option creates data lines in which data items are separated by a TAB ASCII Character 9 Although no attempt at vertical alignment is made files containing narrow data items can be confused with Fixed Column files End users should therefore check for the existence of TAB characters before using these file for
104. new Diagram may be created These are Create Diagram Information using Co ordinate File Points Create Diagram Information using current CAD Plot Sheet Create Diagram Information using the current Working Plan Generate Diagram from a SURPAC type DXF File Generate Diagram from an AllyCAD type DXF File Apart from selecting the Diagram Creation or Generation option you also need to set various other available options These are e Set the Diagram sheet Orientation only available for A2 A1 and AO sheet sizes e Set the required Diagram Font to be used Recommended fonts are either Arial variable width font or Monospac821 BT fixed width font Select the required Text Styling Regular Italic Bold or Bold Italic Set the Diagram sheet Margins only available for A2 A1 and AO sheet sizes Set the Standard Text Size Set the Standard Point Circle Size and finally When using the Diagram creation from a CAD Plot Sheet or a Working Plan select or deselect the options for importing surrounding Lines and surrounding Text Items around the identified figure Whether the Diagram Points are identified from a Plan or from a List this programme will use the Beacon values currently stored on the defined Co ordinate file to compute the Diagram data When generating a Diagram from a DXF file all data and Co ordinates are read from the DXF file and are not related to values stored in the defined Co ordinate file A Dia
105. now has the two Undo functions included in the Edit menu refer to Page 2 Modification General CAD Programme The following modifications have been made to the General CAD programme 1 A Point Layering System has been added This Layering System is based on the Beacon Descriptions used for the current Co ordinate File For Cadastral Mode Co ordinate Files there are up to 55 Point Layers and for Engineering Mode Co ordinate Files there are up to 300 Point Layers Refer also to Page 10 When you start a new General CAD drawing sheet the programme will search through the list of existing Points in the Co ordinate File and determine which of the Beacon Page 79 of 312 Descriptions for that file have actually been used The Point Layers corresponding to these used Descriptions will be Activated and set as being Visible As you add and modify or delete Points from the Co ordinate File the list of Active and non Active Point Layers will be modified accordingly To change the Visibility of the Active Layers click the programme s Point menu heading and then select the Set the Visible Point Layers item The displayed form will show all the available Layers for the Co ordinate File All the non Active Layers Beacon Descriptions not used will be shown in grey italic text The Active Layers will be in black standard text with either a green tick Layer is Visible or a red cross Layer is not Visible displayed on the r
106. of a control Station from a given Beacon as its weight is carried out then the 4 pairs of transformed co ordinates would no longer depict an exact rectangle A comparison of the theoretical and measured distances between the corner Beacon and the close Trig Beacon would however show a difference of only about 0 01m 0 03m depending on the proximity of the other common control Stations The decision as to what type of transformation to adopt in this and other similar cases needs to be that of the Surveyor For precision Engineering surveys for example the inter relationship between the survey Beacons could be of more importance than the relationship between any one Beacon and a nearby Trig Beacon For Cadastral Surveys however the relationship between the boundary Beacons and nearby Trig Beacons could be more important than retaining the figural accuracy as determined from the co ordinates of a previous Survey Add to this the further transformation decisions of how many common control Stations are to be used and it becomes obvious that a programme is required that is both flexible enough to offer the User a comprehensive set of options and at the same time remains straight forward to use Over and above the transformation of co ordinate files there are also the requirements of transforming existing associated CAD files such as General Plans Working Plans Sectional Title sheets etc as well as related Tacheometric files DTM file
107. of all the Delete or Rub options available for the programme The General CAD programme File sharing over a LAN Previously this programme allowed for the CAD Sheet to be stored in a different Path Folder than its associated Co ordinate File This however caused problems in a LAN when two or more work stations accessed the same CAD Sheet To overcome this problem a CAD Sheet is now automatically stored in the same Path Folder as its associated Co ordinate file Note that due to the temporary CAD Sheet file storage required for the SURPAC UnDo functions a CAD Sheet from any of SURPAC s CAD programmes may not be used on more than one work station at a time A Permission Denied error is displayed if this attempted The General CAD programme Setting Mark Points Previously in order to set a Mark Point at a position on the CAD Sheet the User would need to first Click the required Mark point icon on the upper menu toolbar then click the Set current Mark Point at Cursor icon on the lower menu toolbar move the cursor close to the required Point and then Click the mouse MB or press the keyboard key This routine has been simplified and now Users just need to first Click the required Mark point icon on the upper menu toolbar then move the cursor close to the required Point and Click the mouse MB After doing the above to set the same Mark Point at further Points simply move the cursor close to a required Point and
108. ordinate File Editing programme The Observation File Loading Editing programme The Level Observation File Loading Editing programme All the Geographical from to Y X or E N Transformation programmes The Standard Helmert and Polynomial Transformation programmes All the Goldfield from to Lo System Transformation programmes The Least Squares Planimetric Adjustment programme The Least Squares Trig Levelling Adjustment programme The Least Squares Spirit Levelling Adjustment programme The purpose of a Navigation Bar is to allow for a more rapid and flexible movement through a list of data and is especially useful for large File Listings The normal file listing Scroll Bars are still used to allow scrolling through the lists as before Features of a Navigation Bar are As you select a Point or Line in a File Listing the Navigation Bar will display a highlight Bar normally dark blue which indicates how far that Point or Line is from the head of the File Listing By clicking the arrow at the Top of the Navigation bar the File Listing will be set to display the First Point Line of the Listing By clicking the arrow at the Bottom of the Navigation bar the File Listing will be set to display the Last Point Line of the Listing If the mouse cursor is placed anywhere in the Navigation Bar a pop up text display will show the Name of the Point that would be shown and highlighted in the File Listing if the mouse button were to
109. ordinate File Selection form The form used by SURPAC to allow the selection of a Co ordinate file has been improved The listing of the files in a selected folder has been extended to allow easier viewing General CAD programme This programmes was causing the sheet information to appear smeared on the screen when the bottom left portion of an AO sheet was being displayed at a large scale This problem has now been rectified Longitudinal Sectioning programme When reading centre line points from a Tacheometric file the programme was causing a duplication of some points when the defined Bend Points produced a series of near parallel lines This has now been fixed Locate and Mean Point Groups in a File This programme was not Saving a Group Mean Point if the Point s Name was manually entered This has now been rectified Page 192 of 312 SURPAC Training Facility This is a reminder that detailed training courses are now available for all SURPAC Software Modules The separate training courses cover the following topics General Surveying Topographical Surveying Engineering Surveying Surface and Underground Mine Surveying Cadastral Surveying for South Africa Namibia Swaziland Lesotho Botswana Zimbabwe Zambia and Malawi These courses are given by Kingray Gowera Spatial iQ z fo Tel 27112588746 Mobile 27768656038 Skype ID kgowera spati S Spatial IQ is situated at Sandton G
110. programme Both programmes are found under the SURPAC General main menu heading Image Placemarks can be useful for e Defining the Point s position on the earth s surface e Using an image or a sketch plan to clearly show the physical location of a Beacon Reference Mark Trig Beacon or Town Survey Mark e Using an image to display a surveyed point of interest such as a monument grave stone sewer or geographical feature e Using a Link file to describe an important surveyed feature or point of interest Image Polygons can be useful for Defining the position shape and size of the Polygon on the earth s surface Showing images of site itself from various viewing positions Showing images of important geographical features on the site Showing images of existing infrastructure or development on the site Using Link files defining the Polygon site dimensions and legal documents pertaining to the site such as a Diagram or Deed of Transfer etc Although the KML files for both Image Placemarks and Image Polygons are created individually all such files in a folder can be combined into a single KML file Sending the information to a third party then requires just sending the sub folder see below created by SURPAC as this sub folder will contain all the necessary KML files including the combined KML file as well as the image and link files used in each of the KML files Page 238 of 312 Creating KML Image Placemarks in SURP
111. programme is relatively simple It is based on the determination of Directions or Bearings plus a base distance comparison using the two sides and the included angle technique for any three Pegs representing the apices of a triangle The programme is also able to handle the situation where the three Pegs are in a straight line The Height Z of the calculated Set Up Peg is determined by Trigonometrical Heighting using observations taken to buttons or bobs suspended from the two sighted Pegs For the best results the double buttons should be observed at each sighted Peg NB It should be pointed out that any Peg determination whether using this method or the Double Button method suffers from an inherent weakness in that the calculated Peg Height is totally dependent on a correct Height of Instrument measurement Pegs whose heights are fixed using any Double Button method alone should always be verified before their heights can be considered as correct The required method of Survey is a Set up at the Peg to be fixed or checked At this Set Up Peg the following quantities should be measured and or observed Face Left and Face Right Vertical Angles to the Top and Bottom Buttons at both Back Pegs Up to two full Arcs Face Left and Face Right Horizontal Angles to both Back Pegs The Slope Distances to both Back Pegs measured from the Height of Collimation of the Instrument to the Top and Bottom Buttons at each Back Peg
112. related to the Co ordinate File that is to be deleted including Description Files General Plans Working Plans Print files etc Page 113 of 312 When you invoke this programme the default Co ordinate File highlighted and displayed is the current Co ordinate File To locate a Co ordinate File in the Listing you can either use the scroll bar on the right of the listing or start typing in the required file Name As you type you will see the highlighted file in the listing being changed correspondingly If you would prefer to retain and use the previous method for Opening Creating a Co ordinate File then do the following Whilst running the Co ordinate File Editing programme Click on the File Options button in the Actions Menu Bar In the bottom right panel of the displayed File Options form de select the option Open Co ordinate Files using SURPAC format and then Click the OK button General Programme Additions and Modifications New Observation File Option to apply an Orientation Swing to a Defined Set Up This option allows for a swing to be applied to all observations made from a User defined Set Up in an Observation file A single Set Up or multiple Set Ups may be selected This function is useful for applying a gross orientation correction to a Set Up or a series of Set Ups To use this option run the Observation File Editing programme and load the required Observation file then Click the File Options button in the
113. result in the corrections not being applied at all When you create a new non Local System Co ordinate File the option is automatically turned ON Toggling the option ON or OFF is done by either Clicking the System Set button in the Actions menu bar when the Co ordinate File Editing programme is running or Clicking the File main menu heading and then selecting the Reset Co ordinate File System menu item The option is located at the bottom of the bottom of the upper panel of the form that will then be displayed Page 115 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 23 Release 05 Importing and Exporting of AutoCAD DWG Drawing Files A new option has been added to the various SURPAC CAD programmes that allows for the Importing and Exporting of AutoCAD DWG Drawing files This option is over and above the existing option of importing AutoCAD DXF Data Interchange Files Although the Import option has been satisfactorily tested using DWG files derived from various sources the intention is to maintain compatibility with true AutoCAD formats Importing and exporting of AutoCAD DWG files uses similar routines as those used for DXF files For importing Click the Import main menu heading and then select the item Import from an AutoCAD DWG File Follow the on screen prompts to select the required DWG file and its required Layers For creating and exporting to an AutoCAD DWG file Click the File main menu heading and then select the
114. s Desktop Color quality option must be set to Medium 16 bit and not the High 24 bit or 32 bit options SURPAC will only create files in the Bitmap format This format produces high quality graphic images but also requires relatively large storage space as it is not a compressed format Before sending an image by e mail for example Users are advised to use a graphics application to convert the created Bitmap image bmp into a compressed JPEG jpg or GIF gif format There are numerous applications that are able to do this including the Paint application which is included on your PC as a part of the Windows installation The above creation of the large up to twice AO in width and height Bitmap images when running Windows XP were be carried out on a PC having 256Mb on board RAM plus a graphic card with 64Mb RAM A PC with less available mother board and or graphic card memory might not be able to generate double AO graphic images Apart from the above described modifications various other changes have been made to the software These mainly consist of fix ups for small problems and bugs that have been reported during the past 3 4 months Page 69 of 312 Page 70 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 10 Release 03 New SURPAC Modular Structure SURPAC has now been sub divided into further Modules in order to make the software more flexible Existing Users will notice the following Modul
115. servitudes were being truncated to display only the first two lines 1 2 Previously Text items on A3 diagrams in particular were difficult to move once the Figure had been swung The programme has been modified so that any Text items written at 270 or 0 remain unchanged when swinging the Figure This can sometimes result in a Text item being positioned in what has now become an incorrect position e g a Name of a contiguous Stand but this can easily be rectified by using the WM Write Move command Overall the new method of leaving 270 and 0 oriented Text items unchanged regardless of Figure swing appears to provide for easier editing than did the previous method 1 3 When re loading Diagrams that were generated prior to SURPAC Version 5 06 the Text Items including the Data block etc can appear to be printed using some non standard font If this happens do the following gt Exit from SURPAC then Delete the file called ita from the data folder where is the diagram Name gt Run SURPAC return to the Diagram Editing programme and re load the required Diagram gt From the programme s Text menu select the Reset Attributes function Do not change any of the default settings except for clicking the do you want a new font checkbox and selecting the required font The Diagram should now be re displayed using the chosen Font 2 Downloading and Uploading Leica 16 Bit data files SURPAC wil
116. several requests from Users it was decided to change the maximum length of Text Items in the CAD Programmes from 80 characters to 160 characters Any Text Item written or edited may now consist of up to 160 characters In order to do this and to ensure that all existing Text data are retained SURPAC will automatically convert an existing CAD Text files from the old 80 character format to the new 160 character format whenever a CAD Sheet is opened This is a fast and seamless operation and will happen without any delay or prompts The main reason for changing the Version of SURPAC from 5 32 to 5 33 is due to this change in the Text file structure Any version prior to 5 33 will use the 80 character length Text file format whilst versions 5 33 onwards will use the 160 character length Text file All SURPAC CAD Programmes now include a function for the conversion of the 160 character Text file format back to the 80 character Text file format This is to allow for the possibility that data files might have to be sent to a User who still runs a pre 5 33 version of SURPAC This function can be found under the File menu heading on all CAD Programmes When converting a 160 character Text file back to the 80 character Text format al Text Items will be truncated to the left hand 80 characters If you have multiple copies of SURPAC running in your office make sure that when upgrading all installations are upgraded to Version 5 33 Once convert
117. show the latest calculated and stored values of a Peg Furthermore the Printing a Co ordinate File programme is unable to display many of the display items shown by the new Peg Index programme since these items are not a part of a standard Co ordinate File The programme allows for either the display of all Peg ASCII File information or the display can be limited to those Pegs that are common to the current Co ordinate File The displayed data may be copied to the Windows Clipboard from which it may be imported Pasted into most other applications such as Microsoft Excel etc Once the Peg Index is displayed the full Peg ASCII File information for any Peg Fix may be displayed by double clicking on the line containing the Peg Fix required Page 78 of 312 Programme Operation From the SURPAC Mining main Menu heading select the Peg Index Using the Peg ASCII Files Menu Item The programme will search the current Data folder for the existence of all Peg ASCII Files files with the extension pg1 pg2 or pg3 If such files are found the Peg Index information required for each Peg will be extracted All data will then be displayed in the Peg Index which will be listed in alphanumeric order of the Points Fixed You may now Select whether you want to view the Peg Index for all existing Peg ASCII Files or just those for which the Peg fixed is common to the current Co ordinate File Finally if you want to view t
118. sure that the menu item Dynamic Lat Long display under the General menu heading has been selected i e its icon is highlighted 2 Select the required Text Colour for the co ordinate printing The Text Size used will be the currently set Default Data Text Size which can be modified through the CAD Sheet Setup Information menu option 3 Move the cursor close to within the current Snap Radius range the required Point 4 Either select the Print Plot Co ordinates menu item from the Point menu heading or just enter the keyboard short cut Command PC Page 151 of 312 General Modifications made to SURPAC Software Section title CAD Programme Participation Quota Extension The Participation Quota function can now create separate A3 and or A4 Sheets to accommodate up to 340 areas Contour CAD Programme Sending Point Nodes to a DXF or DWG File When sending the Sheet output to a DXF or DWG file the Point Node information if used will now be placed on a different Layer from the Spot Height data Diagram CAD Programme Removal of the Heading Text misplacement problem The random repositioning of some Header Text items that sometimes occurred when creating a Diagram or on moving or copying a block of Text has now been removed Locate and Store the Nearest Trig Beacons Removal of Error 9 problem Due to the large increase in the number of Trig Beacons and TSMs in the SURPAC transformation
119. the Google Earth DTM You can define the entire file or mark selected points in the file This function is useful when needing to evaluate the accuracy of imported Google Earth Heights against surveyed values Using this Option If you want to restrict the comparison of Google Earth heights to selected Points then first highlight these Points in the Co ordinate file listing as explained above Then in the Actions Menu click on the File Options menu item to display the File Options form Click on Compare File and Google Earth Heights and then click on the OK button If you have highlighted a set of Points you will be prompted if you want to restrict the height importation to these Points Reply as appropriate amp Comparison of Co ordinate File Heights against Google Earth Values Y X Desc File Height GE Height Diff 75982 46 3085968 47 55 1214 88 1218 22 75980 49 3085987 46 55 1214 63 1217 76 75978 44 3086008 31 55 1214 38 1217 29 75977 73 3086028 67 55 1213 68 1216 84 75977 05 3086048 56 55 1213 28 1216 40 75976 28 3086067 50 55 1212 80 1216 12 75975 66 3086078 48 55 1212 64 1215 98 75975 10 3086092 50 55 1212 26 1215 80 75990 66 3086082 66 55 1212 33 1215 70 75992 87 3086064 00 55 1212 63 1215 92 75995 13 308604492 55 _ 1213 09 1216 24 75997 15 3086025 79 55 1213 36 1216 72 76045 88 3085969 01 55 121353 1218 14 76064 84 3085977 13 55 1213 26 1218 0
120. the Point Cloud file has a Vertical Exaggeration lt gt 1 then the Contours generated will not be true ground values but rather values that fit to the model selected If you intend to use the generated Contours for export to SURPAC or to any other application set the Vertical Exaggertion to 1 00000 before importing the surface Point Cloud into CloudCompare Page 271 of 312 CloudCompare v2 6 1 32 bits BD View 1 I I E Cc 7B lt De Tree 7 14 ak 4 Current Display 30 View 1 M Global shift 0 00 0 00 0 00 ECloudCompare k D6 Tree 7 Polifin Surface PC Cloud Oe fe J it k Es ot eG 4 tog Tep BH GQ removefiter Bur chade E A E SS s Kc SOR MLS Polifin Surface PC asc C Sur Contour plot Polifin Surface P State Value Polifin_ Surface P 7 RGB a Object ID 4 Chi 476 668 ale 1 000000 Contours created in CloudCompare from a SURPAC Surface DTM model These CloudCompare Contours can be exported as either a DXF file or as a Shapefile Either of these file types can be rimported into the SURPAC General CAD programme To export a CloudCompare Contour file follow the menu path File Save In the displayed Save file form you can change the Path and Name of the file to be exported as well as its type normally DXF or Shapefile Summary In the preceeding pages have only touched on the CloudCompare functions that relate to topographical and mining surve
121. the file was in the Cadastral Mode This has now been fixed up Page 133 of 312 Page 134 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 24 Release 03 General Modifications to SURPAC Software There are no major changes in this upgrade just some minor modifications and corrections for a few bugs found floating around after the last upgrade which are SURPAC Problem when using both local drives C and D SURPAC was displaying a message stating that There are too many SURPAC Installations on this Network when Windows was installed on Drive D and SURPAC was installed on Drive C or vice versa This has now been rectified SURPAC Problem when closing down When SURPAC was closed down by means of clicking the red X button at the top right of the form instead of using the normal Exit SURPAC Software menu item the application was not closing down correctly if the Current File Printer Pages form was displayed This has now been corrected The General Plan CAD programme The F11 function Auto Write Stand Data amp Area was not closing the defined Erf Stand correctly Also the Ctrl A function Calculate the Area from a Stand Erf defined by Point identification was not working correctly These have now been rectified The General CAD and General Plan CAD programmes For both of these programmes an extra menu heading has been added entitled Delete Rub These menus consist
122. the first or the second located Point in a Point Group and then save this Point s values in the Co ordinate File using a default Name or a User entered Name It can be used to Delete all Points in a Point Group other than the Point selected as the required Point representing the Point Group Programme Operation From the Conversion Main Menu heading select the Locate and Mean Point Groups in a File menu item The programme Form will then be displayed The Form consists of Input Boxes forming an Edit Window at the top of the Form used for Displaying and or Editing the Co ordinate values of the Selected Point The Selected Point is the Point that will be Saved in the Co ordinate File unless the Save request is turned off as representing the Point Group These values may be User modified A File Display Window that will display the Point Names Co ordinates Heights Directions and Distances of all Points located as a Point Group The Directions and Distances displayed for each Point are values calculated from the current co ordinates displayed for the Selected Point As the Selected Point co ordinates change either by direct User Editing or by changing the Group Point information so the Directions and Distances in the display will change At the right hand side of the File display Window is a graphic a Tick or a Cross showing which of the Point Group Points have been used in determining the initial default values
123. the keyboard Ctrl and A keys The usual form requesting User response related to the Stand Erf number the area storage etc is then displayed Make the required selections and ensure that the appropriate co ordinate distance accuracy is set near the bottom of the form Regardless of selection the minimum accuracy used is 2 decimal places and the maximum is 4 On this same form you can select or de select the display of the Point Definition Information Form It is useful to have this form displayed as it shows not only the selected Points but also the Stand Erf line data Click the OK Button on the form and the cursor will now change to the blue Point Digitise cursor Move the cursor close to the first required Point or Line terminal for the Stand Erf and click the Mouse LHB If selected the Point Definition Information form will be displayed at the bottom left corner of the screen showing the first Point s Name and co ordinates Move the cursor close to the next required Point and again click the Mouse LHB The Point Definition Information form will display this Point s information plus the polar data derived from the co ordinates from the previous Point to the current Point Continue in this fashion selecting all required Points and finally closing the Stand Erf by re selecting the original starting Point The Stand Erf Area will be shown on the Point Definition Information form By
124. then simply select the printer called deskPDF out of the list of available printers You need to set the required size for the document A4 A0 the required sheet orientation Portrait or Landscape and deskPDF will then create and save the PDF file The PDF file can then be viewed via Adobe Reader or any other PDF reader and also e mailed as an attachment to a client or any other interested person deskPDF is Page 160 of 312 also able to carry out conversations of Microsoft Word Excel Access files etc into PDF format files Although the DXF format will always have its own unique place in the transference of information PDF files created via deskPDF do have certain advantages over DXF files First the PDF documents provide a truer reproduction of their original SURPAC CAD Sheets Secondly anyone receiving a PDF file does not need to have any expensive software such as AutoCAD in order to view the document Thirdly PDF files avoid the quagmire of different DXF versions that abound and which can cause annoying and time wasting compatibility problems If you are interested in purchasing the deskPDF software please visit http www docudesk com desk_pdf_standard shtml and follow the screen instructions You will need a credit card to make the required payment General Modifications Option to automatically Maximise the Windows display for CAD Programmes Personally when using high resolution monitors e g 1680 x 1050 p
125. these two CAD programmes has been added to SURPAC Data to be imported must be of the structure Erf Stand Name Number TAB Area in m Note the items must be TAB separated When Copying data from another SURPAC Area file the format generated is automatically that shown above This option is particularly useful when Area data need to be transferred from one file e g Phase 1 of a Sectional Title development to a new file without having to re calculate the Areas Page 161 of 312 SURPAC Version 5 33 Release 02 Programme Modifications SURPAC General CAD Programme Importing ESRI Shapefiles shp into SURPAC via DXF Although Shapefiles shp cannot be imported directly into SURPAC there are various applications available that will convert Shapefiles into the DXF format Some users have in the past asked for the ability to import Shapefiles into SURPAC so here is a convenient solution Download and install the application called DXF Author This application was written by ESRI in Massachusetts USA and can be downloaded free of charge Although normally dislike recommending free application downloads this one seems to work well is simple to use and produces the desired results Enter the URL http www mass qgov mais dxf htm Complete the 3 information boxes and then click on the Download DXF Author button After downloading follow the installation instructions provided Using this application a Shapef
126. to SURPAC When using a Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Series Total Station the Comms Settings should be as follows BAUD 9600 BPS May be any value 19200 to 4800 PARITY NONE DATA BITS 8 STOP BITS si Make sure that the Total Station has the same transfer parameters as set in SURPAC On the displayed SURPAC form select the required Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Series from the available list of Loggers Total Stations and then click the Load Data Button SURPAC will now be ready to receive the co ordinate data to be downloaded SURPAC will wait in this mode until the data downloading starts or until the routine is aborted In SURPAC select the Set Parameters Button and set or check the following options Connection Port COM2 or the appropriate Port number Baud Rate BPS 9600 BPS May be any value 19200 to 4800 Data Parity None Data Bits 8 Bits Stop Bits 1 Bit Flow Control Hardwire On the Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 set the Data Transfer method to NIKON and RAW and the select the Comm command to start the downloading process Once data transmission begins the programme will display the number of bytes that have been received from the Total Station Once the complete file has been transmitted the programme will commence to translate the byte information into co ordinate data that are then stored in the currently defined Co ordinate File e The maximum number of lines that may be transferred at one time
127. to discussion below 2 When importing Google Earth or 1 50000 map sheet whose orientation needed to be corrected for Meridian Convergence the programme was applying the incorrect Convergence for the UTM Zone system This has now been corrected 3 Auto importing of Geo Referenced Images which are referenced by Latitude and Longitude rather than the more usual Y X values has been added Discussion Screen Displayed Line Thicknesses amp Name Sizes All CAD programmes in SURPAC have the option of keeping the screen display of drawn Lines at a standard thin thickness or to vary the line thicknesses as the display is zoomed in or out The General CAD programme and the Contour Generation and Plotting programme both have the facility to either hold the size of Point Names or Spot Height values to a standard 2 5mm size regardless of display scale or to vary the Name or Spot Height size as the display is zoomed in or out Keeping the Name or Spot Height size constant is useful when an area is cluttered with Points and you need to zoom in to an area for more clarity To set these options in the various CAD programmes e General CAD programme Click on the Mark Pnt menu heading then select the Set Mark Point Options menu item amp Mark Point and Point Name Options xs Set Select required Options Point Name Attributes Set the Point Name Character Size mm 2 5 Select the Point Name Character Co
128. used for replying End to certain prompts Y and N are the usual Yes and No prompt replies respectively Convert to Deg Min Sec DMS format Converts the displayed value to the DMS mode Angles or Directions may be added or subtracted in the DMS mode as follows Input a DMS angle using the normal SURPAC DDD MMSS method Then click the DEC and then the DMS buttons this will display the angle using the current SURPAC DMS display settings Then input the DMS angle to be added or subtracted also using the DDD MMSS method and finally click the button Convert to Decimal Degree format Converts the displayed DMS value to the Decimal Degree mode DDD dddddddd Page 41 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 05 Release 06 Downloading and Installing the SURPAC Control Files for South African Users Clarke 1880 Modified Ellipsoid to from WGS 84 Ellipsoid Transformations Users in South Africa need to download the SURPAC Transformation Control files contained in the PKZIP Self extracting file called Surpac Control Files exe in order to be able to carry out Clarke 1880 Modified Ellipsoid to or from WGS 84 Ellipsoid transformations Download these files as follows Click on the appropriate Button displayed near the bottom of the download page and when prompted store the download file into any Folder such as C Surpac Download for example After downloading is complete use Wi
129. values in order to retain the correct scaling Page 216 of 312 Hence the above should now look like 2 2000212 0 0 2 2000212 65083 701875737628 2843626 040160913000 Modify the tfw file as mentioned above before import the image into SURPAC General CAD Page 217 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 8 Version 5 40 Release 01 SURPAC Support for the Windows 8 Operating System SURPAC Version 5 40 has been optimized to run under both the Microsoft Windows 7 and Microsoft Windows 8 operating systems but will also run under Windows Vista and Windows XP Please note that earlier versions of SURPAC will not run under Windows 8 When installing SURPAC or a SURPAC Upgrade under Windows 8 it may be necessary to carry out the installation using the Run as administrator option To do this right click on the installation file s icon then select this option from the pop up menu that will be displayed SURPAC Intermediate Upgrades Intermediate modifications are sometimes made to SURPAC in between the main Upgrades These modifications in general do not warrant a complete Upgrade of the software but in order to keep your SURPAC up to date you should download and install these intermediate modifications The version number would be something like 5 40 0103 indicating that the modified Upgrade file represents modification 03 of the official release called Version 5 40 Release 01 Normally a new User Name and
130. when in the Co ordinate File Editing programme In the Co ordinate File Editing programme click on the File Options menu item found in the Actions bar at the left of the co ordinate display The two new Point Shapefile options are shown at the bottom of the displayed form see Pg 7 Double click on the Import Co ordinates from a Point Shapefile option The programme will prompt for the name of the existing Point Shapefile and when selected will display the following set up form amp Shapefile C Surpac Software Samples L5952 youngsville township p Select Shapefile Point Import Options Shapefile Ellipsoid Clarke 1880 Modified Shapefile System Cape Datum Arc 1950 Shapefile Central Meridian 27 Convert Geogaphical Values to System Co ordinates Change the Sign of the Y X co ordinates pore Attribute for Point Names v ROT shapefile Attribute for Point Descriptions v RON z Shapefile Attribute for Point Calc Pages v UNR Shapefile Attribute for Point F B Pages v Mc Shapefile Attribute for Point Label 1 v TC Shapefile Attribute for Point Label 2 v ECT Shapefile Co ordinate Limits Metres Min Y Value 70335 35 Min X Value 2904963 66 Max Y Value 71599 25 Max X Value 2905591 25 Default Start Name if no Database Point Names exist a1 Set up form for Importing Data from a Point Shapefile In the above example the Shapefile co ord
131. within 5 metres of the computed position the programme will display the value No Point in place of the Point Name and the remaining items will be left blank Continue selecting pairs of Directions and Distances going in a continuous clockwise direction until you close back on the starting Point at which point the Area for the Stand Erf will be calculated using the entered Polar data To Store the Area for the GP Data Sheet click the Store Area Button Once an Area is stored in the associated wga file along with its Stand Erf Number the stored data are used by the Data Sheet programme to automatically construct the Data Sheet Area Lists On completion and Printing if required click the New Area Button to start the Area calculation for the next numbered Stand Erf To select a different Number enter the required Number into the Stand Erf drop down list Data generated by means of Text Item selection cannot be modified on the Area form other than changing a Direction by 180 However by using the Buttons provided a Data line may be Deleted or Inserted To Delete a Line click the required Line to highlight it then click the Delete Data Button To Insert a Line click the Line below the required insertion position then click the Insert Data Button Finally select the required Text Items from the GP Sheet to represent the Direction and Distance for the inserted Line Page 117 of 312 Once an Area has been
132. years However from recent feedback from a number of Users regarding encountered problems it is obvious that a fair number of Users are still unaware of the Undo facilities incorporated in all the SURPAC CAD programmes So here is a reminder Undo Previous Task The first of these two functions allows the User to backtrack or Undo up to 9 Drawing Tasks carried out in the current programme session A Drawing Task is any screen activity that modifies data on the current drawing e g Lines Arcs Circles Text Items Hatching Contours Graphic Items etc Activities such as changing Scale Orientation etc are not considered as drawing tasks as these may be changed at any time by the User To Undo a Drawing Task either 3 From the CAD programme s Edit Menu Heading select the item called Undo Previous Task or Page 150 of 312 4 Use the keyboard Ctrl Z function i e press and hold down the Ctrl key and at the same time press the Z key Once a maximum of 9 Undo operations have been done the Undo Previous Task menu item will be greyed out made non active indicating that no more Undo tasks can be undertaken This menu item will become re activated when you perform further Drawing Tasks Undo All Session Tasks The second of the two Undo functions allows the User to Undo All Drawing Tasks carried out during the current session The drawing will revert to the state it was in when it was lo
133. 0 76060 97 3085995 37 55 1212 96 1217 53 76053 00 3086012 60 55 1212 81 1217 07 76005 93 3086088 19 55 1212 07 1215 54 76020 68 3086076 05 55 1212 12 1215 70 76033 27 3086061 86 55 1212 32 1215 89 76044 73 3086047 41 55 1212 31 1216 16 75544 52 3085906 82 55 1224 06 1223 85 75545 36 _3085900 68 55 1221 16 1223 96 75545 80 3085897 97 55 1221 53 1224 00 247 v alalle ed eed e ea elna eo jP Leelee gt N aD ee N Scanning Google Earth DTM Completed Mean Height Difference 1 70 Largest ve Difference 4 75 Standard Deviation of the Mean 3 08 Largest ve Difference 1 22 cancer Print List Exit A form will be displayed in which the selected Points their co ordinates description surveyed heights and interpolated Google Earth heights will be shown These height comparisons are imported at a rate of approximately 350 500 Point heights per minute depending on your internet connection Statistical data relating to the comparison of heights are shown at the bottom of the form There is also an option whereby you can compare Google Earth heights for a single User selected Point Using this Option In the Co ordinate file display right click on the Point whose height you want to compare On the pop up menu that will now be displayed select the menu item Compare Height with Google Earth A f
134. 0010 5010009 5010037 9700077 9800044 5010014 9700060 5010030 5010036 5010035 5010011 5010001 a System WG27 AED Y 73075 32 70396 10 74059 36 72314 72 69962 48 71852 70 71167 62 72838 68 73893 69 43831 95 70630 93 49216 50 75016 72 73433 05 73816 99 72146 84 75290 79 X 3228782 21 3224791 92 3229717 93 3226784 01 3223423 74 3225382 28 3224262 00 3225931 44 3227354 64 3275957 40 3222926 62 3276221 16 3228585 68 3225889 64 3225708 37 3223492 21 3227425 80 Select Both Trig Beacons and TSMs WGS 1984 Datum Z 1593 80 1675 50 1644 80 1709 80 1564 90 1686 00 1688 50 1692 90 1697 10 2082 10 1592 50 1841 80 1571 90 1679 80 1659 80 1671 00 1691 00 Direction 238 48 13 229 41 32 241 15 42 234 51 53 227 14 13 232 15 37 229 51 59 234 08 45 237 21 30 6 13 43 227 27 31 356 30 33 240 18 23 234 42 28 234 50 17 229 56 30 238 46 53 l Sort Options Distance 30161 15 30313 76 30546 32 30617 87 30901 52 31073 85 31250 05 31539 50 31610 68 31739 88 31766 76 31875 43 31934 60 32047 28 32465 46 32494 92 32758 84 a i i DS iaa aS ias BaS DaS fa iaa aa DaS S DS DS DS Sort the List by Distance Select only Trig Beacons Select only TSMs O Set the Search Y X Centre Position MA Set the Maximum Search Radius Kms 100km v Maximum Number of Beacons to Locate Nearest100 E Display Point Degree Square Information
135. 16 Electricity Other Lines Cables 017 Telephone Lines Overhead 018 Telephone Lines U G Cables 019 Telephone Lines Other Lines Cables 020 Sewage Main Lines 021 Sewage Township Lines 022 Sewage Other Lines 023 Water Main Supply 024 Water Township 025 Water Purified Sewage 026 Water Other Lines A Set this List as the Default STANDARD WED List pa import Description List from another Co ordinate File Delete all the Descriptions from this List Layer Descriptions and Colours may be entered or modified via the Set the Layer Descriptions amp Colours menu item found under the Layers menu heading The keyboard short cut key to this function is F4 the F4 Special Function Key Page 213 of 312 When using a newly created Co ordinate file the default Description Layer List either Cadastral or Engineering will be loaded Using the Engineering format The first time a General CAD Sheet is loaded the programme will check to see if there are any Point Layer ID values in the Co ordinate file that do not match any existing Layer ID for the current Sheet NB When displaying the file Points in the Co ordinate file Editing programme the Point Layer ID is shown under the Description heading In order for all file Points to be displayable their Layer ID must exist in the list of Descriptions for the current CAD Sheet Using the F4 function see above will solve this problem
136. 28 29 03 28 S Max Longitude 27 12 31 62 E Max Latitude 28 29 17 83 S SURPAC CAD Option form for Creating a Shapefile See explanations below The above form shows the available options that may be selected when creating a Shapefile 1 The Shapefile Creation form will automatically display the Ellipsoid Co ordinate system and Central Meridian or Zone set for the current Co ordinate File These values can only be changed by editing the Co ordinate File system via the Co ordinate File Editing programme 2 This option allows you to either create the Shapefile co ordinates in the System of the current Co ordinate File Y X or E N or in Latitude and Longitude Creating the Shapefile using Latitude Longitude values is preferable as this provides more flexibility for the end user when importing the Shapefile Page 229 of 312 3 Shapefile Polygons Only available in the General Plan programme If the General Plan Sheet has an existing Shape Polygon File see Pg 3 then the option to create Polygons in the Shapefile will be active Select this item to create Polygons Normally either Polygons or Lines are created in a Shapefile Creating both will cause a duplication of many of the Sheet Lines 4 Shapefile Lines This option allows you to export all Lines on the current Sheet to the Shapefile When SURPAC exports a Line to the Shapefile it automatically populates the associated dbf file with the above mention
137. 3 DEAR De Aar 30 39 54 7592 23 59 33 4958 28827832 3397718 24 1287 99 ASH701941 B 28 06 09 785364 31 14 DRBA Durban 29 51 04 2494 31 01 24 4079 388947 46 3310421 11 35 19 ASH701941 B 333 05 32 678987 71 15 ELDN East Londen 33 02 17 2824 27 49 43 2502 77410 64 3657282 50 135 10 ASH701941 B 0 15 22 952348 72 16 ELDA East London 33 02 12 9736 27 49 57 5101 77781 72 3657152 68 117 96 TRM59800 00 0 14 02 952217 31 17 ERAS Ellisras 23 41 12 0110 27 41 45 9162 70999 79 2620758 73 851 07 ASH701941 B 172 46 41 84857 78 v Sort Options Search Options Sort the List by Distance Set the Search Y X Centre Position An Points 81667m 2704943m Sort the List by Direction z Set the Maximum Search Radius Kms 200km De Select All Select All Abort Sort the List by Name i Maximum Number of Points to Locate All Points The Locate and Add Nearest TrigNet Stations programme display Page 304 of 312 TrigNet Point Rustenburg RSA WG System Hartebeesthoek94 Datum System WG 27 Y 28315 23 X 2838505 94 Z 1117 58 Lat 25 39 13 5204S Lon 27 16 55 1897E Antenna TRM55971 00 g d i SURPAC Surveying Software SoS guve ARE EINEN PAE mY P Bronkhorst R s TrigNet Stations on Google Earth showing data for a selected Station The full set of Google Earth icons used by SURPAC Software is now 2 Trigono
138. 3D E X 324 383 Box dimensions Y 347 281 zS X 879559 Box center Y 689278 Z Info Object ID 3 Children Curent Display DViewd come 12 56 42 3D View 1 Color ramp shader loaded su 12 56 42 ccGLWindow 3D view initialized 12 56 42 CloudCompare started 12 56 48 VO File C SurpacCloudView Datafiles Polifin_Contour_PC dxf loaded successfully E sccessfully Display of a SURPAC Contour Point Cloud pseudo DXF in CloudCompare When navigating around the display in CloudCompare it is important to note that the Mouse button functions are different from those used in SURPAC and Google Earth The Mouse button functions in CloudCompare are Button 1 Left hand button Used for Rotating the model about the 3 axes Button 2 Middle button The scroll wheel is used to Zoom the model as is used in SURPAC Button 3 right hand button Used to Pan about the model Creating a DTM Point Cloud files for display in CloudCompare Run the SURPAC programme Topographical Digital Terrain Modelling Page 262 of 312 Proceed to generate the Surface and Base if applicable DTMs in the normal manner When selecting the Grid Interval the default value of twice the minimum interval allowable seems to work well when exporting the Point Cloud files to ClooudCompare To create the Point Cloud files click on the Point Cloud button at the bottom left hand site of the DTM display
139. 57 7 STB2 24 21 04 3298 S _30 57 01 6606 E 5026 880 2694189 031 WG 31 501 064 234 26 32 1267 095 8 STC2 24 21 05 3156 S 30 57 02 7095 E 4997 303 2694219 352 WG 31 502 004 236 19 30 1274 212 9 STD 24 21 03 5916 S 30 57 01 6087 E 5023 351 2694166 319 WG 31 501 525 233 34 34 1279 252 10 STC3 24 21 05 9475 S 30 57 03 4306 E 4976 972 2694238 788 WG 31 502 675 237 33 11 1280 649 11 STD3 24 21 05 0089 S _30 57 02 8569 E 4993 151 2694209 913 WG 31 502 140 236 04 37 1282 913 12 STB3 24 21 03 0927 S 30 57 01 6893 E 5026 085 2694150 968 WG 31 501 656 233 05 15 1290 237 13 STA2 24 21 03 6155 S _30 57 02 1924 E 5011 896 2694167 049 WG 31 501 809 234 02 08 1292 101 14 STB 24 21 03 4963 S 30 57 02 3498 E 5007 462 2694163 380 WG 31 501 921 234 01 10 1297 844 15 STA1 24 21 03 0662 S 30 57 02 7153 E 4997 165 2694150 142 WG 31 502 347 233 48 58 1313 963 16 STB1 24 21 02 3201 S 30 57 02 3098 E 5008 603 2694127 191 WG 31 501 895 232 43 03 1318 523 17 STC j 24 21 04 9405S 30 57 04 4272 E 4948 890 2694207 795 WG 31 504 155 237 04 20 1321 022 v gt o Sort Options Search Options z wen 5 Sort the List by Distance Set the Search IY X Centre Position au Points Search Centre 6057 70 2694925 88 Sort the List by Direction Bs gt Sort the List by Name Set the Maximum Search Radius Kms 20km View All N View List on Google Earth De Select All Sort the List by Source File M
140. 6 ceil 0 0 Average neighbors per cell 8 0 8 0 1 892 1 423 Copy to dipboard Num precision 3 100 Coc const The result of the volume calculation will be displayed in the lower left hand box labelled Results Page 309 of 312 For the above example the Cloud Compare Volume estimation is 1 323 806 m8 To determine the net volume between the two surfaces it is necessary to divide the above result by the Vertical Exaggeration which in this case 2 0 This gives a Net Volume 1 323 806 2 661 903 m survey unit for this example is metres Comparing the CloudCompare Volume with the SURPAC Volume The same volume can be calculated in SURPAC albeit following simpler steps In the Digital Terrain Modelling programme click on the Volumes button at the left of the display On the Volume Options form that will be shown select the item Cut and Fill Volumes Between the Figural and Base DTMs and then click the Proceed button k DTM Volume Calculation Options i zm _ pem Volume Options Cut and Fill Volumes Between the Figural and Base DTMs Cut and Fill Volumes from Figural DTM and a given Horizontal Plane Location of a Cut and Fill Balance Plane through the Figural DTM C Display Cut and Fill Volumes between two separate Figural DTMs FIGURE CUT VOLUME 303 Cu m FIGURE FILL VOLUME 662220 Cu m FIGURE NET VOLUME 661917 Cu m Highest Elevation for the Cu
141. 6350 038 127 282 22C mes KS SURPAC Co ordinate Files WCR Listing and File Summary B Miocal disk Co ordinate File Infofmation File Name L595 youngsville township aac File Heading This i an example of a J Surpacgs E Samples Ellipsoid Clary 1880 Modified C keith test Projection RSA Lo System Cape Datum C Psion Test System Loz Hemisphere South Axes Labels Y X Orient 0 South File Format Cadastral File Sort Options FConets 0000 X donst 2 000 000 000 Sort Files by Name Z Const 0 00 Mean Heighj ADL 1 329 000 Sort Fijes by Size O Contents 196 Points Last Modified 06 05 05 Sort Fips by Date Co ordinate File Name Size Bytes Date Lhst Modified a g 15952 Trans 1008 06 05 P4 12 14 23 PM 15952 Trans wa 1120 11 0594 04 25 25 PM 9 15952 wg 27 21616 30 11 04 08 55 43 AM 5952 youngsville township 06 05 05 09 25 16 AM Dims Dec OT CE AC 5952 Youngsville Township WG27 21280 26 04 05 08 52 10 AM Sin Cos Tan MR MC Layout 2689568 06 10 04 01 37 25 PM Leb1 2464 25 02 04 01 25 26 PM Asn Acs atn u u Leoniedeel1 4256 15 11 04 09 40 03 AM ya x y xY lle Level1 560 20 01 03 10 10 36 AM Litabet 896 16 11 04 03 46 53 PM stoke Bota lio er lest LL 3248 30 08 00 01 33 00 PM inst ev ev I Ratel RS LI wg 24864 28 11 03 02 04 14 PM X I LH od 5 z 7 8 9 e y Create a
142. 75 2936 284 68 65 2 zZ 88120 001 687615 2936 278 68 65 2 88120 001 68761 25 2936 28 68 65 2 88120 001 68762 001 2936 272 68 65 2 88120 001 68761 75 2936 276 68 65 2 88120 001 68762 5 2936 27 68 65 2 88120 001 68762 25 2936 27 68 65 2 88120 001 68763 001 2936 266 68 65 2 88120 001 68762 75 2936 268 68 65 2 88120 001 68763 5 2936 262 68 65 2 g Separator ASCII code 32 BIA Skip lines o A extract scalar field names from first line Max number of points per doud 128 00 Million 2 Apply _ Apply all Cancel Page 265 of 312 The Red Green Blue components are those inherited from the SURPAC DTM display They depend on the Colour and Luminance as set in SURPAC Also note that if a Vertical Exaggeration has been applied in SURPAC then the height values shown will be the actual height values multiplied by the Vertical Exaggeration applied To proceed to the file display click the Apply All button CloudCompare will then load and display the DTM s requested which in the example looks like this Cc 1 7 lt 2 3 4 62 A Btiece Ganumntmutes 3 X 8192 D e 4 V amp Polifin Surface PC asc C Surpa 7 Polifin_Surface_PC Cloud 4 amp Polifin Base PC asc C SurpacCl 7 Polifin Base PC Cloud Visible E Show name in30 E Colors Box dimensions 355 Box center Info Object ID 4 Child Current Display 3D View X Cloud Points 476 66
143. 758 and 24759 SURPAC needs to be able to recognize this fact before the General Plan construction begins What needs to be done to correctly define Stand 24759 is to create two theoretical Points namely 24759 4 and 24759 5 NB Before starting this procedure regardless of which method is used the Co ordinate file must be in the Cadastral Mode and its Heading must have its Label Field 1 set to the option Alternate Name Page 283 of 312 There are two methods of generating the necessary theoretical Points are Method 1 e In the Co ordinate File Editing programme click on Add Data button in the Actions bar menu e Inthe Name Input Box enter 24759 4 press Enter e Inthe Y co ordinate or Eastings Input Box enter 24758 2 e SURPAC will then create a Point called 24759 4 and allocate to it the co ordinate of the existing Point 24758 2 Repeat this procedure for all required theoretical points Label Field 1 must be set to Alternate Name Name 91 24754 2 92 24754 3 93 24754 4 94 24755 1 95 24755 1 24755 2 24755 3 24755 4 247554 24756 1 24756 2 24756 3 24756 4 24757 1 24757 2 24757 3 247574 24758 1 24758 2 3 SURPAC Ver 5 63 for Windows XP Vista 7 8 aE ae Y Co ordinate 0 000 34448 411 34490 954 34487 868 34437 319 34437 319 34440 936 34483 522 34465 957 34465 957 34437 319 34465 957 34453 589 34426 081 34392 684 34391 900 34413 975 34418 600
144. 8 Global shift 0 00 0 00 0 00 Global scale 1 000000 Point size Transformation history Matrix Axis Angle Export Angle 0 000000 deg Console Axis 0 000000 0 000000 1 000000 ia Center 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Sear tame wpe i E OHOH erete a x r gt iS gt iie ax 08 52 48 ccGLWindow 3D view initialized 08 52 48 CloudCompare started 08 52 55 1 0 File C SurpacCloudView Datafiles Polifin_Surface PC asc loaded successfully 10 08 52 56 1 0 File C SurpacCloudView Datafiles Polifin_Base_PC asc loaded successfully Initial display of a SURPAC DTM in CloudCompare showing layout descriptions The numbers in red above are described as 1 Menus File open save quit etc Edit edit selected entities and their features colours normals scalar fields etc Tools segmentation registration projection etc Display display related options Plugins loaded plugins 3D Views 3D views management Help about help etc 2 4 Toolbars Main quick access to editing and processing tools open save point picking clone etc Scalar fields quick access to scalar fields related tools Plugins quick access to currently loaded plugins standard and OpenGL shaders 5 View toolbar quick access t
145. 9 92 1014 580 93 1015 504 64 1016 504 67 1017 503 89 1018 518 20 1019 550 00 1020 600 00 1021 600 00 1022 605 15 1023 509 84 1024 500 00 1025 500 00 1026 523 90 1027 694 80 1028 836 00 v Delete Polygon Add or Subtract a constant Value to the Polygon Stand Numbers _ Sample of a GP Sheet Polygon File Editing Lines in a SURPAC created Shapefile Lines may be exported to a Shapefile from either the General CAD programme or the General Plan programme By default Shapefiles do not store Line Attributes and each Line is regarded as a Solid single width colourless item To overcome these attribute limitations the SURPAC programmes attach attributes to each Line by means of the associated dbf file attribute format data base file SURPAC creates the following headings in this file with the appropriate attribute value being added to each heading for each Line LINE STYLE The Style of the Line refer to SURPAC Line Styles LINE_WIDTH The Line Width refer to the SURPAC Line Width settings LINE_LAYER The Layer Number or Pen Number for the Line Text Items in a SURPAC created Shapefile Page 228 of 312 Text Items may be exported to a Shapefile from either the General CAD programme or the General Plan programme By default Shapefiles do not store Text Attributes and each Text item is considered as having uniform size style width to height ratio orientation font and Layer To overcome these attribute limitati
146. 908 90507226 Hed a zt 18X 7055824 90510388 187 3g AL 21A 7048813 90512419 1438 5G gt 2X 7054906 90533455 igs 512 BX 7056155 90533093 iuo 57 amp HA 7054369 90516145 iut 563 BA 7053593 90512388 142 549 r 705234 90512750 143 j BC 7051458 90513285 ni RD 7050 BE 5 SG Results for Block Boundary HX 5g a Results for Block Boundary A11 to A22 sY 58X Point Name Y x 3X 80x 54c 70617 79 905309 43 SX Join Distance 44E 70563 25 905121 17 196 00 Summation of all Stand Distances along the Block Boundary 196 00 Mis closure 0 00 The Number of Distance Text Items found 11 The resultant form above shows the Names and co ordinate values of the two Block boundary join Distance between these two Points the summation of all Stand lock boundary the mis closure between the two Distances and the number of Distance Text items found along the boundary If the mis closure exceeds 0 02m this terminals selected the Distances along the B value will be shown in red 3 Clarke 1880 Modified to from WGS Transformations RSA The common control r TSM points used in the transformation are now listed after the display of transformed points showing both System co ordinate values Points Trig and o 4 DTM Creation terrain surveys 5 Longitudinal Sect Changes have been made to enable the handling of flat DH lt 0 5m ion programme The AutoCAD DWG output option has been added to
147. 920 x 1080 recommended Multiple displays Extend these displays z This is currently your main display Advanced settings Connect to a projector or press the key and tap P N Make text and other items larger or smaller What display settings should I choose OK Cancel Apply Windows Set up for an extended dual display In Windows you need to set up the configuration for an extended display over the two screens Do this with the Laptop lid closed Otherwise it will show that you have 3 screens Follow the path shown in the above image Control Panel gt All Control Panel Items gt Display gt Screen Resolution or simply right Click on the screen and from the pop up menu select Screen Resolution Set the Multiple displays option to Extend these displays The first instance of SURPAC is then run and its display is moved on to Monitor 1 The second instance of SURPAC is run and its display left on Monitor 2 These can be swapped around if required Both instances of SURPAC should be using the same Co ordinate file You can then for example display a CAD programme on one screen and calculations on the other screen You can also run two CAD programmes as shown below Page 243 of 312 Changes made on one instance of SURPAC will be reflected on the other For example if you Add a Point using the General CAD programme on one of the screens that Point will be shown in the co ordinate listing on the other screen Sometime
148. AC When in the Co ordinate File Editing programme right click on the display line for the Point for which an Image Placemark is to be created This will cause the normal pop up menu to be displayed which now includes the new menu item Create a Google Earth Image Placemark amp Create KML Polygon with Images Polygon C Surpac_GE 8140bgpwg84 7188 a NB All Images and Link files for the KML file will be created in the C Surpac_GE 8140bgpwg84 folder When sending a KML Polygon file to a third party all Images and Link files in the KML file plus the KML file itself must be sent Click to change Current Image DSCN1454 JPG v Image 1 Width in Pixels 75 0 150 0 300 450 O 600 0 Current Image Image 1 Image files c OS v Bca C Surpac Software Image 1 Heading C1 2000 Oki a Picture 1 LJ 2010 2 BAILLIE PARK U36 6 Diagram Polygon General Headings Any old Heading Line 1 24 08 09_190826 jpg 2527da Swing PlotBMP 2 jpg 8140bgpwa84 GP2 GPplanBMP 1 j Polygon Link Files c5a5_ Sketsplan01 pdf Broeder 4 bmp Broederbig ConBMP 1 bmp Broederbig ConBMP 2 bmp Broederbig ConBMP 3 bmp C501 Malelane X20 4 DiagBMP 1 jp All Graphic jpg bmp gif Cancel Clear the Current Image Save above data to a kim Info File Load data from another kim Info File Clear All Shown information Create a Combined KML file
149. AC CAD Layers at their default Colour values CAD Items to be Imported Import All Items X Import Lines ArcsiCircles X import images Import Text Items x Import Topo Symbols Import Hatch Items NB To Change a Layer Number Click on the Existing Number and then select a new Number 12mm Round Iron Peg Option form used for Importing Data from one General CAD Sheet to another Page 249 of 312 New Line Commands for the SURPAC General CAD programme The following Line Commands have been added to the General CAD programme LC Line Copy The Cursor must be positioned near the Line to be Copied The programme will then define the located Line by displaying it in purple The Cursor will jump to the closest Line terminal of the defined Line The copy of the original Line may then be e Moved by moving the Cursor or pressing the Keyboard arrow keys e Scaled by using either the or Commands or e Rotated by using the lt or gt Commands Once the required Position Length and Direction for the Line have been reached use the Enter Command to Place the Line Unless the Snap Mode has been disabled the Line terminal at which the Cursor is situated will snap onto the nearest existing defined Snap Item within range of the current Snap Radius The original Line will not be erased or modified LM Line Move The Cursor must be positioned near the Line to be Moved
150. AC data Folder All Image adjustments scaling resizing etc performed in SURPAC will be to the copied Image So if you do make a hash of a Sheet Image you can always Delete it and re import from the original Page 27 of 312 2 6 Extended Mark Point functions New Mark Point styles incorporated are A blank Circle in a solid Square A blank Square in a solid Circle A diagonally half solid Square A chequered Square New Options for Mark Points allow you to change the Size Foreground Colour and Background Colour of existing Mark Points Page 28 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 05 Release 02 1 Modification to the Line Thickness function Some printers were not recognizing the Line Thickness value for Pen 1 SURPAC has now been modified to correct this The problem appeared to be sporadic and depended on the printer or printer driver used SURPAC now uses double prompting every time the printer has to receive a line thickness command in order to make sure that the information gets through correctly Hopefully this problem is now resolved 2 Modifications to the Diagram CAD Programme This Programme has been modified so that the Font Name Size and Style as well as the Point Circle Size may be User selected either before or after a Diagram is constructed When starting a new Diagram a Form will be displayed allowing the above options to be set For an existing Diagram select the menu item Select St
151. AC this feature inadvertently became disabled but it has now been re instated A discussion on Image Importing and Printing SURPAC will import and use images in BMP JPG and TIFF TIF formats However TIFF is not as standard a format as first appears There are different compression techniques that can be applied to a TIFF image and these obviously effect the size of the image produced Although SURPAC is able to import and manipulate images in excess of 65Mb it is only able to output print images up to about 50Mb This limit cannot be modified at present as the computer language used to write the software will not allow for a larger image to be printed For most survey plan printing requirements this 50Mb limit is quite adequate However if a TIFF file has been compressed using some extra compression technique there are about 7 of them then the shown file size is misleading and a TIFF file may actually be up to 4 times larger than its displayed compressed size For example used a 1 50000 Degree Sheet TIFF file which had a nominal size of 15 4Mb On the face of it this is well within the limit of 50Mb and should be OK The file was loaded as a background image for a General CAD sheet and then this sheet was printed to PDF The output of the image was entirely distorted then imported this 1 50000 Degree Sheet TIFF image into a graphics application called IrfanView if you don t already have this usetul little programme you
152. Actions menu bar From the displayed File Options form select the item Add Subtract a Value to from all Directions at a defined Set Up and then Click the OK button On the displayed form enter the Angle to be Applied select tick the Set Ups to which this angular swing is to be applied and then Click the Proceed button The problem in creating an OBA text file from an Observation File has also been corrected Modified Diagram CAD programme The following DXF output problems in the Diagram CAD programme have been fixed up e The Point Circle sizes have been changed to correspond with their screen sizes e The Figural Lines have been trimmed at the Point Circle positions e The Circles inside the Trig Beacon symbols have been corrected The Figure Area A command has been re instated This was previously done away with due to the existence of the Data amp Consistency Ctrl D command but it seems some people prefer to use the A command for Areas The Data amp Consistency Ctrl D display form now includes a comparison between the written Area on the Diagram and the values determined from both Polar and Join methods from the Diagram data listing Modified Standard Helmert Transformation programme The problems associated with entering manual data have been fixed up It is now possible to define a Co ordinate File as input for System 1 and at the same time enter other data manually Modified Write Text WT
153. Change the Pen Thickness Values menu item found under the Edit menu heading Notes on Pen Line Thicknesses The thickness value allocated to any Pen should produce a Line on the Printer Plotter output of the same width or thickness The first time you use any Printer Plotter however you should plot a test sample using all the Pens and then measure the resultant Line Thicknesses to ensure that they are correct If not you may have to set Thicknesses for the Pens that will produce the desired Thicknesses on the Printer Plotter output The Screen Line Thicknesses will emulate the set Pen Thicknesses as closely as is possible bearing in mind that the Screen resolution is much lower than that of a Printer Plotter device The values allocated to the 8 Pens will be stored in a File for future use Changing the Pen Thicknesses in any of the Graphic Programmes will cause the Pen Thicknesses for all Graphic Programmes to be modified Any Lines drawn before any Pen Thickness changes are made will automatically have their Thicknesses changed in accordance to the new settings When the Keep Line Thicknesses Constant Check Box on the form is Checked i e when a cross is displayed the Line Thicknesses will be kept to their designated Thicknesses whenever the current Scale is larger than the designated Plotting Scale for that Sheet For example if Pen 2 is set to a thickness 0 50 mm then as long as the current Scale is equal or larger t
154. Co ordinate File Editing programme do a Right Button Mouse click and then select the Output Y X Z to an ASCII File Menu item from the Pop Up Menu From the displayed option form select the Use the Leica Wild GSI 8 bit Output Format check box and then click the OK button 2 Converting ASCII Observation data stored in the OrganiSUR Format This additional programme allows for the importing and restructuring of an OrganiSUR observation ASCII file File type ODB e Whilst in the Observation File Editing programme select the ASCII Import button then select the OrganiSUR Format option and click the Proceed Button e Select the required ASCII file File type ODB e From the displayed form select the required Option Settings for importing and converting the observation data OrganiSUR Code 3 observations Polars and or Tachy shots often contain only Point descriptions or only Point Names It is important therefore to select the appropriate action to be taken for these observations OrganiSUR Code 2 observations defining Set Up stations do not differentiate between Fixed and Free Stations so you need to select the appropriate action for allocating the required SURPAC Set Up Codes Other options exist which allow for the combination of CL and CR observations Code 4 with Code5 HA and Code 6 with Code 7 VA Code 10 observations Orientation checks can also be combined with C
155. Creating Editing Plotting programme The Write Line Distance command U has been improved When using this command to Write the Distance along a stand boundary the programme will combine the boundary line portions in the event that the boundary is composed of a series of continuous parallel lines When Viewing a Point V command or Modifying a Point M command on a General Plan the display form now include the Name Position and not the Point Height When creating an Inset using the FD Frame Define and FZ Frame Zoom commands the Circle and Name size of any Points included in the Inset will now assume the same Zoom ratio as the text items in the Inset Creating ASCII files from a Co ordinate File When creating an ASCII file of a Co ordinate File you can now specify if you want the Y X Z Constants to be applied to the co ordinates or whether you want them left off Applying Shifts to Co ordinates in a Co ordinate File When using the Apply Shifts to Y X and or Z Co ordinates option it is now possible to define the entire file for applying the defined Shifts or to restrict the Shift application to User selected Points in the file This option is found by Clicking the File Options button when in the Co ordinate File Editing programme Modified Single Point Fix Manual data entry for Forward Intersections This function applies to the Least Squares Adjustment Single Point Fix by Forward Intersection programmes
156. D programmes Mining Peg Fixing Applying Error Limits There was an inconsistency in the error checking routine for this programme as follows Enter the required Error Limits Vertical Angle Error Limit Secs Horizontal Angle Error Limit Secs Distance Zero Error Limit mm Distance Parts Per Million Limit Elevation Zero Error Limit mm Elevation Parts Per Million Limit Compulsory Back Check Calculation Yes No The Horizontal Distance check routine calculates the difference between the two measured distances and then compares this difference against the defined allowable limit see above form ar However the Vertical Distance Height check routine was calculating the mean of the two measured Vertical Heights and then checked to see if either of the measured Heights differs from the mean Height by more than the defined allowable limit Hence the difference between the two measured heights could differ by up to twice the defined limit In order to bring both check methods in line the Vertical Height limit check routine has been changed to use the same procedure as the Horizontal Distance checking as this is the more intuitive solution Page 209 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 Version 5 37 Release 03 There are only a few changes for this Upgrade however they are all are important changes SURPAC Support for AutoCAD Version 2012 DF ad DWG files SURPAC is now a
157. DAT file using this Command the Point Numbers that are generated from the DAT file will not necessarily be the same as those in the SURPAC Tacheometric file Contour Generating and Plotting Programme 1 Importing from a Civil Designer DAT File via the Options Button Using the normal File Selection Window select the DAT File required The programme will automatically create the Tacheometric File information Point Numbers will be started from 0001 for a new file or from the last existing Point Number for an existing File Point Numbers will then be incremented by 1 for each new Point On the completion of the Point creation from the DAT file the programme will prompt Do you want to Generate a Surface Contour Triangulation File from the Imported Data Click the Yes Button if you want a Surface Triangulation file generated The appended Points from the DAT file will now be visible in the Tacheometric File Display Window In order to view the Surface Triangulation run the Tacheometric and Contour Plotting C A D Programme If the triangulation network is not displayed automatically then click the Triangulation Display On Off Button in the Floating Tool Bar If you want to generate Contours from the Surface Triangulation then click the Create Contours Button in the Floating Tool Bar When the prompt Triangles for this File already Exist Do you want to re Create these Triangles appears click th
158. Diagram figure Point or of Aborting the Diagram construction and returning to the Diagram Programme 4 General CAD Programme Programme enhancements 4 1 Using Pen 8 Colour Grey as a BackGround Layer All Data drawn with Pen 8 Colour Grey or that have been imported into Pen 8 may be set as being BackGround Data These data are visible in grey but are not treated as being active They provide a visible background of information that can act as a reference and or comparison to the actual non Grey information being constructed or edited NB Graphic Images may also be scaled and positioned so as to provide a true background of information Scanned Orthophotos are very useful for this purpose When importing data from a DXF file or from another SURPAC Sheet e g General Plan Working Plan etc the options now exist to import these data directly into Pen 8 Grey Setting the BackGround option as ON will then make all these data as being BackGround only Selecting Deselecting the BackGround option is done by either pressing the F11 Key or by clicking the appropriate menu item found under the Programme s General main menu heading When the BackGround option is ON all Lines Arcs Circles and Text Items that are drawn using Pen 8 Grey will remain visible but be non active The only functions or Commands that will remain active for Pen 8 data will be the LD Line Dimension and LIC Line Parallel Chec
159. E command or click the Mouse RHB 4 Repeat the above process to create any further required sets of mid Contour Gaps Note If the Contours have been generated by the Triangulation method then the Triangle data file file type wes containing all the Triangle information is always available and can be used to quickly regenerate the Contours if this becomes necessary If for example you want to remove all the created mid Contour Gaps then select the Create New Contours menu item and then the From Surface Triangulation sub menu item Then when prompted reply No to the prompt to re Create the Triangles Reselect the required Contour Interval and the Contours will be restored Finally remove the display of the Triangulation and apply the Contour Smoothing option if required Page 31 of 312 Label Start End and mid Contours Once the Labelling Options have been set and the mid Contour Gaps created automatic generation of the Contour Labels is activated using this Command Note that Contour Labels will not be duplicated if this Command is repeated Before Labelling commences all existing Labels are automatically Deleted to prevent duplication Delete Existing Contour Labelling Contour Labels are normal Text Items and may be Moved Copied Edited dynamically repositioned oriented and or resized like any other Text item However Contour Labels have a specific tag which identifies them as such for the Programme This
160. Factor to all Distances and or Targ Heights option and click the OK Button e From the displayed form select or enter the required Scale Factor to be applied Page 4 of 312 Finally select the items to be changed Distances Target Instrument Heights or both and finally click the OK Button 4 Image Importing for the CAD Plotting and General Plan Programmes The Adding Importing of Images BMP JPG GIF ICO Standard and Enhanced Metafiles formats has been upgraded for these two programmes When selecting the Add Import a Sheet Image Menu item from the Image Main Menu bar a form will be displayed allowing you to select a required Drive and Folder All existing Images of the above types will be listed for a defined Drive and Folder A single mouse Click on any of the listed Images will display that Image on the right hand side of the form There is also a Check box that allows you to select an Image from the Windows Clipboard rather than from a disk stored file Once the required Image is displayed on the form Click the Select Current Image button at the bottom of the form This will Select the Image for placement on the current Sheet at a User defined Position and Size To place the Image first click the Mouse at the required Top Left position for the Image The Image will be displayed at a default size Then move the Mouse in the Left lt gt Right direction to enlarge or decrease the Image until the de
161. Figure and the required Figure Command is given Figure Co FC Place the Cursor inside the closed Figure that is to be Copied and closest to the Figure bend point onto which the Cursor is to be Snapped Then from the Draw main menu heading select the Figure Commands item and select the Figure Copy Item or give the keyboard FC Command The Programme will then define the located boundaries of the Figure by highlighting them in purple The Cursor will Snap onto the closest Figural bend point to where the Cursor was originally placed The Figure may then be Moved around by moving the Mouse or Keyboard arrow keys Scaled by using either the or the Commands Rotated by using either the lt or the gt Commands When the required Position Size and Orientation for the Figure have been reached use the Enter Command or click the Mouse LHB to Place the copied Figure Note that unless the Snap Mode has been disabled the Figural point at which the Cursor is situated will Snap onto the nearest Snap Item The original Figure will not be erased Figure Delete FD Place the Cursor inside the closed Figure that is to be Deleted and then from the Draw main menu heading select the Figure Commands item and select the Figure Delete Item or give the keyboard FD Command The Programme will then define the located boundaries of the Figure by highlighting them in purple and will then proceed to Del
162. File The CAD Sheet s position size and contained Items will not change If the new Co ordinate File does not overlap the CAD Sheet no Points as defined by Mark Points will be displayed 4 3 New function Line Bisect To create a Line bisector do the following e Move the cursor close to the Line for which a Bisector is to be created e From the Draw main menu heading select the Line Bisect Item or give the keyboard Command LB Page 51 of 312 A Bisector will now be created using the same Pen Colour Line Style and Line Thickness as the parent Line This Bisector is a standard Line Item 4 4 New function Construct a Double Headed Arrow To draw a Double Headed Arrow do the following Select the required Pen Colour and Line Thickness the line Style will default to Solid From the Draw main menu heading select the Draw a Double Arrow Item Move the cursor to the required starting position no snapping will take place and click the Mouse LHB Move to the required end position and click the Mouse RHB 4 5 New function Figural Area Calculation by User Point Selection Areas may be computed automatically using the graphic line location technique by pressing the keyboard A key or by selecting this item from the Draw main menu However sometimes this method cannot be used due to a complexity of Lines or other Sheet information The function described below can be used for any
163. File The Image used should have no or a very small orientation difference to the defined System It is unadvisable to have Images that need to be Swung re oriented as displaying such Images is very slow If the Image has been derived from a scanned source use the scanner software to correctly orient the Image as closely as possible before Importing it into SURPAC If a small orientation difference exists less than 1 degree then this can be eliminated by carrying out localized Shifts by using the Image Shift IS Command before digitizing in an area Select a display Scale such that the entire Image fits into the current Screen Viewing Area Place the Cursor anywhere within the area of the Sheet Image that is to be Transformed and then give the IT Command or select the option from the Image menu The Programme will then display a Transformation Data Form on the Screen which is to be used for displaying the Co ordinates of the Image digitized Points and entering their true System values This Form will remain on top of the other Screen data as long as this transformation mode is being used The Form may be moved around the Screen in the normal Windows manner if it is obscuring any necessary detail On the Image move the Cursor to the first common Point and set the Cursor as close as possible onto this Point and then click the Mouse LHB The Image Co ordinates of this common Point will be displayed on the Transformation Dat
164. File Image file is complete move the Cursor to the required Top Left corner position for the Sheet Image and click the Mouse LHB Now move the Cursor to the required Bottom Right position for the new Sheet Image then click the Mouse RHB The Sheet Image will be displayed in the rectangle created above This need only be a preliminary positioning and sizing of the Image Using the other Sheet Image Commands this Image may be Moved Resized Rescaled Shifted Flipped or Deleted at any future time For Images that have known co ordinate values for its Top Left and Bottom Right corners these positions can be pre entered in the Co ordinate file and then used to accurately position and scale the added Image New WGS 84 Trig Beacon and TSM Data The WGS 84 control data base in SURPAC has been completely revised The complete list of all the 2005 values of Trig Beacons and TSMs which are the latest available have been incorporated in the revised data base This new data base has been included in this SURPAC Upgrade and will automatically install itself in the SURPAC installation folder Apart from the inclusion of the usual Name Y X Z data for the Trig Beacons their Descriptive Names have also been included in the data base Hence in the WGS 84 System the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons programme will display the Descriptive Names of the Trig Beacons If either Point Label Field 1 or Point Label Field 2 has been pre se
165. For each new Polygon generated a minimum of 3 Polygon Lines must pre exist in order for the programme to generate the final Polygon Line for the Polygon These pre existing Lines are User identified by Clicking on the Lines in a clockwise sequence This function is very useful for rapidly sub dividing a township block into stands of a prerequisite area Up to 20 Stands may be created simultaneously with a single use of this Command E13 New Polygon Stand Lines The figure above shows a typical use of this new Command In this example an existing block of a newly designed township E7 E8 E9 E10 E13 E7 is to be subdivided into 4 stands each having the same Area To do this first determine the Area of the figure E7 E8 E9 E10 E13 E7 by using the normal A Area Command Divide this area by four to determine the area required for each of the 4 stands Note The SURPAC Calculator can be used to speed up this process When the Fixed Area Command is given the programme will check to see if the Calculator is displayed and whether there is a positive value displayed in its display screen If so this displayed value will be adopted as the default value required for the new polygon s that are to be created For this example enter the area for the total figure into the Calculator then divide this total by 4 The resultant value will be displayed by the Calculator Leave the Calculator displayed and then continue with th
166. II files associated with it then this menu item will be non active A display of the existing Peg ASCII files for the selected Point Peg will be displayed From this display you can select the required file for viewing by double Clicking it The file s data will then be displayed in a scrolling list form Options on this form allow you to either change to another Peg ASCII file send the displayed information to the Windows Clipboard Exit form the display or Re Calculate the Peg fix If the last option is selected the Peg ASCII data will automatically be sent to the appropriate Peg fix programme to allow for a possible recalculation Page 72 of 312 Other Changes Made Changes Made Apart from the above described modifications various other changes have been made to the software These are 1 Longitudinal Section and Cross Section programmes The Plotter Printer device was not being selected correctly by these programmes This was especially apparent when trying to plot to a network device This problem has now been corrected The positioning of the plots has also been modified to make sufficient allowance for the Plotter Printer margins 2 When running Windows XP an option has been included to restrict the maximum size of graphic displays in the CAD programmes to the same size as that used by Windows 98 This is to allow for those Users who might be running Windows XP but on a PC having a graphics card with only 8Mb o
167. Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 03 Release 01 Displaying the Printed Pages The Printed Pages function is designed to provide an exact reflection of the Pages sent to the Printing device excluding Plotted CAD sheets This function is designed to overcome some past problems such as Due to the Windows spooling of single and multiple printer pages it is sometimes impossible to know exactly what has been printed recently without making SURPAC dump the spooled information When the printer is a network printer located some distance from the user s computer When output is being sent to an ASCII file using the VPG option the data sent is not readily visible The function allows for the on screen display of the Printed Pages information applicable to the current Co ordinate File All existing Printed Pages for the current File will automatically be loaded at the same time that the Co ordinate File is loaded If the current Co ordinate File was created before the installation of Version 5 of SURPAC then only those Printed Pages generated since the installation will be loaded The information is displayed in a Form displayed at the top right corner of the SURPAC screen When the 1024x768 XGA resolution is used this Form is displayed automatically along with the SURPAC Calculator For the 800x600 SVGA resolution this Form will only be displayed if the appropriate Menu Item is selected The Printing Area ma
168. Modified Cadastral Diagram Construction Edit Programme A new Menu has been added to the Diagram Construction Edit programme that allows for the importation of graphic information from another SURPAC CAD programme This function should not be confused with the existing function that allows for the creation of a Diagram by means of the User selection of Points from either a General CAD Sheet or a Working Plan This new feature enables the importing of graphic information once the basic Diagram figure has been identified normally by the User selecting the required Points from the basic Diagram Setup form Once the basic figure has been identified the User may then import graphic information from e Another Diagram e A Working Plan or e A General CAD Sheet The imported graphic information Line and Text items will be any information that lies in the Figural Plotting Area the area outlined by a dotted grey line Imported lines will be trimmed at the edges of the Figural Plotting Area The scales and orientations of the source sheets need not be same as that of the current target Diagram Thanks to Michael Van Niekerk of Welkom for the original idea Page 98 of 312 Modified The General CAD Programme When displaying Points the User now has the option of displaying the Point Name the Point Description or both These option can be found on the Point menu Thanks to Schalk Burger of Louis Trichardt for the original
169. New File In the above Drive and Path New File Name e 4 5 6 x Cancel Delete a Co ordinbte File 1 Za A EB e Delete the Sdlected Co ordinate File including pil Associated Files GPs WPs etc Open 0 5 pen Loading a New Co ordinate File 10 13 AM 09 05 05 CAPS INS E i File Sort Options Create a New File Delete an Existing File The diagram above shows the various elements of the display form On this form you can 1 Select a Drive by Clicking on the small down arrow of the Drive Display List to display the available Drives and then Clicking on the required Drive 2 Select a Folder by scrolling through the Folder Display List shown for the selected Drive and then Clicking on the required Folder 3 Highlight any of the existing Co ordinate Files shown in the File Display List by Clicking on the required File When a File is Highlighted its basic information will be shown in the top right panel of the form This information includes most of the data shown in the System Set function in SURPAC as well as the number of Points in the file and the Date that it was last modified 4 Sort the File Display List by Name the default option Size or Date Sorting is always in increasing order lowest to highest earliest to latest etc 5 Enter a required Name for the creation of a New Co ordinate File 6 Delete any existing Co ordinate File along with its ancillary files These ancillary files include all files
170. Orientation Point used at the Set Up along with their Orientation corrections and the weighted mean If this option is left open i e an empty check box the individual orientations will not be displayed on screen in the case of the Traverse they will still be printed as part of the Traverse output and only a warning will be given if the above mentioned limit is exceeded 5 New SURPAC Calculator Functions The SURPAC Calculator has had a number of enhancements made to it including a new series of Mathematical and Financial functions If you are not familiar with the SURPAC Calculator you can display it by either selecting the appropriate menu item from the File main menu heading or by clicking the calculator icon near the right hand side of the SURPAC status bar at the bottom of the screen Financial Functions Payment Installments This function calculates the Installment Payments using a fixed Interest Rate over a given Period for a Loan Amount Reply to each prompt by entering the appropriate value and pressing either the Button or the Enter Button Note that the Period is always in Months the Interest Rate is the Annual Interest Rate and the calculated Installment is per month Future Value This function calculates the Future Value of a present Lump Sum and or Monthly Payments using a fixed Interest Rate and over a given Period Reply to each prompt by entering the appropriate value and pressing either the
171. PAC Observation Code Format used for all General Observation Files Apart from the normal observation entities such as Horizontal Angle Vertical Angle Slope Distance Instrument Height Target Height each Set Up Point and Sighted Point requires a Point Name Number a Point Description Code and an Observation Code SURPAC must be able to determine from the Observation Codes in an Observation File whether a Station Beacon is a Fixed Point or a Free Point As SURPAC is able to utilize General Observation Files to automatically configure and run Least Squares Control Networks Traverses Single Point Fixes Tacheometric Reductions and Mass Polar Calculations it has to ascertain all configural information Set ups at Free Point or Fixed Point Observations to Free Points or Fixed Points etc SURPAC Observation Codes SET UPS Set Up Code 1 or 2 with the following meanings Code 1 Defines a Set Up at a Point with unknown co ordinates E g a Free Point Code 2 Defines a Set Up at a Point with known co ordinates E g a Fixed Point OBSERVATIONS Observation Code 3 to 9 with the following meanings Code 3 Defines a data line used to fix a Control Set Up Point Code 4 Defines an Orientation observation Code 5 Defines a Polar or Tacheometric fixing data Code 6 Defines a data line used to fix a Control Point Code 7 Defines a Back Check Observation for an U Ground Peg Fix Code 8 Defines a Set Up Peg to New Peg Observation for
172. Placemark represented by a camera location to differentiate it from a standard Placemark that has no Image attachments To display the Placemark s Name co ordinates headings Link Files and Image Files Click on the icon To display the contents of a hyperlink Link Files right Click on the hyperlink Google Earth will then switch to its display page and display the contents of the file If the file does not display and the loading bar stays on the form then just click the refresh button at the top of the screen To display the Images in full size right Click on the Image Google Earth will then switch to its display page and display the Image Page 241 of 312 Creating KML Image Polygons in SURPAC Image polygons are created using the General CAD programme found under the General Menu heading When in the General CAD programme move the mouse cursor inside the figure stand polygon for which you want to create an Image Polygon on Google Earth Then right Click the mouse The cursor will move up into the Menu area Now Click the Figure menu heading and then from the drop down menu select the option Create a Google Earth Image Polygon NB The keyboard equivalent command is FG With the cursor inside the required figure stand polygon type in FG You will now be prompted to enter the Number or Name for the figure stand polygon The programme will then for search and locate the Lines that form the figure s
173. Plotter Output If a hard copy or PDF output of the Sheet is required then select this option The existing Plot Scale Error Ellipse Scale etc will be used for the plot output e Sheet Size You may select a Sheet Size that allows for the display of the network data without congestion e Sheet Orientation The Sheet Orientation not the Sheet Swing may be set to either Portrait or Landscape modes e Sheet Plotting Scale The Plotting Scale should be used in conjunction with the Sheet Size and Sheet Orientation to produce a plot of the network without congestion e Sheet Viewing Scale The Viewing Scale can be set to display any portion of the Sheet on the monitor You can also use the F5 SFK or the Mouse Scroll button to do this e Error Ellipse Scale The Error ellipse Scale should be set to suite the accuracy of the network and the Sheet Plotting Scale For example If an Error ellipse Scale of 1 1 is set then at the defined Plotting Scale the semi axes major will plot true to scale e Point Name Positions You may set or reset the position of Point Names by using the normal SURPAC N1 N9 Commands e Text Items can Written Imported Edited Moved and or Deleted using the normal SURPAC Text Commands Options using the Mouse e Clicking the Left Hand Button If the LHB is clicked on or close to a Network Point the Point s Name Co ordinates and Error Ellipse parameters if the Point has been adjusted in the Network
174. Point Cloud St Helens With the Point Cloud file highlighted in the Database See Page 9 follow the menu path Edit Mesh Delaunay 2 5D XY plane On the displayed form leave the Max Edge length as 0 Triangulation and creation of the Mesh file will now take place Make sure that the Normals value in the Properties section is checked CloudCompare v2 1 32 bits 3D View 1 ae e Jax GPBREvox Seer rua Mr gm e nC SO DAO G rreme rcon MMM ES S E isc Son is De Tree a were ra FS aa 4 V amp Mount St Helens Oct 4 2004 12 si lt FO Mount St Helens Oct 4 200 u T Mount St Helens Oct 4 4 4 jat a 4 m ot r jas i Fy WA z g acom The above image shows the St Helens example after creation of the Mesh file and switching the Normals display on Page 277 of 312 To Colourize the model as displayed on Page 16 follow the menu path Edit Colors Height Ramp Color ramp Default Custom First color lee Second color Frequency 5 direction On the displayed form you can either select the required colour range First color and Second color or just accept the default black to white colour range Setting the colour range to dark blue to light blue for example gives a display as PBREVeX St SE ORM yr oak wR FG DMO Greene sree MM ESS lt i son is a Pe EBRN G haEghaan Colourized display of Mount St Helens using a single colour range
175. Point Groups in a File Programme has been modified so as to allow the resultant differences be displayed as either Polar data or as Co ordinate differences e When creating a Printout of a Co ordinate List or a Peg file it is now possible to define an Exclusion text item This Exclusion text item may be up to 7 characters in length Any Point in the Co ordinate file whose Name begins with the defined Exclusion text item will be excluded from the listing Leave the Exclusion text item as blank if you do not want to exclude any Points Page 16 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 05 Release 01 SURPAC non Graphic Programmes Additions and Modification applicable to All SURPAC non Graphic Programmes NB The Additions and Modifications made to the Graphic Programmes are listed further on 1 The Irish Grid the U K National Grid and the ETRS89 Co ordinate Systems These three Co ordinate Reference Systems or TRFs Terrestrial Reference Systems have been added in order to provide support for SURPAC Users living in the U K or Ireland The other Co ordinate Reference System supported in this region is the Universal Transverse Mercator U T M System Zones 29 30 and 31 The Irish Grid This Co ordinate Reference System is defined by the following parameters e Ellipsoid Airy 1830 Modified a 6 377 340 189 m b 6 356 034 447 m e True Origin Latitude 53 30 00 N Longitude 8 00 00 W
176. Point Names Y Co Display the Point Names ordinates and X Co ordinates must be Display the Point Y Co ordinates displayed as these items represent the ini isplay for any Point Display the Point X Co ordinates minimum display ea Fo t x x x If one or both of the Label Fields are selected as visible then you can select the required heading for each Label Field from the displayed drop down lists Whilst these Label Fields are in general passive descriptive items there are certain instances where these items are used by SURPAC programmes For example setting the heading of one of the Label Fields as Display the Point Height Values Display the Point Aux Height Values Display the Point Descriptions Display the Point Field Book Pages X E x 7 Display the Point Calculation Pages Display the Point Label Field 1 Display the Point Label Field 2 Label Field 1 Heading Trig Names X Trig Names will be used by the Diagram x x x CAD programme whereby the Name of a Trig Label Field 2 Heading Point Source Beacon shown on a Diagram will be included as well as its Number For Co ordinate file ox T listings the Trig Names will be shown in the columns normally reserved for F B and Calc Page If one of the Fields is designates Back Peg then this column will have the name of the Back Peg automatically placed in it when a Mining U G Peg calculation is carried ou
177. Point in original coordinate system on disk x 91706 001000 y 3195124 001000 z 3231 326000 3195100 00 0 00 x Scale 1 00000000 CloudCompare automatic co ordinate origin Global shifts to prevent accuracy loss This type of shift requirement is typical for surveys in the Southern African Lo or WG systems where no constant has been applied to the X values interpreted by CloudCompare as being Y values This is also true for surveys carried out in the UTM system in the Southern Hemisphere CloudCompare will then display its interpretation of the SURPAC created ASCII Point Cloud file This interpretation is correct and does not any user modification The first 3 columns are the X Y Z point data and the last 3 columns are the Red Green Blue colour components of each point in the cloud Please note that as CloudCompare was originally designed for Northern Hemisphere countries the X Y values represent the Y X values for Southern African countries Open Ascii Fil W ea Filename SurpacCloudView Datafiles Polifin_Surface_PC asc Here are tha first lines of this file Choose each column attribution one doud at a time 1 2 3 4 5 6 a x coord X 1 coord y X z coord Z X Q Red 0 255 E Green 0 255 v Blue 0 255 z 88120 001 68760 5 2936 286 68 65 2 38120 001 68760 25 2940 082 90 86 8 88120 001 68761 001 2936 282 68 65 2 88120 001 68760
178. Prism Constant to Selected Measurements zx Select required Option for Applying the Prism Constant Option 1 Select the Measurements by Description Select the required Description s Ev M Option 2 Select the Measurements by Prism Height Enter the required Prism Height Enter the Prism Constant to be Added 3 Further modifications have been made to the Zambia Diagram template to comply with the SG Zambia regulations These include the automatic Scale values for the Diagram the position of the North Point and the auto naming of the Diagram number Page 311 of 312 4 Anew feature has been added to the Reset Text Attributes function Define Attributes for Editing Text Items ignore the Text Case 1x Precede with or to Swing Text Items Old Size mm gt WTH Ratio gt Style NIVBIU ii a EDIT All Text Items satisfying the selected Criteria DELETE All Text Items satisfying the selected Criteria Layer Ca se Set Text Items satisfying the above Criteria to Upper Case Set Text Items satisfying the above Criteria to Lower Case Text Font and Size Options Set a New Font for All Existing Text Items Select New Text Font Arial v Apply a Size Scale Factor to Text satisfying the selected Criteria x Enter a Scale Factor 0 500 This new feature allows you to apply a Scale Factor to all existing Text items on the Sheet that sa
179. RPAC Users may now choose from four different Menu display styles To view these styles Click the File item found on the main Menu Heading From the displayed menu move the Cursor onto the menu item Set the SURPAC Menu Style A sub Menu will be displayed showing the four different styles available which are Style 1 Office 2000 This is the Menu style that SURPAC has used up to now A bit dull has no 3D feature and selection and the hover highlighting is weak Style 2 Office XP An improvement on Office 2000 above Still no 3D feature but a nice highlighting feature with shadows Style 3 Office 2003 In my opinion the best of the four styles It uses a colour scheme to match that selected by the User for the Windows XP display It displays the Toolbars in 3D and uses a good contrast colour to clearly show highlights This is the default style for SURPAC Style 4 VS 2005 Also an attractive style using a colour matching the form background colour It also displays the Toolbars in 3D and uses a good contrast colour to clearly show highlights The new main Toolbar contains various programme icons To view an icon s programme function let the Mouse cursor hover over the icon Once your mind s eye has made the association between the icons and the programmes you will find that using the Toolbar is a quick and convenient way of navigating around the most commonly used programmes in SURPAC With the a
180. Shapefile C Surpac Software Samples L5952 youngsville towns xS Select Shapefile Import Options Shapefile Ellipsoid Clarke 1880 Modified Shapefile System Cape Datum Arc 1950 Shapefile Central Meridian 27 Convert Geogaphical Values to System Co ordinates Use Shapefile Values for CAD Sheet Centering X Change the Sign of the Y X co ordinates Select DBF Header for Data to be shown None as Text Items on the General Cad Sheet V RILLE IIS STAND_AREA Shapefile Co ordinate Limits Metres Min Y Value 70418 73 Min X Value 2905048 31 Max Y Value 70701 78 Max X Value 2905350 75 noon J Importing an ESRI Shapefile Polygons into SURPAC In the above example the Shapefile co ordinates are System Y X values The system used is displayed at the top of the screen and therefore the option to convert from Geographical Lat Long values to system Y X values is not active NB Ensure that Max Min co ordinate values shown at the bottom of the form are in the range of the limits of the current CAD Sheet being used to import the data The List box at the right of the form shows the Shapefile associated dbf Headings In this case only the STAND_NAME and STAND_AREA are options for importing and displaying a text header for each Shapefile polygon If you select STAND_NAME for example SURPAC will convert the headings into Text Items and then place each heading at the centre of th
181. Sheet size of a General CAD Sheet can now be User defined When opening a new Sheet or modifying an existing Sheet use the Sheet Information display to set the required Sheet length and Height Importing DXF SPLINE data The General CAD DXF import function can now support the DXF SPLINE formatted data These lines are imported as a series of connected straight Lines If a Bezier Spline Curve series through these Line junction points is required then this can be done by selecting the Bezier Curve Fitting menu item under the Draw menu heading Please note that SURPAC will only import DXF or DWG files that are compatible with AutoCAD 2005 or earlier versions such as AutoCAD 2000 Release 13 Release 12 etc At this stage AutoCAD 2007 DXF and DWG files can not be imported into SURPAC General SURPAC Modifications Diagram CAD Programme The problem with the vanishing Point B on the Diagram Figure has now been resolved This problem sometimes occurred when the Frame Move or Frame Copy commands were used General CAD General Plan CAD and Working Plan CAD Programmes All the above programmes had had a new Command added This newly added Command is the Line Intersection Intersection Angle display Command Using this Command will display the Directions of two User identified Lines as well as the Intersection Angle made by the two Lines Except for Lines that are either parallel or perpendicular to one anoth
182. Ss aa ae JR SURPAC Contour CAD showing imported Google Earth Points on a 50m Grid This generated Tacheometric file can then be used in the SURPAC Contouring CAD programme to construct and edit contour lines using the Triangulation method over the quadrilateral area in the usual way The two preceding images and the one on the next page show the stages of generating a contour display from imported Google Earth points i e defining an area importing the data creating the Contours and then displaying these contours on Google Earth via a KML file amp Google Earth ES a 7 ale Google earth imagery Dat 2 ie See Ene 25 E Biev i SURPAC 5m Contours of Hartebeespoort dam wall area using Google Earth Data m Eyeall 314km Page 197 of 312 2 2 Compare Existing heights with interpolated Google Earth Heights This function allows you to compare existing Tacheometric file heights with interpolated heights from the Google Earth DTM This function is useful when needing to evaluate the accuracy of imported Google Earth Heights against surveyed values Using this Option In the Actions Menu click on the Compare GE Hts A form will be displayed in which the file Points their co ordinates description surveyed heights and interpolated Google Earth heights will be shown These height importations are imported at a rate of approximately 350 500 Point he
183. Standard Text Size as 2 8 mm Select the Standard Text Size as 3 0mm Select required Default Standard Font Diagram Font Name Select Point Circle Size mm Select the Point Circle Diameter as 1 0 mm Select Standard Text Stying Select the Point Circle Diameter as 1 5 mm Regular Italic C Bold Bold Italic Select the Point Circle Diameter as 2 0 mm When Creating a Diagram from a CAD Sheet or a Working Plan Include Lines surrounding the Diagram Figure Include Text Items surrounding the Diagram Figure X On the form displayed above select the option Create diagram Information using the General CAD Options Also select any other required options such as Sheet size Sheet orientation margins surrounding data etc When complete click the Create button The following form will now be displayed Select the item Auto Generate Diagram Data using Stand Number option The Stand Number entered for the file name in this case 24764 will become the default Stand Number Diagram Creation 2s Options for Extracting Data from a General CAD Sheet Generate Diagram Data using Stand Point Identification Auto Generate Diagram Data using Stand Number Enter the Stand Name Number 24764 Use the Closest two Trig TSM Beacons X Use the same Headings as the previous Diagram X Use the same Signature as the previous Diagram X Below the Stand Number are three further options e f you
184. There are however certain functions such as the Mean and Standard Deviation function where the Enter button must be used when entering a list of values and the button used to indicate the completion of the data entry Power Function Calculates X to the power of Y Either X or Y may be non integer and or negative quantities if this is required Input the X value then click the X Y button Next input or calculate the power value Y then click the button For example to calculate 94 1 3 input 9 and click XY Then input 1 then click the divide button and input 3 Finally click the button The function will first compute the value 1 3 and then compute and display the result 94 1 3 Inverse Function Calculates the Inverse of the displayed value Square Function Calculates the Square X 2 of the displayed value Square Root Function Calculates the Square Root SQR X of the displayed value Page 40 of 312 Arc Sine Function Calculates the Arc Sine of the displayed value and displays the result in the DMS mode Arc Cosine Function Calculates the Arc Cosine of the displayed value and displays the result in the DMS mode Arc Tangent Function Calculates the Arc Tangent of the displayed value and displays the result in the DMS mode S Key E Key Y Key N Key Clicking any of these buttons is the same as pressing the equivalent keyboard key S is used for replying Start to certain prompts E and is
185. User defined figure whether Lines exist or not To compute a Figural Polygon Area by Point selection do the following Set the required co ordinate accuracy 2 4 places for the calculation by either selecting the Set Line Write Options item from the Edit main menu heading or by simultaneously pressing the keyboard Ctrl and O keys From the Draw main menu heading select the Area by Point Selection Item or simultaneously press the keyboard Ctrl and A keys The cursor will now change to the blue Point Digitise cursor Move the cursor close to the first required Point or Line terminal for the figure or polygon and click the Mouse LHB The display line at the top of the screen will show the Name of the selected Point unless a Line terminal was chosen Move the cursor close to the next required Point and again click the Mouse LHB Continue in this fashion selecting all required Points and finally closing the figure by re selecting the original starting Point The figure Area will be shown in the display line near the top of the screen To Abort the calculation at any stage press the Esc Key In summary when defining Points for an Area calculation by Point Selection Clicking the Mouse LHB will select the Point closest to the cursor as the next figural Point Clicking the Mouse RHB will de select the last displayed figural Point Pressing the keyboard Esc key will provi
186. Y X co ordinates 3 Create Shapefile using Highlighted Points only x Add the Constants to the Co ordinate Values X include the Co ordinate File Label Field Data Number of Co ordinate Decimal Places 2places 3places 4Places 5Places Point Descriptions Show full Point Descriptions C Show Codes Only Option Form for Creating a Point Shapefile The above form shows the available options that may be selected when creating a Shapefile e The Shapefile Creation form will automatically display the Ellipsoid Co ordinate system and Central Meridian or Zone set for the current Co ordinate File e This option allows you to either create the Shapefile co ordinates in the System of the current Co ordinate File Y X or E N or in Latitude and Longitude Creating the Shapefile using Latitude Longitude values is preferable as this provides more flexibility for the end user when importing the Shapefile e f you only want to include certain Points for the Shapefile then mark Highlight these Points in the Co ordinate file listing before creating the Shapefile otherwise the whole Co ordinate file will be used Once the required options have been selected SURPAC will create a Point Shapefile from the current Co ordinate file The Shapefile itself only consists of the Y X B or E N H values for each Point To overcome these attribute limitations SURPAC attaches attributes to each Point by
187. a Form under the headings Image Y value and Image X value In the Input Box labelled True Y value either enter the Name of the common Point only if its co ordinates exist in the Sheet s defined Co ordinate File or enter the true System Y co ordinate and then in the True X value Input Box enter the true System X co ordinate Repeat this procedure for up to 5 common Points After each new Point is added check the Image Transformation Parameters displayed at the bottom of the Form If a large Std Devn is displayed then check the entered data for errors As discussed above substantive Swings or orientation differences in excess of 0 5 degree should be avoided If large swing does exists then Delete the Image use the scanner software to re orient the source Image and then Import the Image again before carrying out a new Transformation Once a series of common Points has been employed to produce a satisfactory Page 26 of 312 Transformation click the Proceed Button on the Transformation Data Form The Programme will then clear the Screen display and redraw the Image using its new Position and Size Check the common Points to see how closely they fit with the corresponding Image Points If large errors are still present then re do the Transformation or apply Shifts and or Scale Factors by using the Image Shift IS Command 2 5 2 Digitizing Points from a Sheet Image II This Command is used for Digitizing Points and storing
188. abel Field 1 as Latitude and Label Field 2 as Longitude The Latitude and Longitude elements are not directly editable and are dependent on the Y and X or N and E values defined for a Point If the Point co ordinates are modified then the Latitude and Longitude will be modified accordingly When first setting the Label Fields as Latitude and Longitude all existing Points in the current Co ordinate file will have their Latitude and Longitude displayed Using the Landscape Orientation to Print a Co ordinate List With the introduction of the Label Fields for a Co ordinate file the page width required for a Co ordinate file listing is often wider than can be provided by an A4 sheet in the Portrait orientation To circumvent this problem it is now possible to print a Co ordinate file listing in the Landscape orientation To set the current Printer in the Landscape mode do the following 1 From the File main menu heading select the menu item Printer Set Up for calculations 2 On the displayed Printer Settings form change the Paper Orientation setting to Landscape 3 Print the Co ordinate file in the normal manner 4 Remember to revert the Printer orientation back to Portrait after printing the list otherwise all subsequent printing will be in the Landscape orientation 5 This function only applies to direct printing and not to pages stored as VPG pages Using Windows Short
189. acons at an offset from a Grid Line or all of the above Once these beacons have been placed their accuracy in comparison with the theoretical Grid Lines should be checked by means of a check Survey These check Surveys need to be carried out to high accuracy in the field and the resulting observations and measurements should be adjusted using Least Squares routines What is then required is a routine that can rapidly and accurately compare the positions of the placed beacons resulting from the check Surveys against their theoretical values This programme provides such a routine YOU o T a ee Moa Agama Pot Mme Pan Kone eat Tape Sytem ete tp 25 HO 8 AGEO 60 0 5 rs Bude nen BS a AAND Sose a Sag OO Lapor Layer 00t Codentrat mors ond Fast teres Pua 1 Ct Vosne IPE foe Put Oven Wers Dupiry A iS rT y7 spif By h a T er peeeonsy z SURPAC General CAD programme showing a Construction Grid Line Layout Programme Requirements Page 257 of 312 Two SURPAC Co ordinate files are required for this programme namely the Master file and the Field file The Master Co ordinate file The first file known as the Master file contains all theoretical Point information The General CAD Sheet for this file also consists of Lines and Text related to the Grid Line layout NB It is important to note that all the Line and Text information for the Grid Lines must be
190. aded at the start of the session Use this feature with caution To Undo All Session Drawing Tasks either 3 From the CAD programme s Edit Menu Heading select the item called Undo All Session Tasks or 4 Use the keyboard Ctrl Q function i e press and hold down the Ctrl key and at the same time press the Q key The time taken for SURPAC to perform an Undo action depends on both the speed of the computer used and the complexity of the drawing involved For an average General Plan CAD drawing etc and when using a fast PC the time taken is negligible being a few hundreds of a second Complex drawings that include Graphic images for example could take a few seconds General CAD Programme New Point Function A new feature has been added to the General CAD Programme viz Print Plot Point Co ordinates PC This function or command will print either the Point s Planar co ordinates Y X or E N values or the Point s Geographical co ordinates Latitude Longitude values These printed items are stored as Text items and can be edited moved deleted etc like any Text item on the Sheet To use this function do the following 1 If you want to print a Point s Planar co ordinates make sure that the menu item Dynamic Lat Long display under the General menu heading is not selected i e its icon is not highlighted or If you want to print a Points Geographical co ordinates make
191. age therefore transformed values are not sufficiently accurate for use for official applications such as Diagram or GP compilations Using these data for beacon relocations would provide only approximate positions However the transformed values can be used for Approximate calculations of areas etc Small scale mapping Google Earth information display This data base will be updated as and when further information becomes available Other Countries The appropriate authorities in other Southern African countries have been approached regarding the supply of data Swaziland apparently does not have any WGS 1984 data for its Trig Network To date Namibia Botswana Lesotho and Malawi have not responded to our request If or when we receive sufficient and reliable data for these countries they will be added to the transformation list Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons The above discussion applies to this programme Zimbabwe and Zambia have been added to the list of countries where this programme is active The same warnings and limitations to these latter countries apply when adding Trig Beacons in the WGS 1984 system i e for Zimbabwe an accuracy of 0 25m is applicable and for Zambia the accuracy drops to 2 0m For the Arc 1950 system the values shown are the official Trig Beacon values Point Comparisons using different Files ia amp Comparison of two Co ordinate Files Co ordinate File Names for Compariso
192. alistic for the model being rasterized For example for a standard survey of a mine dump pit or opencast area a Grid Step of about 1 i e 1 metre should be about right After entering the Grid Step click on the Upgrade Grid bar shown in red If you see the plot area on the right of the form displayed as a single colour block then this normally means that the Grid Step chosen is too small Choose a new larger Grid Step and again click the Upgrade Grid bar Cloud Name Polifin_Surface_PC Cloud Points 476668 height range 54 4202 2934 63 2989 05 Grid step 1 000000 Edit grid size 335 x 355 Projection direction z X cell height average height v resample input loud Empty cells Fill with interpolate X 0 000000 Export Contour plot Start height 2934 629917 Step 5 442017 Min vertex 3 ignore borders V Generate ox cne Near the bottom of the left hand side information block click on the Contour tab Change the Start Height value to the lowest required Contour height and then finally change the Step value to the required Contour interval Leave the Min Vertex at its default value Click the Generate button to generate the Contours On completion the Contours will appear on top of the rasterized image on the form To include these contours in the Database tree click the Export button and then click the OK button at the bottom of the form NB f
193. allation CD then this may be used to install SURPAC on Windows 7 as long as the same installation method used for Windows Vista is followed New installation CDs are available for installing on Windows XP Vista 7 which allow direct installation without the need to follow specific steps for Windows Vista or Windows 7 A new installation CD costs R150 00 to cover costs and courier fees for Users having a current SURPAC Maintenance Contract Point Comparison using different Files A new option has been added to this programme It is now possible to compare Point Co ordinates and Heights the default option between two files or to compare Point Descriptions between two files Diagram Programme 4 The size of the text Surveyor General on Sheet 2 of an A3 Diagram has been changed to match that on Sheet 1 5 The Bezier Spline curve function has been improved a When a figure was oriented the Bezier curve was not plotting in the correct position This has now been rectified b The Bezier curve was also causing an approximate 200mm shift in the position of Text items This has now been fixed c Please note that Bezier curves can only be created when the figure orientation is 0 After creation of the Bezier curve the figure may then be re oriented 6 A Diagram can take up to 200 Excluded or Servitude points 7 The Diagram headings such as Sides and Directions were sometimes being deleted when other text items we
194. and click on Download and Install SURPAC Software Follow the on screen instructions for downloading and installing SURPAC after which send me an e mail keith surpac co za identifying who you are and at which company or Mine you are employed will then e mail new security files to you to re activate your License A Google Earth changes Modifications have been made to SURPAC to accommodate changes made to Google Earth in Version 6 0 3 The changes made in Google Earth impacted on the functions in SURPAC that import Paths or Lines Polygons and Place Marks from Google Earth If you are still using Google Earth Version 5 or earlier these modified functions will still work but nevertheless Users are advised to upgrade to the latest version 6 0 3 General Plan Sectional Title amp Working Plan programmes When calculating parallel lines Line Shift command when the sheet was swung from True North the distance used to calculate the positions of the parallel lines was incorrect This has now been fixed Addition of the Kolida KTS 400 Series Total Station The option to import data from an ASCII file generated by a Kolida KTS 400 Series Total Station has been added to SURPAC Least Squares Adjustment of Trig Heights When the Date and Time were included in the Observation file used for calculating the adjustment they caused problems in identifying the correct set up stations This has now been rectified Co
195. and so on The MB also has other functions such as indicating a mid curve point when drawing an arc Layer Modifications for AutoCAD DXF and DWG Files The method of Layer generation for both the AutoCAD DXF and DWG files from the SURPAC CAD programmes has been modified As before Text Fonts used in SURPAC are where possible matched to the equivalent fonts in AutoCAD and are attached to each Text Item However it is no longer necessary to manually map the Font Style Names within AutoCAD as this is now done automatically for most fonts This applies to the following families of fonts supported by SURPAC and AutoCAD Arial Bank Gothic Bertram Commercial Courier New Dutch Monospace Roman Stylus Swiss Times Roman Universal Maths Vinetia The DXF DWG STANDARD font is now set as the being the same as the default font used for the current SURPAC CAD sheet If you want the DXF DWG file set so that it has its STANDARD font as the AutoCAD default font called MONOTXT then you must set the SURPAC CAD sheet so that its default font is also MONTXT This should be done before Text items are generated on the sheet Note Using AutoCAD s Format Text Style to set the default font to MONOTXT for data that has been generated in SURPAC using a True Type font will allow for more rapid zooming and panning in AutoCAD but it will not display the imported Text Items with their correct shape or spacing The Point Circles and Point Names
196. and the LM Command given The Programme will then define the located Line by displaying it in purple The Cursor will jump to the closest Line terminal of the defined Line The located Line may then be e Moved by moving the Cursor or pressing the Keyboard arrow keys e Scaled by using either the or Commands or e Rotated by using the lt or gt Commands Once the required Position Length and Direction for the Line have been reached use the Enter Command to Place the Line Unless the Snap Mode has been disabled the Line terminal at which the Cursor is situated will snap onto the nearest existing defined Snap Item within range of the current Snap Radius The original located Line will be removed Page 250 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 8 Version 5 61 Release 01 uF The My Stations files SURPAC now allows you to create and store two My Stations files one for the Clarke 1880 Modified ellipsoid e g the RSA Lo datum Arc 1950 Arci1960 UTM etc and the WGS 1984 ellipsoid e g RSA Hartebeeshoek94 datum UK National GPS Network New Zealand Geodetic Datum NZGD2000 UTM etc These files are called My Stations Lo and My Stations WG respectively and are stored in the same folder as the SURPAC application usually the C Surpac Software folder The purpose of these files is to allow Surveyors to store their own Stations or any other required points in the a
197. andard Font and Settings menu item found under the File main menu to display the Form 3 Downloading Observations from Leica Total Stations and GSI ASCI Files Some Users employ the Word Index 42 to store Point Descriptions whilst others seem to prefer just using the standard Word Index 41 The previous version of SURPAC was reading Point Descriptions from Word Index 42 even if the data contained was null blank This effectively led to the overwriting of the Description contained in Word Index 41 with blank information This has now been corrected 4 Changes to the Contour CAD Programme 4 1 When creating BreakLines by means of the Point by Point construction the Programme was not snapping the constructed lines onto the selected Points Users still employing this manual technique are reminded that the Auto BreakLine Creation function is much faster Although the Points were being correctly recognized and the appropriate BreakLine Descriptions allocated the lines did not appear visually correct unless a Screen Refresh was carried out This has now been corrected 4 2 The Triangulation Polygon Functions menu item under the Triangulation main menu is now always enabled even if no triangulation exists Since this function can be used for Deleting and or Importing Points within a defined polygon area the use of the function is not necessarily limited to sheets that have an existing tri
198. angulation 5 Reduction of an Observation File to a Co ordinate File or a Tachy File When reducing an Observation File SURPAC first checks to see if all the Set up Points exist in the current Co ordinate File If one or more of the defined Set Up Points dos not exist you will be given the option of letting SURPAC determine the Y X Z or E N H values for the missing Set Up Point s To do this SURPAC will use both the Forward and Back if available observed Polar data to calculate each missing Set Up Point Page 29 of 312 This technique is aimed at providing a rapid calculation facility for the computing of temporary side stations or even an open traverses where such Set Up Points are used to determine the co ordinates of surveyed beacons or tacheometric points within the Observation File The technique uses weighted Orientations and fully reduced Distances and Height Differences in calculating the values for the missing Set Up Points Distances and Height differences are meaned between Forward and Back measured data where applicable The above technique applies no form of mis closure or statistical comparison to the acquired results and the accuracies of the determined values are completely dependent on the accuracy and quality of the observation set contained in the Observation File For accuracy and safety therefore it is still recommended that Set Up Points that form part of a Control Network such as a T
199. application has been installed on the computer If Microsoft Word has not been installed the Spell Checking facility in the CAD programmes will be automatically disabled Further to the above Microsoft Word must be installed in one of the following folders C Program Files Microsoft Office Office C Program Files Microsoft Office Office10 C Program Files Microsoft Office Office11 C Program Files Microsoft Office Office12 C Microsoft Office Office C Microsoft Office Office10 C Microsoft Office Office1 1 C Microsoft Office Office12 If you have Microsoft Word installed in any folder other than one of those listed above then in order to activate the CAD Spell Checking facility create a folder called C Microsoft Office Office and copy the application file called Winword exe into this folder As this facility makes use of the Microsoft Office defined dictionary any words that are added into its dictionary will also be accepted by the SURPAC CAD Spell Checking facility By default the Spell Checking facility will be set as Active or Enabled unless Microsoft Word cannot be located However if you decide that you do not want the CAD programmes to make use of the Spell Checking facility then it can set this function as Inactive or Disabled by going Page 143 of 312 to the Co ordinate File Editing programme clicking the File options button on the Actions Menu Bar and then de selecting the Use Spell Check facil
200. ar Structure displayed when SURPAC start up or when the User Information menu item is selected Installed SURPAC Software Modules SURPAC Lite SURPAC Conversions SURPAC Least Squares SURPAC Topographical SURPAC Engineering SURPAC Mining SURPAC Cadastral Standard SURPAC Cadastral Extended NOTE The SURPAC Topographical Module that existed before June 2003 is now the equivalent of the combined new Modules called SURPAC Lite SURPAC Conversions SURPAC Least Squares and SURPAC Topographical Users should not notice any change in accessibility to applications for which a License has previously been acquired The minimum entrance level for SURPAC Software is now the SURPAC Lite Module If you would like to see which applications make up the SURPAC Lite Module please visit our Internet site www surpac co za Shaded Background Options The Contour Creation Plotting CAD the Digital Terrain Modelling and the General CAD programmes have all had an enhanced Background Shading option added This type of Background Shading is based on the DTM data generated for a User defined Tacheometric File A smooth colour graduation of a User selected base colour is displayed ranging from very Dark to very Light The total height graduation is based on the total height difference of the DTM and an individual cell colour graduation is based on that cell s height value The colour graduation can be set to range fr
201. are to be generated for the Mesh intersection positions then set the Description Code and the Display Options for these Points Highting of the Mesh Intersection Points Option 1 Highting Points from a SURPAC DTM If the current General CAD Sheet has a defined and underlying DTM then the first of the Height Options may be used to determine heights for the generated Mesh Points Using this method the programme will interpolate heights for each of the Mesh Points by from the DTM Page 224 of 312 NB To define a DTM for a General CAD Sheet Click on the File Menu heading and select CAD Sheet Setup Information Option 2 Highting Points from the Google Earth Surface DTM If the current Co ordinate File System is defined as using the WGS 1984 Ellipsoid then the Mesh Point Heights may be interpolated from the Google Earth Surface DTM via SURPAC s activation of the Google Elevation API The smaller the Mesh Interval the more Points will be added to the file and the more accurate will be the resulting Contours and DTMs However Users must bear in mind that the Google Earth Heights have a relative accuracy of about 3 metres and the resulting Contours and DTMs are only to these accuracies Further to this the Google Earth DTM may also have a significant vertical shift compared to surveyed ground heights It may be necessary therefore to adjust the interpolated heights based on a comparison with control Points such as Tri
202. are using Landscape when Swing should be 90 Sheet Margins 10mm Text width to Height 0 45 Text Size 2 5mm Text Font Monospac821 BT or Courier New Ignore all other selection options Press the OK Button Step 4 From the Programme s Import menu select the Import from an AllyCAD DXF File item Step 5 Select the required DXF file from the displayed File Select Open form The programme will then run the DXF Import routine which will only take a few seconds and the display the imported Line and Text items To create a new Sheet from another DXF file go to the Programme s File menu and select the Open Create a Plot File Sheet item Then repeat the above from Step 3 General Plan CAD Programme Data and Consistency function Ctrl D This function can be used to rapidly produce Data and Consistency reports for Stands in a General Plan Sheet The function is called by either simultaneously pressing the CTRL D keys or by selecting the appropriate menu item from the Programme s Data menu This function uses Directions Distances and Co ordinates of a Stand to carry out and display a Consistency check between the Polar data and the Co ordinate data Areas are also computed using both the Polar and Co ordinate data The Directions and Distances are identified by Clicking on the appropriate items on the General Plan Sheet If the Direction identified lies on the incorrect side of the current Stan
203. art of the SURPAC License in order to be able to access the programme The programme is loaded from the Conversions Menu when selecting the Locate and Add Nearest Bench Mark Menu Item If the current Co ordinate file is empty the programme will display a warning message and abort as the Co ordinate file must contain at least one Point in order for this programme to work The Co ordinate file should have appropriate constants set If no constants are used then both the Y an X ordinates must have their full values As a starting default the programme will assume the Y X search position as being the centre of gravity of all existing Points in the current Co ordinate file The programme will use the further defaults of a Search Radius of 50Km and the number of Points to display as 10 The results of this default search will be displayed You may now change any of the search parameters required as mentioned on the previous page Each displayed Bench Mark will initially have a green tick displayed next to it This implies that the Bench Mark is a required Bench Mark and which would be added to the current Co ordinate file when the Store and Exit Button is clicked If any Bench Mark is not required then click on that Bench Mark s green tick The symbol will be changed to a red cross and the Bench Mark s co ordinate display will be changed to an italic font This Bench Mark will now be flagged as not required
204. at the Descriptions by the Points in the imported file may bear no resemblance to those held in the Default Beacon Description List Page 81 of 312 The Default Beacon Description List is the list of Beacon Descriptions that is automatically attached to a new Co ordinate File when that file is first created To Auto Compile the Beacon Description List for a Co ordinate File do the following Whilst in the Co ordinate File Editing programme click the Descriptions menu item in the Actions Bar Menu If all the Beacon Descriptions used by the Points in the Co ordinate File are included in the Beacon Description List then the Beacon Description List form will be displayed in the usual manner f not a prompt will be displayed asking if you want SURPAC to re compile the Beacon Description List in compliance with the Descriptions used by the Points in the Co ordinate File If you reply Yes to this prompt then a new Beacon Description List will be generated derived from the Point Beacon Descriptions existing in the Co ordinate File This process is advised before using the General CAD programme to ensure that all Points are covered in this programmes Point Layer option Other Changes Made Some other corrections and changes made to SURPAC are For both the Cape Datum to WGS 84 and the WGS 84 to Cape Datum Transformations RSA only the option for the User to apply a Scale Factor to the Source data ha
205. ata item or the Transform WGS84 Data to Clarke 1880 Data Item obviously only one of these menu items will be active at a time If either of the two SURPAC control files LoLatLonList sur or WGLatLonList sur is missing you will not be allowed to proceed with the programme These files must exist in the folder in which SURPAC is installed If one of the files is missing or damaged you can download these by going to www surpac co za and clicking the Download Upgrades button You need to have a current SURPAC Maintenance Contract to legally be able to do this The flexibility of the programme allows for a variety of transformations between the Clarke 1880 Modified Ellipsoid the Cape Datum in South Africa and the WGS 84 Ellipsoid the Hartebeesthoek94 Datum in South Africa The following are examples of the types of transformations that may be carried out Lo 27 to WG 27 Lo 27 to WG 29 WG 19 to Lo 19 WG 19 to Lo 21 UTM Zone 35 Clarke 1880 to UTM Zone 35 WGS 84 UTM Zone 34 WGS 84 to UTM Zone 35 Clarke 1880 UTM Zone 35 Clarke 1880 to WG 27 UTM Zone 34 WGS 84 to Lo 19 Lat Lon WGS 84 to Lo XX Clarke 1880 Lat Lon Clarke 1880 to WG XX WGS 84 Lat Lon Clarke 1880 to UTM Zone XX WGS 84 Lat Lon WGS 84 to UTM Zone XX Clarke 1880 The Programme will fill in the necessary headings such as the ellipsoids and the To file System The System of the Sou
206. ata drawn with Pen 8 Colour Grey or that have been imported into Pen 8 may be set as being BackGround data These data are visible in grey but are not treated as being active They provide a visible background of information that can act as a reference and or comparison to the actual non Grey information being constructed or edited NB Graphic Images may also be scaled and positioned so as to provide a true background of information Orthophoto images supplied free of charge by the Chief Directorate Surveys and Mapping Mowbray are very useful for this purpose Page 67 of 312 When importing data from a DXF file or from another SURPAC Sheet e g General Plan Working Plan etc the options now exist to import these data directly into Pen 8 Grey Setting the BackGround option as ON will set all these data as being BackGround only Selecting Deselecting the BackGround option is done by either pressing the F11 Key or by clicking the appropriate menu item found under the Programme s General main menu heading When the BackGround option is ON all Lines Arcs Circles and Text Items that are drawn using Pen 8 Grey will remain visible but be non active The only functions or Commands that will remain active for Pen 8 data will be the LD Line Dimension and LIC Line Parallel Check Commands The BackGround option can be toggled ON OFF by pressing the F11 key This function can be very useful for exampl
207. ate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons programme when the current Co ordinate File is defined as being in the South African WG system If there is any User who has the official Lo values for TSM s in the area would be grateful for an ASCII or SURPAC listing for these Points to add to the Control Files Also if there are Users who may have official data for Trig and or TSM data that may be missing from other areas in Lo or WG these data would also be appreciated in order to make the Control Files more complete Page 137 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 24 Release 04 New Programme Circle Centre and Radius determination from Arc Points This programme will calculate the Circle Centre and Radius of a circle determined from multiple Points surveyed on the circumference of the circle Arc Points The programme can accommodate up to 200 Arc Points and uses a best fit procedure to determine the most likely Y X or E N values of the Circle Centre and the Radius The programme can be located by clicking the General main menu heading and then selecting the menu item Circle Centre from Arc Points Arc Points that are to be used are loaded into the top grid listing by clicking on the their Names in the Name Display Grid at the bottom of the form After at least three Arc Points have been defined the programme will compute and display the Y X or E NJ values of the Circle Ce
208. ate to the programme that the figure has been closed and all Points have been identified NB If you make a mistake in identifying a Point just press the Esc Key You will then be given the option of going back one step i e ignoring the last Point clicked or cancelling the Diagram creation altogether You cannot identify a Point more than once If you do inadvertently click a Point twice you will receive an appropriate warning that that Point has already been used for the Diagram Once you have closed the figure any existing Pen 1 Lines and or Text Items within a calculated search limit 40 of the width of the figure will be tagged as to be included as part of the figural plot of the Diagram The Diagram Figural Data Entry Form will now be displayed and will include the Working Plan Sheet selected Points as the Points to be used for the Main Figure Points You can now add the Page 37 of 312 Trig Town Survey Marks headings etc as described in the previous section Once this is complete click the Proceed Button to return to the main Diagram Graphic Editing Programme Apart from the Data Block information and the Main Figure plot all the located Line and Text Items on the Working Plan Sheet will be displayed These obviously may be edited moved deleted etc in the normal way 4 and 5 Generate a Diagram from a SURPAC or an AllyCAD type DXF File There are two DXF options one for importing AllyCAD t
209. auteng However they are able to provide 2 3 or 4 day training courses at any location where there is sufficient demand To view feedback and fuller training information please visit www surpac co za and click on the SURPAC Training Courses and Information button Page 193 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 Version 5 37 Release 01 lt These new SURPAC Google Earth functions make use of the importation of elevation or height data interpolated via the Google Earth Elevation API This function allows for the interpolation of heights of locations anywhere on the Google Earth DTM Summary Based on tests carried out on data samples in areas in South Africa it would appear that the interpolated Google Earth heights are in general accurate to about 3 4 metres However this figure can be improved to below the 2m level by carrying out a comparison between surveyed ground heights and Google Earth interpolated heights for selected points in an area and then adjusting the interpolated Google Earth heights for the mean area height difference These results must be seen as estimates and might not be applicable in your area This can best be tested by using ground control points for comparison Nearby standard Trigonometrical Beacons can also be used for ground control bear in mind that the Beacon height is the top of the pillar which is usually 1 4m above ground level Applications Generating Contour and DTM files via downloaded Go
210. aximum Number of Stations to Locate Nearest25 v Delete Point Print List Abort gt lt Store and Exit The Locate and Add My Nearest staon pragia programme display Adding Stations to the My Stations Lo or My Stations WG files Load the Co ordinate File that contains the required Stations that are to be added to the My Stations file making it the current Co ordinate File SURPAC will note the System of the current Co ordinate File and will open the appropriate My Stations file i e Lo or WG Mark highlight a Station or Stations that are to be added to the My Stations file To Highlight a block of Stations Use the Click and drag method or the Shift Click method To Highlight Separate Stations Use the Ctrl Click method Once all required Stations have been highlighted the cursor should be over either the last Station selected or over the green tick box near the top right of the display In either case Click the mouse Right hand button to display the Co ordinate display s pop up menu On this menu select the Add Station s to My Stations WG file or Add Station s to My Stations Lo file as the case may be If a Station of the same Name and originating from the same Co ordinate File already exists in the My Stations file the programme will prompt you to either accept the existing Station values or to overwrite the values
211. be any value 19200 to 4800 Data Parity None Data Bits 8 Bits Stop Bits 1 Bit Flow Control Hardwire e Click the Load Data Button SURPAC will now be waiting for the incoming data e On the Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 set the Data Transfer method to NIKON and RAW and the select the Comm command to start the downloading process e Once data transmission begins the programme will display the number of bytes that have been received from the Total Station Once the complete file has been transmitted the programme will commence to translate the byte information into Observation data that are then stored in the currently defined General Observation File e The maximum number of lines that may be transferred at one time is 3000 2 2 Receiving Co ordinates from a Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Total Station Accessing this Data Transfer facility in SURPAC e In the Main Menu Bar Click the Heading General Then from the displayed Menu click the Item Co ordinate File Editing e At the Top Left corner of the displayed Programme form click the Options Button A new smaller form will be displayed showing the available Options e Click the Load Data from an Electronic Field Book Option and then click the OK Button Page 56 of 312 The displayed downloading form allows for the setting of the logger s data transfer parameters when the Set Parameters Button is clicked or selected Downloading from the Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Series
212. ble to Import DXF ad DWG files created using AutoCAD Version 2012 or compatible software The importing of hatched polygons has also been improved Modified Graphic Image Printing The printing of graphic images including inserted signatures on Cadastral CAD sheets has been improved Both the positioning of the images relative to the line and text items is more precise and the quality of the printed image has been enhanced This applies to both direct printer plotter outputs and to PDF outputs Diagram A3 Printing The Diagram CAD programme was not correctly printing A3 diagrams when outputting to diagram to an A4 printer This has now been rectified for both direct printer output and for PDF output Page 210 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 Version 5 38 Release 01 New Layering System The Layer system in the General CAD Programme is directly linked to the Beacon Point Description List For Co ordinate files using the Cadastral format there are 55 Beacon Descriptions available hence a General CAD Sheet using this format will have 55 Layers available For Co ordinate files using the Engineering format the Layer system is more flexible and there are 300 Layers available for a General CAD Sheet when using this format In the Cadastral format Layers are identified by number 1 55 The Layer Description is then that of the Beacon Description corresponding to that number In the Engineering format Layers are ident
213. ble to use either the 8 bit GSI format or the 16 bit GSI format Via the Options Button in the Co ordinate File Editing programme 3 All Y X co ordinate values and or Z values can now be instantly converted and re stored by applying a User defined factor Via the Options Button in the Co ordinate File Editing programme 4 A new Function has been added to the Pop Up Menu that appears when a Mouse Right Button Click is made whilst in the Co ordinate File Editing programme This function will bring up a Form that displays all existing Cadastral ancillary CAD Sheets related to the current Co ordinate File e g General Plan Sheets G P Data Sheets Sectional Title Sheets and Working Plan Sheets This useful for quickly checking on the status of existing Cadastral information for any given Co ordinate File 5 A new feature has been added to the Observation File Editing programme The Observation Code entry box has been changed to a Drop Down list This list contains the allowable 9 SURPAC Observation Codes plus an extra item shown as When entering data you may select the required Code by simply clicking the appropriate number on the displayed list or if you prefer enter the number manually as before Clicking the item will display an Information Form which shows the full meaning of the SURPAC Observation Codes Whilst this form is displayed you can also click the required Code on this form in place of
214. blem for ASCII files which are generated for purpose of loading into GPS or Total Station devices In these cases these header lines can now be suppressed Folders for Observation Files Up to now an Observation file had to reside in the same folder as the current Co ordinate file Whilst this would be the normal requirement for the majority of cases having the Observation file in a folder other than that of the Co ordinate file provides more flexibility As from this release you can open or create an Observation file in any folder Data Traverse Calculation Page Numbering Problem The Data Traverse programme was not generating the correct Calculation Page Numbers The Page Numbers were either omitted altogether or an incorrect number was assigned This has now been rectified Locate and Mean Point Groups in a File This programme has been extended to allow for the display of all Points in the current Co ordinate file which do not form a part of any Point Group A Point Group is simply a group of two or more Points that lie within a User defined search radius of a Primary Point The Primary Point is normally the first Point located for a group This useful addition now makes it possible to display all placed Points which for example are either unchecked or for which the check Point lies outside the User defined search radius This list of Points can be sent to the Printer an ASCII file the Clipboard or to an Excel file By saving
215. bmitting official documentation Zimbabwe This country has now been added A data base has been set up using the available Clarke 1880 Modified i e the Arc 1950 values and the WGS 1984 values Unfortunately we have only been supplied with a limited amount of information consisting of about 1 600 common Trig Beacons in the two systems Sample transformations indicate a Standard Deviation for the transformations between the two systems to be in the order of 0 25m At this stage therefore transformed values are not sufficiently accurate for use for official applications such as Diagram or GP compilations However the transformed values can be used for Beacon relocation purposes Approximate calculations of areas etc Page 219 of 312 Small scale mapping Google Earth information display This data base will be updated as and when further information becomes available Zambia This country has also been added As for Zimbabwe a data base has been set up using the available Clarke 1880 Modified i e the Arc 1950 values and the derived WGS 1984 values The Zambian WGS 1984 values were obtained through SURPAC using a combination of a simultaneous Molodensky Badekas transformation anchored by a Helmert transformation based on 16 common points with known WGS 1984 values Subsequent sample transformations indicate a Standard Deviation for the transformations between the two systems to be in the order of 2 0m At this st
216. bottom left of the form an Option List is available which allows the User to select any Tacheometric file Contour file or Horizontal Alignment file whose data are to be transformed based on the currently selected Option settings This option is only active if a SURPAC Co ordinate file has been selected as the Source File Carrying out a System to System Transformation using this Programme Before calling the Programme open or load a Co ordinate File which will become the current Co ordinate File In order to make this transformation programme appear as active on the Conversions Menu the System of the current Co ordinate File must include certain elements as is described below For Transforming FROM Lo System TO WG System the current Co ordinate File System must include e Ellipsoid WGS 1984 e Projection RSA WG System Hartebeesthoek94 Datum or Projection Universal Transverse Mercator World System e The WG System Central Meridian or UTM Zone must pertain to South Africa For Transforming FROM WG System TO Lo System the current Co ordinate File System must include e Ellipsoid Clarke 1880 Modified e Projection RSA Lo System Cape Datum or Projection Universal Transverse Mercator World System e The Lo System Central Meridian or UTM Zone must pertain to South Africa Page 47 of 312 From the SURPAC Conversions Main Menu heading select either the Transform Clarke 1880 Data to WGS84 D
217. bove files and to have the ability to locate and import the nearest of these Stations into any Co ordinate file Each Station stored in either of the two My Stations files consists of the following data Name Latitude Longitude Y Co ordinate or Easting X Co ordinate or Northing System e g WG 273 Lo 193 Zone 35 etc Height Aux Height Field 1 as set in the Source file Field 2 as set in the Source file Description Source File Path Name When displaying the nearest Stations the following are also shown e Direction e Distance Which are determined from the currently chosen Search Centre position Since the two My Stations files are stored in Lat Long format any Degree Square boundaries become irrelevant to the programme Surveys can be located close to any Degree Square boundary and the programme will still generate its own temporary Degree Square of Points centered about the Survey or any User defined Point in the Survey Data may be drawn from different Degree Squares for any given Survey The programme offers User options for the display mode of the selected Stations namely e The Search Centre position may be User selected The number of located Stations displayed may be set according to a required maximum number or a required maximum search radius e The display of located Stations may be in order of Distance Direction Point Name or Source File e Any of the located Statio
218. calculation of the defined unknown free Point An Active Data Line will have a Green Tick displayed in its Active column A Data Line defined as Non Active is data that exists but which will not be used for the current calculation A Non Active Data Line will have a Red Cross displayed in its Active column and the Observation information will be displayed in Red Italic text An Observations Active status can be changed using a single mouse click To change a Data Line s Active status click the Mouse LHB in the column marked Active in the appropriate display Line 6 Systems for Botswana Lesotho Namibia Swaziland and Zimbabwe Users in these countries may now set their localized Lo System the Bessel s System for Namibia as the current system A small flag at the top left of the display in the Co ordinate File Editing Programme will indicate the current System in use Apart from the flags for these countries the South African flag will indicate either the RSA Lo System or the RSA WG System the Irish flag the Irish Grid the Union Jack either the U K National Grid or the National GPS Grid and an appropriate U T M flag will indicate the use of that system Local Systems have no flag set 7 Changing to another Co ordinate Observation or Tacheometric File In order to switch to a different Co ordinate Observation or Tacheometric File do a Mouse RHB click when running the appropriate Editing Programme Fo
219. can be used for example for the following functions Determining the Y X Z values for any new Peg from which two other fixed Pegs can be seen This method has the advantage that the Surveyor can determine where he wants to put a new Peg place the Peg set up under it and then fix the Peg using this method without having to set up at any other Peg Checking the Y X Z values for any existing Peg from which two other fixed Pegs can be seen When checking an existing Peg this method provides a convenient and full technique for verifying the relative positions of the Set Up Peg and the two sighted Back Pegs Calculating the Y X Z values for a Peg on a new Inter connected by a Raise to a lower Inter This method fixes the new Peg from twin Pegs established over the Raise and whose plumb lines can be sighted from both Inters the Twin Raise solution The plumb line Pegs themselves are fixed from existing Pegs on the lower Inter The three Pegs on the upper Inter can either be in a straight line or can form the apices of a triangle When using this option the following procedure should be followed On the new Inter set two new Pegs such that their plumb lines can be lowered down through the Raise to be visible from the lower Inter containing the existing Pegs These plumb line Pegs should be set as far apart as possible to provide the best orientation accuracy Place two buttons on each of these plumb lines to be visible fr
220. carry out the above process once For surveys covering large areas in excess of 10Km in length or width for example the programme will automatically re adjust its central Point whenever necessary and therefore its 1 by 1 square It is only necessary for the User to identify the System of the Source Data even this is not required if a SURPAC Co ordinate file is used as the Source Data set the required transformation options and then either select a Source Data file or start manually entering written co ordinates The Lo System Cape Datum and WG Hartebeesthoek94 Datum Systems The following discussion is essentially that used with the introduction of the Weighted Helmert Transformation programme nearly two years ago However it was decided to repeat the discussion as the information contained below is of high importance to this current programme Mathematically the task of converting planar co ordinates derived from ellipsoids that have different parameters Axis major and Axis minor is not a difficult one as long as these co ordinates have been derived using the same ellipsoid to plane projection Fortunately the pre existing Southern African Lo System the Cape Datum based on the Clarke 1880 modified ellipsoid the global UTM System using either the Clarke 1880 modified or the WGS 84 ellipsoid and the new South African WG System the Hartebeesthoek94 Datum based on the WGS 84 ellipsoid all use the Transverse
221. cking the System Set button on the Actions Bar menu then Clicking the option Remove existing Security Password and giving the necessary Password Page 107 of 312 Modified Sending a Co ordinate File to a Microsoft Excel file This function has been improved in that the information transferred to the Excel spread sheet file now conforms to the Options set for the Co ordinate File Listing and does not simply contain the entire file as was the case before For example if you need to create an Excel spread sheet containing only Points having a certain Description then make sure that on the Options for Co ordinate File Listing form the Use Point Description option is set to Yes and that the Description entered is the one required Once the list is displayed Click the MS Excel File button at the bottom of the display form The list as displayed will be sent to a new Excel spread sheet and this sheet will be displayed Assuming that you have Excel installed on your computer Modified Manual entry of Observation Data for Resections and Trilaterations This function applies to the Least Squares Adjustment Single Point Fix programme Users may now elect to manually enter observations into the calculation form or as before read the data from a pre loaded Observation file Note that in the case of directly or manually entered data these data will not be stored for any future use Once the calculation has been completed the
222. clicking in the Drop Down list The Information Form can be cleared by clicking the X Button in its top right corner Re displaying the Form can be done by either clicking the item in the Drop Down list or by selecting the appropriate option after clicking the Options Button Page 7 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 03 Release 04 Summary of SURPAC modifications made in Version 5 03 Release 04 1 2 Downloading and Uploading facilities for the SOKKIA SET300 SET500 and SET600 Series Fix up of the premature Page Printing problem when exiting from Polars Joins Intersections etc This was a problem only encountered with some Printers Fix up of the Line Running problem where the closure Point had its Calc Page Number incorrectly changed When an Observation file is opened in the Observation File Editing programme it is now checked for any deleted lines If the number of deleted lines exceeds 3 then the file is automatically Purged This is to prevent possible problems that can be encountered when Observation files containing large amounts of deleted lines are used for Network Adjustment etc The CAD Plotting Programme see the General Menu has been extended to accommodate an unlimited number of lines arcs and or circles Amongdt other things this option allows for the importation of large DXF files This has been tested for DXF files of up to 12MB in size Page 8 of 312 Modif
223. cons and Working Stations Any Point may be defined as being a Detail Point simply by setting the descriptive character as being D For example if the current Co ordinate File Description Code for a Corner of Wall is set as 04 then for such a Detail Point simply set its Description Code as 04D For both the Working Plan and the General CAD programmes the Detail Point symbol is a small black square with an included white cross For all other SURPAC CAD programmes the Detail Points category is ignored For the listing of a Cadastral Co ordinate File the inclusion of the Detail Points category is optional as for all other categories New Working Plan CAD Monochrome Display and Symbols The Working Plan CAD programme can now support Monochrome Sheet creation and output as well as the standard colour format Users wishing to create Monochrome Working Plan Sheets for the purpose of copying and or photo reductions can now do so by simply selecting the Monochrome Display option WP Beacon Legend Mononchrome Beacon Placed Beacon Found Beacon Adopted Beacon Not Adopted Calculated Point Reference Mark Detail Point Trig Beacon or TSM Station Permanent Station Temporary Page 88 of 312 To switch between the normal Colour Display and the Monochrome Display click the Working Plan main menu heading Edit then select either the Display Sheet using Standard Co
224. ction are displayed in black When a Direction is observed one way only the line will be shown as a two thirds solid line and a one third dotted line When directions are observed both ways a solid black line will be shown Programme Features After computing the Network or single Point Fix the results of the Least Squares Adjustment will be displayed on the output sheet At the foot of the sheet will be a series of option buttons and the Plot Network button is the third button from the left Clicking this button will produce a default display of the Network on an A3 sheet This default display can now be modified using the options as outlined below Options using the Menu system e Refresh the Display You can re display the Sheet with the current cursor position as the sheet centre You can also use the F2 SFK to do this e Select a New Sheet Swing The Sheet display may be swung re oriented from 90 to 90 You can also use the F4 SFK to do this e Select an New Sheet Centre The position of the Network on the selected Sheet can be adjusted by re setting the Y X or E N values for the Sheet Centre When this option is selected the current Sheet Centre will be displayed by means of a blue cross e Display Point Information This option will display a Network Point s Name Co ordinates and Error Ellipse parameters if the Point has been adjusted in the Network in the information bar near the top of the screen e
225. ctionality of the Security Lock that blocks certain usage of a Co ordinate File has been extended Up to now setting a Security Lock by means of entering an appropriate Password prevented any Addition Modification or Deletion of Points in that Co ordinate File The option has now been added whereby you can still block any Modification or Deletion of Points but allow the Addition of New Points To apply a Security Lock to the current Co ordinate File Click the System Set button on the Actions Bar menu on the left hand side of the Co ordinate File Editing programme form Click the option Set Security Password if required A form will then be displayed informing you of the format of the Password that needs to be entered If you decide to continue a new form will be displayed This form is used to enter and check your Password and it also allows you to select the option Allow Addition of New Points to this Co ordinate File If you select this option i e the small box contains a cross then you or anyone else will be able to Add New Points to the file but will not be allowed to Modify or Delete any existing Points even those Points you Add If you do not select this option i e the small box is empty then nobody will be able to Add Modify or Delete any Points This means that the file can only be used for displaying and or printing its contents Any Co ordinate File having a Security Lock can have this lock removed by again Cli
226. currently running programme and to back track until the Co ordinate File Editing programme is reached This Esc function works as follows f you are currently in some programme function such as viewing the programmes available options then the Esc key i e pressing the Esc key on the keyboard will take you out of this function and back to the programme itself Pressing the Esc key again will return you to the previously run programme or to the Co ordinate File Editing programme f you are running a programme but not any of its functions as described above then pressing the Esc key will either return you to the previously run programme or to the Co ordinate File Editing programme Note that this Esc function does not work for any of the SURPAC CAD programmes as these programmes use the Esc key to carry out abort actions within the CAD programmes itself New Auto Compilation of a Description List This function is only applicable to Engineering Format Co ordinate File Beacon Description Lists Cadastral Format Descriptions must comply with the Description Codes used by SURPAC Software The purpose of this function is to allow for an automatic re compilation of a Beacon Description List for a Co ordinate File for which the Descriptions used in the Co ordinate File do not match those held in the Beacon Description List If a Co ordinate File is imported from an ASCII file for example then it is possible th
227. d Flipped or Deleted at any future time 9 For Cadastral CAD Sheets such as Diagrams General Plans Working Plans and Sectional Title Plans a security feature has been added when adding an Image to the Sheet With reference to the MML mentioned on the previous page the most common Image likely to be used on these CAD Sheets would be the responsible Land Surveyor s scanned signature Hence this security feature requires that a Password be entered before an Image can be added to the Sheet The default Password is ABCD1234 and it is advisable that the responsible Land Surveyor sets a new Password to ensure that only he she can add an Image signature to the Sheet Summary on Importing Adding Images to a CAD Sheet SURPAC CAD programmes are able to import create export and manipulate Images of the following file types BitMap bmp JPEG Files jpg TIF Files tif and tiff GIF Files GIF Icons ICO Standard Metafiles WMF Clip art images Page 166 of 312 Enhanced Metafiles EMF When a SURPAC CAD programme imports an Image it creates a copy of this image and stores this copy as a part of the sheet information The original Image file is never changed by any subsequent Sheet Image manipulation in SURPAC All SURPAC CAD programmes have the ability to both Import and Export graphic images using parameters from associated TIFF World Files TFW These small text files which may be attached to Image
228. d The routine now used for volume determination in Cloud Compare is now as follows NB The Cloud Compare Software is currently only available in 64 bit format at this stage Future versions will support both 32 bit and 64 bit Windows operating systems Computing Volumes from SURPAC DTMs in CloudCompare A useful benefit from creating Delaunay Mesh files for the Surface and Base DTMs is the ability to compute the Volume between these two surfaces This is done as a single calculation The Volume estimation calculation in Cloud Compare allows for the selection of two loaded models These two models can be either the Surface and Base models of a single survey such as a dump or open pit or they can be any two models having a common overlap area First in the DB Tree window highlight select the two Cloud files not the mesh files between which the volume is to be determined DB Tree y 4 V amp Polifin_Base_PC asc C Surpac_CC 4 V Polifin_Base_PC Cloud W Polifin_Base_PC Cloud m 4 F Polifin_ Surface PC asc C Surpac 4 V Polifin_Surface_PC Cloud W Polifin_Surface_PC Clou The image above shows the highlighted selected entities being the Cloud files for the Surface Polyfin_Surface_PC and for the base Polyfin_Base_PC Now follow the menu path Tools Volume Compute 2 5D volume The following form will now be displayed Page 308 of 312 Volume calculation
229. d then it may be modified by clicking the appropriate Button that will automatically add subtract 180 to the Direction Users now have the option of setting the default Stand Number for a new calculation to the next logical number or to get the programme to locate and display the existing Stand Number closest to the cursor position at the time the CTRL D Command is given Page 35 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 05 Release 05 1 All CAD Programmes Improved DXF file import functions All SURPAC CAD programmes have been modified to enable the import of AutoCAD R14 2000 type DXF files These DXF files can now be imported whilst maintaining the following attributes Line Colours Line Thicknesses Line Styles Text Fonts Symbol Fonts Text Styling Text Colours The inclusion of the Text Fonts and Symbol Fonts depends on whether the PC running SURPAC supports i e has installed the appropriate Fonts that have been used by the AutoCAD DXF file that is being imported The adoption of the DXF Line and Text Colours is most evident when using the CAD Drawing amp Plotting Programme as these colours are displayed when the programme identifies the various DXF Layers in the importing file For the General Plan Working Plan and Diagram Programmes Users are forced to link an incoming DXF Layer to one of the Sheet Pens Pens 1 to 8 2a Diagram CAD Programme New Diagram Creation Options Creating a New Diagram
230. d Lines will be used to form the Arc tangents of a connecting circular Arc This Arc may be defined via a given circular radius or a Tangent Length LIP Point Intersection Two non parallel User identified Lines will be used to Intersect at a Point The trimming of the intersecting Lines depends on the options chosen in the LIO Command below LIS Splay Intersection Two non parallel User identified Lines will be made to intersect with a Splay connection between the two Lines at the Intersection Either the Splay Distance or the Splay Base Distance is defined by the User The splay Line will be calculates at the half angle of the two intersecting Lines LIC Line Parallel or Perpendicular Check If the two defined Lines are Parallel or Perpendicular within a User defined angular limit then this will be reported by means of a standard Windows Message Box If the Lines are Parallel the separation distance will also be displayed Otherwise the directions of the two Lines will be displayed in the Message Box LIO Line Intersect Option Setting Use this Command to set the various Line Intersect Options You can define which Lines are to be trimmed in the case of a Point Intersection whether a Radius or Tangent Distance is to be entered for an Arc Intersection whether an Apex Distance or a Base Distance is to be entered for a Splay Intersection and finally the angular accuracy required when Parallel or Perpendicular
231. d by entering the Names of the consecutive Bend Points These Bend Points must exist in the currently defined Co ordinate File This method is best suited for the rapid development of preliminary Long sections over large areas where a Height accuracy of 3 Metres is sufficeint A form will then be displayed that allows you to enter the Bend Points that define the Required Long Section These Points must exist in the current Co ordinate File NB An easy way to import a series of Bend Points is to define a Path in Google Earth that follows the required route This Path can then be imported into the SURPAC General CAD programme After this use the option that Converts Line terminals into Points The Y X values of these Points will then be stored in the Co ordinate File Finally use the Co ordinate File s Import interpolated Google Earth Heights option to height these Bend Points amp Long Section interpolation from Google Earth ES N Chainage of the First Long Section Point Listed Below 0 000 Bend Name Chainage Y Co ord X Co ord Elevation L9 3753811 898 34 742 R 55 080 652 3 754 622 892 338 353 3755272 935 265 187 EE 2640 931 _55 990 368 3 755 953 464 _ 282 743 555 051 56 108 720 3 757 346 722 240 122 55 200 183 3 759 096 931 1 038 511 6925 935 54 658 160 3759535 401 1061 422 Required Interpolation Interval along Section Line s 50 000 X
232. ddition of the main Toolbar Users now have three methods for accessing the more common programmes in SURPAC 1 By selecting the required programme from the drop down Menus which are displayed by Clicking on any of the main Menu Headings For all programmes By Clicking the appropriate icon on the main Toolbar For selected programmes By using the appropriate Special Function Key on the keyboard refer to the write up for Version 5 24 Release 01 For selected programmes All SURPAC CAD programmes have had their Toolbars moved from the right hand side of the screen to the top of the screen immediately below the programme s menu heading bar These Toolbars are fixed but can be removed hidden by the User if required once the programme is running All SURPAC CAD programmes now have built in Help menus The Help topics basically follow the programme s Menu headings To view a Help topic Click the Menu Heading Help which is always the last Menu heading and then select the required topic from the displayed menu Page 131 of 312 Each topic displayed will cover the available Commands or functions for that topic The F1 key is still applicable for the overall Help pages New features for the General Plan amp Sectional Title CAD Programmes Sheet Protection The data for a General Plan or Sectional Title Sheet may now be protected to prevent any unauthorized data changes For example once a GP Sheet has been finalized
233. de the option of de selecting the last figural Point or of Aborting the Area calculation 5 Cadastral General Plan Programme Programme enhancements 5 1 New function Construct a Double Headed Arrow To draw a Double Headed Arrow do the following Select the required Pen Colour and Line Thickness the line Style will default to Solid From the Line main menu heading select the Draw a Double Arrow Item Move the cursor to the required starting position no snapping will take place and click the Mouse LHB Move to the required end position and click the Mouse RHB 5 2 New function Stand Erf Area Calculation by User Point Definition Areas may be computed automatically using the graphic line location technique by pressing the keyboard A key or by selecting this item from the Data main menu However sometimes this Page 52 of 312 method cannot be used due to a complexity of Lines or other information The function described below can be used for any User defined figure whether Lines exist or not To compute a Stand Erf Area by Point definition or selection do the following If the Stand Erf number has already been written on the GP sheet then move the Cursor close to this Text Item to enable the programme to lock on to it as the default Stand Erf number for the Area storage From the Data main menu heading select the Area by Point Definition Item or just simultaneously press
234. de this rectangle could result in unrealistic adjustments being made to the traverse Points The overriding principle of any transformation based on the comparison of common Points is that these common Points define a framework within which the Points to be transformed should lie Extrapolation beyond this framework should be avoided An extreme example of the above problem was brought to my attention recently in which a traverse was run between two Points lying about 1 5m apart from each other However the traverse included new Points which were up to 25m away from these two control Points The Helmert Transformation adjustment technique was then used to adjust the traverse Due to the poor configuration of the traverse plus the fact that the distance from either control Point to the furthest traverse Point was some 17 times greater than the distance between the control Points themselves lead to the Point co ordinate adjustments being distorted To help prevent this type of problem occurring in future the Field Traverse programme has been modified to issue a warning if the Helmert Transformation adjustment technique is attempted for a traverse for which this adjustment technique is unsuitable Users should be aware that the above principle of restricting transformation Points to within a framework defined by a set of common control Points also applies to System to System transformation programmes such as Weighted Helmert Transformati
235. der for Windows NT and Windows 2000 New SURPAC Actions Bar Menus The majority of the SURPAC programmes have until now used a left hand side display of Buttons indicating the various programme options and or functions These Buttons have now been replaced by Actions Bar Menus Each menu item in an Actions Bar Menu uses both Text and Graphic entities to identify the action that will be carried out by selecting that menu item As the cursor is run down or across an Actions Bar Menu the menu item currently under the cursor is highlighted The inclusion of the graphic entities in the Actions Bar Menu makes their use more intuitive and obvious than the previously used Buttons To select a menu item on an Actions Bar Menu move the cursor onto the item required and then click the item single click of the Mouse LHB Please note that the use of these Actions Bar Menus has been optimized for a Screen Display Area of 1024X768 pixels This is the optimal resolution for running SURPAC Software Page 74 of 312 If you are still running SURPAC using a Screen Display Area of 800X600 pixels then use the Windows Control Panel to reset this to a display of 1024X768 pixels At the same time check that the Color setting is set to 16 Bit Color do not use 24 Bit or 32 Bit as these colour levels use up large amounts of graphic memory and will limit scaling of Sheets in the SURPAC CAD programmes
236. dit Mesh Delaunay 2 5D XY plane A small form will appear requesting the required maximum edge length for the triangulation For a standard SURPAC DTM with both surface and Base DTMs the default value of 0 00000 can be accepted However if the DTM is a Surface model only and is of irregular shape you may need to apply a maximum triangle edge length to prevent the programme extrapolating beyond the surveyed area When ready press the OK button The triangulation mesh process should only take a few seconds Once complete go to the Properties display at the bottom left of the screen and check Click the box called Normals The resulting model is much better defined than that created under Option 1 with sharper edges and colourization defining topographical features such as slopes peaks and valleys Repeat the above exercise for the Base DTM if applicable and if Volumes are required so that Mesh models for both surfaces are computed As the Surface DTM will normally hide the Base DTM unless the survey is of an excavation the Base DTM can be viewed on its own by clicking on the check box to the left of the name of the Surface DTM Checking this box again will make the Surface DTM visible again Adding Contours to the Surface DTM display in CloudCompare If a pseudo DXF Contour file has been created in the Contour Creation Plotting CAD programme these Contours can be displayed simultaneously with the Surface DTM model NB W
237. diting form is displayed Click on the Options button From the displayed list select the Generate Sections from defined Bend Points and Google Earth Heights option and then Click the OK button amp Long Section Creation Editing _ 2 Chainage Level Description Side Slope Y Edit 0 000 34 742 fia a A 40 367 int Fila K 46 072 Print File EFTE ASCII File 22 r 59 398 67 879 77 923 Add Point t 90 397 101 048 110 719 121 072 130 859 152 003 190 151 225 638 255 926 279 263 iia Meat 7 301 107 320 074 336 256 v Page 201 of 312 amp Long Section File Creation Options Generate Sections from a Tacheometric File plus defined Bend Points interpolate Sections from a Tacheometric File plus defined Bend Points Create Sections from a Contour Triangulation File plus defined Bend Points Load Section information from a Handi Data LEVELS Lng Sect Disk File Load Long Section Information from an ASCII Disk File Merge Long Sectional Information from a SURPAC Long Section File N Generate Sections from defined Bend Points and Google Earth Heights Create a Series of Grouped Random Section Files from a Tachy File Using this method SURPAC will Import Long section Height data from the Google Earth DTM interpolated along a User defined Centre Line or series of consecutive Centre Lines and at a User defind interval The Centre Line position s are define
238. down the Mouse LHB as the cursor is moved Once the drawing tool is correctly positioned click the OK button on the dialog box The newly created Placemark will be added to My Places Warning if you have a Temporary Place currently open at the time of the construction then the Placemark may be added to that Temporary Place The created Placemark now needs to be saved as a KML file in order for SURPAC to be able to import it To do this locate the Placemark under either My Places or Temporary Places and right click on it A pop up menu will appear and on this menu click the Save Place as menu item On the displayed Save file form ensure that the Save as Type item is set to KML kml The KML file may be saved to any folder but SURPAC KML files are generally kept in the C Surpac_GE folder Finally click on the Save button Importing the Placemark into a SURPAC Co ordinate File as a Point Before attempting to import the Placemark data into a Co ordinate file first ensure that the file System is set to either the WGS 84 or GRS80 ellipsoids and that the Central Meridian of the WG System or Zone is correct for the point data to be imported In the SURPAC Co ordinate File Editing programme click on the Import GE KML button on the Actions bar menu From the displayed File Selection form select the KML file that contains the required Placemark information The Placemark position will then be converted to its equivalent Y X
239. duplicate Line etc and then to rectify these in the normal manner Grid Marks and Headings need to be added and the GP Co ordinate and Area Data can be generated and then imported onto the GP Sheet at the required location Page 287 of 312 The SURPAC Auto Diagram Creation function There are now five methods for compiling a Diagram in SURPAC Method 1 Selecting Points from the Co ordinate file List This is the original method for Diagram creation in SURPAC Please refer to previous documentation Method 2 Graphically Selecting Points from a Working Plan Sheet This method for Diagram creation pre exists in SURPAC Please refer to previous documentation Method 3 Graphically Selecting Points from a General CAD Sheet This method for Diagram creation pre exists in SURPAC Please refer to previous documentation Method 4 Entering a Stand Number shown on a General CAD Sheet This is a new method for Diagram creation It is a semi automatic method that only requires the entry of a Stand Number that exists on the current General CAD Sheet In order for this method to work data for the township or sub division area in question must exist on the current General CAD Sheet If the township has been generated in the General Plan CAD programme then all the Line and Text data must first be imported in to General CAD Sheet This can be done as follows e Set Up a General CAD Sheet in the normal manner e click on the Impor
240. e No Button Contours will now generated at the required interval using the Surface Triangulation imported from the DAT file Debugging and small programme changes made in Version 5 04 Release 01 e The maximum number of Placing Checking Points per Set Up when generating Setting Out Sheets has been increased from 300 to 1000 e Creating BreakLines in the Contour Creation and Plotting Programme has been improved and speeded up The maximum number of BreakLines per Sheet is 200 and the maximum number of Points per BreakLine is also 200 e The Printing of the Observation Abstract Sheet for the Single Point Least Squares Programme has been enabled e The problem associated with using a long file name in excess of 16 characters in the Least Squares Level Network Adjustment Programme has been rectified e The Raw Data Printing of an Observation file now makes allowances for extended Header information and angular and linear accuracy options e When Merging Selected Points from another Co ordinate file it is now possible to select the required Points from a displayed list by clicking them instead of entering the names manually Page 12 of 312 In the Digital Terrain Modelling Programme the Grid Mesh 3D DTM Plotter Output now uses the assigned Line Colours as in the Screen display and does not plot in Monochrome as it did in the past In the Least Squares Single Point Fix Programme the initial Information Form wil
241. e when information is to be imported from a DXF file and when a mathematically correct layout is to be constructed based on the imported DXF information In this case when importing the data set all DXF Layers to be imported into Pen 8 there is an Option on the DXF Import form that will automatically do this if required After the importing is complete select the BackGround option as ON by pressing the F11 key For data that already exist on a General CAD Plotting Sheet use the Reset Line Attributes and Reset Text Attributes Commands to change required data to Pen 8 for speed use the global Change All Lines of this type when resetting Lines 4 The General CAD Plotting Programme Importing Graphic Images This function has been improved so as to ensure that an Image is imported at the correct scale relative to the Sheet onto which it is being imported This requirement is important for example when importing Orthophoto images such as those supplied by the Chief Directorate Surveys and Mapping Mowbray As these type of images have no defining grid lines or marks it is essential that the top left corner of the image for which co ordinates are provided is correctly positioned and that the image imported at the correct scale When selecting an image file for importing the selection form now includes the option Import the Image applying the Scale Factor of The default value is 1 However if you are im
242. e Earth only provides for limited line drawing options Available options are line width and line colour and apply to straight lines only SURPAC has always provided for line styling dotted lines dashed lines etc by means of adding extended functions to handle such lines New functions have now been added to the SURPAC General CAD programme to enable the plotting of Arcs and Circles on Google Earth via a KML file Arcs may be solid dotted or dashed A lt r Da l K sre F Sa ae Mm A Oe MAS nd Ae Example of a SURPAC KML file displayed on Google Earth including Arcs and Circles Page 248 of 312 This function has been extended to allow Users to select or de select the data items that are to be imported Users can now select the following when importing from another General CAD Sheet All Items Default Lines Arcs and Circles Text Items Images Topo Symbols Hatch Items polygons As before Users can also select which Layers to import port from SURPAC General CAD Sheet C Surpac Software Brian ST Large W2 General CAD Importing Options Layer Target Copy all imported General CAD Data Items to the Current Layer Layer 001 Cadastral Option Copy Imported General CAD Layer Data into separate existing CAD Layers Make all Imported Layers Active with the Current Layer Layer 001 x Layer Colours Change all SURPAC CAD Layer Colours to match the corresponding Imported Layers Leave the SURP
243. e Elements or simply just Click left button or right button anywhere on the currently displayed Co ordinate file headings Select this menu item or x Click anywhere on this heading display SURPAC Ver 5 32 for Windows XP Vista Co ordinate File Editing C Surpac s Sampiles L5352 youngsyille township DAR File General Conversions eering al Open or Cfeate a File 3 View an ABCII File fte File DataBhse Options Srdinate Descriptions F B Trig Names 897 100 450 033 l Bryanston WT 4 i sa Reset Co prdinate File System l Set Co orWinate File Elements ad al 905 194 988 29P 2 Re4nitialize Co ordinate File 905 203 855 34P 905 132 613 01P 904 977 799 22C Printer Page Options 904 977 449 01F 905 014 183 22C 905 013 783 01F Set the SURPAC MenuStyle 033 Bryanston WT 905 114 953 01P 902 324 600 033 Display SURPAC Calculator 903 450 130 033 ee E n 900 377 300 033 Set the Function Key Allocations 906 184 450 033 Set the Screen Display Colours 906 275 430 033 A 904 779 730 031 Orlando East E setthe Sereen Sireiftorizoaini 910 850 650 034 Orlando West By 1C S Samples L5952 Youngsville Township 905 444 947 22C P 905 444 718 01F B 2 C Surpac98 Samples Jooste 905 737 728 01P B _ 3 CASurpac98 Samples Doornkop New Lo 905 285 925 22C Pe 905 110 569 22C B l 4C Surpac98 Samples Doomkop 905 352 507 01P 4 Exit SURPAC Software 905 154 488
244. e List by Distance ly x All Points v Import Google Earth DTM Heights X Print List Sort the List by Direction O Set the Maximum Search Radius Kms 50km z Sort the List by Name O i View List on Google Earth Sort the List by Height Diff Maximum Number of BMs to Locate Nearest 20 The Locate and Add Nearest Bench Marks programme display x Danatk lei s lE Bench Mark xvbx RSA WG System Hartebeesthoek94 Datum Degree Square 2523BC System WG 23 Y 70 890m X 2818167m _ BM Height 1041 394m GE Height 1 051 325m_ GE Height Shift 9 93m Lat 25 28 07 5S me Lon 23 42 17 7E Sad LED 53 Info Nie Genivelleerd SURPAC Surveying Software Display of Bench Marks on Google Earth showing information for a selected Bench Mark My thanks to Corn de Jager Land Surveyor for suggesting the incorporation of this feature Page 247 of 312 New Google Earth features in SURPAC New Icons for SURPAC Google Earth Displays A new set of updated and improved icons is now used by SURPAC Software as follows 2 Trigonometrical Beacons Town Survey Marks 75 Bench Marks Survey Beacons Points B Image Placemarks or Polygons Please note that the hot Spot that identifies the position of the item is the bottom centre of the icon Drawing Arcs Circles and Dashed Dotted Lines on Google Earth The KML language used to generate KML files on Googl
245. e Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons programme unfortunately omitted the WGS 84 data for the Degree Square DS3128 If you do work in this area then please re download the file called SurpacUp Zip available on the same Internet Page as the SURPAC Upgrade files Refer to Page 1 of this document The Diagram CAD programme The menu item to Re size the Figure was disabled The Re set Text Attributes function for changing a limited box of text items defined by the Frame command was applying the new text attributes to all the text on the diagram Page 85 of 312 New General CAD Topographical Symbols and Line Styles SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 20 Release 03 The General CAD programme now incorporates some useful Topographical Symbols plus a new Line Styling option that can be used to create Lines of various styles such as Fence Lines Electricity Lines and Telephone Lines Topographical Symbols General CAD Programme only To view the available Symbols plus other related functions click the General CAD main menu Topo Symbols NB If your PC is set to the low 800 X 600 pixel limit you will have to click the main menu Mark Pnt then click the menu item Select Mark Topo Symbols To place a Topo Symbol on the current CAD Sheet move the cursor to the desired position and Right Click i e Click the mouse RHB Click the main menu Topo Symbols heading and then click the requi
246. e Republic of South Africa and to surveys whose co ordinate system is defined as being in the WG WGS 84 Ellipsoid System in South Africa the Hartebeesthoek94 Datum It is not necessary for the User to define any source file for the location of the Bench Marks as SURPAC has a built in Source file called BenchMarksRSA sbm This file must exist in the folder in which SURPAC Software is installed usually the folder C Surpac Software The above Source file contains the double precision geographical positions Latitude and Longitude of about 18 000 Bench Marks throughout the Republic of South Africa approximately co ordinated in the Hartebeesthoek94 Datum system This programme will automatically search and extract the required Bench Mark information from the above Source file Since the Source file Bench Marks are stored in Lat Long format any Degree Square boundaries become irrelevant to the programme Surveys can be located close to any Degree Square boundary and the programme will still generate its own temporary Degree Square of Points centered about the Survey or any defined Point in the Survey Data may be drawn from different Degree Squares for any given Survey The programme offers User options for both the selection of Bench Marks and the display mode used namely e The Search Centre position may be User selected The number of located Bench Marks displayed may be set according to a req
247. e WGS 1984 ellipsoid By clicking on the View List on Google Earth Button if active all the selected required Stations will be displayed on Google Earth Clicking on any of these displayed Stations in Google Earth will display the Station s system co ordinate and height information Latitude Longitude and point description Page 253 of 312 B Station STA 12mm Iron Peg RSA WG System Hartebeesthoek94 Datum System WG 31 Y 4961 236 X 2694185 443 Z 503 692 Lat 24 21 04 21398 Lon 30 57 03 9895E SURPAC Surveying Software Display of Stations on Google Earth showing information for a selected Station My thanks to Land Surveyors Xan Swart and Willem Knoetze for suggesting this feature The full set of Google Earth icons used by SURPAC Software is now 2 Trigonometrical Beacons Town Survey Marks Please note that the hot Spot 75 Bench Marks that identifies the position of the item is the bottom centre of the Survey Beacons Points icon B Image Placemarks or Polygons ee My Stations Page 254 of 312 General Modifications Importing Google Earth Polygons and Points These routines have been modified to be able to handle differing techniques of KML file creation in different applications Google Earth KML Polygons can be imported using the General CAD programme and KML Points can be imported using the Co ordinate File Editing programme Creating Hatched filled
248. e ability to rotate zoom and scan the model and to simultaneously view different aspects of the model in different windows The second objective is to compute volumes to use as a check for the volumes created in SURPAC for the same model Options for viewing a 3D Model There are various ways of displaying a 3D model in CloudCompare Here we will describe two of these ways Each method has its advantages in relation to speed and correct visualization of the model Method 1 This method is the simplest and fastest but does not always provide the clearest or best defined models Once the imported DTM model is displayed as shown on the previous page move the cursor to the top left corner of the display screen The caption will appear Click on the sign 2 or 3 time until the gaps in the model grid appear to be filled by the enlarged points Although quick and easy this method ails to produce a model with the same detail and accuracy as the other 2 methods The display can be reverted back to its origin form by clicking on the sign 2 or 3 times Method 2 This method is a bit more complex but still fairly straight forward and produces far better models Importantly it also produces the necessary Mesh model Delaunay 2 5D required for volume calculations To apply this method first highlight the Surface DTM model i e its Point Cloud in the Database tree then follow the menu path Page 267 of 312 E
249. e careful of any Constant differences that may exist between the two Tacheometric files as this will prevent Merging Re Triangulating a Polygon Re Triangulation of the Polygon area can be carried out using the pre existing Points unless they have been Deleted or on the Merged Points or if applicable on both sets of Points Disabling and Re enabling BreakLine Seqments Any BreakLine Segments may now be Disabled and or Re enabled A BreakLine is composed of Line Segments connecting Points having a common Description A BreakLine can either be created using the Auto BreakLine function or constructing it by using a Point by Point identification on the Screen After an Auto BreakLine creation it is possible that one or more of the BreakLine Segments are not required This can happen for example if there are two separate topographical features each having Points with the description TB Top of Bank to identify the features Using Auto BreakLine and defining the common description as BL would cause these two feature to be linked by the BreakLine when obviously they should not be By Page 24 of 312 disabling the unwanted BreakLine Segment s the two features can be made as separate entities without having to use different descriptions for each feature To Disable a BreakLine Segment a Move the cursor close to the required segment then click the Mouse RHB From the BreakLines menu select the Disable a BreakLi
250. e format mesh Object File Format File types supported by CloudCompare Binary ASCII Dil Kad lad Page 275 of 312 Features Normals Colors RGB Scalar fields gt 1 Labels viewports display options etc Normals Colors RGB Scalar fields gt 1 Colors RGB Various scalar fields see LAS 1 4 specifications Normals Colors RGB or I Scalar field intensity Colors RGB Robust normals can be computed at loading time Colors RGB Normals Scalar fields gt 1 Normals Colors RGB or Scalar fields all Single texture Normals Colors RGB Scalar fields gt 1 File format or Colors RGB binary Materials and texture ep eee EET ee format Colors RGB ai ESRI Shape file yeep Polyline s polygon s Scalar fields 1 per entity format Contour plot s etc pdms PDMS macros ASCII haad kE a Rh Band O mac RASTER Common raster binary a as scalar fields formats GDAL ce output ASCII 1 Calibrated picture s pane 3D keypoints 2D images Standard images etc Point cloud scalar field m cloud normals tpn Mensi Trimble ASCII Soisic laser scanner Multiple stations ia sensor poses meta file Cloud calibrated All camera poses pictures Geo georef Mascaret profiles ASCII Profiles Mascaret polylines Cloud as ASCII ba matrix File types supported by CloudCompare Continued Editing and Colourizing an Imported Point Cloud Mesh in Cl
251. e information line displayed for each Station is too long to be displayed in total on a standard display page To view the full Station information use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the data display Each displayed Station will initially have a green tick displayed next to it at the right hand side of the display This implies that the Station is a required Station which would be added to the current Co ordinate File when the Store and Exit Button is clicked or displayed on Google Earth when the View List on Google Earth Button is clicked If any Station is not required then either click on that Station s green tick or Double Click on any one of the displayed Station s data items The symbol will be changed to a red cross and the Bench Mark s co ordinate display will be changed to a grey italic font This Station will now be flagged as not required and will not be added to the current Co ordinate File or displayed on Google Earth Clicking a Point s red cross or Double Clicking on any one of the displayed Station s data items will reverse the above process NB The Select All and De Select All Buttons can be used to designate all Stations as Selected Required or De Selected Not Required respectively A Station may be Deleted from the My Stations file by highlighting the required Station line by Clicking on it and then Clicking the Delete Point Button Once a S
252. e operation Defining the Polygon and required Options The apices of the Polygon must be existing Points The programme will not let you define a Polygon Point unless it is able to snap onto an existing Point From the Triangulation menu select the Triangulation Polygon Functions item From the displayed Option form select the required Options Note that some Options are linked For example the programme will not let you delete the existing Polygon Points without deleting the Triangulation associated with those Points Move the cursor close to the required First Point of the Polygon and click the Mouse LHB Now move from Point to Point along the perimeter of the required Polygon clicking on each Point with the Mouse MB Finally when the Last Point is reached indicate this by clicking the Mouse RHB For the best results the Polygon perimeter lines should coincide with existing Triangulation lines Deleting Triangles In order for a Triangle to be Deleted all three sides must either lie inside the Polygon or be contiguous with one or more Polygon perimeter lines Deleting Points In order for a Point to be Deleted it must lie inside the Polygon Polygon perimeter Points will not be deleted Merging Points The programme will prompt for the name of the Tacheometric file from which the Points are to be Merged Any Points from this file that lie inside not on the perimeter of the Polygon will be Merged B
253. e programme To start the Command Click on the programme s Draw or Line main Menu heading and then select the Fixed Area Calculations item from the displayed menu Or simultaneously press the Ctrl and S keys on the keyboard Move the cursor close to the line E8 E7 and Click the Mouse LHB This defines E8 as the first Point of the existing polygon and E8 E7 as the direction of the first side of the new Polygon s You must now proceed in a Clockwise direction and Click either the Mouse LHB or MB on all the other lines except the last line that are common to the existing Polygon and the first new Polygon Finally Click the Mouse RHB on the last line common to the existing Polygon and the first new Polygon This will define the last Point of the existing Polygon and the direction of the last side of the new Polygon s The new Polygon side s that will be calculated will be between the first and last sides as defined above For this example Click the Mouse LHB on lines E8 E9 and E9 E10 Then Click the Mouse RHB on the line E10 E13 Hence E10 will be the last Point of the existing Polygon and E10 E13 will be the direction of the last side of the new Polygons stands The programme will now display a form in which you can define the required Direction of the new calculated side s of the new Polygon s the required Area of the new Polygon s the Number of new Polygons required Eithe
254. e requirements of Land Surveyors Mine Surveyors and Engineering Surveyors requiring high accuracy transformations for existing data and for GPS derived data As such this programme should not be confused with various other programmes that only offer approximate 0 5m 1 5m transformations for the purpose of small scale mapping or non survey related activities Due to the nature of the re adjustment of the Hartebeesthoek94 co ordinates see the discussion below using a transformation based on a table of adjustments or parameters for a given area cannot provide the same level of accuracy as that of a Weighted Helmert transformation that uses the 4 or 5 closest common Control Points lying around to the Point being transformed In spite of the high accuracy achieved by the programme it is very straight forward to use Once an initial transformation Point has been identified from whichever input source the programme will start by identifying a 1 wide strip centered on the Lon gitude of this Point All common control Points falling within this strip will be extracted from the Control files Using the Latitude of the Point as the co centre a localized Degree Square is then determined and data within this 1 by 1 square become the control data for the transformation This whole process takes approximately from 0 1 for a Pentium IV 1 9Ghz PC to 2 0 for a Pentium Il 450Mhz PC For normal surveys the programme will only need to
255. ea and the last used menu will be displayed If the File drop down menu is not displayed the Click on the CAD programme s File menu heading to display this menu Click on the menu item Sheet Output to a Printer Plotter Select and set up the required printing device On the Sheet Plotting Options form that will be displayed make sure that the Plot the Currently displayed Portion of the Sheet at the Current Scale Option is selected 9 Finally Click the OK button aa OND Modified Cadastral Diagram Construction Edit Programme The following Commands have been added to the programme s Line menu LB Line Bisect This will create a new Line perpendicular to and at the centre of the current Line Move the Cursor close to the Line through which a bisector is required Click the Mouse RHB and then Click the Line Bisect menu item The keyboard equivalent Command is LB LE Line Extend This will extend an existing Line from either terminal If the Line is Extended to a position that is closer than the current Snap Radius distance to another Line then the new terminal for the Extended Line will be Trimmed snapped onto this Line Move the Cursor close to the Line terminal of the Line that is to be Extended Click the Mouse RHB and then Click the Line Extend menu item The keyboard equivalent Command is LE Move the Cursor in the desired direction and you will see the Line extend or shrink as the Cur
256. ease the Mouse LHB Either the Horizontal or the Vertical Scroll Bar position indicator or both will change in response to this Panning action 4 Changes to the F5 Select new Screen Scale Command Pressing the F5 Special Function Key or the equivalent K key now displays a more useful scale selection form The form allows for either the entry of a required new Screen display scale or the selection of the scale from a list of scales The top Input Box will display the current Screen scale and allow you to enter a new scale If you want to use this method which is similar to the previous method then enter the required new scale and then either press the Enter key or click the OK button on the form It is only necessary to enter the actual scale number e g 500 not the whole item e g 1 500 The lower Selection list will highlight the scale value which is closest to the current Screen scale From this selection list move the Scroll Bar if necessary so that the required scale is visible then simply click that value 5 Using different Fonts for individual Text Items plus other Text Options Text Items can now be set to use a Font different from the defined Default Font The Default Font is that Font defined via the Sheet Setup Information menu item or the Select Plot File Default Font menu item When selecting the Write Text Item Command the WT Command the displayed Text Entry a
257. ed at a scale in the region of 1 2500 without any loss of detail quality This figure can vary from region to region but it is generally true for built up areas Google Earth therefore makes a vary useful visual display tool for SURPAC Users when it is interfaced or linked with survey co ordinate and or image data This interfacing can be in the form of Displaying the locations of Trig Beacons and or Town Survey Marks for a User selected area Displaying Beacons and Stations from a previous survey to help locate these points Displaying User selected Points in a Co ordinate file to help locate these points Displaying Points and or Lines from a survey plan or sheet to view their positions Displaying a survey plan or sheet itself as an overlay image on the earth surface etc SURPAC Version 5 35 now has the above interface options included which are described below Requirements to enable SURPAC interfacing with Google Earth 1 Google Earth must be installed on the computer If you do not already have Google Earth installed visit http earth google com and follow the on screen instructions for installing this software The basic version of Google Earth is free and is quite suitable for the SURPAC interface functions mentioned below There is a Google Earth Pro version available but at a cost of US 400 about R4000 2 The currently loaded Co ordinate file in SURPAC must use either the WGS 84 ellipsoid the GRS80 ellipsoid or any
258. ed attribute values see Pg 4 In order for a GIS or any other application to display the imported Lines with their correct attributes it needs to be able to read and apply these attribute values correctly SURPAC obviously is able to do this so that Shapefiles created in a SURPAC application can be imported by another SURPAC application with the Lines shown with their correct attributes Using a Shapefile is in fact a quite convenient and compact method for a User to transfer sheet information between programmes or from one User to another If the Lines are to be sent to a Shapefile then there is a further option that allows SURPAC to send the Lines using a pseudo Dashed Dotted technique This is useful for importing Lines into applications that are not able to make use of the above mentioned SURPAC Line attributes stored in the Shapefile Selecting his option will cause SURPAC to create Line dash and or dot segments between the Line terminals equivalent to the Line s Style This will produce an imported Line display that approximates the original Sheet Line data in Style but not in Width nor in Layer 5 Shapefile Text This option allows you to export Text items on the current Sheet to the Shapefile When SURPAC exports a Text item to the Shapefile it automatically populates the associated dbf file with the above mentioned attribute values see Pg 5 In order for a GIS or any other application to display the imported T
259. ed the Line terminal Height values 2 4 Heighting Points from the defined DTM Digital Terrain Model If a DTM File has been selected in the Sheet Setup Information function and if this DTM covers a portion or all of the current Plot Sheet then you can select the Point menu item Height Points from DTM This option will allocate DTM interpolated heights to all Points falling within the area covered by the defined DTM file A further option exists that will restrict the Heighting to those Points which have a null zero height value l e Points that are already Heighted will not be changed 2 5 New Image Commands for the General C A D Plotting Programme 2 5 1 Transforming a Sheet Image IT This Command is used for setting a Sheet Image normally an Image displaying an orthogonal plan view in its correct Position and Size relative to the Survey System defined in the current Co ordinate File This is done by carrying out a modified Polynomial Transformation on 3 to 5 common Points These common Points must be clearly identifiable on the Image such as Grid Intersections and their true System Co ordinates must be known The System Co ordinates can be entered into the Sheet s Co ordinate File if required as the System positions for digitized Points can be identified by either entering their Y X or E N values or by entering their Point Names and then letting the Programme read the co ordinates from the Co ordinate
260. ed to the 160 character format a Text file will not be readable from an earlier version of SURPAC If it has to be read by a pre 5 33 version of SURPAC the file will have to be converted from the 160 to the 80 character format using the above mentioned SURPAC Version 5 33 function Using a PDF creator software when Plotting from SURPAC Using the deskPDF Software PDF Portable Document Format is a widely used format for viewing and transferring documents of various type including plans and diagrams There are various applications that will read and display PDF documents such as Adobe Reader that can be downloaded from the internet free of charge For example the Adobe Reader can be downloaded from http www adobe com products acrobat readstep2 html Applications that create PDF files however are not free Scouting through the Internet have found an excellent and relatively cheap application that performs a number of PDF creation operations including the creation of PDF files directly out of the SURPAC CAD programmes This application is called deskPDF Standard and it only costs US 19 95 about ZAR160 Once installed this application will set itself up as a Printer device and will be displayed in the list of available Printers To create a PDF file of your document directly from SURPAC you print the document or CAD Sheet or Diagram etc you select the usual Output to a Printer Plotter menu option and
261. ed to them This is accomplished by automatically transferring the plotting Sheet data to the SURPAC General CAD programme After creating and or displaying either of these Section files click the Plot Section Button thereby indicating that the file is ready for the plotting stage A form will be displayed that allows you to select the Page Size and Page Orientation for the plotting sheet If you intend to use CAD editing facilities on the Sheet before sending it to the plotter then select the appropriate Output Option on the form and select a suitable Name for the CAD Sheet Once the plotting Sheet has been transferred to the General CAD programme you are free to modify the Sheet using any of the normal General CAD editing facilities available After plotting the CAD Sheet will remain on disk for future use if required Page 89 of 312 SURPAC Programme Changes The use of the SURPAC Project File spf has been modified to cater for the copying of files from one PC to another When a project including all its associated files is copied from one PC to another it is possible that the directory structure in the second PC is different from that in the first PC To overcome the problem of non location of associated files listed in the spf file that would arise in this case SURPAC will first attempt to locate associated files at their specified locations then if this fails it will search the folder in which the Co ordinate fi
262. ed which elements points lines map sheets etc you want displayed on Google Earth SURPAC will transform the Y X or E N positional information into Latitudes and Longitudes SURPAC will also convert dotted or dashed lines into small line segments for sending to Google Earth as the KML format can only handle solid lines If a SURPAC CAD sheet is to be sent to Google Earth SURPAC will first set the sheet transparency or set the background to fully transparent as User set and then create a PNG image of the sheet PNG Portable Network Graphics files are lossless highly compressed image files normally having the extension of png All SURPAC generated KML and PNG files are stored in the folder C Surpac_GE The names of the generated KML files and of the associated PNG files where applicable are KML files saved from the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons programme are called FileName_Trigs kml where FileName is the name of the current Co ordinate file KML files saved from the Co ordinate File Editing programme are called PointName_Point_Group kml where PointName is the name of the first Point selected marked in the current Co ordinate file KML files saved for Lines and Points from the General CAD programme are called FileName_CAD_Lines kml where FileName is the name of the current Co ordinate file Page 174 of 312 1 KML and PNG files saved for Sheet overlays from the General CAD
263. eet Image may now be digitized by clicking the Mouse LHB once the Cursor has been correctly positioned at the required location Continue in this manner for as many Points as is required To terminate the Digitization Mode press the keyboard Esc Key 2 5 3 Adjusting a Sheet Image Brightness and Adjusting a Sheet Image Contrast These functions allows for modifying either an Image s Brightness and or its Contrast If an Image is to be used as a background to a Sheet for example it may need to have its Brightness and Contrast modified so that the Sheet Items Lines Text Items Marks etc stand out against the background Move the Mouse cursor over the Image required then click the Mouse RHB Select either the Adjust Image Brightness or the Adjust Image Contrast item from the Image Main menu heading On the displayed Form use the Mouse cursor to move the Adjustment bar Button until the required effect has been achieved then click the Save and Exit Button This process may be repeated any number of times Note The Image that is modified is the Sheet copy of the Image and not the original Image itself For example if you have an Image called Brits jpg and you Import this Image into a Plot Sheet called Smithville Township SURPAC will create a copy of the original Image call it Smithville Township PlotBMP 1 bmp if this is the first Image in the Sheet and then save it in the defined SURP
264. efine the direction and distance The Commands used for these Line write actions are the keyboard hot key entries of U Write Distance T Write Direction F Write Direction and Distance f Write Distance and Direction and Y Write Splay data E g to write a Line Distance locate the cursor close to and on the correct side of the required Line and then press the keyboard U key To these existing Commands there has now been added a series of similar Commands but which determine the Direction and or Distance to be written by using User defined Co ordinate file Points rather than a drawn Line These new Commands use the same keyboard entry as above along with the simultaneous pressing of the Ctrl key For example to write a Line Distance using Points give the keyboard Command Ctrl U i e simultaneously press the keyboard Ctrl and U keys and then click on the two required Points New Commands Ctrl U After identifying the required two Points the Line Distance will be written Ctrl T After identifying the required two Points the Line Direction will be written Ctrl F After identifying the required two Points the Line Dirn and Dist will be written Ctrl f After identifying the required two Points the Line Dist and Dirn will be written Ctrl Y After identifying the required two Points the Line Splay Data will be written These new Commands can also be activated by selecting the ap
265. efined as a UTM system SURPAC Training Facility am pleased to announce that there are now fully fledged training courses available for all SURPAC Software Modules including General Surveying Topographical Surveying Engineering Surveying Surface and Underground Mine Surveying Cadastral Surveying for South Africa Namibia Swaziland Lesotho Botswana Zimbabwe Zambia and Malawi These courses are given by Kingray Gowera Spatial iQ Tel 27112588746 Mobile 27768656038 Skype ID kgowera Spatial lIQ is situated at Sandton Gauteng However they are able to provide 2 3 or 4 day training courses at any location where there is sufficient demand To view feedback and fuller training information please visit www surpac co za and click on the SURPAC Training Courses and Information button Page 191 of 312 SURPAC Version 5 36 Release 03 Programme Modifications General Programme Modifications Running SURPAC under Microsoft Windows 7 If you intend replacing your old PC and or Laptop running Microsoft XP or even 98 and you intend replacing this with a new computer running Windows 7 do not install SURPAC using an installation CD that does not specifically state that the installation is for Windows XP Vista 7 Doing this may cause installation problems and SURPAC may not run correctly If you have a current and active Software Maintenance Contract for SURPAC rather go to our web site www surpac co za
266. ehaviour referring to inactive windows or windows in the background If Scroll inactive windows when I hover over them is set to On which is the default then turn it Off by clicking on it to change it Page 301 of 312 Scroll inactive windows when hover over them Click on the above option to change the hover sending from On to Off NB You must also ensure that your device drivers for printers scanners RS232C lt gt USB cables etc are compatible with Windows 10 If not these can generally be down loaded from the internet ii New Locating and Adding Nearest TrigNet Points RSA only TrigNet points in South Africa and their use in SURPAC Software The office of the Chief Directorate National Geo spatial Information NGI has issued a list of all TrigNet base stations covering the Republic of South Africa TrigNet stations act as fixed point receivers when using the GNSS Global Navigation Satellite Systems thus negating the need for Surveyors having to purchase and use two GNSS receivers TrigNet is a network of continuously operating GNSS base stations covering South Africa and which are all managed and controlled by a single control centre situated in the offices of National Geospatial Information Each of the TrigNet remote stations records GNSS data on the two frequencies of GPS at all stations and GPS and GLONASS for 12 stations only at a rate of one observation per second commonly known as a 1 sec epoch rate
267. eighted Helmert type transformation should suffice There are however two mutually exclusive criteria involved in a transformation and the Surveyor needs to decide which of these two criteria is to be satisfied when carrying out a co ordinate transformation Consider the hypothetical case of a farm diagram on which the diagram co ordinates define the farm boundaries as making an exact rectangle and these are listed as Lo System values Further imagine a Trig Beacon or Station situated very close to one corner of this rectangle say within 50m and assume further that this Trig Beacon has adjustment shifts errors in the order of 0 10m relative to other Trig Beacons in the vicinity The two main options facing the Surveyor are If a Standard Helmert transformation is carried out which would apply equal weight to all the common control Stations used the obtained co ordinates of the 4 diagram Beacons would still define an exact rectangle This new rectangle may be shifted be of a different scale and or orientation when compared to the original rectangle but the main consideration is that it would still be a rectangle The farm Beacon close to the near Trig Beacon would however have co ordinates that would show the theoretical distance between this Beacon and the near Trig Beacon differing from the measured distance by an amount of about 0 10m If a Weighted Helmert transformation using for example the inverse of the distance
268. eir respective polygons In the example shown below the Shapefile polygons were imported into Layer 1 Black The imported headings were then transferred into Layer 2 Red Page 233 of 312 Shapefile Polygons Imported into SURPAC Q Shapefile C Surpac Software Samples L5952 youngsville towns _ 2S Select Shapefile Import Options Shapefile Ellipsoid Clarke 1880 Modified Shapefile System Geographic Lat Long Shapefile Central Meridian Not Applicable Convert Geogaphical Values to System Co ordinates Use Shapefile Values for CAD Sheet Centering Change the Sign of the Y X co ordinates Select DBF Header for Data to be shown as Text Items on the General Cad Sheet _ TEXT_ITEM TEXT_DIRN X file te Li res Min Y Value 70402 95 Min X Value 2904914 66 Max Y Value 71102 35 Max X Value 2905354 10 Importing Lines and Text from a SURPAC created Shapefile Page 234 of 312 Importing Lines and Text from a SURPAC format Shapefile into a SURPAC CAD Sheet If the Shapefile s prj file the data projection format is missing or it is incorrectly created the above form will show the Ellipsoid System and Central Meridian as being undefined In this case you might need to ascertain more information regarding these values from the company or person who issued the Shapefile When importing Lines and Text from a SURPAC created Shapef
269. elephone this information to SURPAC Software Page 90 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 20 Release 04 New Topographical SURPAC Land Levelling Routines This new Programme provides routines for the recalculation of the surface shape of a Field or portion of land to enable the desirable flow of water normally for agricultural irrigation purposes There are two methods by which the calculation of the new Field surface may be carried out The first method is by calculating a Plane of Best Fit through the surveyed Field surface This method provides a smooth surface with uniform slope In any given direction It also provides a surface which is easier to create by earth moving machinery due to the uniformity of slope However the total amount of earth moved combined Cut and Fill volumes using this method does tend to be more extensive than using the alternative method The second method is by using the Individual Line Fit technique Using this method the Field surface is redesigned so as to ensure that the Feeder Line all Planting Lines and the Drainage Line have gradients that fall within User defined maxima and minima values Whilst this method does result in a surface that has variable gradients it does tend to minimize the total amount of earth that has to be moved Other routines allow for A 2 D display of the designed Field Feeder Line Planting Lines and Drainage Line Points superimposed on the ex
270. em and then the Save Image sub menu item In the Save As dialogue box enter an appropriate file Name The file type is automatically set to the Jpeg format Save the file in the same folder as the associated Polygon normally the C Surpac_GE folder NB The Google Earth Pro application is able to create image files at a much higher resolution than the standard Google Earth However the Pro version is not free and costs about US 400 Importing the Google Earth Image to a SURPAC General CAD Sheet In the SURPAC General CAD programme ensure that the sheet size and scale are correct for the Image to be imported Then import the Image bounding lines via the Polygon KML file created above defining the Image size and position see above by using the Import Lines from Google Earth KML File menu item NB With the Sheet orientation set to 0 the imported Polygon should appear to be slightly tilted due to the effect of Meridian Convergence see below The Polygon should not appear to be trapezoidal in shape or to be distorted This would indicate that the Google Earth was tilted and or the Terrain option was still ON On the Sheet locate the cursor at the approximate centre of the Polygon then click the Mouse RHB Click the Image menu heading and then select the Add Import a Sheet Image menu item On the Image Selection form set the required path and then click on the required Image file On the right hand side of the form deselect the Maintai
271. en run SURPAC and Google Earth simultaneously to view the current survey for example these conflicting Panning techniques do cause a problem for the User To overcome this the SURPAC standard Panning technique has now be changed to match that used by Google Earth i e when pressing and holding down the Mouse LHB the screen view of the Sheet will be moved in sympathy with the moving cursor If you prefer to revert to SURPAC s previous method of Panning then do the following 1 Go to the Co ordinate File Editing Programme 2 Click on the File Options button on the Actions Bar Menu 3 in the bottom right panel shown on the displayed File Options form de select the option CAD Panning Move the Sheet with the Mouse Lat Long ASCII Output When creating an ASCII file of Lat Long values from the Co ordinate file the programme was reporting an error 730 This has now been corrected Two Sides and the Included Angle When printing the result of this calculation the co ordinates of the second fixing Point were incorrectly displayed This has now been corrected Page 186 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 35 Release 05 SURPAC Version 5 35 Release 05 Programme Modifications This upgrade for SURPAC consists mainly of minor corrections and tweaks to the software covering various programmes There have been quite a few of these since the last upgrade was issued in March 2010
272. ending overlay information to another person who does not have SURPAC Software To create a KMZ file from a SURPAC generated KML file use any zip application such as Winzip or WinRAR to create a zipped file that contains all the required elements for the data and or overlay The created zip file must be given the extension kmz Notes For files that contain Points you must include the three small PNG image files called RedBlackTrig png RedBlackTSM png and RedBlackPoint png These images are the SURPAC mark icons for Trigs TSMs and Points respectively For overlays that consist of a CAD Sheet the PNG image of the CAD Sheet must be included The PNG image file will have the same name as the KML file All the above files including the KML file are located in the C Surpac_GE folder The KMZ file can then be sent to a third party user with the instruction that the contents of the KMZ file must be extracted to a folder called C Surpac_GE Unzipping extracting the KMZ file will produce the parent file with a KML extension plus the mark icons and other information linked to the KML file Double clicking on the extracted KML file will then open Google Earth and produce the same data and or overlay view as produced by SURPAC Hints when using SURPAC CAD and Google Earth interfacing If you intend to view multiple SURPAC data and or overlays in Google Earth then do not close Google Earth after each viewing Leave Google Earth
273. ent Layer to any of the Defined Layers Individually set the other Defined Layers that are to be either Active or Non Active Set All Defined Layers as being Active Set All Defined Layers other than the Current Layer as being Non Active For Non Active Layers you can specify whether the information on these Layers is to be made invisible or to be displayed in a pale grey colour In the latter case the displayed data is regarded as Background information When Non Active Layer information is set as Background information the items on these Layers cannot be edited or deleted A further option allows you to display Images on Non Active Layers as pale grey images if required Setting the Layer Descriptions and Colours Layer Point Description Layer ID Layer Colour Edit Cadastral Lines and Text Items Pen 1 cu O 001 Cadastral Lines and Text items Pen 1 002 Cadastral Lines and Text items Pen 2 003 Cadastral Lines and Text Items Pen 3 004 Cadastral Lines and Text Items Pen 4 005 Cadastral Lines and Text Items Pen 5 006 Cadastral Lines and Text Items Pen 6 007 Cadastral Lines and Text Items Pen 7 008 Cadastral Lines and Text Items Pen 8 009 Sundry Cadastral Lines 010 Sundry Cadastral Text items 011 Electricity Pylons Eskom 012 Electricity Medium Lines Eskom 013 Electricity Farm Lines Eskom 014 Electricity Township Overhead 015 Electricity Township U G Cables 0
274. entered data will be lost Furthermore only a single arc or information from a manually meaned set of arcs may be entered The idea of this new option to manually enter data is to provide the User with a quick calculation for something like a 3 or 4 point resection while in the field Modified Entering of New Point co ordinates in the Join and Polar Programmes Both the Join and Polar programmes have been modified to allow for the option of directly entering co ordinate data for new Points This applies to both the From and To points in the Join programme and the Polar From Point in the Polar programme If you enter a Point Name that does not exist in the current Co ordinate File the programme will move into the Y Co ord display box and wait for you to enter a value Once this value has been entered press the Enter key and then enter the X Co ord value followed by the Point Height if this is required In the Join programme you can also enter a new Point s Description These newly entered Points will be added to the current Co ordinate File and will be available for future use Modified Contour CAD Programme Spot Heights Menu A new menu item has been added namely the Description Only Circle item This item allows for the display of Tacheometric file Points by means of a Circle at the point position plus a display of the Points Description Code Modified Tacheometric Editing Programme
275. er the two possible Intersection Angles are displayed This Command is included as one of the Line Intersect Commands To use the Command either Click the Line or Draw menu heading select the Line Intersections menu item and then the Intersection Angle sub menu item or simply enter the keyboard shortcut LII To complete the operation identify the two required Lines by Clicking on or close to each in turn Page 163 of 312 Modification to the SURPAC Lo System Data Base An error was found in one of the Trig Beacons in the Free State area Trig 361 DS 2926 The given X ordinate in the listing 1996 listing of Lo or Cape Datum values was 1 00m in error This has now been rectified in the SURPAC data base If you feel that this change might affect any of your future surveys please re download and store the self extracting file called Surpac Control Files exe which can be found on the same web page as the SURPAC Upgrade file and then install its compressed files by double clicking its icon Contour CAD Programme Improvements have been made to the output of Contours to both the AutoCAD DXF and DWG file formats This applies to Contours when either smoothed spline fit or unsmoothed Loading Data from a Leica GSI 16 Digit format ASCII file Both co ordinate and observation data may now be downloaded from a Leica GSI 16 Digit ASCII file Some of the Leica precision instruments use the 16 Di
276. ere not being compared correctly This has now been fixed up Text Labels for newly calculated Points in a Co ordinate File lf a Text Label was added to an existing Point in the current Co ordinate file this added Label value was retained in memory and was then automatically added to any newly calculated Point This has now been corrected Newly calculated Points will have no Text Labels attached except in the case of the Text Labels being defined as Latitude and Longitude Importing Data from one General CAD Sheet to another When importing data from one General CAD Sheet to another only the data related to Pens or Layers 1 8 were being imported and not Pens 9 14 This has now been corrected DXF DWG output of Diagrams When exporting a Diagram as a DXF or DWG file the lines were not being correctly trimmed to the edge of the Point Circles This has now been rectified Page 158 of 312 Co ordinate File Editing Maintaining Co ordinate Accuracy When renaming a Point or editing any one of its co ordinate values all co ordinate values were automatically restored to an accuracy of only 3 decimal places Although this made no visible or practical difference it did effect Directions in a subsequent General Plan construction This was especially applicable to short distances such as splays This problem has now been rectified and editing any element of an existing Point will not cause the re adjustment of the values of any other co o
277. ere sometimes displaced when the drawing was sent to the Plotter This depended on the defined Plotting Scale set for the drawing and the actual Plotting Scale as used This problem has now been rectified Page 145 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 24 Release 06 All CAD Programmes New Spell Checking Option The Spell Checking facility introduced with the previous SURPAC Upgrade has had an option added which allows the function to be turned On or Off when using either the WT Write Text Command or the WE Write Edit Command This option does not affect the usage of the Spelling Check All Text Command When selecting either the WT or the WE Command you will see that a new check item at the bottom of the displayed form entitled Use Spell Checking function De selecting this item will de activate the Spell Checking for Text items that are either Written or Edited NB By default the Spell Checking facility will be set as Active or Enabled unless Microsoft Word cannot be located However if you decide that you do not want the CAD programmes to make use of the Spell Checking facility then you can set this function as Inactive or Disabled by going to the Co ordinate File Editing programme clicking the File options button on the Actions Menu Bar and then de selecting the Use Spell Check facility in CAD Programmes option in the bottom right hand panel General CAD Programme New Func
278. ered a Gross Error even if the adjustment does exceed the Tolerance level Users Wish List Wish List Finally Users are welcome to forward any suggestions for ways in which they think that SURPAC programmes could be improved or extended As day to day Users of the software you are in the best position to evaluate its functions in practice If you have a wish list of functions you would like to see added to SURPAC or just have some general but pleasantly worded comments on the practicality of the software then please e mail these to info surpac co za can t make any guarantees that all wishes or comments will be acted upon but we will do our best to accommodate reasonable suggestions as long as these are applicable to SURPAC Users in general Page 96 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 22 Release 01 New Extended Helmert Transformation features The Standard Helmert Transformation programme has had two major changed made to it namely 1 It now has an Auto Transformation feature added This option allows Users to carry out a System to system transformation without having to identify the individual Points that are common to the two Systems and When carrying out a transformation in which the common Points are User selected the Points in System 1 Source do need to have the same Names as the corresponding Points in System 2 Target 1 Carrying out an Auto Transfor
279. es Text Lines and Text or Points can be erased Lines extending beyond the defined polygon will be trimmed to the relevant polygon side The Contour CAD programme has a similar routine for deleting contour lines or portions of contour lines Most CAD programmes now include a Add Co ord Values to Plot Items function Data Writing Commands The Commands for writing Line and Stand Data have been modified for easier use The same T Write distance U Write Direction F Write Direction Distance f Write Distance Direction and Z Write Splay Data are applicable except that these are now point and click Commands It is no longer necessary to use the P0 No Pen Command followed by the S Start and E End Commands to define a Line or Line portion required for computing the Data to be written Now you only have to move the cursor close to and on the desired side of a Line and then give the required Data Writing Command The programme will calculate by looking at surrounding Stand polygon Lines whether the entire Line or just a portion of the Line is to be used for computing the Data to be written The smart keys F10 F11 and F12 used for automatic Stand Block data writing and Area calculation still apply as before General Plan and Sectional Title programmes only Line Draw Commands The Line Command list has been extended to include such Commands as Line Dimension Li
280. es in the folder Button After the completion of all required Image Placemarks or Image Polygons the KML files for these items can be combined into a single KML file This file will contain all the KML information for the Image Placemarks or Image Polygons in the current sub folder This is a convenient way of displaying all Placemarks or Polygons on Google Earth by using a single command especially if you intend sending the information to a third party These files will have the name Combined_Image_PlaceMarks or Combined_Image_Polygons Sending Placemark or Polygon KML files to a third party When sending a KML file to a third party you must include all the Image Files and Link MH2 WG 23 Y 70435 967 X 2817287 029 Z 1031 903 Lat 25 27 38 9468S Lon 23 42 01 2755E Top level invert level Pipe 1 0 87m Invert level Pipe 2 0 67m Manhole Inside Diameter 0 90m Link File short report pdf Files with the KML file If you have created a Combined KML file then safest way to do this is to include all files in the sub folder If you are sending Placemarks you must include the small file called Icon38 png in order to get the correct symbol shown on Google Earth Link File Braytet Displaying an Image Placemark KML on Google Earth Once a Placemark has been created SURPAC will transfer the KML file Google Earth assuming that Google Earth has been installed You should see the
281. et Up for Calculations The Printer Set Up form will be displayed and the Windows Default Printer will be shown as the Current Printer Next to this item is a new button Select Click this button and select the required Printer from the displayed list of available Printers The selected Printer will remain as the Calculation Printer device for the duration of the current SURPAC session or until it is again changed by the User Page 182 of 312 Modifications to the DTM Creation Display Programme SURPAC Version 5 35 Release 04 Programme Modifications The DTM Digital Terrain Modelling Programme has been improved with the following changes 1 The Multi Colour display for both the Grid Mesh and Solid Model displays has been modified to display a uniform PROYGB colour display with blue being the colour depicting the lowest regions and purple depicting the highest regions The Multi Colour display is now set as the default display value as its use of colour layers gives a better visual impression of the model 2 A Colour Height Bar is shown on the left of the sheet This bar shows the actual height values relative to the different colours used on the display 3 When both a Figural DTM and a Base DTM exist for a model it is now possible to view the two surfaces either simultaneously or individually when viewing a Solid Model 4 The Vertical Scale value has been removed and replaced with a Vertical Exaggeration setting Now
282. ete erase the defined Figure Note This action can be reversed by using the UnDo function found under the Edit menu heading Figure Move FM Place the Cursor inside the closed Figure that is to be Moved but closest to the Figure bend point onto which the Cursor is to be Snapped and then from the Draw main menu heading select the Figure Commands item and select the Figure Move Item or give the keyboard FM Command The Programme will then define the located boundaries of the Figure by highlighting them in purple The Cursor will Snap onto the closest Figural bend point to where the Cursor was originally placed Whilst in the Move mode the Figure may be Moved by moving the Mouse or Keyboard arrow keys Scaled by using either the or the Commands Rotated by using either the lt or the gt Commands When the required Position Size and Orientation for the Figure have been reached use the Enter Command or click the Mouse LHB to Place the Figure Note that unless the Snap Mode has been disabled the Figural point at which the Cursor is situated will Snap onto the nearest Snap Item The original Figure will be erased Page 147 of 312 General Plan and Sectional Title CAD Programmes New Functions When writing Line data Sides Distances Directions or both SURPAC locates the nearest Line to the current cursor position and uses this Line s terminals or intersection positions to d
283. ets are in general related to the co ordinate information held in the Co ordinate File The following file types are now stored by an SPF Tacheometric File General Observation File Level Observation File Planimetric Network Adjustment File Trig Height Network Adjustment File Spirit Level Network Adjustment File Horizontal Alignment File Vertical Alignment File Cross Section File Longitudinal Section File Diagram CAD File General CAD Plotting File With the exception of the General CAD Plotting Files none of the above files is unique to any Co ordinate File or SPF A General Observation File for example can be associated with any number of Co ordinate Files Page 83 of 312 Modification Field Traverse Adjustment Options The Field Traverse programme offers 3 different methods of adjustment namely By the Helmert Transformation method By the Bowditch Proportional Distance method and By the Bowditch Proportional DY DX DZ method It appears that some Users are using the Helmert Transformation method for the adjustment of traverses for which this method is totally unsuited The Helmert Transformation adjustment technique should only be applied to traverses where the traverse Points that are to be adjusted lie within or close to the rectangle defined by the co ordinates of the Start and Closing Points of the traverse Attempting to extrapolate an adjustment to include Points lying a long way outsi
284. exible USB ports which is fine except that many survey data Loggers and or Total Stations only have RS232 output ports This necessitates using a converter cable when downloading or uploading between any of these devices and SURPAC running on a PC Laptop without an RS232 port Page 119 of 312 Tests made using Booker Versions 5 1 and 6 1 running on a Psion Organizer and a Psion Workabout respectively showed that small time delay modification had to be inserted into the SURPAC download routines in order to prevent a loss of data being sent from the Psion With the time delay added these functions now appear to be working correctly The same time delay has also been included for all other download options Leica Pentax Sokkia Topcon etc Should you still experience any incorrect downloading of data using any Logger or Total Station in conjunction with a USB gt RS232 converter cable then please let me know Setting a Co ordinate File for Printer output to the VPG Virtual Pages option Once a particular Co ordinate File has been set to send the printer output to the Virtual Pages vpg file then this state should persist unless changed by the User In the past the printer output state would revert back to the physical printer whenever the Co ordinate File was reloaded This has now been corrected When reloading a Co ordinate File that was previously set to use the Virtual Pages this condition will automatically be reset Whe
285. existing Image for another Image simply re select a new Image as described above Clear All Shown Information Button This button will clear all the currently displayed Images Link Files and Headings Use with caution A warning message will be displayed in case you Click this button in error Save above Data to a kim Info File Button This button allows for the intermediate saving of the information to a kim file A kim file is a SURPAC file that holds all data for an Image Placemark or Image Polygon The kim file saved will be in the sub folder of the C Surpac_GE as explained above and will have a name associated with current Placemark or Polygon In the above example the path and file name will be C Surpac_GE L5952_ Youngsville Township Wg_27 13B KML Image Placemark kim Load data from another kim Info File Button When running this programme it will check to see if the current Placemark or Polygon has an existing kim file If so it will Page 240 of 312 automatically load data for this Placemark or Polygon However it can be useful to load or Import data from another kim file For example if you have a large number of Placemarks to create and all Placemarks have the same or similar Headings then you can import these Heading and any other common information into a new Placemark or Polygon These data can then be edited as required Create a Combined KML file for all KML fil
286. ext items with their correct attributes it needs to be able to read and apply these attribute values correctly SURPAC obviously is able to do this so that Shapefiles created in a SURPAC application can be imported by another SURPAC application with the Text items shown with their correct attributes Using a Shapefile is in fact a quite convenient and compact method for a User to transfer sheet information between programmes or from one User to another If the Text items are to be sent to a Shapefile then there is a further option that allows SURPAC to send all the Text items on a Sheet such as the Directions and Distances making up the Stand data to the Shapefile If this option is not selected then only the major Text items such as Stand Numbers Street Names Sheet Headings etc will be sent to the Shapefile 6 These information blocks display the maximum and minimum co ordinate values for the data that is to be exported to the Shapefile The values are shown in either System co ordinates Y X or E N or in Latitude Longitude Exporting data in Latitude Longitude format is preferable and more flexible The sign of the Y X or E N co ordinate values can be swapped if necessary to cater for those Northern hemisphere applications that require that 0 be set to North and not South as for the Southern African Lo and WG Systems Page 230 of 312 Point Data in a SURPAC created Shapefile Point data may be exported to a Shapef
287. f line SURPAC will use its internal data base to validate the License Those Users whose IT Department have de activated employee Internet access might find that SURPAC freezes when it attempts to access the on line data base If this does happen please contact me for a solution to this problem Contour CAD Programme This programme was not correctly creating 3D values when generating a DXF or DWG file This has now been rectified Mining Peg Calculation Double button Method This programme was not printing the correct heading for a Double Button Peg Fix This has now been rectified General Plan and Working Plans programmes Delete Text group by Attributes This function was not working correctly in either of the CAD programmes This has now been corrected Support for Zambia Lo System Arc 1950 This System has been added to the list of supported Lo Clarke 1880 Modified Systems The UTM System also used in Zambia is already supported Page 168 of 312 SURPAC Version 5 35 Release 01 Programme Modifications New Functions for Interfacing SURPAC with Google Earth As most people are well aware the Google Earth application is available as a free download from the web site http earth google com Google Earth allows for the viewing of 2D or 3D colour satellite imagery for any point on the Earth as well as being able to view galaxies and the ocean floors The surface terrain imagery can usually be view
288. f you have made a change to an existing link or you have created a new link the programme will prompt you to Save this change addition before moving on Previously if you had not Saved a change or addition the link would be lost when you moved on to edit create the next one 6 2 An new option is included which enables you to specify whether or not the Point Name is to be shown when a Mark Point is linked to a Point Description 6 3 The Mass Lines to Points function has been modified It now allows you to specify the Description code you want to allocate to the newly created Points It also runs a lot faster than before 7 Converting Lat Long ASCII Files to U T M Co ordinates modification The SURPAC routine for converting the Geographical Lat Long values to U T M system co ordinates from an ASCII file contained a problem This problem has now been repaired Page 60 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 06 Release 03 1 Locate and Add the Nearest Trig and or TSM Beacons for a File This new programme provides the facility of locating a set of the nearest Trigonometrical Beacons and or Town Survey Marks TSMs to a User defined geographical position If required the located set of Points may be added to the current Co ordinate File Currently this programme is limited to the geographical area of the Republic of South Africa and to surveys defined as using either the Lo Clarke 1880 Modified Ellipsoid Sys
289. fication purposes An output of the displayed list of located Points may be made to the Printer an ASCII file or the Clipboard and The located Points in the displayed list marked as required i e the ticked Points may be added to the current Co ordinate File This programme may be loaded in any of three different ways namely 1 2 3 From the main Conversions Menu select the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons Menu Item or In the Co ordinate Editing Programme click the Mouse RHB and from the displayed pop up Menu select the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons Item or In the Co ordinate Editing Programme click the Options Button select the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons option and then click the OK Button If the current Co ordinate File is empty the programme will display a warning message and abort The Co ordinate File must contain at least one Point in order for this programme to work The Co ordinate File should have appropriate constants set If no constants are used then both the Y an X ordinates must have full values 2 Mining Menu Peg Calculation Double Back Fix Method This new programme is designed to handle a number of Peg Fixing and or Checking functions for the Mine Surveyor The main difference between this programme and the previous Double Set Up and Double Button Methods is that the Peg to be fixed or checked is the Set Up Peg itself This programme
290. files of any type contain parameters that are used to automatically position rotate and scale the Image on the Sheet or plan into which it is imported This saves a lot of User time normally spent on ensuring that an imported graphic image is correctly situated on the sheet or plan The information stored in a TFW file does not constitute complete geographical positioning and you still need to ensure that the Y X or E N co ordinates in the TFW file relate to the Projection and System of the current Co ordinate File RSA WG 279 for example The TFW file must have the same name as its associated TIF TIFF or JPG image file in order for this function to operate Selecting an Image for inclusion on a CAD Sheet When selecting the Add Import a Sheet Image menu item from the Image Menu bar heading a form will be displayed allowing you to select a required Drive and Folder All existing Images of the supported types will be listed for a defined Drive and Folder A single mouse Click on any of the listed Images will display that Image on the right hand side of the form Once the required Image has been highlighted click the Select Current Image button at the bottom of the form This will select the Image for placement on the current Sheet For an image having an associated TIFF World File no file positioning is required as the elements of the TWF will locate and size the image automatically Once selection of a non TIFF World
291. first or starting Point but all Point numbering or naming must follow in a clockwise direction For example for a five sided Stand whose number is 24739 the Point Names would be 24739A 24739B 24739C 24739D and 24739E Page 281 of 312 0M 4 IB p I iar ST 12mm Round Iron Peg ms so Fe Daer 247422 247421 247402 237863 ee Y __ 34357 58 X __ 276879297 Z __ lt Display of three non contiguous Stands and their surveyed Points Point Naming for Contiguous Stands The Point Name structure remains exactly as described above For non contiguous Stands Point naming is straight forward However for contiguous Stands where a Point defines a common corner of two or more Stands a bit of office manual labour is required to enable SURPAC to recognize that that Point is in fact common to the relevant Stands The image below shows contiguous Stands 24758 24759 24760 and 24761 Page 282 of 312 24757 247593 2758 2 eas 24760 1 247592 24759 1 Y _ 34319 94 X _2765930 95 Z _ lt my z ze Display of four contiguous Stands and their surveyed Points From this image it can be seen that the Stand 24758 for example is defined by the Points 24758 1 24758 2 24758 3 24758 4 and that Stand 25759 is defined by the Points 24759 1 24759 2 24759 3 24758 2 24758 1 This is because the line 24758 1 25758 2 is a common boundary for Stands 24
292. for all KML files in this folder Set up form for a Google Earth Image Placemark or Image Polygon Proceed x The above form will be displayed with its heading showing the folder Path that will be used to store the Image Placemark Polygon information and the Point or Polygon Name NB SURPAC will create a sub folder under the main SURPAC Google Earth folder called C Surpac_GE This sub folder is created from the name of the current Co ordinate file All blanks in the file name will be replaced by underscores In the above example the folder used to store the information is C Surpac_GE 8140bgpwg84 and the Polygon name is 7188 Entering Image File Link file and Headings for an Image Placemark or Image Polygon Image Files The top left hand drop down box under the heading Click to Change Current Image selects the current Image holder You are able to select up to 8 Images for an Image Placemark or Image Polygon The File selection box on the right hand side of the form will display all acceptable Images in the current folder path The folder path can be changed by selecting the required path using the Drive and Directory selection boxes above the file display The Image type displayed can be selected using the file Type selection box below the file display NB The only Image file types that may be used are JPEG jpg Bitmap omp or GIF gif files Clicking on a file Name in the Fi
293. form The GPX file will then be created Points will be stored in the GPX file as Way Points Useful Tip If you have Google Earth running you can drag and drop the GPF file on to Google Earth and view the GPF file points Section title Sheet Creation Edit CAD This programme has been extended so as to accommodate up to 485 Section Title areas in the Participation Quota Sheets Page 204 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 Version 5 37 Release 02 Importing ESRI Shapefiles shp into SURPAC via DXF Although ESRI Shapefiles shp cannot be imported directly into SURPAC there is an application available that will convert Shapefiles into the AutoCAD DXF format This function was initially covered in SURPAC Version 5 31 in 2007 but following recent queries it appears that not many Users are aware of this function Importing Shapefiles into SURPAC does required the use of an external application called dxfAuthor exe This application was written by ESRI in Massachusetts USA It is a free application that could be downloaded but the web site has recently been closed down and the application can no longer be downloaded as was initially reported in Version 5 31 Included in this Upgrade of SURPAC is the self extracting zipped file called dxfauth zip that will have been saved in the same folder in which the SURPAC Software is installed Locate the file using the Windows Explorer and double click on the file ico
294. further Drawing Tasks Undo All Session Tasks The second of the two Undo functions allows the User to Undo All Drawing Tasks carried out during the current session The drawing will revert to the state it was in when it was loaded a the start of the session Use this feature with caution To Undo All Session Drawing Tasks either 1 From the CAD programme s Edit Menu Heading select the item called Undo All Session Tasks or 2 Use the keyboard Ctrl Q function i e press and hold down the Ctrl key and at the same time press the Q key The time taken for SURPAC to perform an Undo action depends on both the speed of the computer used and the complexity of the drawing involved For an average General Plan CAD drawing etc and when using a Pentium IV 2 0 Gh based PC the time taken is negligible being a few hundreds of a second Complex drawings that include Graphic images and large amounts of Text running on a Pentium II 400Mh based PC for example could take a few seconds New Temporary Deletion of Co ordinate File Points Temporary Deletion of Co ordinate File Points Now when Co ordinate File Points are Deleted using any of the available Delete options they are only Temporarily Deleted They are maintained in the Co ordinate File and marked as being non Active Such non Active Points will not be used or recognized by any of the SURPAC programmes whilst they are in this state Restoring Temporarily Deleted Po
295. g Beacons close to the area NB The use of the Google Elevation API is subject to a limit of 2 500 requests per day Each SURPAC request consists of 4 locations Points providing a maximum daily i e for a 24 hour period download of 10 000 Points General SURPAC Modifications General CAD programme The View Select Linked files function was not working This has now been fixed General CAD programme When importing Layers from a DXF or DWG file the De Selected Layers were still being imported This has now been corrected General CAD programme When importing data from a DXF or DWG file there was a problem importing certain PolyLines This has now been corrected Sectional Title programme A problem sometimes occurred for jobs with a large number of units causing the display of the Areas on the final sheet to overflow the defined margins This has now been corrected General Plan programme The function to switch the sheet display from Monochrome to Colour was not working This has now been corrected Transforming between Cape Arc950 and WGS 1984 programme In certain areas and under certain conditions the programme was reporting that there were insufficient common points to carry out a transformation This was in fact due to a bug which has now been corrected New Co ordinate systems The Arc 1960 Geodetic Systems Zones 36 and 37 for Kenya and Tanzania have been added to SURPAC Users working in t
296. g Sheet margin changes for a Working Plan Increase of Sectional Title units for the Participation Quota sheet to a new maximum of 805 units Fix up for problem when importing General CAD data into the GP or WP programmes Fix up of the Figure Fit FF function not working from the Menu in the General CAD programme Fix up of the Figure MidWall FW function problem in the General CAD programme Fix up of the Line Attribute LA function problem in the General Plan Diagram and Working Plan programmes Page 221 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 8 Version 5 40 Release 02 The General CAD Programme Changes and Additions Selecting or Changing a Sheet Layer The method used to Select or Change a Layer has been improved When clicking on the display box in the Sheet heading area to the right of the heading Layer the display box that shows the current Layer a drop down list of the currently defined Layers will be shown The colour of each Layer is also shown For the Cadastral file format the full 55 available Layers will be shown and for the Engineering file format only the User Defined Layers will be shown The Current Layer will be highlighted and shown in the middle of the drop down list display This makes it easier to select a new Layer that is close to the Current Layer Layer ae 001 12mm Round Iron Peg Layer 002 20mm Round Iron Peg Layer 003 12mm hole in tarmac Layer 004 Corner of
297. git format for storing and transferring data as opposed to the standard 8 Digit format files Mining Peg Fixing Programmes The Grade calculation routine has been modified so as to allow the User entered Grade value to have a 4 decimal place accuracy Page 164 of 312 Compliance with the SGO MML requirements SURPAC Version 5 34 Release 01 Programme Modifications The Offices of the Surveyors General of Gauteng Limpopo and Mpumalanga provinces recently decided to adopt the Mass Media Lodgement MML of documents from Land Surveyors in these provinces via e mail The file format decided upon is PDF Portable Document Format In a previous SURPAC Upgrade pointed out the advantages of installing a PDF printer device to enable the creation of PDF documents directly from SURPAC This applies to CAD Sheets such as General Plans and Diagrams etc and also to creating a single PDF document containing all the Printed Pages related to the current survey The benefits of acquiring a PDF capability are outlined below Using a PDF Printer Device PDF Portable Document Format is a widely used format for viewing and transferring documents of various type including plans and diagrams There are various applications that will read and display PDF documents such as Adobe Reader that can be downloaded from the internet free of charge For example the Adobe Reader can be downloaded from http www adobe com products ac
298. gram may consist of up to 1000 Text Items 2000 Lines and 300 Points as well as any User added Image files Notes When constructing the Main Figure Data the lettering sequence employed goes A Z then A1 21 A8 Z8 A9 Z9 but omitting the values I O 11 01 19 09 When using Sheet sizes of A2 A1 or AO and using the using the method of Point selection from the list of Co ordinate File Points the Diagram programme will first check to see if the Co ordinate File contains a set of Point Names that starts from A and which then runs through the alphabet including the A1 Z1 A9 Z9 sequences If such a set of Points is found you will be given the option of adopting these Points as the Main Figure Data for the Diagram The reasoning is that for large Diagrams the outside figure of a Township is often required as being the Main Figure itself Using this option can save a lot of data entry or Point selection when large figures in excess of 100 Points are required Page 54 of 312 2 Support for the Nikon NPL 300 350 500 and 800 Series Total Stations SURPAC now supports the downloading of Observations and Co ordinates plus the Uploading of Co ordinates to from the above Nikon Total Stations 2 1 Receiving Observations from a Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Total Station Data Structuring required for SURPAC General Observation Files Downloaded Observation Data should as far as possible conform with the SUR
299. gth with the Distance Text items displayed for individual Stands abutting the Block boundary NB The programme uses the rounded co ordinate values of the Block boundary terminal Points as shown on the GP Data Sheet This is to ensure that the distance derived for the Block boundary conforms with the join value that would be calculated from the GP Data Sheet values As the values stored in the Co ordinate file are accurate to well beyond the mm range using these values could cause a small difference in the GP Data Sheet derived distance and the Co ordinate file derived distance To use this function either enter the keyboard shortcut Command of LM or select the menu item Block boundary Sum Check found under the Line menu heading The screen cursor will change to selection mode Click on one of the Block boundary terminals then move to the other Block boundary terminal and click on it NB f the Block boundary Points are apex points and if there are splay corners at these apices use the point where the splays intersect the Block boundaries Page 295 of 312 1413 to 555 REFERENCE MARKS ws 12482 7048707 90535251 1421 542 RMI 7055950 90511740 1422 5 gt RM2 7046297 90537233 1423 540 RMS 7049140 90535149 Wet 56 gt TOWN SURVEY MARKS g j wo rossas 90510527 11 se gt 10 7051807 90534353 182 601 1433 588 BLOCK CORNERS 1434 583 17x 7054
300. h SURPAC Pen No Create Line Definition Layers for each SURPAC Pen No Include the Named Co ord Points as POINT information Transpose Co ordinates Yes No Shifts and Factors Scale Factor to be Applied to Data 1 000000 Y Shift to be Applied to Data 0 000 X Shift to be Applied to Data 0 000 WTH Factor to be Applied to Text Items 1 000000 Simple Layering System Single AutoCAD Layer for each SURPAC Pen No The first system is the system used in SURPAC in the past and simply assigns all Lines Arcs Circles Text Items for a specified Pen Number to a single AutoCAD Layer If the drawing is complex and if lines of various thicknesses or weights and styles are used on a single Layer then this method makes it difficult to assign appropriate weights and styles to lines once the data has been transferred to AutoCAD If there are no complex lines per Layer then this method of Layer generation is acceptable Complex Layering System Line Definition Layers for each SURPAC Pen No This method which is the default method is advisable for most drawings being transferred to AutoCAD especially when Lines of various Styles and Thicknesses are used SURPAC will search each Pen Number for Lines of differing Thicknesses and Styles and allocate a Layer in the DXF DWG file for each combination of Pen No Style and Thickness used For example if Pen 01 has one or more Lines having a Line Thickness 3 i e the th
301. h distances measured in a forward sense Note that in the case of directly or manually entered data these data will not be stored for any future use Once the calculation has been completed the entered data will be lost The purpose of this new option to manually enter data is to provide the User with a quick calculation for a Trilaterated Point Modified Point Name Sorting Routine All programmes The Point Name sorting routine has been extended and improved allowing for correct sorting when using more complex names such as SHALU2D1 These names are more complex in the sense that the contain two separate number blocks and need to go through a double sorting routine to ensure their correct placement in the listing Modified Option to toggle ON OFF the SL amp SE Corrections All programmes When setting up or modifying a Co ordinate File s System parameters it is now possible to select ON or deselect OFF the Datum Level amp Scale Enlargement Correction function for measured distances Previously this option was only available for Local System surveys but it is now available for all projection Systems such as Lo WG UTM Bessel OSGB36 etc The reason for changing this option is to make allowance for Users who wish to apply the SL amp SE corrections in the instrument and to prevent the occurrence of duplicate corrections being applied NB Turning this option OFF should be done with caution If incorrectly used it could
302. han the Plotting Scale any Line drawn with a Pen 2 thickness will have its width maintained at 0 50 mm Leaving the Keep Line Thicknesses Constant Check Box Unchecked will cause Lines to be drawn at Thicknesses appropriate to the current Scale For example if Pen 2 is set to a thickness 0 50 mm then if the current Scale is say 1 500 with a designated Plotting Scale of 1 1000 any Line drawn with a Pen 2 thickness will have its width shown as 1 00 mm Due to the limited accuracy of Screen displays approximately 50 80 DPI compared to Inkjet Printers Plotters from 300 2000 DPI Pen Line Thicknesses shown on the Screen display are not always true reflections of the relative Line Thicknesses For example if Pen 1 is set to a thickness width of 0 20mm and Pen 2 is set to 0 3mm lines drawn with the two may appear to have the same width on the Screen especially when small scales are used 2 Setting the Pen Style Pattern Lengths This function allows you to view or to allocate required Pen Style Pattern Lengths for each of the 4 non solid Line Styles Users can now customize each of these Line Styles by setting individual Pattern Lengths Any or all of these default values may be changed by selecting the Set the Style Pattern Lengths menu item found under the Edit menu heading 3 Zooming and Panning using the Mouse New Zooming and Panning options have been added These options use the Mouse to control and define the Zoom
303. hat the dimension Text Items such as Directions and Distances on General Plans and Sectional Title Sheets may no longer be valid The User is given the option therefore to suppress the transformation of these Text Items Transforming Ancillary Files Finally you may identify any SURPAC Tacheometric File Contour File or Horizontal Alignment File for which co ordinate data are to be transformed The currently selected and displayed Control Files and the currently selected Options will be used for the transformation When Tacheometric Files are transformed any associated DTM Files area automatically transformed at the same time You will be prompted to select the File into which the transformed data will be stored Normally select a different Name for the new File to that of the Source File If you want to overwrite the existing Source File data give the New File the same name as for the Source File Be careful with this option however as you may be overwriting data that may be needed in future When transforming any of these ancillary Files it is important to take into consideration the Constants of the Source File and the Current File Although Files such as Tacheometric Files do not have specific Constants it is assumed by the programme that the Y X Z Constants of the defined Tacheometric Source File are the same as those for the Co ordinate Source File and similarly the Constants for the New Tacheometric File to be the same as for the c
304. he DTM s then the Vertical Exaggeration used for both Contours and DTM Point Clouds should be the same for a correct display Storing the SURPAC created Point Cloud files for display in CloudCompare When installing SURPAC or the Version 5 63 Upgrade the application will create folders for storing both the CloudCompare application files and the SURPAC created Point Cloud and pseudo DXF contour files This data storage folder is called C Surpac_CC All Point Cloud files created by SURPAC will be stored in this folder SURPAC created files will be given the following names DTM Surface Point Cloud file _ File_Name_Surface_PC asc DTM Base Point Cloud file File_Name_Base_PC asc Contour pseudo DXF file File_Name_Contour_PC dxf Note that if the File Name has any spaces included SURPAC will automatically convert these to _ underscore as names with spaces cannot be exported to CloudCompare If the Y X or E N values used by SURPAC are too large CloudCompare will suggest an origin or global shift for these values in order to prevent any accuracy loss In this case just accept the suggested shifts unless you have any particular reason to override these with your own shift values Page 264 of 312 Coordinates are too big original precision may be lost Do you wish to translate rescale the entity shift Scale information is stored and used to restore the original coordinates at export time
305. he T100 comes with the Intel processor Atom 23740 2GB RAM and 64GB storage It also has a 1366 x 768 pixel display with full touch screen functions It has a slim detachable keyboard with a USB 3 0 for a mouse external hard etc a micro SD port plus a 2 megapixel camera The T100 also comes preloaded with the full versions of Microsoft Office Word and Excel Another nice feature is an HDMI video output which allows you to connect the T100 to a larger monitor with an HDMI input port for normal office use If you have an android or compatible smart phone the charger and cable used by the phone can also be used to charge the T100 which saves carrying around extra cables and chargers The battery in the T100 when fully charge has a useful running time of 11 12 hours However it does take an equal amount of time to recharge the battery As this is a full Windows 8 1 based computer SURPAC loads and runs without any problems Just be careful though If you are going to buy an equivalent computer there are others on the market make sure that the operating system is the full Windows 8 1 and not a truncated Windows operating system such as Windows CE When using the tablet without the keyboard you do need an on screen keyboard for entering data Fortunately Windows has such a keyboard called OSK exe It is advisable to make a shortcut of this small application and put it on the desk top for easy access The full path for
306. he drawing limits Point Off Line calculations The programme was not storing the newly calculated On Line points correctly and was in some case overwriting other existing points This has now been rectified Co ordinate File Heading Information The heading of Survey Record has been added to the list of available headings for the two available Label Fields in the Co ordinate File Editing programme Mining Underground Peg Fixing programmes These programmes will now check the Face Left and Face Right angle values computed for Arc 1 before ARC 2 is entered If these values differ by more than the set Horizontal Angle Limit a warning will be displayed and the Page 215 of 312 values checked and or re entered before continuing A reminder to all Users of the Mining U G Peg Fixing programmes the default Password for changing the Limit settings is ABCD1234 Co ordinate File Listing There was a bit of glitch in the Co ordinate file listing when points with names of N and P were used Due to a routine that tried to prevent the use of O as a point Name the programme was deleting point P whenever point N was edited This has now been rectified Opening Creating a new Co ordinate file When opening a new Co ordinate file Users are able to Create a new Folder or Delete an existing Folder by making a Right Click on the C folder Icon or the root directory In the previous upgrade of SURP
307. he next nearest point regardless of quadrant The minimum number of Control points that may be selected is now set to 4 A new option has been added This allows the you to select either Determine and Apply Individual Transformation Factors for each Point in the file or Determine and Apply a single Set of Transformation Factors from the file Centre value The latter option is best applied when the relative positions of the file points need to be retained The first option is best applied when the file points are far apart such as on large farm sub divisions for example On the print out of the transformation the most used common Control points are shown as before but with the addition of the number of times each Control point was used Page 203 of 312 Exporting GPX files for GPS systems This new feature can be found by clicking on the File Options menu item in the Actions menu of the Co ordinate File Editing programme If you want to restrict the GPX file creation to select Points in the Co ordinate file then first highlight the required Points as described on Page 2 of this document On the displayed form select the option Export Data to a GPX File for GPS systems Reply as appropriate to the prompt Do you want to restrict the Transferring of Point Data to Selected Highlighted Points if you have highlighted a set of Points Then define a Path and Name for the GPX file to be created using the displayed
308. hen ever the General CAD programme is activated However a new or a existing CAD Sheet can be loaded by the User by clicking the File menu heading and then selecting the menu item Open or Create a CAD Sheet Over time numerous CAD Sheets can exist in a data folder not all of them having the same name as their associated Co ordinate File To solve the problem of having to remember which CAD Sheets is linked to which Co ordinate file a new feature has been added into the General CAD programme which does this for you If you want to load a linked CAD Sheet into the programme or just see which CAD Sheets are designated as being linked then click the File menu heading and then select the menu item View Select Linked CAD Sheets A form will then be displayed showing the list of CAD Sheets linked to the current Co ordinate file This action could take a few seconds if there is a large number of CAD Sheets files in the current data folder If you want to Select one of the listed CAD Sheets then click the Sheet name to highlight it and then click the Select the Highlighted CAD Sheet button If you want to Delete one of the listed CAD Sheets then click the Sheet name to highlight it and then click the Delete the Highlighted CAD Sheet button Note A CAD Sheet s linked or associated Co ordinate File can be changed at any time by clicking on the programme s Edit menu heading and then selecting the menu item Change Associated Co ordinate
309. hen exporting DTM Point Cloud models from SURPAC to CloudCompare the option exists to export the Contours at the same time as the model presuming the Contour pseudo DXF for the current file exists First Click the File Open menu item and then select the required Contour file Depending on the area size and contour interval used this loading and display will take a few seconds For a correct display the co ordinate system and constants used for the Contour file must be the same as for the DTM files and the Vertical Exaggeration for both the Contour file and the DTM file s must be the same Page 268 of 312 Sea ee 2x ic ex PBCECoxX SPL OL kar TET J OIIO Grete arc MM ES SS e gt DB Tree 8 a 4 V Polifin Surface PC asc C Surp i 4 7 Polifin Surface PC Cloud if W Polifin Surface PC Cl 4 V Polifin Base PC asc C Surpac 4 V Polifin Base PC Cloud T Polifin Base PC Clou 4 V Polifin_Contour_PC dxf C Sur Q a p oe F Camera Link g m Properties e gam Property State Value Name Polifin_Base PC Visible 7 Normals 7 Show name in 3D z Colors RGB X 335 Box dimensions 355 Z 144739 X 87953 5 Box center Y 68926 5 Z 2941 86 Info Object ID 11 Ch Current Display 3D View x Faces 951 025 Wireframe Stippling ial A SURPAC Surface DTM and Contours displayed in CloudCompare Computing Volumes from SURPAC
310. hen make sure that the appropriate Check Box at the bottom of the Form is checked Once all required SFK allocations have been made click the Save Layout Button When operating in SURPAC except in any of the CAD programmes you can now access the allocated Programmes at any time by pressing the assigned SFK Note Page 9 of 312 Avoid pressing the F10 SFK This key cannot be allocated and if pressed will cause the SFK allocation facility to be temporarily frozen If you do happen to press the F10 key by mistake however then just press F10 again and this will unfreeze the SFK allocation facility 2 Locate and Mean Point Groups in a Co ordinate File Programme Description A Point Group is defined as two or more Points in a Co ordinate File that lie within a prescribed distance of one another The programme will search through the current Co ordinate File using an alphanumeric order looking for Points that create a Point Group A Point Group can be from 2 to 14 Points in size This programme incorporates a number of useful functions For example It can be used to search for and Display the Values of a Point that may have been surveyed two or more times and Saved in the Co ordinate File under different Names It can be used to Mean all the Points in a Point Group and then save these meaned values in the Co ordinate File using a default Name or a User entered Name It can be used to Adopt either
311. hes that could then be attached to a KML display of a set of Bench Marks This would make the location of the Bench Marks in the field a lot simpler As yet we have had no response to this request from the NGI Hopefully we will be able to add this feature at a later date Apart from using the Bench Marks to control the heighting of surveys such as control surveys for road rail or pipe line construction the Bench Marks around an area of proposed development can be used to adjust a set of imported Google Earth DTM grid heights used for example for the purpose of a preliminary contour display model of a proposed development site In general there is a height shift between Google Earth DTM interpolated heights and the actual ground heights represented by the Bench Marks A comparison between the two sets of heights can be used to determine the local height shift to be applied to the Google Earth DTM values When comparing Google Earth DTM heights with the Bench Mark heights it is important to bear in mind the following limitations 1 Due to the approximate positioning of the Bench Marks avoid points that lie on steep ground 2 Some Bench Marks are studs placed on the plinths of Trig beacons In these cases the heights of the Trig pillars normally 1 4m need be taken into account Using the Locate and Add Nearest Bench Marks programme NB This programme forms a part of the Conversions Module and this Module must be an active p
312. hese areas can now set their surveys in either of these systems These systems are based on the Clarke 1880 Modified spheroid and use the UTM SE co ordinate system Page 225 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 8 Version 5 50 Release 01 SURPAC is now able to import and export Point Line Polygon and Text information using the ESRI Shapefile format This is an important addition as it enables Surveyors using SURPAC to exchange information with individuals and companies using GIS Geographic Information System applications such as ArcView ARC INFO ArcGIS OpenStreetMap PlanetGIS TGIS 1Map and many others Shapefiles explained in brief The ESRI Shapefile or simply Shapefile is a geospatial vector data format for GIS software Shapefiles can spatially describe features such as Points Lines Polygons and Text The Shapefile format was first introduced with ArcView GIS in the early 1990s Shapefiles store the basic geometric data types mentioned above As these elements generally require some form of attribute to specify what they represent a table of records i e a data base can be used to store attributes for any element in the Shapefile A Shapefile is not a single file but actually a set of several component files Three individual files are mandatory to store the core data that comprise a Shapefile being the shp shx and dbf files which are explained below The fourth file type considered as being
313. his Peg Index information data in another application such as Microsoft Excel then click the Send the data to the Windows Clipboard Button This Clipboard information may then be Pasted into applications such as Microsoft Excel Microsoft Access etc Modification Diagram CAD Programme The following modifications have been made to the Diagram CAD programme 1 The handling of Text items relating to a Diagram Figure with an orientation swing has been improved When a Diagram Figure is swung any Text items inside the Figure Drawing Area which is defined by dashed grey lines area also transformed re positioned and re oriented in sympathy with the Figure In the past Text items close to the left side of the Figure Drawing Area were sometimes given a reverse orientation making them appear in the incorrect position These has now been corrected Using the Frame Copy function for copying Text items from outside the Figure Drawing Area to inside this area has also been fixed 2 The Insert a Blank Data Block Line and Delete a Data Block Line functions were not working correctly These has now been corrected 3 When creating a Diagram from either the General CAD programme or the Working Plan CAD programme the number of sides in the Diagram was inadvertently limited to 70 This has been corrected and the new limit has now been set to 300 sides 4 As for all the other SURPAC CAD programmes the Diagram CAD programme
314. hting All used Control Points are given the same weight e Inverse Distance Used Control Points are weighted according to the inverse of their distance from the Point being transformed e Inverse Distance Squared Used Control Points are weighted according to the inverse of the square of their distance from the Point being transformed In summary The Equal Point Weight Option will retain optimum figural consistency for the survey but will tend to ignore localized control Point differentials The Inverse Distance Option will provide a weighted transformation based on the position of each Point to be transformed This weighting will cause shifting of the survey Points in sympathy with the differentials of close control Points and will therefore cause figural distortion The Inverse Distance 2 Option will provide close to exact transformation of control Points but will also create maximum figural distortion Control Points e This option allows you to select the number of the nearest Control Points to be used for a transformation This number may range from 2 to 20 Do not select 2 unless the are is very sparsely covered by Control Points Normally a number such as 4 or 5 would be chosen Page 46 of 312 Data Storing Options e Save to Co ord File Transformed data are stored in the current SURPAC Co ordinate File e Save to ASCII File Transformed data are stored in a User designated format in an ASCII File e Do Not Save Poi
315. ic Heights 4 The Mount Eden Circuit 2000 This Co ordinate Reference System is defined by the following parameters e Ellipsoid GRS80 WGS 1984 a 6 378 137 000 m b 6 356 752 314 m e True Origin Latitude 36 52 47 0000 S Longitude 174 45 51 0000 E e Origin False Eastings 400000mE Shifts False Northings 800 000m N e Scale Factor 0 999900 e Projection Transverse Mercator e Unit International metre e Ordinates Eastings Northings E N e Heighting MSL Orthometric Heights When defining a Co ordinate File as being in any one of the above Systems the Conversions menu listing will be modified to display the menu option entitled New Zealand System to System Conversions This programme can be used to carry out conversions such as 1 Mount Eden Circuit 1949 lt Mount Eden Circuit 2000 Mount Eden Circuit 1949 lt New Zealand Geodetic Datum 1949 Mount Eden Circuit 2000 lt New Zealand Geodetic Datum 2000 Mount Eden Circuit 1949 lt gt Latitude Longitude Hayford Ellipsoid Mount Eden Circuit 2000 lt gt Latitude Longitude WGS 1984 Ellipsoid New Zealand Geodetic Datum 1949 lt gt Latitude Longitude Hayford Ellipsoid New Zealand Geodetic Datum 2000 lt gt Latitude Longitude WGS 1984 Ellipsoid Latitude Longitude Hayford lt gt Latitude Longitude WGS 1984 Ellipsoid O NODA wD Page 127 of 312 General modifications made to SURPAC S
316. ications made to SURPAC Version 5 04 Release 01 1 Setting the Function Key SFK Allocations Programme Description This programme allows you to allocate or link any of a wide range of SURPAC Programmes to the keyboard Special Function Keys SFK F2 to F9 and F11 to F12 The F1 SFK is always reserved for accessing the SURPAC Help Pages The F10 SFK is a pre assigned Key and cannot be used for programme allocation Allocating a SURPAC Programme to a SFK means that that Programme can be loaded and run by simply pressing the appropriate keyboard SFK For programmes that are often used this method is a quicker alternative than having to go through the Menu system to locate and run the Programme Using this Programme you can set up your own preference list of Programmes that you want to allocate to the SFKs This list will be stored in a file called F Key Allocation which is maintained in the Folder in which SURPAC is installed Deleting this file will set the SFK allocation back to its default allocation The F5 SFK Allocating a Programme to the F5 SFK can cause a problem as this SFK may be used by some of SURPAC programmes as an Entry of Data completed function in an Edit Window If the F5 SFK Entry of Data completed function is enabled for a Programme then allocating a Programme to F5 can cause certain programmes to ignore the Programme call when the F5 SFK is pressed To avoid the above
317. ickness is the thickness currently User allocated to Line Thickness 3 and these Lines are defined as having Line Style 4 i e Dash Dot lines then SURPAC will create an AutoCAD Layer called Page 121 of 312 P01__DASHDOT__0 75MM and all Lines having these attributes will be defined as lying on that Layer This makes it a fairly easy task in AutoCAD to assign to a Layer the required Colour Weight thickness or width and Style As all the Lines are set using the BYLAYER option the transferred lines will automatically take on the assigned colour weight and style selected for their layer Text Items and Topo Symbols in the General CAD programme are also allocated separate Layers from the Lines Circles and Arcs for example PO1__TEXT_ITEMS Text Fonts used in SURPAC are where possible matched to equivalent Fonts in AutoCAD and are attached to each Text Item Using the Format Text Style option in AutoCAD then allows the User to easily set appropriate AutoCAD Fonts for the Text items imported from SURPAC by matching the Font Name to the Style Name e g matching the Font Name Arial to the Style Name ARIAL Before formatting these fonts all Text Items will be initially displayed using the STANDARD MONOTXT font Note that whilst this default font allows for rapid zooming and panning in AutoCAD it does not display the imported Text Items with their correct shape or spacing and the Format Text Style needs to be used in order
318. ified by either numbers 1 300 or by a Layer ID A Layer ID may be up to 8 characters in length A Layer ID typically is a cryptic description of the Point surveyed For example PL 33 could refer to a 33Kw power line pylon Default Point Layer Descriptions When creating a new Co ordinate file a set of default descriptions will be loaded for both the Points and therefore the General CAD Layers Cadastral format Co ordinate File For a Cadastral format Co ordinate file the default Cadastral descriptions will be loaded These default descriptions are held in the file called Standard wed and is stored in the SURPAC installation folder This description list consists of 55 descriptions segmented as follows Descriptions 01 28 Beacon Descriptions which may be User defined The only exception is Description 22 which is normally retained to be Not Beaconed Calculated Points Description 29 Reference Marks Description 30 Outside Figure Points Township Descriptions 31 33 Trigonometrical Beacons Description 34 Town Survey Marks Descriptions 35 55 Working Stations Refer to the SURPAC electronic Help pages via the F1 Special Function Key and read the topic Beacon Description List found under the heading SURPAC Lite Module for details on using this format Description file Engineering format Co ordinate File For an Engineering format Co ordinate f
319. ight hand side Click on an Active Layer to change its Visibility status This function has the primary use of making Visible only those Points required at a given time It also makes the allocation of Mark Points to certain Descriptions easier Bear in mind that the Point Layers have no effect on the other drawing items such as Lines Arcs Text Items or Hatching For Lines and Arcs you can use the Set Active Pens menu item found under the Draw menu heading and for Text Items you can use the Set Active Pens menu item found under the Text menu heading These functions make their respective items either visible or non visible for the Pen colours selected The function to Transform the Sheet Data Items has been added This feature provides for a Helmert Transformation based on 2 to 5 common points identified by the User This facility is useful for re scaling re positioning and re orientating imported DXF drawings for example However it can be used for transforming any existing General CAD drawing Before using this function make sure that you are able to identify between 2 and 5 points common to both the existing drawing which could just be an imported DXF drawing for example and to the True System into which the drawing is to be transformed Ideally the True System should be the System as used by the current Co ordinate File To make the transformation easier add Points to the Co ordinate File that corresponds t
320. ighting Control Points etc and when ready Click the Compute File button After the file transformation has been completed you can transform other entities such as existing CAD sheets Tacheometric files Contour files etc or just print out the results of the Co ordinate file transformation The current Co ordinate file will be switched to the newly created file containing the transformed co ordinates Increased size for Co ordinate File Heading The length of the heading that can be set for a Co ordinate file has been extended to 64 characters This heading will appear at the head of each printed calculation page between the file name and the page number Increased size for Calculation Page item The length of the Calculation Page item for a Point in a Co ordinate file has been extended to 8 characters This item is alphanumeric Modified Lo lt gt WG Transformation Control Files These Control files have been modified for Trigonometrical beacons in the some of the areas in the Free State The affected lists are DS2727 DS2726 DS2725 DS2724 DS2827 DS2826 and DS2825 If you use any of these Degree Sheets then please download the updated version of the self extracting ZIP file called Surpac Control Files exe This file can be found on the same Internet page from which you can download this SURPAC upgrade See Page 1 Note You need to have the Conversions Module of SURPAC in order for this function to be active
321. ights per minute depending on your internet connection Statistical data relating to the comparison of heights are shown at the bottom of the form Contour Generating CAD Programme 3 1 Compare existing heights with interpolated Google Earth Heights This function is the same as that described Tacheometric File Editing Programme above Using this Option 3 1 1 Comparing a Single Point Right click on the Spot Height that is to be compared and then from the Spot Heights menu heading select Compare Spot Height with Google Earth Height for a single Point A form will then be displayed showing the Point selected its co ordinates and height the Google Earth height and the difference Moving the cursor away from this form will cause it to be removed amp Comparison of Surveyed Height with Google Earth Iterpolated Height xs Point Number Y Co ordinate X Co ordinate Spot Height GE Height Difference 779 74717 51 3085861 19 1259 89 1260 35 0 46 N 3 1 2 Comparing the entire file Click on the Spot Heights menu heading and select Compare Entire File with Google Earth Heights A form will be displayed in which the Tacheometric file Points their co ordinates description surveyed heights and interpolated Google Earth heights will be shown These height comparisons are imported at a rate of approximately 350 500 Point heights per minute depending on your internet connection Statistical data relating to the comparison of heights
322. ile or a Shapefile created by an application using the same data protocols as SURPAC see Pages 4 and 5 all Line and Text attributes will be read from the associated dbf file and applied to the incoming data In the above example the set up form for importing the Shapefile information shows that the Shapefile co ordinates are in Geographical Lat Long format The option to convert the Lat Long values to System Y X values is selected by default To correctly import the Text item attributes select the dbf heading TEXT_ITEM SURPAC Ver 5 50 for Windows XP Vista 7 8 General Pl file General Conversions Least Squares Topographical Engineering Mining Cadastrat Help Ele Edt Frame Data import Line General NamePsn Point Image Text Gridortn Delete Rub Help 7 AA 2 2 2 ononoandEnE EAT AEE lind eines and Text items imported from a SURPAC created Shapefile into a SURPAC CAD Sheet SURPAC will treat every Line and Text item as a pseudo polygon enabling it to place the Text items in the correct places and using the correct orientation Layer Size etc Lines will also be allocated to the correct Layers and have the correct width and style Page 235 of 312 Example of a Composite of Imported Shapefile Pol ons and Google Earth Information B SURPAC Ver 5 50 for Windows XP ista 7 8 General CAD Programme Nn E cs Ele General C
323. ile the default Engineering descriptions will be loaded These default descriptions are held in the file called Standard wed and is stored in the SURPAC installation folder This description list consists of 300 descriptions which are User definable Layer Properties A Layer has the following properties Layer identifying ID Number This number ranges from 1 to 55 for Cadastral format Co ordinate files and from 1 to 300 for Engineering format files For Engineering format files Layers can be further identified by their Layer ID a 1 to 8 character text item related to the Layer s contents Page 211 of 312 NB Layer Description This is a fuller Description of the Layer contents and is the same as the Point Description used i e there is full compatibility between Point Descriptions and Layer Descriptions Changing a Layer Description for example will cause the corresponding Point Description to be changed as well In order for a Layer to be used it must have a Description For Engineering format Co ordinate files the Layer ID must also be defined Layer Colour Each Layer is allocated a colour The colour options consist of the basic 14 RGB colours plus a series of colours emulating the colour sequence as used in AutoCAD This is to help maintain compatibility with imported DXF and DWG files When creating a new Co ordinate file default colours are assigned to each Layer These colours can be User modified To maintain
324. ile for the African continent for example can be converted into DXF and then loaded into a SURPAC General CAD Sheet as shown here Addition of the new Fill Commands The General CAD programme now includes commands for Filling a User defined area The area can be any closed figure bounded by lines of any colour The boundary lines can be a figure created from a series of straight lines be a closed set of connected spline curves or be a closed figure created by using the Sketch mode When Filling the figure with a colour you may select either the current Hatch Colour or a colour selected at Random by the programme Any Filled area my be Deleted a any stage If you are going to delete both the Fill colour and the figure itself make sure that the bounding figure is deleted before deleting the Fill colour The display of Filled areas may be turned on or off at any stage Note that when Printing a General CAD Sheet the Filled areas cannot be directly printed In order to create a hard copy output of a Sheet containing Filled areas first create a Graphic image jpg tif etc of the Sheet from SURPAC then use any image printing software to print the image Page 162 of 312 Using the Fill option with Random Colours the map of Africa displayed above imported from a Shapefile that has been converted to a DXF file can now be displayed in colour Setting the General CAD Sheet Size via User Selected Dimensions The
325. ile via the File Options menu item Actions bar menu when in the Co ordinate File Editing programme Co ordinate File Options Co ordinate File Input Options Co ordinate File Edit Options Merge Data from another Co ordinate File Purge Clean out the Current Co ordinate File import Data from a Y X Z ASCII Text File Change the Sign of the Y Co ordinates Import Data from a Lat Long ASCII Text File C Change the Sign of the X Co ordinates import Data from an AutoCAD DWG or DXF File Change the Sign of the Z Co ordinates Load Data from an Electronic Field Book C Transpose the Y and X Co ordinates Convert Merge Data from a Tacheometric File C Apply Factor to Y X and or Z Co ordinates Convert Data from a Horizontal Alignment File Apply Shifts to Y X and or Z Co ordinates Locate and Add the Nearest Trig TSM Beacons Restore Deleted Points in the Co ordinate File YY IAOEE OCOOnS C Co ordinate File Output Options Startup Options On Startup Always Export Data to a Y X Z ASCII Text File Load the Co ordinate File previously used Send Data to an Electronic Field Book C Prompt for the Co ordinate File selection Export Data to a Lat Long ASCII Text File Open Co ordinate Files using SURPAC format Copy Data to the Windows ClipBoard C CAD Panning Move the Sheet with the Mouse Display Co ordinate File Maxima and Minima Use the UnDo function in CAD Programmes
326. iles Anyone attempting to use data extracted from either of the two files other than through an appropriate SURPAC programme is warned that highly inaccurate results will occur Keith W Young and SURPAC Surveying Software are not responsible nor are they liable for any damages or misinformation resulting from the use of these data Since these Source File Points are stored in shifted Lat Long format any Degree Square boundaries become irrelevant to the programme Surveys can be located close to any Degree Square boundary and the programme will still generate its own Degree Square of Points centred about the Survey or any defined Point in the Survey Data may be drawn from different Degree Squares for any given Survey The programme offers User options for both the selection of Points and the display mode namely The Search Centre position may be User selected The located Points may be either Trig Beacons TSMs or both The number of locate Points displayed may be set according to a required maximum number or a required maximum search radius The display of located Points may be in order of Distance Direction or Point Name Page 61 of 312 Any of the located Points in the displayed list may be tagged as not required to prevent them from being added to the Co ordinate File Any located Point in the displayed list may have its Degree Square Latitude and Longitude shown on a sub display for identi
327. imits The available screen area for plotting a section has been modified to allow a more appropriate allocation to the height and width components of the display The programme will first determine the maximum display height required for the plot using the User defined Vertical Scale and then maximize the horizontal limit by allocating all available display memory along the horizontal axis If this still is insufficient display for the defined Horizontal Scale an appropriate warning message will be displayed If this warning is ignored the plot will be truncated 4 New Options for Field Polar reductions and Field Traversing When reducing Field Polars from an Observation File or carrying out a Field Traverse calculation a Form will be displayed which shows two new prompts namely Std Deviation Limit for Set Up Orientations Show the individual Orientations for each Set Up Point The first prompt requires an entry that will represent the maximum allowable limit for the Standard Deviation of a set of Orientations taken at a Set Up Point A warning message and sound will appear if this limit is exceeded The second prompt queries whether you would like each Orientation made at a Set Up to be displayed or not If you click this option i e an X appears in the check box then once a Set Up Point has been selected by clicking on the Point s Name in the Set Up Points display list an on screen display will be made showing each
328. in the File Display Window thereby changing a Point from Used to Not Used or vice versa or by entering User required values into any of the Input Boxes in the Edit Window Clicking the Display the Next Group Button will then cause the programme to calculate and display the next Point Group Once all groups have been located and the File Search completed the programme will display the results of the Search At this stage a Print out of these results can be done if required While this method is slower than using the Automatic method it does allow for User intervention and Selected Point modification for any Point Group Modified SURPAC Programmes in Version 5 04 Release 01 Contour Generating and Plotting Programme 1 Fit Triangles to BreakLines The constructed Triangles can be modified such that Triangle base lines are made co incident with BreakLine segments In order for this to be feasible it is important the BreakLines are constructed so that they run Point to Point Any BreakLine segment drawn between Points that are far apart can not be matched to a Triangle base In this case the segment will be ignored and matching will have to be done manually using the Modify a Triangle Command Using this function with correctly constructed BreakLines can vastly improve the Triangulation network aligning the network so that known and highlighted topographical features are correctly shown by the Triangle generated contours On com
329. inate File has been selected as the Source Data the programme provides the option of transforming any related files such as Tacheometric files Contour Files DTM files and Centre Line files Again these files when specified will be transformed using the User defined Option settings Page 45 of 312 The Programme Form Layout The displayed form will show a large co ordinate Grid initially empty in which is used to display the Source Data co ordinates and their transformed values in the current System Above this Grid is an array of Input Boxes used for entering manual co ordinates and for editing Points already transformed Clicking on a Point in the Grid after a transformation will cause that Point s information to be displayed in the Input Boxes Above these Input Boxes is another Input Box which can be used to enter or to modify the Source Data file System description except in the case where the Source Data is a SURPAC Co ordinate file and a Label Box showing the System of the current Co ordinate file Below the Grid are four Option Lists showing the available options for Selecting Source Data setting the Point Weighting the number of Control Points to be used and the Point Storing Options These Options are Source Data Entry Mode e By Manual Co ordinate Entry e From aSURPAC Co ordinate file e From an ASCII Co ordinate file e From an ASCII Latitude Longitude file Point Weighting Option e Equal Point Weig
330. inates are System Y X values The system used is displayed at the top of the screen and therefore the option to convert from Geographical Lat Long values to system Y X values is not active From this form you can select dbf heading information that is to be allocated to each of a Point s attributes such as Point Name Description Calculation Page etc Once selected click the Import button If the dbf file does not have a header representing the Point Name you can check this by first viewing the dbf file then set a Start Name for the Points otherwise the existing default value of A1 will be used Point Names of A1 A2 A3 etc will be allocated to the imported Points The Point information will be imported stored and displayed in the Co ordinate file listing Page 237 of 312 Creating KML Placemarks amp Polygons with linked Images and Files SURPAC is now able to create Google Earth KML files for both Placemarks and Polygons that have attached Images or Files or both When the Placemark or Polygon is displayed on Google Earth clicking on its icon will display locality information hypertext Links to files and the Images included for the Placemark or Polygon The Image Placemarks this wording is used to differentiate form standard Placemarks are created via the Co ordinate File Editing programme and the Image Polygons again to differentiate from standard Polygons are created via the General CAD
331. ing False easting Standard parallels Page 226 of 312 Creating and Exporting ESRI Shapefiles from SURPAC Creating Shapefiles in SURPAC Three SURPAC programmes can be used to create write a Shapefile namely the Co ordinate File Editing programme for Points the General CAD programme for Lines and Text and the General Plan programme for Polygons Lines and Text Shapefiles created in SURPAC may consist of 1 Polygons only when using the General Plan programme Lines Text items Any combination of the above or Points oe a Polygons in a SURPAC created Shapefile Only the General Plan programme is capable of generating Polygons to be included in a Shapefile When using one of the Area commands A Ctrl A or F11 Commands in the General Plan programme the form shown below is displayed A new option has been added to this form namely the option Add Data to the Shape Polygon File The SURPAC Shape Polygon file is a file that stores the co ordinates of the corner Points of the Stands or polygons along with each Stand s Name Number and Area Ultimately this information is used to generate the Polygons that are written to a Shapefile when required amp GP Stand Area using Auto Line location Select Area Storage Options Always set the Number to the next available Stand Erf Name or Number 1145 lt Store Area to the Sheet Area File Yes NoC Add Data to the Shape Polygon File Yes NoC Cent
332. ining Using the Peg Fix Error Limits The setting and use of Error Limits for a Mining Peg Fix calculation have been modified The angular Horizontal and Vertical Error Limits remain simply as a User defined value in seconds of arc However Error Limits for both Distance measurement differences and Vertical Height differences are now related to a combination of a Zero Error and a Parts Per Million factor which is applied to the horizontal distance Enter the required Error Limits Vertical Angle Error Limit Secs Horizontal Angle Error Limit Secs Distance Zero Error Limit mm Distance Parts Per Million Limit Elevation Zero Error Limit mm Elevation Parts Per Million Limit Compulsory Back Check Calculation Yes No Page 94 of 312 The logic of this type of error limit application is that first there is normally an allowable error a Zero Error for a measured linear quantity regardless of the distance involved Secondly there is usually a further allowable error which is proportional to the distance involved For example using a Zero Error setting of 10mm and a PPM setting of 20ppm a distance of 50m would have an allowable error of 11mm 10 1 whilst a distance of 200m would have an allowable error of 14mm 10 4 Note that the PPM factor for Vertical Height differences is also applied t
333. ining a private road as an erf stand that would normally be defined as Block Corners must have a Description Code of 28 All Points that have been Named N1 N9 commands on a GP and which have a Description Code of 28 will be included on the GP Data Sheet under the heading Internal Beacons General Plan Sides amp Directions ASCII File from the Area by Point Definition function When using the Area by Point Definition function in the General Plan CAD programme it is now possible to create an ASCII file that shows either all data including co ordinates or that shows the Sides A B B C etc the Directions and the Distances of the figure defined This ASCII file can then be imported onto any position on the GP using the ASCII File Text Import option in order to include the file data as Text items on the GP Sheet This would be applicable to large erven stands such as the private roads discussed above that cannot be shown on a single GP sheet Corrections and Modifications made to SURPAC Software Sectional Title CAD Programme A problem with the generation and display of a multi sheet Participation Quota list has been rectified The total number of areas that can be displayed for a single Participation Quota listing has now been increased to 405 Point Comparison using two different Co ordinate Files When comparing two Co ordinate files using the Comparison by Co ordinates option the Heights w
334. int exists in the current Co ordinate File or just click the Enter Button and input the Point s values The Direction and Distance between the two Points will be displayed one at a time Polar Calculation This function carries out the standard 2 dimensional Polar calculation from a Point using an entered Direction and Distance The Point may exist in the current Co ordinate File in which case its values will automatically be loaded or a Point unrelated to the current Co ordinate File in which case you will be prompted to enter its values When prompted for the Point Name input the Name if the Point exists in the current Co ordinate File or just click the Enter Button and input the Point s values When prompted for the New Point Name just press Enter if you do not intend saving this Point After the display of the New Point co ordinates you will be given the option of Saving the New Point to the current Co ordinate File Mathematical Functions Mean and Standard Deviation This function will determine the Mean and Standard Deviation of a series of entered values Each value entry must be followed by clicking the Enter Button After entering the last value click the Button to display the Mean Click the Button again to display the Standard Deviation Factorial Calculates the Factorial value of a non zero positive integer Enter Button For most operations the Enter button acts the same way as the button
335. int pre exists in the current Co ordinate File otherwise a Code 01 will be allocated to a Set Up Point The Second Block is the Point or Station Number Use the Third Block to define the Point or Station Description Code a number in the range 0 499 or an alphanumeric code of up to 6 characters The remaining Blocks 4 7 are used for the Observational Data or Point Co ordinates Accessing the YOM 3Ta Data Transfer facility in SURPAC e Inthe Main Menu Bar Click the Heading Topographical Then from the displayed Menu click the Item General Observation File Load Edit e Load the required General Observation File or Open a new File e Near the Top Left corner of the displayed Programme form click the ASCII Import Button e On the newly displayed form select the YOM 3Ta Format Option then click the Proceed Button e Finally select the ASCII File normally a dat File from the displayed File Selection form 3 2 Downloading Co ordinate Data At this stage transferring Co ordinate data from a YOM 3Ta Total Station is done via an ASCII File create read routine Before running the appropriate SURPAC Programme use the YOM 3Ta to download an ASCII file Accessing this Data Transfer facility in SURPAC e Inthe Main Menu Bar Click the Heading General Then from the displayed Menu click the Item Co ordinate File Editing e Atthe Top Left corner of the displayed Programme form click the Options Button A new smaller f
336. ints These Points can however be recalled and again made Active at any time unless they have been Permanently Deleted see below To make Temporarily Deleted Points Active go to the Co ordinate File Editing programme and click the File Options item in the Actions Bar Menu On the displayed form is a frame entitled Co ordinate File Edit options If Temporarily Deleted Points exist for the current Co ordinate File then the option Restore Deleted Points in the Co ordinate File in this frame will be active Click on this option and then click the OK Button A new form will list all the Temporarily Deleted Points in the file Mark tick the Points that are to restored and click the OK Button The selected Point s will again become Active and will be available for use by all SURPAC programmes Page 77 of 312 Permanent Deletion of Co ordinate File Points If you want to Permanently Delete Points that are currently defined as non Active i e have been Temporarily Deleted then go to the Co ordinate File Editing programme and click the File Options item in the Actions Bar Menu On the displayed form is a frame entitled Co ordinate File Edit options From this frame select the option Purge the current Co ordinate File and then click the OK Button If Temporarily Deleted Points exist you will given the choice of Permanently Deleting these Points during the Purge action New Peg Index
337. ired portion of the original text deleted To accept any changes made on that line press the Enter key or double click the mouse LHB To cancel any changes made and return to the original text press the Esc key The object of this editing function is to provide a facility to making changes to items such as descriptions and heading on the output printout or output file These changes only relate to the current output activity and are not permanent changes Once the listing has been made and the programme exited these modifications will be lost If any inadvertent changes are made such as to co ordinate values then simply Exit from the programme without printing and then re generate the output listing in the usual way My thanks to Dudley Pound of Centurion for the original suggestion Page 140 of 312 General Modifications made to SURPAC Software SURPAC Problem when closing down When SURPAC was closed down by means of clicking the red X button at the top right of the form instead of using the normal Exit SURPAC Software menu item the application was not closing down correctly This was happening when using various programmes in SURPAC The result was a Permission Denied error if you then re ran SURPAC before closing down the PC This problem seems to be fixed now but if the Permission Denied error still crops up with any User please let me know about it Note If this error does occur it is not necessary to re bo
338. is 3000 2 3 Sending Co ordinates to a Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Total Station Accessing this Data Transfer facility in SURPAC e In the Main Menu Bar Click the Heading General Then from the displayed Menu click the Item Co ordinate File Editing At the Top Left corner of the displayed Programme form click the Options Button A new smaller form will be displayed showing the available Options Click the Send Data to an Electronic Field Book Option and then click the OK Button The displayed downloading form allows for the setting of the logger s data transfer parameters when the Set Parameters Button is clicked as well as for Sending the data Page 57 of 312 e When using a Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Series Total Station the Comms Settings should be as follows Baud Rate BPS 9600 BPS Data Parity None Data Bits 8 Bits Stop Bits 1 Bit e Set the Nikon in the mode necessary to Receive Data In SURPAC the Send Co ordinate Data to a Logger Instrument form should be shown From the list of available Loggers Total Stations select the Pentax PCS 300 Series Total Station Then select the Set Parameters Button and set or check the following options Connection Port COM2 or the appropriate Port number Baud Rate BPS 9600 BPS May be any value 19200 to 4800 Data Parity None Data Bits 8 Bits Stop Bits 1 Bit Flow Control Hardwire e On the displayed SURPAC form click the Send Data Button
339. isplay Colours Display Colour for Contour Lines Rea z Display Colour for Solid Triangle DTM Yellow Surface Options Clamp the Display Data to the 3D Google Earth Surface O Show Display Data in 3D over the Google Earth Surface Set required Height above Google Earth Surface 5m SQoglees earth SURPAC 3D Triangulation Model and Contours sdisplayedi in situ on Google Earth In the above example the Show Display in 3D over the Google Earth Surface was used This mode is necessary for physical manmade features such as dumps or stockpiles that overlay the pre existing natural surface Page 199 of 312 Google Earth Summary on displaying 3D Models in Google Earth In Google Earth it is possible to view imported and superimposed KML data from various view ports This can be done dynamically using the Mouse as follows e Panning Hold down the Mouse Left Hand button and move the cursor in the desired direction e Scaling Scroll the mouse scroll wheel forwards or backwards e 3D Object Viewing Move the cursor to the centre of the object then hold down the Mouse Middle button Moving the cursor forwards or backwards will change the Tilt vertical view point Moving the cursor left or right will change the Orientation horizontal view point The amount of vertical height exaggeration can be set in Google Earth by clicking on the Tools menu and selecting the Opti
340. isting You can highlight Points by Highlight a block of Points by clicking on the first Point and then dragging the mouse cursor to the last required Point or Il Highlight a block of Points by clicking on the first Point and then holding down the Shift keyboard key click on last required Point Ill Highlight selected Points by clicking on the first Point then holding down the keyboard Ctrl key click on any other Points required Then in the Actions Menu click on the File Options menu item to display the File Options form The Google Earth options are at the bottom of this list of options Click on Import interpolated Google Earth Heights and then click on the OK button If you Page 194 of 312 have highlighted a set of Points you will be prompted if you want to restrict the height importation to these Points Reply as appropriate Heights for the selected Points or for the entire file will now be imported via interpolation from the Google Earth DTM and displayed on the Co ordinate file listing These height importations are relatively slow and are imported at a rate of approximately 50 80 Point heights per minute depending on your internet connection speed The maximum Point heights that may be imported are restricted by Google Earth to 2 500 per day 1 3 Compare Existing heights with interpolated Google Earth Heights This function allows you to compare existing Co ordinate file heights with interpolated heights from
341. isting Co ordinate File Points the Contour Lines of the original Field surface and if required a shaded DTM background display of the original Field surface A 2 D display of the Cut Volume and Fill Volume dispersement for the Field by comparing the original surface with the computed surface A print out of the necessary Field setting out information for the Surveyor The ability to transfer the computed Feeder Line Planting Lines and Drainage Line Points to the current Co ordinate File This new programme can be run by clicking the SURPAC Main menu heading item Topographical and from the displayed menu select the item Land Levelling Routines Refer to the SURPAC Help pages for details on how to use this programme If you would a worked example of the above programme please email me and will send this through to you Modified Cadastral Diagram CAD Programme The Diagram CAD programme has been modified to allow for extended Line drawing and Editing functions Up to 5000 lines may now be used on a single Diagram This is to make allowance for long river boundaries that are composed of a large number of small lines Page 91 of 312 Modified Mining Double Back Fix Peg Calculation There was an error in this programme which arose when one of the angles of the triangle exceeded 90 The resulting calculation showed the two derived sets of co ordinates as being significantly different This pr
342. item Sheet Output to an AutoCAD DWG File Follow the on screen prompts SURPAC can also import Point information for direct storage into the current Co ordinate File To do this run the Co ordinate File Editing programme and then Click the File Options button In the top left hand panel of the displayed form Click the option Import Point Data from an AutoCAD DWG or DXF File and then Click the OK button When selecting the required input file make sure that the File Type is set correctly i e DWG or DXF The import and export functions in the various CAD programmes have been tested using DWG files from various sources Should you experience any problems with these routines then please let me know by e mailing the file s to me with an explanation as to which of the import export you were using when the problem occurred General Plan Programme New Function Ctrl C Ctrl C Areas with Data and Point Co ordinate Checking NB This new function is over and above the pre existing Ctrl D function which carries out a data consistency check without reference to any Point c ordinates The Ctrl C function computes progressive Polars around a closed polygon representing a Stand Erf for example and carries out a comparison between co ordinates derived from the Polar data and the Point co ordinates stored in the Co ordinate File The Polar data are obtained by using the Mouse cursor to select required Text Items displa
343. itioning and you still need to ensure that the Y X or E N co ordinates in the TFW file relate to the Projection and System of the current Co ordinate File RSA WG 27 for example The TFW file must have the same name as its associated TIF TIFF or JPG graphic file in order for this function to operate The function is very useful when importing orthometric images such as rectified orthophotos Thanks to Ed Kinsey of Chief Directorate Survey amp Mapping Mowbray for the sample data files All CAD Programmes Spell Checking Facility All SURPAC CAD programmes now incorporate a Spell Checking facility This facility will check the spelling of individual Text items as they are created using the WT Write Text Command or when they are edited using the WE Write Edit Command There is also a new Menu item called Spelling Check All Text which can be found under the Text menu heading Selecting this menu item will cause the programme to carry out a spelling check on all Text Items with the exception of Directions Distances and Point Names unless a Point Name Position is set as N5 or NO and the Name then written as a Text Item This Spell Checking is essentially the one used by the Microsoft Office Version 2000 or later applications such as Word Excel Access etc and in order for the Spell Checking facility to be activated in the SURPAC CAD programmes it is necessary that the Microsoft Word
344. itions and scales The new method employed has been optimised for HP Inkjet plotters printers and plotted images should now show good position and scale relative to their screen views If small adjustments are still required for individual plotters then these can be made through options provided on the form displayed immediately prior to sending the data to the printer plotter 6 The System Set form for Co ordinate Files now includes two Information Text Boxes allowing Users to enter any descriptive notes relevant to the current file These information lines are not printer or displayed anywhere except in the System Set form itself and are there purely as reminders or information for the User 7 The problem experienced by some Users when switching between the Join Polar and Intersection programmes has been fixed up It is also useful to note that SURPAC uses the Special Function Keys F2 F3 etc as hot keys allowing you to quickly toggle between some of the more widely used programmes In summary these are F1 Reserved for calling the SURPAC Help Pages for the currently displayed programme F2 The Co ordinate File Editing programme F3 The General CAD programme F4 The Observation File Editing programme F5 The Tacheometric File Editing programme F6 The Contour CAD programme F7 The Polar programme F8 The Join programme F9 The Intersection programme F10
345. itize cursor indicating that the programme is waiting for you to identify the Points to be used for the Diagram Whilst in this mode you are free to Zoom or Pan about the CAD Plot Sheet Once you have located and displayed the are containing the required figure click the cursor close to the top left hand Point of the figure The cursor will snap onto this Point and use it as Point A for the Diagram Go around the figure in a clockwise direction clicking onto all Points making up the figure Finally again click onto the first Point Point A to indicate to the programme that the figure has been closed and all Points have been identified NB If you make a mistake in identifying a Point just press the Esc Key You will then be given the option of going back one step i e ignoring the last Point clicked or cancelling the Diagram creation altogether You cannot identify a Point more than once If you do inadvertently click a Point twice you will receive an appropriate warning that that Point has already been used for the Diagram Once you have closed the figure any existing Lines and or Text Items within a calculated search limit 40 of the width of the figure will be tagged as to be included as part of the figural plot of the Diagram The Diagram Figural Data Entry Form will now be displayed and will include the CAD Plot Sheet selected Points as the Points to be used for the Main Figure Points You can now add the T
346. ity in CAD Programmes option in the bottom right hand panel General Modifications made to SURPAC Software General CAD Programme Line Erasure Polygon Lines Arcs and Circles This function will now also Delete any Arcs or Circles found within the defined Polygon In order for an Arc to be deleted the entire Arc must lie inside the defining Polygon General CAD Programme Reset Attributes for Arcs and Circles This new function allows for the Resetting of the Attributes for Arcs and Circles As for the resetting of Line attributes each Arc Circle can be reset individually or all Arcs Circles having the same attributes as the selected all Arc Circle can be Reset simultaneously or all Arcs Circles having the same attributes as the selected Arc Circle can be Deleted Sectional Title CAD Programme Importing data from TopoCAD This function was not importing the data as instructed but this has now been rectified Working Plan CAD Programme Importing DXF data This function was not importing the data as instructed but this has now been rectified Creating an ASCII File from a Co ordinate File An option has been added which allows the User to suppress the sending of header information to the ASCII file This header information includes a description of the file system file name date etc and would normally be required information when sending the ASCII file to a third party However these header lines apparently cause a pro
347. ixels prefer to have SURPAC running in a window that occupies only the left half of the screen when carrying out any of the calculation routines This prevents large areas of blank grey background filling the screen instead of leaving it available for other applications that might also be running However when using any of the SURPAC CAD programmes prefer the sheet display to occupy the entire screen as this makes it easier to move pan around the drawing On the assumption that other users might also prefer this arrangement have introduced a new option that maintains SURPAC in a user defined window and position whilst in calculation mode but changes the display to full screen mode whenever a CAD programme is used On closing the CAD programme the display reverts to the use defined window To enable this option select and run the Co ordinate File Editing programme which is the default programme when running SURPAC and then Click the File Options button in the Actions Bar menu The Co ordinate File Options form will be displayed In the bottom right hand panel of this form Click the Maximize Screen Display for CAD Programmes option making sure that the check box displays an X The same procedure can be used to remove the option making sure that the check box is blank if the feature is no longer required Option to Paste Areas into General Plan and Sectional Title Area Files The option to Paste Areas into Area files of
348. k Commands The BackGround option can be toggled ON OFF by pressing the F11 key This function can be very useful for example when planning information is to be imported from a DXF file and when a mathematically correct layout is to be constructed based on the imported DXF information In this case when importing the data set all DXF Layers to be imported into Pen 8 there is an Option on the DXF Import form that will automatically do this if required After the importing is complete select the BackGround option as ON by pressing the F11 key For data that already exists on a General CAD Sheet use the Reset Line Attributes and Reset Text Attributes Commands to change required data to Pen 8 for speed use the global Change All Lines of this type when resetting Lines 4 2 Changing the Associated Co ordinate File Whenever a General CAD Sheet is created it is immediately associated with the current Co ordinate File In other words the Point data will be that contained in the current Co ordinate File Sometimes however it is required to keep a CAD Sheet s Line Text information etc intact but to relate this information to some other Co ordinate File In order to change the Associated Co ordinate File for a General CAD Sheet click the Programme s Edit main menu heading and then select the Change Associated Co ordinate File item From the displayed Open File form select the required Co ordinate
349. l display a list of all Set Up Points for Resections or Forward Observed Control Points for Intersections found in the currently defined Observation File and allow you to select the required Point Page 13 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 04 Release 03 1 Reducing of Observation Files When reducing Observation Files it is now possible to limit the calculation process to a User defined portion of the Observation File You may now enter the Start and End line numbers to restrict the programme to those lies only Obviously at least one Set Up must be included in the range of Lines selected This new feature applies to both reductions to a Tacheometric File and the Co ordinate File 2 Keeping Spot Heights and Mark Points at Constant Size This new feature applies to the Contour Creation Plotting Programme and the C A D Drawing amp Plotting Programme By default the size of both Spot Heights and or Mark Points will be held at a Constant Size The following provisos and options are applicable e The Constant Size will be the User defined default Data Character Size in mm This character size may be altered either through the Sheets Set Up Information Form or via the Set Display Options Menu Item e The Constant Size function is only applied by the Programmes when the Sheet Display Scale is larger or equal to the User defined Final Plotting Scale This is to prevent the Display being covered by re
350. l now download Leica 16 Bit data as well as the 8 Bit format This applies to both Observations and Co ordinates 16 Bit Co ordinate files may now be generated for sending directly to a Wild Leica instrument or logger or to an ASCII file When downloading the relevant programme can automatically identify whether the incoming data is in 16 Bit or 8 Bit format For Uploading the User is given the choice of using either the 16 Bit or 8 Bit format 3 Downloading from the Topcon GTS 200 2120 500 700 Series The previous release of SURPAC contained a bug in these routines When downloading the programmes either reported a division by zero error or only downloaded the Setup and Orientation observation lines This problem has now been corrected 4 Sectional Title CAD Programme modifications 4 1 The usage of Sub Areas has been extended allowing the Main or parent Area to be on one Sheet and the Sub Areas on any of the other Sheets Previously the Main Area and all Sub Areas had to all be on the same Sheet 4 2 When Sub Areas are combined with the Main Area the Main Area will include all Sub Areas and the Sub Areas will be deleted from the relevant sheet s 4 3 A Participation Quota Sheet will not be generated if the programme detects the presence of Sub Areas which have not been combined with their respective Main Areas When this occurs you will be prompted to combine all Areas if you want to proceed with the PQ Sheet cons
351. latively huge numbers when a small Display Scale is used e You can cancel the Constant Size function by clicking the appropriate Check Box after selecting the Set Display Options Menu Item 3 Changing the Size Outline Colour and Background Colour of Mark Points This new feature applies to the C A D Drawing amp Plotting Programme Existing Mark Points Circles Squares triangles etc may have their Size Outline Drawing Colour and Background colour changed via the Set Display Options Menu Item found under either the Mark Pnt or Point Main Menu items The Size and Colour of existing Point Names may also be changed using this same option 4 Zoom to a Window Zoom to Full Sheet and Zoom to Plot Scale This new feature applies to All the SURPAC C A D Programmes Users can now employ these three new Commands to improve on screen Scale changing and to locate on screen positions With the pre existing Zoom Up and Zoom Down Commands the full list of Zoom Commands is now Pg Up Zoom Display Scale Up Selecting this Command from the General or F Key Main Menu or pressing the Pg Up keyboard key will cause the Screen display to be re plotted at half the current display Scale For example if the current Screen display Scale is 1 1000 the new Scale will become 1 500 Pg Dn Zoom Display Scale Down Selecting this Command from the General or F Key Main Menu or pressing the Pg Dn keyboard key
352. le itself is located If this also fails the listed associations will be discarded The Cadastral General Plan CAD programme has been modified to allow scale reductions and or enlargements of the Sheet For example an AO GP Sheet at 1 500 can have its Sheet settings changed to A3 at a scale of 1 2000 This will allow plotting of the General Plan on an A3 Sheet maintaining the relative sizing of all items The Sheet can then be switched back to AO and a scale of 1 500 The new SURPAC Access Code As you would know by now we have been forced to increase the level of security for SURPAC Software installations This new security requirement comes into force on the 6 January 2004 and all Users need to have obtained their new SURPAC Access Code by this date To avoid any interruptions to your usage of SURPAC please do not leave this to the last possible moment The prior releases of SURPAC Version 5 20 required that an obtained Access Code only be entered on or after the 6 January 2004 However those of you who have already obtained the new Access Code may input this Code immediately after implementing this current SURPAC Upgrade Version 5 20 Release 03 Any SURPAC Access Code obtained after implementing this SURPAC Version 5 20 Release 03 may be entered immediately To obtain your Access Code click the SURPAC main menu heading Help select the Get User Information Code menu item and then e mail preferably or t
353. le Earth has now been added to path search in this latest version of SURPAC Importing Polygons from Google Earth Into the General CAD Programme Previously the maximum number of sides for an imported Google Earth Polygon was set at 100 This has now been extended to 5 000 which should cover most User requirements Least Squares Single Point Fix When an Observation line contained both a Horizontal Angle and a Slope Distance the programme was not making provision for the case where the Horizontal Angle was deleted and only the Slope Distance was required to be used This has now been rectified Vertical Curve Alignment Programme There was a bug in this programme which sometimes caused the display of an incorrect K factor value in the Curve Alignment Set Up display This has now been corrected Printing the Co ordinate File listing to an ASCII file When printing a Co ordinate File listing to an ASCII file by using either the Print File icon or the Print the Co ordinate File List menu option from the Pop Up menu when using the Co ordinate File Editing programme an error message was displayed and the ASCII file was not created This problem has now been fixed Selecting a Printer for Calculation Printing You may now select any installed Printer device for printing calculations without changing the Windows Default printer setting From the top File main menu heading click the menu item Printer Select and S
354. le selection box will display the image in the image holder at the top centre of the form To select this file as the Image for the Current Image double click on the file Name Page 239 of 312 Image File Headings Each Image used for an Image Placemark or Image Polygon can have its own Heading For example for Image 1 position the cursor in the input box directly below the heading Image 1 Heading enter the heading required for that Image Repeat this for all Images that are used Image Sizes You can set the size of each Image included in the Placemark or Polygon KML file Image width values may be selected from 75 pixels up to 600 pixels The default value is 300 pixels These are the sizes of the Images that will be shown when you click on a Placemark or Polygon in Google Earth The actual size of the Image itself is not changed Once in Google Earth you can right Click on a displayed Image in order to display it full size Placemark or Polygon General Headings At the bottom left of the form are input boxes for up to 9 General Headings These headings may be used for any descriptive purpose to help describe the purpose locality etc of the Image Placemark or Image Polygon These headings may be entered edited or removed in the usual way Placemark or Polygon Link Files A Link File is a file that the Image Placemark or Image Polygon can load up and display within Google Earth via a hyperlink text item NB Link Files have to
355. ll become active for the listing You can now move up or down through the listing by scrolling the Mouse wheel If you want to edit a line of Point information then Click the required line at the require column position Name Y Co ordinate etc and the Mouse cursor will jump onto the Edit Line Check Box The data for the Clicked line will be placed in the Edit Line text boxes and the column Clicked will be highlighted ready for editing Once editing is complete Click the Check Box Some Name Display Grids such as for the Join and Polar programmes require that the Horizontal Scrollbar is Clicked before the scrolling function becomes active This is due to the cursor focus being set on one of the Text Input boxes waiting for an input such as a Point name rather than on the Display Grid Using the Mouse Scrolling feature for SURPAC Graphic CAD programmes When in a CAD programme the Mouse scrolling feature can be used as a Zoom function allowing you to change the Display Scale of the sheet To Zoom In scroll the wheel away from you and to Zoom Out scroll the wheel towards you The smoothness of the zooming feature depends largely on the amount of data on the sheet and the operating speed of your computer A General Summary of Mouse features for SURPAC Graphic CAD programmes The following is a re cap of the available Mouse functions for SURPAC CAD programmes 1 Holding the LHB down and moving the cursor will allow you to Pan m
356. locking on to the Points of the first file defined source file for Point merging Even if you subsequently elected to merge from another file the first defined file would remain as the source file for Point selection This has now been corrected Page 155 of 312 SURPAC Version 5 32 Release 02 Programme Modifications General Modifications made to SURPAC Software As this SURPAC Upgrade is being issued within 3 weeks of the previous Upgrade there are not a lot of changes or additions However those that have been made are quite important Co ordinate File Label Field Elements columns Copy and Paste The two text Label Fields when selected now support the normal Windows Copy Ctrl C and Paste Ctrl V functions Diagram Creation CAD Programme Curvilinear Boundaries A Bezier Curve function has been added to allow for the better display of curvilinear boundaries This Command allows for the drawing and plotting of Bezier Curves though a number of User defined Points This Command is activated by selecting the Bezier Curve Fitting menu item under the programme s Line menu heading After this simply Click the Mouse LHB on a series of positions any position Point or Line terminal that you want to use to define the Bezier Curve As you progress the Bezier Curve will be displayed in purple through the positions selected When you reach the last required position Click the Mouse RHB The Curve function will now close and the
357. lour aaa Apply Colour to Existing Point Names Mark Point Attributes Set the Mark Point Size mm 2 5 Select the Mark Point Drawing Colour BE lt i Select the Mark Point Background Colour Apply Changes to Existing Mark Points amp Keep Name and Mark Point Display Size Constant x Keep the Pen Line Thicknesses Constant x At the bottom of the displayed form you can select or de select both the Point Display Size and the Line Thickness Display options Page 207 of 312 e Contour Generating and Plotting CAD programme Click on the Edit menu heading then select the Change the Pen Thickness Values menu item Number of Decimal Places 1place 2Places 3 Places Set Constant and Character Height Height Constant to be applied 0 00 Point Character Height mm 2 50 Keep Spot Height Display Size Constant x Keep Pen Line Thicknesses Constant x At the bottom of the displayed form you can select or de select both the Spot Height Display Size and the Line Thickness Display options e General Plan GP Data Sheet Diagram Sectional Title and Working Plan CAD programmes Click on the Edit menu heading then select the Set Pen Line Thicknesses menu item Pen Line Thickness Settings Setiview the Line Thicknesses mm Thickness 0 20 mm Thickness 0 30 mm Thickness 0 50 mm Thickness 0 75 mm Thickness 1 00 mm N
358. lour Mode item or the Display Sheet using Monochrome Mode When in the Standard Colour Mode the Sheet will be displayed using the normal colours and Point symbols as defined in the Survey Regulations When in the Monochrome Mode the Sheet will be displayed so that all measured lines normally red and grid lines normally blue will be displayed in grey Beacons Stations and Trig Beacons will be displayed in black as shown on the previous page NB Users may include the above graphic on any Working Plan Sheet by using the Image functions as follows From the Working Plan Image main menu heading select the Add Import an Image item From the display query form click the Select an Image from a Disk File and click proceed Set the Files of type as Jpeg and then set the Look in item as C Surpac98 folder Select the file WP Beacon Legend Monochrome jpg On the Sheet move the cursor to the required Top Left position for inserting the Image and click the mouse Move the cursor to the required Bottom Right position for the Image and again click the mouse The inserted Image will now be visible The Image Size and or Position can be changed using the appropriate Image main menu options New Longitudinal and Cross Section CAD functions Both the Longitudinal Section and the Cross Section programmes have had CAD editing facilities add
359. ly After selecting a Sheet position SURPAC will search for the nearest Point within range of the currently set Snap Radius If no Point can be found SURPAC will adopt the current cursor position i e there will be no Snap function Snap to Lines Only After selecting a Sheet position SURPAC will search for the nearest Line terminal within range of the currently set Snap Radius If no Line terminal can be found SURPAC will adopt the current cursor position i e there will be no Snap function Snap to Grid Lines After selecting a Sheet position SURPAC will search for the nearest Grid Line intersection or terminal within range of the currently set Snap Radius If no Grid Line intersection or terminal can be found SURPAC will adopt the current cursor position i e there will be no Snap function There are also options to set the Snap Radius in mm and to turn the Snap Mode On Off To access the Snap options click the Edit main menu heading and then select the menu item Select the Snap Option Creating a Rectangular Point and or Line Mesh This new function allows for the creation display and storing of Lines Points or both that cover a User defined area The Mesh may be at any User given position cover any User given rectangular area and be at any User defined Mesh Interval or Orientation 3 3 E 3 Example of a 10m Mesh of Lines and Points created over a slimes dam To access this fu
360. mation The advantages of transforming using the Auto Transformation method are obviously speed and convenience The two files the Source and Target files do not need the corresponding Points to have the same Names However be warned that large Source files e g in excess of 1000 Points can cause the process to run slowly especially on older computers The pre requisite configurations for an Auto Transformation are e The System 1 file which is the Source file for the Points to be transformed must be an existing SURPAC Co ordinate File e The System 2 file which is the Target file for the transformed Points must be the Current Co ordinate File e The System 1 file must contain all the common Points control Points required for the transformation plus any other non common Points that are to be subsequently transformed based on the transformation parameters derived from the Auto Transformation e The System 2 file must only contain the common Points control Points required for the transformation e The two files the Source and Target files do not need the corresponding Points to have the same Names e If the System 1 file Source file has a large number of non common Points and the corresponding common Points in the two files have different Names then it is advisable to let the common Points in System 1 have Names that appear near the beginning of an alpha numerical listing This is to speed up searching in large file
361. means of the associated dbf file attribute format data base file SURPAC creates the following headings in this file with each attribute being added to each heading for each Point POINT_NAME The Point Name up to 8 characters POINT_CODE The SURPAC Description Code for the Point OR POINT_DESC The SURPAC Full Description for the Point CALC_PAGE The Calculation Page number for the Point FB_PAGE The Field Book Page number for the Point DATE The Date the Point was last calculated or modified LABEL 1 The Point Label 1 Heading LABEL 2 The Point Label 2 Heading Page 232 of 312 Importing ESRI Shapefiles into SURPAC Importing Polygons from a Shapefile into SURPAC Polygons can be imported into either the General CAD programme or the Cadastral General Plan CAD programme If you are importing a Shapefile that has been created through SURPAC or any other application that quantifies Line and Text attributes such as Layer Pen width Style etc then the current Layer or Pen number set in the CAD Sheet is not important as imported data will be correctly allocated However if the Shapefile s associated dbf file does not include attributes set the CAD Sheet into the required Layer with the required Line and Text Style before importing the Shapefile polygons Click on the Import menu heading and then select the Import Data from an ESRI Shapefile menu item and then select the required Shapefile to be imported amp
362. metrical Beacons Town Survey Marks 75 Bench Marks Please note that the hot Spot that identifies the position of the item is Survey Beacons Points the bottom centre of the icon Image Placemarks or Polygons Ba My Stations TrigNet Stations References NGI Department of Rural Development and Land Reform Teboho Maphakisa VRS technology as densification to RTK for GPS GNSS Page 305 of 312 EA New Locating and Adding Nearest Trig Beacons Botswana amp Lesotho This programme provides the facility of locating a set of the nearest Trigonometrical Beacons about a User defined geographical position If required the located Points may be added to the current Co ordinate File and or displayed on Google Earth if the WGS 1984 ellipsoid is set as the current ellipsoid This programme has now been extended to cover 1 The Republic of Botswana for surveys defined as using the Arc 1950 Clarke 1880 Modified Ellipsoid System or the Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Zone 35s System Clarke 1880 Modified Ellipsoid 2 The Kingdom of Lesotho for surveys defined as using either the Arc 1950 Clarke 1880 Modified Ellipsoid System or the WG WGS 84 Ellipsoid System a SURPAC Locate Nearest Trig Beacons and or Hep No 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Selection Options Name 5010032 5010008 5010031 5010002 5010015 501
363. mis closure of the Line Traverse on an existing Point or Line terminal The Line Traverse will then be adjusted according to the mis closure To use this function move the cursor close to the required Line Traverse starting Point or Line terminal Then either enter the keyboard shortcut Command LV or select the menu item Line Data Traverse under the Line menu heading The following data entry form will be displayed amp Line Traverse xs Line Data j ageng oeme 142 36 30 0 12 36 The programme will continue displaying the above form waiting for data entry until a calculated Line Traverse Y X or E N values fall within 0 20m of an existing and currently visible Point or Line terminal When such a point or Line terminal is found the following form will be displayed Page 294 of 312 Line Data Traverse xs Line Traverse Mis closure Point Name if X 55A 70635 440 905215 822 Traverse 70635 464 905215 798 DY 0 024 DX 0 024 Mis closure 0 034 Continue the Traverse Adjust the Traverse S To adjust the Line Traverse and save the adjusted traverse Lines click the Adjust the Traverse button Otherwise either Abort the Line Traverse or continue with the Traverse to close on another Point or Line terminal 2 General Plan CAD programme New function Block Boundary Line Sum Check This function allows Users to check the total length of a Block boundary and compare this len
364. mm The AutoPlan GP Creation option form The AutoPlan GP Creation option form provides for a number of automatic data creation options The first three options allow for the auto creation and or display of the e Stand Lines e Stand Data and e Stand Points Further options allow for e Adding the calculated Areas to the Sheet Area File e Adding each Stand to the Sheet s Shape Polygon File e Centring and Printing the Stand Number and e Centring and Printing the Stand Area After completing the option selection on the above form Click the OK button to begin the AutoPlan GP Creation process Page 286 of 312 amp suRPac Ver 5 64 for Windows XP Vista 7 8 General Plan Crea i PRERE NNE veJ Sheet No 04 Scale 1 400 Swing 00 Press Mouse RHB or Space Bar for Pull Down Menu se a 247342 ei 200 0650 f 3040 237820 at wis oa 24732 ee Bes 28 i EA ey z lt zg MB KII a2 re w aB 24734 F ak 23782B Bs 24735 2s win wa Po et 23782 i GA paN pe 7334 2473241 98 57 9 pid mH 2336 91 17 50 nS a3 z ABI 23 98 247422 270 51 50 a 24742 g 24737 ES oO 485 272 06 92 56 00 e AT 5796 2 43 38 24737 4 24740 272 58 00 Sm Se nal Y 34278 356 X 2765760 087 lt gt After completion of the AutoPlan GP Creation process the Sheet needs to be inspected for any missing data Point Names that overlap boundaries
365. mmand To continue with a series of Auto Write Stand amp Area actions use the Mouse MB To re start a series of Auto Write Stand amp Area actions to re set the Stand Erf number for example use the F11 command All SURPAC CAD Programmes Point Locate and Zoom When using the PL Point Locate command the programme will centre the sheet display about the Located Point and will also Zoom closer on to the Point Basic Co ord Distance Area Conversions This programme was not allowing for User selection of Points from a defined source Co ordinate file Now once you have defined the output target file for the converted Points the programme offers you the choice of converting all the Points in the source file If you reply No to this option a listing of the Points in the source file will e displayed at the bottom right part of the form allowing you to select tick the Points that you want converted Support for the Sokkia Instrument Mining Software SDR ASCII File format SURPAC now supports the Sokkia Instrument Mining Software format for the calculation of Mining U G Pegs when using the Double Button method SURPAC will import data from a Sokkia SDR ASCII file into an Observation file as usual When calculating the Peg from the Observation file SURPAC will combine certain observations to separate the Top Peg and Bottom Peg readings Merging Points from another SURPAC Co ordinate file This routine was
366. n e When prompted select a suitable folder and then press the Unzip button After extraction close down the Zip application e Go to the folder where the unzipped files are saved and then double click on the SETUP exe application e Select an appropriate folder for installing the dxfauthor exe files and then install NB Included in this Upgrade of SURPAC is the Word document dxfAuth Help Pages doc that provides a worked example on creating a DXF file from Shapefiles This file can be found in the same folder in which the SURPAC Software is installed have done a few simple tests and the application seems to work well is simple to use and produces the desired results Using this application a Shapefile for the African continent for example can be converted into DXF and then loaded into a SURPAC General CAD Sheet as shown here Using the Fill Commands The General CAD programme includes commands for Filling a User defined area or polygon The area can be any closed figure bounded by lines of any colour The boundary lines can be a figure created from a series of straight lines be a closed set of connected spline curves or be a closed figure created by using the Sketch mode When Filling the figure with a colour Page 205 of 312 you may select either the current Hatch Colour or a colour selected at Random by the programme Any Filled area may be Deleted at any stage If you are goi
367. n File No 1 C Surpac Software Samples 8140bgpwg84 Comparison Options Compare Points by Name Compare Points by Co ordinates C Maximum Search Limit for Point Matching m 5 00 Output Display Options Show Co ordinate Comparisons Show Description Comparisons Display the Non Common Points Hide the Non Common Points Sort Results Alphabetically Sort by Differences High Low Page 220 of 312 Two new features have been added to this programme First it is possible to display the list of comparisons in alphanumeric order which is the existing method or in order of magnitude of the linear difference between respective points Selecting this latter option will display the list from the largest difference to the smallest difference Secondly the display of the non common points between the two files may be ignored Obviously there are instances where the display of the non common points is necessary and important However if only the comparison of common points needs to be examined the display can be cluttered with unrequired non common point information General SURPAC Modifications Fix up for the problem occurring when modifying Engineering Layer Point Descriptions Engineering format Setting Point Descriptions to their Layer Description Number when the Observation file Point Codes are defined as numbers and not text items Fix up for the problem that sometimes occurred when makin
368. n File security is ABCD1234 and when this value is set the programme presumes that no security protection is required Leaving the Password as ABCD1234 will leave the Observation Files unprotected Hence a new Password can be set to protect files for a specific reason or for a specific time After this the Password can be reset to the above default vale and the file protection will be removed Once a Password other than the default value has been set on a computer any User of that computer will have to enter the set Password in order to modify a file s data line When entering the Password the User has the option of 1 unlocking the file for modification for either one action the current action or 2 unlocking the file for modification for the entire current SURPAC session Page 188 of 312 New option for Reset Text Attributes Command all CAD programmes This new option allows all Text items satisfying the User set criteria to be changed to be either all Upper Case or all Lower Case characters Contour CAD Erasing Surface Edge Triangles When creating Contours from Surface Triangulation Edge Triangles are those triangles constructed through the auto triangulation process that lie outside the area required by the User for the contour display Edge Triangles cannot be modified normally by using the F11 Command as they only have one of their sides common with any other triangle When giving the F11 Command on
369. n and therefore is not able to directly call a 64 bit application This is only applicable if the ellipsoid used for the current Co ordinate file is WGS84 Importing DXF DWG files The importing of DXF DWG files has been improved by the inclusion of 3DFACE TRACE and SOLID items The SOLID items are imported as Hatch items using the original DXF DWG colour The SURPAC General CAD programme now supports the full range of the AutoCAD Standard Colours Page 185 of 312 The Diagram CAD Programme Diagrams can now accommodate a larger number of Servitude and Excluded Figure points The total number of points on a Diagram remains at 300 Co ordinate File Headings Previously the stored File Heading and Mean Height above Sea Level for a Co ordinate file were not being recalled when the file was reloaded This has now been corrected Sheet Panning All CAD files The Sheet Panning used previously shifted the Sheet in the opposite direction to the cursor movement Panning is carried out by pressing and holding down the Mouse LHB and then moving the Mouse The thinking behind this Panning movement was that the cursor should be moved towards the are of the Sheet that needs to be viewed However this type of Panning is in conflict with the Panning method used by applications such as Google Earth and AutoCAD In these applications the mouse grabs the current display and then moves it in sympathy with the moving cursor As many Users oft
370. n the Image Width and Height Ratio option and select the Apply Meridian Convergence to Image option NB This last option is important as it is necessary for SURPAC to apply a small rotation to the incoming Image to compensate for Meridian Convergence This due to the Google Earth Image being oriented to True North and the SURPAC Image being oriented to the Grid North i e the True North at the central meridian The Sheet will automatically be re oriented by the amount of the Meridian Convergence On the SURPAC General CAD Sheet move the cursor to the top left corner defined by the imported Polygon and then click the Mouse LHB Now move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the Polygon and then click the Mouse RHB SURPAC will now apply a swing to the Image to correct for the Meridian Convergence The Sheet will again re orientate back to 0 and displa y the adjusted imported Image NB The Image will no longer fit perfectly onto the Polygon lines due to the former having been swung to compensate for the Meridian Convergence Adjusting the Imported Sheet Image Setting the Image to the Background If the Image lies on top of existing Line and Text items then set the Image as the background i e the Lines Text Points etc will be displayed on top of the Image To do this right Click on the Image click the Image menu heading and then select the menu item Send Images to the Back Shifting the Image The imported Image may need to
371. n this happens a prompt will be displayed showing that the printed calculation pages for this file will be sent to the Virtual Pages and not to the physical printer Polar programme Setting a Direction parallel to defined Points The Polar programme displayed an erroneous result when a Direction was defined by setting it parallel to the line joining two Points existing in the file This has now been corrected Sectional Title CAD programme Areas and Mid Wall Calculations The Sectional Title programme was sometimes displaying the incorrect Area when using the F11 Calculate and display the figural Directions Distances and Area function This has now been corrected The Mid Wall position calculation was also leaving small line extensions between the first and last lines created at the mid wall position This has also been corrected Page 120 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 23 Release 06 New Layer Options when creating AutoCAD DXF and DWG Files When creating either AutoCAD DXF or DWG files the SURPAC CAD programmes General CAD General Plan Diagram Sectional Title GP Data Sheet and Working Plan now include the option of using either a simple Layering system or a more complex Line Colour Type and Thickness based system SURPAC DWG File Creation DWG File Creation Options Data Storage Store in 3D Format O Store in 2D Format Creation of AutoCAD Layers Create a Single AutoCAD Layer for eac
372. nces etc and then click the Locate Line Points button Finally either of the two options may be selected to move the located points on line or to calculate new on line points General CAD General Plan Working Plan and Sectional Title CAD programmes These programmes have all had a new function added which allows for the quick and simple visual resetting of the Sheet Centre position Before calling this command first set the screen display of the Sheet so that the entire Sheet is visible then click either the Edit or the General menu headings and then select the menu item called Select a new Sheet Centre Move the cursor to the required new Sheet Centre position and then click the mouse LHB You can use the mouse MB to quickly repeat this command in order to adjust the selected Centre position if required General Plan CAD programme A new option has been added which allows the drawing of a circle at a defined line bend point This command is used to indicate the position of a line bend when there is no point calculated at that position To call this command move the mouse close to the bend point and then click the mouse RHB Then click on the Point menu heading and then select the menu item Draw a Circle Line Bend Position Page 190 of 312 Mining Peg calculation programmes These programmes Double Set Up Double Button and Double Back Fix have been modified to work correctly when the current Co ordinate File System is d
373. nction Click either the Line or Point main menu heading and then select the menu item Rectangular Point Line Mesh after which the Mesh option input form will be displayed The Mesh position and Area to be covered are defined by selecting two Points and an Orientation The first Point is usually the Point on the left West side of the area The second Point should be diagonally opposite the first Point Page 223 of 312 7 amp Generate a Mesh of Rectangular Point and or Line data for a Defined Area X Mesh Information Point Name Y Co ord X Co ord First Cnr Point CP1 552 137 407 970 Diag Opp Point CP2 368 874 491 574 Set Direction of Primary Mesh Lines gt 180 to lt 270 256 00 00 Set the required Mesh Interval 10 000 v Set the Starting Name for the Generated Points G1 Display Point Names and Single Circle for all calculated Mesh Points x interpolate Mesh Point Heights from the Underlying Sheet DIM N Obtain Mesh Point Heights from Google Earth DTM Surface Only Generate and Store the Points for the Mesh Layout Only Generate and Store the Lines for the Mesh Layout Generate and Store both Points and Lines for the Mesh Layout Rectangular Mesh Option form The rectangular Area to be covered with a Mesh of Lines and or Points is User defined This is done by entering the First Corner Point usually being the Point nearest to the North West corner of the a
374. nd or Editing form now includes 5 1 A List of all existing Fonts from which the required Font for the current Text Item may be selected 5 2 An option to change all characters in the current Text Item to Lower Case 5 3 An option to change all characters in the current Text Item to Upper Case 5 4 An option to set the current Text Item to Double Spacing 5 5 An option to set or remove the Underlining of the current Text Item The other Options Text Colour Direction Size etc remain as before NB This Option does not apply to the Contouring Creation Plotting Programme Page 23 of 312 Additions and Modification applicable to Individual SURPAC Graphic Programmes 2 Contouring Creation Plotting C A D Programme 1 1 1 2 Options using the new Triangulation Polygon functions The new Triangulation Polygon Option consists of 4 functions namely Deleting all existing Triangles lying within the defining Polygon Deleting all existing Points lying within the defining Polygon Merging appending Points from another Tacheometric file that lie within the defining Polygon and 1 1 4 Re Triangulate the area covered by the defining Polygon i l 1 1 1 Qn These Options may be carried out individually or simultaneously It is possible for example to delete all Triangles and Points lying within a User defined Polygon then merge Points from another file and re Triangulate the Polygon area all in a singl
375. nd or from the designated Point that is to be fixed All Distances will then be reduced and used to carry out a simultaneous Least Squares fix and adjustment of the Point s Y X or E N ordinates 8 Other SURPAC Changes Other changes and corrections have been made to various SURPAC programmes In general these have been made in response to problems or requests from SURPAC Users Briefly these include Downloading Observation data using the Leica GSI 8 format additional options Intersection programme for a Direction and a Distance the a option had incorrect values Tacheometric file generation from an Observation file the first 3 lines sometimes went AWOL Page 5 of 312 The Name position 0 in the General Plan programme the Point circle was not being shown Goldfield gt Lo conversions when using Metres the incorrect factor was being applied UTM Zone to Zone Conversions Extending the maximum number of Points observed at a single Set Up for Trig Heighting to 60 The Fieldbook output option of an Observation file was not working Error 54 The General Obs File Reductions to the Co ordinate File programme now display the DY DX DZ values the linear mis closure and the Class A limit for double or multiple Polar calculations The Size and Position used for the SURPAC software display plus the optional display of the Printed Pages and the Calculator Forms are recorded when you Exit fr
376. ndows Explorer to display the download Folder contents Look for the file called Surpac Control Files exe and double click its Icon This will Run the self extracting ZIP file On the displayed PKZIP Extraction Form set the Destination Folder Name as that in which SURPAC is currently installed the default is C Surpac98 then click the Finish Button Once extraction is complete which should only take a few seconds the two control files be stored in the SURPAC installation folder Finally display the contents of the SURPAC Installation Folder and ensure that the two SURPAC files called LoLatLonList sur and WGLatLonList sur have been installed Both of these files are approximately 1 1 Mb in size 1 Clarke 1880 Modified to WGS 84 Transformations Programme Overview This programme provides for rapid and accurate transformations between the Cape Datum Clarke 1880 Modified Ellipsoid either an RSA Lo System or a UTM Zone System and the Hartebeesthoek94 Datum WGS 84 Ellipsoid either an RSA WG System or a UTM Zone System within South Africa Two control files are provided that cover the entire country and which contain approximately 38 000 common Control Points These files have been verified and compiled from data supplied by SURPAC Users throughout South Africa over the past 3 4 months My thanks to those SURPAC Users who were approached by us with a request to supply common data that they might
377. ne Generate Line Subdivide Line Replicate Line Trim Write Line Data Line Logical Line Intersect etc The selection of Line Colour Pen number Line Style and Line Thickness is from the Pull Down menu or from a Toolbar Text Commands The selection of Text Colour Pen number is from the Pull Down menu or from one of the Toolbars Page 2 of 312 Import Commands Import Commands now allow for the rapid transfer of Line Arc Circle and Text data between the CAD Plotting General Plan Sectional Title and Working Plan programmes as well as between any of these programmes and TopoCAD CAD GIS All SURPAC CAD programmes support the DXF output format The CAD Plotting General Plan Sectional Title and Working Plan programmes support the import of DXF data Image Commands All the CAD programmes are able to import create and or export Graphic Images A number of image file formats are supported for file importing A graphic file may be imported from a stored disk file or from the Windows Clipboard An imported Image may be moved shifted re sized flipped or removed Images can be shown on top of other sheet items or behind them depending on the Image s function Images can vary from a full sheet background image to a small Image such as a digitized signature Hatching CAD Plotting programme only The CAD Plotting programme now supports the Hatching of closed Polygons A number of different Hatch styles and colours
378. ne Segment item or b Move the cursor close to the required segment then give the Keyboard Command X i e press the X key on the Keyboard To Restore Re enable the Last Disabled Segment Select the Restore Last Disabled Segment item from the BreakLines menu Repeated use of this Command will Restore a series of previously Disabled Segments To Restore Re enable all Disabled Segments Select the Restore All Disabled Segments item from the BreakLines menu 3 The General C A D Plotting Programme 2 1 Dynamic Display of Latitude and Longitude values The Geographical values Latitude and Longitude of any Point Line Terminal or the current Cursor position can now be displayed in dynamic mode Once this option is selected from the General menu the Latitude and Longitude will be shown in the display line at the top of the screen just below the menus The current Co ordinate File must be set as a recognisable Grid system linked to one of the available Spheroids e g RSA Lo System RSA WG System UTM System Irish Grid System UK National Grid system etc 2 2 Sheet Setup Information changes When using the Plot File Sheet Setup Information Option from the File menu the following Options are now available 2 2 1 Define a required Horizontal Alignment File to be included in the Sheet display 2 2 2 Define a required Surface Contour File to be included in the Sheet displa
379. ng to delete both the Fill colour and the figure itself make sure that the bounding figure is deleted before deleting the Fill colour The display of Filled areas may be turned on or off at any stage Note that when Printing a General CAD Sheet the Filled areas cannot be directly printed In order to create a hard copy output of a Sheet containing Filled areas first create a Graphic image jpg tif etc of the Sheet from SURPAC then use any image printing software to print the image Using the Fill option with Random Colours the map of Africa displayed above imported from a Shapefile that has been converted to a DXF file can now be displayed in colour General SURPAC Information amp Modifications Checking for the latest SURPAC Upgrade From time to time intermediate Upgrades are made to SURPAC Software and these are loaded onto the www surpac co za web site These intermediate changes are not sent out for general notification and the Version number does not change However you can at any time check to see if there is a newer version of SURPAC available than the one you are running by loading the above web page and then allowing the cursor to hover over the button The latest SURPAC Version and the date of its release will be displayed If you have a valid Software Maintenance Contract you can then download and install this intermediate Upgrade as explained on Page1 Running SURPAC from a Co ordinate File Icon You
380. nging the Mouse Scroll Setting In Windows 10 for SURPAC Software To configure the basic features of your mouse you need to access the Windows 10 Settings app In order to do so first open the Start Menu by clicking the Start button in the bottom left corner of the screen j o cs Get Skype Documents J File Layviorer amp Settings Rower all apps Now with the Settings app open click on Devices Page 300 of 312 System Network amp Internet Display notifications Bluetooth printers Wi Fi airplane mode apps power mouse VPN rA G Personalization Accounts Time amp language Background lock Your account sync Speech region date screen Colors settings work family Cr A O Ease of Access Privacy Update amp security Narrator magnifier Location camera Windows Update high contrast recovery backup Now choose Mouse amp touchpad from the menu on the left to open up the mouse configuration screen Settings ey 63 DEVICES Printers amp scanners Mouse Connected devices Select your primary button Bluetooth bee Multiple lines at a time Typing AutoPlay Choose how many lines to scroll each time 4 Scroll inactive windows when I hover over them D o Touchpad To help prevent the cursor from accidentally moving while you type change the delay before clicks work Medium delay Related settings Additional mouse options Important Step Now set the scroll b
381. nnecting Curve Points A new Command has been added to the Draw menu which allows for the drawing and plotting of Bezier Curves though a number of User defined Points This Command is activated by selecting the Bezier Curve Fitting menu item under the Draw menu heading After this simply Click the Mouse LHB on a series of positions any position Point or Line terminal that you want to use to define the Bezier Curve As you progress the Bezier Curve will be displayed in purple When you reach the last required position Click the Mouse RHB The Curve will now close and be drawn in the colour of the current Pen Layer Bezier Curves through Curve Points A new Command has been added to the Draw menu which allows for the Deletion Erasing or Rubbing of a Bezier Curve First move the Cursor to any position close to the Bezier Curve that is to be Deleted Do a Mouse RHB Click at this point and then select the Delete an Item menu item and from the displayed sub menu select the Erase a Bezier Curve item Otherwise you can simply move the Cursor close the Curve and then give the keyboard Command RV The facility of Printing large Graphic Images has been improved The programme can now Print full sheet Graphic Images to a plotting device providing that the device has sufficient memory to handle the Image The Topographical Symbols drawn on a Sheet can now be exported to a DXF file Page 105 of 312 General Programme Additio
382. ns and Modifications Auto Creation of a WG WGS 84 or an Lo Clarke 1880 Modified Co ordinate File This new function will automatically create a new WG WGS 84 file transformed from the current Co ordinate file if this current file has its System defined as Lo Clarke 1880 Modified Conversely if the current Co ordinate File has its System defined as being WG WGS 84 then this function will automatically create a new Lo Clarke 1880 Modified file All Points in the current file will be transformed and then stored in the new file The original file will not be changed Note that this function will only be active if you have purchased the Conversions Module of SURPAC Software and you have the SURPAC Control Files installed If you do not have the Control Files installed these can be downloaded from the SURPAC Internet site on the same page used for downloading the SURPAC Upgrades To run this function Click the File Options button when running the Co ordinate File Editing programme On the displayed form Click the appropriate option button that will be displayed at the bottom of the left bottom panel and then Click the OK button The programme will prompt for the required Name for the new Co ordinate file which will be stored in the same Folder as the current file Enter any appropriate Name and Click the Proceed button On the displayed transformation form select your required options for Point We
383. ns in the displayed list may be tagged as not required to prevent them from being added to the Co ordinate file or being displayed on Google Earth e An Output of the displayed list of located and selected Stations may be made to the Printer an ASCII file an Excel file or the Clipboard e The located Stations in the displayed list marked as required i e the selected Stations may be added to the current Co ordinate File e The list of required Stations may also be displayed on Google Earth Page 251 of 312 hae e Car SURPAC Locate the Nearest Stations in C SURPAC SOFTWARE MyStations WG sur L xs ual Current Co ordinate file System WG 31 Hartebeesthoek94 Datum WGS 84 No Name Latitude Longitude Y Co ord X Co ord System Height Aux Height Direction Distance Field ma ste 5087 319 2694246 124 _wG31 498 683 234 59 19 184 779 2 ST3 24 21 05 9458 S 30 56 59 3498 E 5091 997 2694238 776 WG 31 493 470 234 34 04 1185 196 3 ST1 24 21 02 1832 S 30 56 56 7496 E 5165 332 2694123 036 WG 31 496 399 228 01 23 1200 364 4 ST4 24 21 09 4011 S 30 57 02 8436 E 4993 479 2694345 051 WG 31 501 251 241 22 31 1212 404 5 STD1 24 21 05 0855 S _30 57 01 0085 E 5045 251 2694212 290 WG 31 499 845 234 49 23 1238 652 6 STC1 24 21 06 8257 S 30 57 03 1639 E 4984 478 2694265 810 WG 31 502 686 238 24 25 1259 9
384. nstructing Lines connecting these Points it will not be possible to inadvertently connect a Fence Point to say a Power Pole Point By separating Cadastral information the General CAD Sheet can be used for a Comparison Sketch drawing For example if all Found beacons are put on a Layer that does not have any Placed beacons then this Layer can be displayed with all other Layers Non Active and the Sides and Directions of the boundary lines written in using the Auto Write function The Placed beacon Layers can then be made Active and the Found beacon Layer set as Non Active and again the Sides and directions between the Placed beacons can be written so as to display the different data between the Found and Placed beacon values The Menu layout for the General CAD Programme has been restructured into a more logical alphabetical order The Figure Commands have been placed under a separate heading and the Figure Fit function has been added Finally the General CAD programme produced an error when using the Line Generate function This occurred when multiple use was made of the 90 or 90 buttons were used to set the directions for a series of contiguous Lines This has now been fifed up Other SURPAC Modifications Diagram CAD Programme The area available for figure construction on A3 diagrams has been enlarged This is to help accommodate figures that need to be swung re oriented and to prevent elements of the figure from exceeding t
385. ntour labels into the General CAD programme has been resolved 7 Exported Shapefile Polygons from the General Plan CAD had incorrect orientations This has now been corrected 8 Corrections have been made to both the General Plan and GP Data Sheet programmes for the UTM North Oriented Systems 9 Google Earth Pro is now a free download SURPAC has been modified so as to first search a computer for the installation of Google Earth Pro and then if it is not found to search for the installation of Google Earth Among other improvements Google Earth Pro provides higher resolution images for downloading into SURPAC CAD programmes 10 All SURPAC CAD programmes plus some other non CAD programmes now have improved Help files These new Help files are in PDF format so you need an installed PDF reader such as Adobe to read these files The new Help files are more detailed and include sample screen displays Other Help files will be added in future for the remaining programmes Page 279 of 312 TJE helpShapefiepdt Adobe Reade a 12 8 FB S amp B amp amp n a s00 ps Tools Sign Comment Developers and Suppliers of SURPAC Surveying Software a fal M i d ll KeithW Young Py ta S 6 Shapefile C Surpac Software Samples L5952 youngsville towns _ Select Shapefile import Options Shapefite Ellipsoid Clarke 1880 Modified Convert Geogaphicai Val
386. ntre plus the circle Radius As more Arc Points are added to the list these values will be re computed and the DY DX and DR values the Y X and Radius differences respectively for each defined Arc Point will also be shown These differences show the respective shifts at a given Arc Point from the best fit values Any Arc Point may be removed form the displayed Arc Point list by clicking on the Point concerned and then clicking the Delete Data button in the Actions Bar Menu on the left of the form Once all the required Arc Points have been defined enter a Name and then a Description for the newly determined Circle Centre point The calculation can be printed using the Print button in the Actions Bar Menu When the OK button is clicked the Circle Centre point will be saved in the current Co ordinate File and SURPAC will then exit from the programme My thanks to Dudley Pound of Centurion for the original suggestion All CAD Programmes Circle and Arc drawing using Line Styles The drawing of both Circles and Arcs in all SURPAC CAD programmes has been improved Any Line Style Line Thickness or Pen Colour used for drawing straight lines can now be applied to the drawing of both Circles and Arcs All CAD Programmes Importing Exporting of TIFF and PNG Images All SURPAC CAD Programmes are now able to both import and export images using the TIFF Tagged Image Format File and the PNG Portable Network Graphics image file formats
387. nts Transformed Data are not saved in any format but the results may be printed For example if you just want to run the transformation to check the residuals Standard Deviations then select this last Option Once you are ready to carry out the transformation and to store the transformed Points then select either of the other two Options Below these Option Lists are four further Options that allow you to select or deselect e Transforming any Trigs or TSMs in the Source File normally deselected e Including any Heights and Description elements in the Source File normally selected e Changing the current File Description Lists to that of the Source File normally selected e Transform any CAD files GPs WPs etc associated with the Source File The programme will search for the existence of any CAD files associated with the Source Co ordinate File only if a SURPAC co ordinate file is chosen as the Source Data These CAD files include General Plans Working Plans Sectional Title Sheets and CAD Plotting Files If any such files are located in the Source File data folder then the last of the above Options is made active and therefore selectable On the bottom right of the form are a series of Function Buttons whose functions are fairly self explanatory These Function Buttons are made active or inactive depending on the chosen options and whether or not transformation data exist in the main co ordinate Grid Finally at the
388. nts on a GP or ST can now be User selected The default size diameter for Point Circles is 2 5mm but Users can now select any required Circle Size from 1 0mm up to 5 0mm Once a Circle Size has been set this size will be used for any future Points Named until the size is again reset by the User The Text character size for Point Name will be the same as the Point Circle size used To set the Circle Size Click the heading Name Posn on the programme s Menu bar then select the menu item Change Circle Size Thanks to Mike Cokwana of KW Town for the original idea New feature for the Diagram CAD Programme Sheet Protection As for the General Plan programme a Diagram s data may now be protected to prevent any unauthorized data changes The Sheet Protection menu item can be found under the programme s Edit menu heading Protecting a Diagram requires the entry and check entry of a password Unprotecting unlocking the Diagram can only be done by entering the same password If a Diagram does get locked and the password forgotten or misplaced you can send the Diagram data files through to me and will be able to unlock it for you New features for the General CAD Programme LP Line Perpendicular This Command allows for the construction of a new Line starting at a defined Point or Line terminal and intersecting a defined existing Line at the perpendicular First the LP Command must be given It is not important where the Cur
389. o files and then use these Points to carry out the transformation Using the Auto Transformation method based on a common Shape If the two files do not use the same Names for corresponding common control Points then the Auto Transformation would have to be carried out using the Common Shape method The programme will look for a suitable Shape in System 2 and then search through System 1 to find the corresponding Shape Using the common Points of this Shape for generating preliminary transformation parameters the programme will then locate each Point in System 1 that corresponds to a Point in System 2 2 Carrying out a User Defined Transformation A User Defined Transformation is one in which the User identifies the individual common control Points to be used in the transformation The System 1 Points may be entered manually or may be read from a SURPAC Co ordinate file The Points in System 2 need not have the same Names as the corresponding Points in System 1 Once a minimum of 2 common Points have been entered the programme is then able to determine the Point in System 2 that corresponds to a User defined Point in System 1 Hence it is only necessary to know the Names of two of the common Points in both of the files Once these Points have been entered the programme will identify the System 2 Point Name once the System 1 Point Name has been entered Thanks to Schalk Burger of Louis Tricharat for the original idea
390. o these Final system common points To run this function click the programme s Edit menu heading and then select the Transform Sheet Data items menu item The displayed form allows for up to 5 common points the minimum being two Move the cursor on the drawing and click onto the first common Point The sheet co ordinates of this Point will be placed into the first two text boxes on line 1 Sheet Y value and Sheet X value Click the text box labelled True Y value If you know the Name of the corresponding True system Point and this Point is stored in the current Co ordinate File then enter this Name If the Point is found the True Y value and True X value text boxes will be filled If you do not have a stored Point then manually enter the True System Y X values for the Point Continue as above for up to 5 common Points Keep a watch on the Transformation Parameters at the bottom of the form in case of gross errors The Transformation form itself will stay visible over the CAD Sheet even if you change scale or sheet position After you have entered the last required Point click the Proceed Button and the Transformation will take place All drawing items except the Points themselves will be transformed based on the common points used In the event of any incorrect Transformation remember the Undo function The Hatching facility has been extended with 3 new Hatch options available These a
391. o choose between allocating available graphic memory to either the Pan function the displayable area of the current CAD Sheet at the current display scale or the Zoom function the ability to zoom in to a portion of the CAD Sheet to display it at larger scales This process has now been automated SURPAC will now automatically allocate the available graphic memory to the Pan and or Zoom functions depending on the current CAD Sheet size scale and Zoom factor This process is seamless and does not require any prior settings or action on behalf of the User With this current method the Zoom factor is virtually unlimited regardless of the defined Sheet plotting scale New Co ordinate File Merging Option New or Updated Points With this new function it is now possible to Merge Points into the current Co ordinate File from a source Co ordinate File for Points which are either e New Points i e they do not already exist in the current Co ordinate File or e Updated Points i e common Points existing in the two Co ordinate Files but where Points in the Source Co ordinate File have been modified and are newer than those in the current File This function is useful for example if two people are working on the same Co ordinate File but are not able to share the file on a network New Points calculated and existing Points modified by the one person can be merged into the second person s file at any later time To use this functi
392. o display related tools Page 266 of 312 6 Database tree for selection and activation of entities and their features 7 Properties view information on selected entity 8 Default 3D view 9 Another 3D view created with 3D Views gt New 10 Console Before you carry out any editing on the 3D model or use it to compute volumes you must first Click on the relevant Point Cloud entity in the Database tree This action will populate the Properties view and activate the relevant Menu items DB Tree fai a V y B49a Surface PC asc C SurpacCloudView Datafiles V B49a Surface PC Cloud 4 V B49a Base PC asc C SurpacCloudView Datafiles V B49a_Base PC Cloud Camera Link Properties fy Property State Value A Name B49a_Surface_PC Cloud Visible u Show name in 3D F Colors RGB z X 188 499 Box dimensions Y 190 501 Z 14 334 X 455 25 Box center Y 462 75 Z 1900 35 Info Object ID 4 Children 0 Current Display 3D View1 x Points 575 586 Global shift 0 00 0 00 0 00 Global scale 1 000000 Point size Default x Matrix Axis Angle Export Axis 0 000000 0 000000 1 000000 Angle 0 000000 deg Center N NNNNNN O NANNAN NA NNNNNNA From a SURPAC user s point of view there are two main objectives for making use of the CloudCompare application The first is for enabling real time visualization of a 3D surface model This includes th
393. o ord Top Left Point p4 84362 301 2845270150 Q Top Right Point P3 85940 223 2845279 170 Bot Right Point p2 86435 236 2846804 455 Bot Left Point p1 84733 609 2847182 994 Set the required Grid Interval 50 000 2 Set the required Description for Boundary Points EDGE Set the required Description for all other Points SH Set the Starting Number for Imported Points 0001 ZE To ensure that the quadrilateral covers the correct area these 4 Points are best determined by using Google Earth to create Placemarks at the appropriate positions The quadrilateral does not have to be square nor does it need to be oriented NS or EW Any four Points that enclose the required area are sufficient One restriction is that when entering the 4 Points into the above form they must be entered in a clockwise sequence normally starting at the Point that is approximately the NW corner SURPAC will then proceed to calculate Tacheometric file points along the perimeter lines of the quadrilateral as well as on all Grid intersections lying within the quadrilateral using the defined Grid interval Once all points are calculated their heights are interpolated from Google Earth and all point data are added to the file These Tacheometric points are imported at a rate of approximately 350 500 Points per minute depending on your internet connection Page 196 of 312 er inf fey xia fax pe ats Sn_
394. o the horizontal distance between the two observed points as Vertical Height errors are also proportional to horizontal distance The default Password for the setting of Error Limits is ABCD1234 Users should change this Password once new settings have been made Modified Control Files for Lo lt gt WG Transformations The two Control Files used for carrying out Transformations between the South African Lo Clarke 1880 Modified Spheroid and the WG WGS 84 Hartebeesthoek94 Spheroia Systems have been modified The TSMs in the Empangeni area have been added to both files You can download the latest version of the self extracting ZIP File called Surpac Control Files exe from the same download page as the SURPAC Upgrade When you run this self extracting file by double clicking its icon the two Control Files in the C Surpac98 folder will be updated Users are welcome to forward Trig or TSM values for their area for both systems and either in a SURPAC Co ordinate file format or in an ASCII format if these do not already exist in the Control Files Users outside of South Africa are also welcome to forward official common information for control beacons for transformations between their old e g Cape Datum and new e g WGS 84 systems Modified L Squares Adj Programmes Error Tolerances The Least Squares Planimetric Network Y X or E N Adjustment and Trigonometrical Heighting
395. o the intersecting Line in the vicinity of the Arc Then Click close to the intersecting Arc The Arc point selected will indicate which side of the Arc is to be trimmed The programme will trim both the Line and the identified portion of the Arc at the Line Arc junction intersection position Line at Half Angle of Pair LH This new Command allows the user to create a new Line being a Line representing the mean Line position between a defined pair of Lines If the two Page 146 of 312 defined Lines are not parallel the new Line will be drawn at the half angle mean direction of the two Lines This Command may be activated by Clicking the Draw main menu heading and then selecting the Line at Half Angle of Pair item or by entering the LH keyboard Command Once the two required Lines have been defined the new Line will be drawn using the current Line Colour Style and Width Figure Commands All Figure related Commands as opposed to Line related Commands can now be found by clicking on the Draw menu heading and then clicking on the Figure Commands menu item Some of these Commands such as Figure Rectangle Figure Hatch etc have been moved from other menu positions but three new Commands have been added namely Figure Copy Figure Move and Figure Delete A Figure is basically any series of connected Lines that form a closed polygon The programme determines a circumscribing Figure when the cursor is placed inside the
396. oan of the necessary equipment to make this new addition possible 6 Creating Insets in Cadastral Programmes This new feature applies to the General Plan Working Plan Sectional Title Plan and Diagram Programmes The Frame Commands can now be used to create Insets more easily as they now allow for the Copying of Points as well as Lines and Text When Points are included in a Frame Definition which is optional such Points will be replicated in the new Copied display as Inset Points They will retain the same Name and Name Position as the original Page 15 of 312 Points Although they may be Viewed Modified and or Deleted on the Sheet onto which the Frame is Copied they do not appear on the Co ordinate List or Co ordinate Editing Programme as extra Points They are regarded as pseudo Points that exist only for the purpose of showing Copied Points in an Inset Note that a group of Inset Points may be Deleted by means of generating an appropriate Erasure Polygon 7 General Changes made to various Programmes in Version 5 04 Release 03 e The Vertical Curve Alignment Programme has been amended to allow for separate Formation criteria to applied to User defined sections or runs within the entire file e When loading any of the Cadastral C A D Programmes the last used Sheet GP WP or ST will be loaded as the default Sheet In the past the first available Sheet was always loaded as the default e The Locate and Mean
397. oblem has now been fixed Modified Least Squares Planimetric Network Adjustment A problem existed when generating the Network File The first observation line was corrupted necessitating the double entry if this observation in the Observation file This problem has now been fixed Page 92 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 21 Release 01 Important Using Printers and or Plotters in SURPAC With the release of the Windows XP Operating System both Home and Professional it appears that Microsoft has managed to restrict certain interactions between applications and the designated Default Printing device This applies to applications such as SURPAC that use the Microsoft library function called Comdlg32 dlI Whether this was by design or by accident is not known One wag has suggested that Microsoft is becoming so neurotic over hackers that it is worried that someone might access a Printer over the internet and drain all the ink out of its cartridges Whatever the reason it has provided both Developers me and Users you with an unnecessary change of approach when using Printers and or Plotters Please note the following Printer Plotter protocols now used by SURPAC Software e On running SURPAC the software will use the currently defined Default Printer as the Printer for the Calculation Pages This Printer must be either an A4 size Printer set in the Portrait orientation or an A3 size Printer set
398. ode 4 Code 5 observations if required e Other assumptions are made by the programme when converting data For example if an OrganiSUR Code 4 observation has no associated Distance Code 8 it is allocated a SURPAC Code 4 orientation If it does have a Distance it is allocated either a SURPAC Code 3 or a Code 6 depending on the status Free or Fixed of the observed Point e As with all downloaded or imported Observation files it is advisbale to employ the Scan the Observation File for Obs Code Inconsistencies option via the Options button to identify and correct any inconsistencies that might exist before proceeding with any file reduction routine 3 Re scaling Linear Data Distances amp Target Heights in an Observation File This additional function allows for the re scaling or re dimensioning of Distances Target Heights or both contained in the currently loaded Observation File This is a useful function for correcting linear data that have been downloaded or imported using an incorrect conversion factor This is especially applicable to Leica Total Stations which measure to either 1mm or 0 1mm accuracy If the wrong assumption is made at download time all Distances and Target Instrument Heights will be incorrect by a factor of 10 This problem can now be corrected very easily by using this function e Whilst in the Observation File Editing programme select the Options button then select the Apply a Selected
399. odified to show the correct symbols Page 123 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 24 Release 01 Using the Mouse Middle Button MB for Scrolling and Scaling SURPAC now makes full use of the Mouse scrolling function Most modern rodents incorporate a combined scrolling wheel plus middle button feature The ideal type of Mouse for use with SURPAC is a 3 button Mouse with the Middle Button being a combination Scroll Wheel Button For best usage the wheel motion action should be stepped rather than smooth and should not be too sensitive This is because SURPAC CAD programmes use the Mouse middle button MB as a repeat the last command function so you want to avoid the scroll wheel moving up or down when you are using it as a MB An ideal example of good Mouse for use with SURPAC is the Microsoft Optical wireless Mouse Using the Mouse Scrolling feature for SURPAC non Graphic programmes For most non graphic programmes moving the mouse cursor into the region occupied by a listing co ordinates observations point names etc will enable the mouse s scroll facility for that listing This is assuming that there are more items in the list or grid than can be displayed in the listing at one time For example if you are using the Co ordinate File Editing programme for a file having a large amount of Points then by moving the mouse cursor into the co ordinate Point display area the Mouse scrolling feature wi
400. of the Selected Point Clicking a Line in the File Display Window will change that Point s status from Used to Not Used or vice versa If the Primary Point is selected as the default for the Selected Point see Options below for example then that Point will have a Tick graphic the Point is Used and all other Points will have a Cross graphic the Point is Not Used An Input Box below the File Display window that allows for the changing of the Search Limit Below this are a number of Options that allow the programme to be used for different requirements Programme Options You can select whether the Primary Point is to be the first Point located in a Point Group or the second located Point If you want the programme to set the Selected Point values to be those of the Primary Point as opposed to taking the Mean values of the whole Point Group then this option allows you to set which of the first two Points found is to be the Primary Point Page 10 of 312 For example imagine set of Points were surveyed using GPS and were allocated numeric Names Later these same Points were re surveyed by Total Station and were allocated Alphanumeric Names If you now wanted to keep all the Total Station derived values and display and or delete those values determined by GPS it would be necessary to set the Primary Point as the gnd Located Point as the numeric Names would always be located first e You can make the programme initially set the Selec
401. oftware 1 The Multi Polar facility has been improved When carrying out a Multi Polar fix the programme will now display previous sets of values for the Point being fixed if the differences exceed the User defined Multi Polar limit this limit can be set by Clicking the File options button whilst in the Co ordinate File Editing programme Viewing the previous values enables you to identify which is in error You can then either re do the current polar or use the Edit a Multi Polar Peg programme to investigate any erroneous values 2 The 3 Point Circle Fit function ahs been added to the General CAD programme This function can be found under the Draw main menu heading By Clicking on any three non collinear Points the function will construct a circle through the three defined Points using the currently defined Pen 3 The Calc Mid Wall Positions function ahs been added to the General CAD programme This function will generate lines at the centre of wall positions from existing outer or inner lines and a defined wall thickness 4 The Line Intersect functions have been added to the Working Plan CAD programme 5 For all CAD programmes the function for plotting Graphic Images has been improved When sending images to a plotter the plotting device interprets the position and scale of the image differently to that on the screen This often results in the plotted images being shown at incorrect pos
402. ogle Earth data provides rapid and useful data that have various small scale applications When displayed in conjunction with an imported Google Earth image these become even more useful The generated Contour and DTM files can also be exported as KML files for client viewing directly on Google Earth itself Examples of useful applications are for e Township planning approval Sub divisional planning approval Preliminary water gas fuel pipe alignment assessment over long distances Preliminary road rail alignment assessment over long distances Cross section data for preliminary mass haul calculations Preliminary dam site investigations water volume versus wall height etc 1 Co ordinate File Editing Programme 1 1 Import Points from a KML file This existing function has been extended so as to allow the import of multiple Points contained in a KML file and not just a single Point as was the case previously 1 2 Importing interpolated Google Earth DTM Heights This function allows you to import interpolated heights from Google Earth for any or all Points existing in the current Co ordinate file You may define the entire file or mark highlight selected points in the file Heights will only be imported for points whose current heights do not exist Existing heights will not be overwritten Using this Option If you want to restrict the import of heights to selected Points then first highlight these Points in the Co ordinate file l
403. oint s co ordinates The weighting is based on the inverse of the distance from the Point to the respective fixing Points For example if a Point has been determined from two Points Stations then its mean co ordinates would be the weighted average with the determination from the closer of the two fixing Points Stations being given the more weight If at some later stage a Page 49 of 312 third Polar is computed to the Point from a third fixing Point Station the programme will take the two existing Multi Polar Peg determinations plus the new determination and use these three sets of co ordinates to compute a new weighted average of the Point s co ordinates Using the Multi Polar Peg facility for Underground Peg Calculations The Editing a Multi Polar Peg File programme has specific functions applicable to the monitoring of historical Underground Peg Calculation data When an Underground Peg Calculation takes place using either the Double Set Up method or the Double Button method the User is given the option of saving all the Peg observational data into an ASCII file These specific ASCII files have the extension of either pg1 for a Double Set Up calculation or pg2 for a Double Button calculation All information both observed and derived relative to the Peg being calculated is stored in this ASCII file Apart from acting as an historical record this ASCII file may be imported and used to re compute the Peg
404. ols click the Edit main menu heading select the Define an Erasure Polygon and then select Erase Topo Symbols Finally define the Polygon in the normal manner Left click Middle Click Middle Click Right Click User defined Line Styling General CAD Programme onl Various Line Styles may be created using this technique A Line Style is created by setting a Line pattern which consists of a segment of solid line followed by line gap into which is inserted an ASCII character The line segment length the ASCII character and the character size are all User defined From the General CAD Draw main menu heading select the Set Special Line Attributes menu item From the displayed form set the required ASCII Character its size and the length of the line segment From this form you can also set the position of the ASCII character as being either above aligned to or below the line itself To construct the line use the normal mouse Left Click or S command and mouse Right Click or E commana Some Examples of SURPAC Line Styles Page 87 of 312 New Detail Points Category for Cadastral format Files A new Category has been added for Cadastral format Co ordinate Files namely the Detail Points Category This category allows for the inclusion of points of detail such as wall corners fence posts etc that have been surveyed but which need to be defined and listed separately from Bea
405. om Dark to Light going from Lowest Height to Highest Height or from Dark to Light going from Highest Height to Lowest Height This function can be used to highlight topographical features in a 2D display for both the Contour Creation Plotting CAD and the General CAD programmes This can be used to enhance the Contour display or to show the topographical relief as a background layer for a drawing such as a township layout The smaller the grid used for determining the DTM the better is the colour graduation for the Background Display Page 71 of 312 Reading and Running Peg ASCII Files Mining As Users of the SURPAC Mining Peg fixing programmes will know that when fixing or re fixing an underground Peg an option for creating a Peg ASCII file containing both the entered and calculated information for the fix is offered These Peg ASCII files may then be used at any future time to recall the entered information into the appropriate Peg Fix programme and to re calculate the Peg values By default the name given to a Peg ASCII files consists of the Peg Name followed by the date of calculation plus the file extension Peg ASCII files generated through the Double Set Up Programme use the file extension PG1 files generated through the Double Button programme use the file extension PG2 and files generated via the Double Back Fix programme use PG3 For example the file called A3925 07 31 02 PG2 would contain the ASCII data f
406. om the SURPAC application The next time SURPAC is Run these settings are automatically recalled and applied The settings are stored under the appropriate headings in the Surpacd ini file found in the C Windows or C WinNT for Windows NT folder Page 6 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 03 Release 03 A reminder on Screen Resolution and Colour Setting SURPAC Users are encouraged to use the 1024 X 768 screen resolution especially if the screen size is 15 or larger For the proper display of the Colour palette the Menu and Toolbar Icons and contour background shading the Windows Colors setting should be set to High Color 16 bit or 16384 colors for Window NT Using the lower 256 colour setting will cause strange looking Icons and background shading Do not use the True Color 24 bit setting This colour level uses extensive memory and will cause an Error 480 Can t create AutoRedraw image problem when running any of the SURPAC Graphic CAD programmes if you have a graphic card of 8MB RAM or less Both the above Screen Area and Colors settings can be set or checked via the Display Icon in the Windows Control Panel Summary of SURPAC modifications made in Version 5 03 Release 03 1 The Printer to Plotter swapping problem encountered by some Users has been rectified 2 When importing a Leica GSI file into a Co ordinate File it is now possi
407. om the new Inter Page 62 of 312 Establish a new Peg to be used as the first Set Up Peg on the new Inter Set up under this Peg and use the Double Back Fix method described below to obtain fixing data for this new Set Up Peg If required the two plumb lines and the Set Up Peg may be placed in a straight line but this is not essential A well conditioned triangle approximately equilateral should mathematically provide the best result On the lower Inter change the buttons on the two plumb lines so that they are visible set up at the nearest fixed Peg to the two plumb lines and then observe measure data for fixing both the plumb lines and hence their two respective Pegs by means of the Double Button method When calculating first use the Double Button programme to calculate the two plumb line Pegs from the set up at the fixed Peg on the lower Inter Then use this Double Back Fix programme described below to calculate the new Set Up Peg on the upper Inter and also to determine the orientations from this Peg to the two plumb line Pegs The programme provides for full double Arc measurements for both Horizontal and Vertical angles and for double Buttons and double measurements for each sighted Peg Users can either use these full observation and measurement options or restrict the survey to a single Horizontal and Vertical Arc the use of single Buttons and single Distance measurements to the sighted Pegs The principle of the
408. on e When running the Co ordinate File Editing programme Click the File Options button in the Actions bar menu on the left of the screen Select Click the top left hand option Merge Data from another Co ordinate File and then Click the OK button e From the displayed File Selection form select the Path and File Name of the Source file e On the displayed Co ordinate File Merge Options form select Click the option New amp Updated Points and then Click the OK button e The programme will warn you that it is about to overwrite and or add data and give you the opportunity to abort from the routine If you choose to continue all new Points in the Source file will be added to the current file and all modified Points that are newer than those in the current file will be used to overwrite the corresponding Points in the current file Page 110 of 312 General Programme Additions and Modifications Local System Surveys Option to Suppress Sea Level amp Scale Enlargement corrections When defining a Co ordinate System as Local it is now possible to suppress the application of the Sea Level amp Scale Enlargement corrections When defining the System as being Local the System Set form will make this option available with the default value set to OFF If you want the programme to apply the corrections then select Click the displayed option so that the small option box displays a cross F
409. on for Layers shown as Background on the screen will be sent to the DXF or DWG file Layer information can also be imported in a similar fashion from TopoCAD CAD software Page 214 of 312 Layer Elements The Layer elements such as Lines Arcs Circles Text items all adopt the Colour of the Layer on which they are created or copied Lines may also have individual width and style features Text items may have individual font style and size features Images are Layer specific If you have different Images loaded on different Layers then these images can be turned On or Off along with the Layer Activation For example you might have a Google Earth Image loaded on one Layer and a 1 50 000 Image on another Layer These Images may then be viewed separately by changing the Layer Activation or if they do not overlap they can be displayed together Points will only be displayed for those Layers that are currently Active All other Points will not be visible nor addressable by the software Note even if the Background in Grey option using the F3 function has been set Points on non Active Layers will not be visible Separating Points into Layers makes Line drawing for surveyed features easier and less likely to cause error For example if a Layer has been used for Fence Points then when this Layer is made Active with all other Layers being non Active only Points with the appropriate Fence points will be displayed Hence when co
410. on of locating the Line of Best Fit through all located Points Using this Option once a required reference line has been defined by means of its two terminals the programme will locate all Points falling within the User defined distance or angular tolerance from that line The Least Squares Line of Best Fit will then be calculated giving equal weight to all Points located including the two terminals The Off Set and Position left or right looking from the first terminal for each Point from this Line of Best Fit will then be displayed You may then Move the located Points On Line i e onto the Line of Best Fit This will change the co ordinates of the Located Points to their on line computed values Otherwise you may compute New Points These New Points will have the on line values of the located Points but will be given different but associated Names The original located Points will not be changed 4 Observation File Editing Programme new Active Non Active function The Observation File Editing Programme now includes an Obs Active column which is applicable to all data lines in a displayed Observation File An Observation that is defined as Active is available for use by any applicable SURPAC Programme An Active Observation will have a Green Tick displayed in its Obs Active column An Observation that is defined as Non Active is an Observation that still exists in the Observation File but which is c
411. one of these Edge Triangles a message is displayed prompting Do you want to Delete this edge Triangle Previously this message would be displayed every time an Edge Triangle was selected which required a Yes or No response and which was a bit time consuming To make the deletion of multiple Edge Triangles go a lot faster you can now select the Cancel option the first time the message is displayed and this will Delete any edge Triangle selected without displaying the message for the remainder of the current session Standard Helmert Transformation Previously if a manual transformation was carried out using manually entered transformation parameters the programme was not allowing for the option to Store the transformed Points into the current Co ordinate file This has now been rectified Sending Point Information to Google Earth Previously if a Point sent to Google Earth from SURPAC had a null or blank Point Description the resultant KML file would display an error when loading into Google Earth This has now been fixed GoldFields to WGS 84 Conversions This routine was showing an error when converting data on any of the GoldFields systems to any of the WGS 84 Systems for South Africa only This problem has now been resolved Diagram CAD There was a printing problem whereby a blank sheet was being ejected by the printer before the actual Diagram was printed This has now been fixed Working Plan CAD
412. ons Standard Helmert Transformations and Polynomial 2 Order Transformations Page 84 of 312 Modifications General Changes Made The following problems encountered in previous release of SURPAC have now been corrected The Areas from Co ordinates and Areas from Polars programmes The Print Area Button in the Actions Bar Menu was disabled The General CAD and Working Plan programmes The F9 Point intersect command was not working correctly The General CAD programme The Rub a Defined Hatch or RH command was not working The Polar programme A manually entered Orientation correction of greater than 10 was inadvertently changed to a value below 10 aft er the first of a series of Radial Polars was calculated The Tacheometric File Editing programme The Paste Button in the Actions Bar Menu was disabled The Sectional Title CAD programme The function for generating a Participation Quota Sheet was not working correctly for sheets greater than A3 in width The Geographical to Lo WG Transformation programme When requesting input data from an ASCII file the system froze The Cross Section plotting programme When plotting a selected range of Cross Sections for plotting the programme would incorrectly interpret the User defined range Transformations Lo Cape Datum to from WGS84 HH94 The SURPAC control files used for these transformations and also for th
413. ons menu item The following image of Table Mountain shows superimposed 20m contours generated in SURPAC from data imported from Google Earth The KML display uses the Clamp to Google Earth Surface option As this covers a large area and a large number of points a 50m grid was used the data had to be imported in two sessions Google Earth will only allow the downloading of 2 500 locations per user per day As SURPAC collects data at a rate of 4 points per location this maximum daily limit is increased to 10 000 points For areas that require more than this limit separate the area into two or more sections and download the data on consecutive days or just use a different e mail addresses if you have them Page 200 of 312 4 m 7 i Pe ee Se ean a l SURPAC 20m Contours of Table Mountain using Google Earth interpolated Data Longitudinal Sectioning Programme A new function has been added that allows for the generation of Longitudinal Sections by the direct importation of interpolated Google Earth Heights Using this Option Click on the Set File Type menu item in the Actions Bar menu On the displayed form select the Section Plotting Using a LONG SECTION File only option and Click the OK button Click on the Select a File menu item in the Actions Bar menu From the displayed form enter the new File Name and Click on the Open button Once the Long Section Creation E
414. ons the SURPAC programmes attach attributes to each Text item by means of the associated dbf file attribute format data base file SURPAC creates the following headings in this file with the appropriate attribute value being added to each heading for each Text item TEXT_ITEM The Text item itself with a maximum length of 80 characters TEXT_DIRN The Direction or Orientation of the Text item in Degrees TEXT_SIZE The Size of the Text item in mms TEXT_WTH The Width to Height ratio for the Text item TEXT_STYLE The Style of the Text item Normal Italic Bold or Bold Italic TEXT_FONT The Font for the Text Item TEXT_LAYER The Layer Number or Pen Number for the Text Item TEXT SCALE The Scale of the source Sheet used for scaling the Text item on the new Sheet amp Creating an ESRI Shapefile Select Shapefile Export Options Co ordinate File Ellipsoid WGS 1984 Co ordinate File System Hartebeeshoek94 Co ordinate File Central Meridian 27 East Convert Y X values to Latitude Longitude values Create Shapefile Polygons no attributes from this Sheet Create Shapefile Lines with attributes from this Sheet Create pseudo Dashed Dotted Lines for Shapefile 7 Create Shapefile Text with attributes from this Sheet Include Distance and Direction Data Text Items X Change the Sian of the Y X co ordinates Shapefile Co ordinate Limits Deg Min Sec Min Longitude 27 12 01 24 E Min Latitude
415. ontain the double precision geographical positions Latitude and Longitude of about 38 000 common Control Points throughout the Republic of South Africa Important notes These files are random binary files and as such the data they contain are not printable nor accessible to Users Further the data contained in these files have had variable false origin shifts applied to them making the data meaningless even to someone who is able to hack their way into the files Anyone attempting to use data extracted from either of the two files is warned that highly inaccurate results will occur Keith W Young and SURPAC Surveying Software are not responsible nor are they liable for any damages or misinformation resulting from any misuse of these data Since the common Points are stored in Lat Long format any Degree Square boundaries become irrelevant to the programme Surveys can be located close to any Degree Square boundary and the programme will still generate its own Degree Square of common Points centered about the defined Survey For surveys covering large areas the programme automatically modifies the centre position and therefore the Degree Square of common Control Points as the transformation progresses This ensures that the transformation process always uses data that surrounds the Survey area Furthermore the use of the Lat Long format allows the programme to carry out transforms between different Central
416. onversions Least Squares Topographical Engineering Mining Cadastral Help File Edit Figure Frame General GridiNorth HatchiFlood Image Import Layers Line Mark Pnt NamePsn Point Text Topo Symbols Delete Help BoHHER BEBE Pos 44005 FeO yY 66094 Y BS EE ARCO ARA FOS BASS Hf 4 BA MAS Sto Ale Xe RY Ree Scale Plot Scale v Swing 00 Layer Layer 002 20mm Round iron Peg gt f Click Mouse RHB for Pull Down Menu Display 5 Ne 4879s Y _ 87250 39 2846591 79 Z d 3 e ha Ie The SURPAC General CAD showing imported Polygons Image and contours The above General CAD screen shot shows the following A background Image imported from Google Earth Stand boundaries imported from a 1Map Shapefile Contours created in SURPAC using downloaded Google Earth point height data A hatched area showing the site for a proposed development NB 1Map Online is a web site that contains Layers of useful and up to date information for Surveyors planners and developers You can apply for registration at 1Map by using the URL http Imap co za register The above demonstrates how easily preliminary composite information for planning purposes can be gathered without the need of any field survey Page 236 of 312 Importing Point Data into a SURPAC Co ordinate file Point data may be imported from a Point Shapefile into a SURPAC Co ordinate file via the File Options menu item Actions bar menu
417. optional in some applications but which is important to Surveyors and which is always created in SURPAC is the prj file All files related to a Shapefile must be located in the same folder Shapefile component file descriptions 1 shp the shape format file which contains the feature geometry itself using either System Lo WG UTM etc co ordinates or geographic Latitude Longitude co ordinates 2 shx the shape index format file consisting of positional indices of the feature geometry to allow rapid forwards and backwards data searching 3 dbf the attribute format data base file consisting of the shape attributes for each shape line or text item using the dBase IV format which can also be viewed using Microsoft Excel 4 prj the data projection format consisting of a description of the co ordinate System and ellipsoid Projection information This file is in plain ASCII format Although optional it is usually provided making it unnecessary for Users to have to guess the co ordinate system of features in a Shapefile SURPAC always provides a prj file when creating a Shapefile The information contained in the prj file should specify the Name of the Geographic co ordinate system or Map projection Datum geodesy Spheroid Prime meridian Units used Parameters necessary to define the map projection for example Latitude of origin Scale factor Central meridian False north
418. or all other non Local Systems this option is set to ON and cannot be changed If you want to change the Sea Level amp Scale Enlargement correction setting for an existing Local System Co ordinate File then e When running the Co ordinate File Editing programme Click the System Set button in the Actions bar menu on the left of the screen On the displayed form Click the option Apply Sea Level amp Scale Enlargement corrections which will toggle the selection to either ON or OFF Finally Click the OK button Contour CAD programme The problem with defining the Plotting Scale has been fixed up This problem only arose if the thousands separator had previously been set to a comma or period full stop Observation File Load Edit programme When using the Mean any Multiple Sightings to Points within a Set Up option the programme returned a value 180 n error if one of the sightings to be meaned was 0 00 00 This has now been fixed The Merge a File function was not working properly and has now been fixed SURPAC General CAD programme Three new Tree Symbols have been added to the Topo Symbols menu heading All Tree Symbols now have the option of having their background shaded in a light green colour except Tree Type 2 which shows bare branches This shading function can be turned ON OFF by selecting the appropriate option on the Set Symbol Options form The Set Symbol Option
419. or the peg Fix of Peg A3925 calculated on 31 07 02 using the Double Button programme To improve the functionality of these Peg ASCII files SURPAC now supports 2 new methods in which these Peg ASCII files may be called and viewed plus the option to automatically re calculate the Peg concerned Method 1 Click the Mining heading in the Main menu and from the displayed menu select the View the Existing Peg ASCII Files item A display of all existing Peg ASCII files in the current data folder will be displayed From this display you can select the required file for viewing by double Clicking it The file s data will then be displayed in a scrolling list form Options on this form allow you to either change to another Peg ASCII file send the displayed information to the Windows Clipboard Exit form the display or Re Calculate the Peg fix If the last option is selected the Peg ASCII data will automatically be sent to the appropriate Peg fix programme If the Peg ASCII file selected does not relate to the current Co ordinate File you will be warned and the calculation will abort Method 2 When the Co ordinate File Editing programme is running click the mouse Right Button anywhere on the line displaying the Point for which a list of Peg ASCII files is required A Pop Up menu will be displayed One of the items on this menu will be the View ASCII Peg Files item If the selected Point or Peg does not have any Peg ASC
420. orm will be displayed showing the available Options e Click the Import Data from an ASCII Text File Option and then click the OK Button e On the newly displayed form select the YOM 3Ta Total Station ASCII Format Option then click the Proceed Button e Finally select the ASCII File from the displayed File Selection form containing the required YOM 3Ta Co ordinate data The YOM 3Ta allows for seven discreet data Blocks per Line of downloaded information The First Block or measurement tag contains information which allows SURPAC to deduce whether the current data Line contains Co ordinate data or whether it as an Observation Line The Second Block is the Point or Station Number Page 33 of 312 Use the Third Block to define the Point or Station Description Code a number in the range 0 499 or an alphanumeric code of up to 6 characters The next 3 Blocks 4 6 contain the Point Co ordinates 4 Additional Options for Field Traverse and Data Traverse Adjustments The mis closure of a Field Traverse or a Data Traverse may now be adjusted for by using one of three different available techniques The technique used to adjust the Traverse is User selectable and the three options are displayed at the same time that the Traverse mis closure information is displayed at the Traverse closure The three Adjustment options are A Helmert Transformation only when using non common Start and End Points A Bowditch Proportional
421. orm will then be displayed showing the Point selected its co Page 195 of 312 ordinates and height the Google Earth height and the difference Moving the cursor away from this form will cause it to be removed Comparison of Surveyed Height with Google Earth Iterpolated Height n Point Number Y Co ordinate X Co ordinate Spot Height GE Height Difference 923 74655 52 3085996 48 1254 24 1254 77 0 52 N 2 Tacheometric File Editing Programme The main and most important function regarding the importation of Google Earth 3D data is the generation of Tacheometric files using data solely imported via Google Earth interpolation as explained below 2 1 Import Points with interpolated Google Earth Heights This routine allows you to import Point co ordinates along with their interpolated heights from the Google Earth DTM Points are imported over a User defined quadrilateral figure covering the required area plus a User defined Grid interval Using this Option In the Actions Menu click on the Import GE Data menu item The form below will be displayed allowing you to enter the four points used to define the required quadrilateral The named Points should exist in the current Coordinate file otherwise their co ordinates must be entered manually amp Appending Tacheometric Data from Goolge Earth DTM Surface Intepolation Ez F Set Points to Define Interpolation Limits on Google Earth N Point Name Y Co ord X C
422. ot the computer as some Users have been doing Simultaneously press the Alt Ctrl Del keys and the Windows Task Manager will be displayed If the Task Manager shows SURPAC as still running after you have closed it down then highlight it in the Task Manager list and then click the End Task button Locate and Mean point Groups in a File This programme has been modified to handle large files in the order of 10 000 points The previous version was giving an out of subscript error on these large files and was very slow during the Point Deletion and Point Modification processes General CAD programme A and Ctrl A Commands These two commands Figural Area from lines and Figural Area from Point definition were causing problems in certain instances These problems have now been fixed Co ordinate File Editing programme If you click anywhere on the file heading display Name Y Co ordinate X Co ordinate etc the Set Co ordinate File Elements form will be displayed On this form you can reset the co ordinate elements Description Calc Page and or F B Page that are to be shown for the current file If you click anywhere on the top row of the displayed file information grid Constants etc the entire co ordinate file will be highlighted You are then able to Delete or Copy the entire file but use this facility with care Once the entire contents of a file have been deleted they cannot be retrieved Extended Control
423. other ellipsoid having the same parameters as the WGS 84 ellipsoid 3 A reasonably fast ADSL or 3G wireless internet connection Optional Setting the Google Earth Display of SURPAC Data and Overlays 1 The SURPAC data displayed on Google Earth does not always provide an exact visual fit on to the satellite imagery In order to force the displayed data to fit as close as possible to the imagery you can use the Google Earth Measure tool to determine the Y X or E N shifts to be applied to the SURPAC data or image so that it best fits the imagery 2 A plan or sheet that is displayed on Google Earth as an overlay can have varying levels of transparency applied to it Increasing an overlay s transparency allows more of the imagery lying under the overlay to become visible Setting a zero transparency will allow the overlay to completely hide the underlying imagery Note that on Google Earth itself there is a slide option on the Sidebar information display that allows for further refinement of the overlay s transparency level 3 An overlay of a plan or sheet may also be viewed whereby the sheet background is completely transparent i e only the detail on the sheet such as the lines text hatching etc will be displayed For this option to apply the sheet background colour has to be white which is the case for all SURPAC CAD sheets All SURPAC CAD programmes which use the Google Earth display function have a menu item
424. ou have the option of importing any Contour Labels that have been created for the Contour File These Labels will be displayed whenever the Contours themselves are displayed Set the Contour Labelling Options Before commencing the Contour Labelling process use this function to set the Label Contour Interval Label Text Size Label Text Colour Pen Label Text Width to Height Ratio Label Text Styling When creating the mid Contour Label Gaps see below the Gaps will only be created through those Contours that match the defined Label Contour Interval The width of the Gaps is determined by the Label Test Size and the Label Width to Height Ratio Create mid Contour Label Gaps If no mid Contour Gaps are created the Programme will only generate Labels at the start and end of the Contour lines Therefore it may be necessary to use this Command to create Gaps through a set of Contour lines at appropriate mid Contour positions As many sets of mid Contour line Gaps as is required may be created A set of mid Contour Gaps may vary between a single Contour to the complete range of Contours To create a set of mid Contour Gaps 1 Select this Command from the Contours Main menu 2 Move the Cursor to the position from where the set of mid Contour Gaps is to begin and then either give the S command or click the Mouse LHB 3 Move the Cursor to the position where this set of mid Contour Gaps is to end and then either give the
425. oudCompare When importing a Point Cloud file of type las or its compressed version of laz the initial display can be very uninformative Take for example the Mount ST Helens example shown on Page 16 The image shown is the final image after meshing and colourizing have taken place When the file is initially imported a form is displayed showing default settings for the importing of the file Leave these default settings as displayed and just click the OK button Depending on the values of the X Y co ordinates in the file the Global Shift Scale form may be displayed See Page 6 Respond as is appropriate Normally the default suggested shifts should be accepted CloudCompare will then proceed to load the Point Cloud file which initially looks like Page 276 of 312 its olf amp J GloudCompare v2 6 1 32 bits 30 View 1 z i p Plugin D Vie GBeEvux 31 DB Tree 8 Sar He peow aS f Gh remover arco MM ESS Se 4 T Mount St Helens Oct 4 2004 1 Mount St Helens Oct 4 200 PC EBS HGROeac Property State Value Name Mount St Helens Visible al Show name in3D E X 262324 Box dimensions Y 35992 7 Z 5138 69 X 13116 2 Box center Y 179963 Z 2569 34 Info Object ID 4 Chi Current Display 3D View1 7 Clo Points 6 743 176 Global shift Global scale Point size Initial display of an las
426. ouse RHB Once construction of the Path or Polygon is complete click the OK button on the dialogue box The Path or Polygon created will be added to My Places Warning if you have a Temporary Place currently open at the time of the construction then the Path or Polygon will be added to that Temporary Place The created Path or Polygon information now needs to be saved as a KML file in order for SURPAC to be able to import it To do this locate the Path or Polygon under either My Places or Temporary Places and right click on it A pop up menu will appear and on this menu click the Save Places as menu item On the displayed Save file form ensure that the Save as Type item is set to KML kml The KML file may be saved to any folder but SURPAC KML files are generally kept in the C Surpac_GE folder Finally click on the Save button Importing the Path or Polygon into a SURPAC General CAD Sheet In the SURPAC General CAD programme first set the required Pen Style Colour and Thickness to be used for the imported lines Click on the File menu heading and then select the Import Lines from Google Earth KML File menu item From the displayed File Selection form select the required KML file The Lines contained in the selected KML file will be imported and displayed on the current Sheet using the defined Style Colour and Thickness Transferring a Google Earth Image to a SURPAC General CAD Sheet Creating a bounding Polygon and
427. ove the screen display to another portion of the sheet You can also Pan by sliding the Vertical and Horizontal Scroll Bars 2 Holding the RHB down and moving the cursor to the Right will allow you to define a rectangle on the screen highlighted in magenta When the Mouse button is released the sheet display will Zoom In and display the defined area at an enlarged scale 3 Holding the RHB down and moving the cursor to the Left moving the cursor a small amount to the left will force the programme to reset the sheet Scale and Position last used before the previous change of scale This function may be repeated to recall up to any of 9 previous Scale Position settings Page 124 of 312 4 Zooming by using the Mouse Scroll Wheel to Zoom In scroll the wheel away from you and to Zoom Out scroll the wheel towards you 5 Clicking the Mouse LHB this is the same as pressing the keyboard S key Start Command or the Enter key 6 Clicking the Mouse RHB this is the same as pressing the keyboard E key End Command 7 Clicking the Mouse MB this is used mainly as the repeat the last command function For example if your are modifying triangles in the Contour CAD programme move the cursor close to the required triangle line and then press the F11 key for the first triangle modification For the next triangle again move close to the required line and then press the Mouse MB to repeat the function
428. pletion of the Triangulation using either the Generate New Triangulation Command or the Create New Contours Command the programme will check to see if any BreakLines exist for the current Tacheometric File If so then the porgramme will automatically run the Fit Triangles to BreakLines function Using this Command the Triangulation may be modified at any time however if a BreakLine or a series of BreakLines are modified or added subsequent to generating the Triangulation Page 11 of 312 2 Create a Civil Designer DAT File This option allows you to create an ASCII file in the Civil Designer DAT format This is done by combining SURPAC Tacheometric File co ordinate information with a related SURPAC Surface Triangulation file The Surface Triangulation for the current Sheet must obviously exist before this option can be used Basically a DAT file is an ASCII file that contains the following comma separated information on each line A Point s Description or null A Point s Y X Z co ordinates A Point s Layer Number SURPAC defaults this to Layer 1 Up to 8 Point Numbers that are linked to the current Point in the Surface Triangulation Network Note that the DAT format makes no allowance for the actual Name or Number of a Point The Point Number that is allocated is the File line number on which the Point s information Description and co ordinates appear This means that when you create a
429. ported in the course of the past 3 months have been fixed Please ensure that you upgrade you SURPAC Software with this latest release Whilst welcome feedback both positive and negative from Users please note that only problems or bugs reported by Users running the latest release of SURPAC can be addressed In the past we have had various Users calling to report software problems only to find that they are actually running an out of data version of SURPAC and that the reported problems had been fixed some time previously know that some Users like to keep their existing SURPAC version running and let other Users discover and report any problems that might be present in a new release Obviously as a SURPAC User you are at liberty to use this approach but bear in mind that problems reported by User running older releases of SURPAC will not be attended to unless these problems are found to be present in the latest software release Storing the Actbar2 ocx file When implementing this SURPAC Software Upgrade the latest version of the library file called Actbar2 ocx will automatically be located in the C Surpac98 folder or the folder in which you have installed SURPAC To ensure the best performance of the new Actions Bar Menus Copy this file into the C Windows System folder for Windows 95 and Windows 98 the C Windows System32 folder for Windows XP the C WinNT System32 fol
430. porting a 1 10 000 Orthophoto image for example onto a CAD Plotting Sheet whose defined Plotting scale is 1 20 000 then this Scale Factor should be changed to 0 5 Whilst the Orthophoto images supplied by the Chief Directorate Surveys and Mapping are very useful to Surveyors as background data they do arrive in the TIFF format SURPAC however imports files in the Bitmap JPEG JPG ICO WMF or EMF formats Furthermore the TIFF format is not as compressed as the JPEG format Users are advised to use any graphics application to convert these TIFF files into JPEG files before attempting to import them into SURPAC Using the converted JPEG format which compresses the TIFF files by a factor of about 7 allows screen displays of the 1 10 000 images to a scale of 1 2 500 without any visual loss of definition Orthophoto images such as those supplied by the Chief Directorate Surveys and Mapping Mowbray 5 All SURPAC CAD Programmes Export Sheet to a Bitmap Image All CAD Programmes now have the item Output to a Bitmap Image File included in the File main menu heading Page 68 of 312 Although this item is functional for all the Windows operating systems its optimal functionality is only available when using the Windows XP Operating System This output function is very useful when a CAD Sheet a G P a general Plot Sheet Diagram Contour Plot etc is required by a client or another application in a graphic file mode rather
431. propriate item from the Data menu heading Sectional Title CAD Programme Option for Multiple Sheets for PQ Data Normally SURPAC displays prints the Participation Quota information on an elongated A3 sheet As this format apparently causes a problem with some of the SG Offices a new option has been added to the programme which allows for the Participation Quota information top be printed on up to three separate A3 size sheets Extended Lo and WG Coverage for the TSM Databases The databases for both the Lo and WG Systems has now been extended to provide better TSM coverage for most of the larger to medium size towns in South Africa These databases are used for the automatic co ordinate transformations between the Clarke 1880 Modified based Lo System to the WGS 84 Hartebeeshoek94 based WG System and also in the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons programme in SURPAC Please download the file called Surpac Control Files exe that can be found on the same Web page as the SURPAC Upgrade file This file is a self extracting WinRAR file and once it has been downloaded click on the file s icon and the two new database files will be re generated and stored in the SURPAC folder My thanks to Willem Knoetze of Danabaai for supplying the bulk of this information and to Steve Johnston for the Malmesbury data Page 148 of 312 General Modifications made to SURPAC Software Support for the Topcon GPT
432. r 16Mb RAM Ideally a PC or Laptop running Windows XP needs a RAM of 256Mb plus a graphic card with an on board 64Mb RAM A PC such as this is comfortably capable of handling the extended graphics used in SURPAC This option can be found by clicking the Options button in the Co ordinate File Editing programme 3 Transformations to from Lo Cape Datum to WGS 84 Hartebeesthoek94 Datum Users can now select Points from a Source Co ordinate file instead of having to transform the entire file When selecting the Source Data Entry Mode Users will notice that the Source data can be either Co ordinate File All Pnts or Co ordinate File Selected apart from the three other options for Manual Data ASCII Co ordinate Data and ASCII Lat Long Data If the latter of the above two Co ordinate File Sources is chosen then after the Compute File button has been clicked a form will be displayed through which Users will be able to mark click the Points required for the transformation The selected Points can either be individually marked or a Block of Points can be defined by giving the first and last Points for the required Block Page 73 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 20 Release 01 General Topics User Feedback This latest SURPAC Upgrade contains some important modifications and extensions as listed below Apart form these programme modifications various small bugs that have been re
433. r Co ordinate Files a Pop Up menu will appear with the two top menu items being the options to Open or Create a Co ordinate File and to run the C A D Drawing amp Plotting Programme For Observation and Tacheometric Files the appropriate File selection form will be displayed when the Mouse RHB is clicked SURPAC Graphic Programmes Additions and Modification applicable to All SURPAC Graphic Programmes The following Additions and or Modifications apply to the following SURPAC Programmes C A D Drawing amp Plotting Programme Contour Creation Plotting C A D except for the individual Text Item Font function General Plan Construct Edit Data Sheet Construct Edit Diagram Construct Edit Sectional Title Plans Working Plan Construct Edit Digital Terrain Model Creation Display Only for the Mouse Panning function 1 Setting the Pen Line Thicknesses This function allows you to view or to allocate required Pen Line Thicknesses for each of the available 8 Pens used in the SURPAC Graphic Programmes When SURPAC is installed the Line Thicknesses are set to their default values as follows Pen 1 Line Thickness 0 20 mm Pen 2 Line Thickness 0 30 mm Pen 3 Line Thickness 0 50 mm Pen 4 Line Thickness 0 75 mm Page 21 of 312 Pen 5 Line Thickness 1 00 mm Pen 6 Line Thickness 1 50 mm Pen 7 Line Thickness 2 00 mm Pen 8 Line Thickness 3 00 mm Any or all of these default values may be changed by selecting the
434. r ID Active 001 Cadastral Data Pen 1 002 Cadastral Data Pen 2 003 Cadastral Data Pen 3 004 Cadastral Data Pen 4 005 CADASTRAL TEXT PEN 1 006 CADASTRAL TEXT PEN 2 007 CADASTRAL TEXT PEN 3 008 CADASTRAL TEXT PEN 4 009 VACANT TopoCAD GLOBAL LAYER 010 VACANT TopoCAD GLOBAL LAYER 011 ELECTRICITY PYLONS E 012 ELECTRICITY MEDIUM LINES ESCOM 013 ELECTRICITY FARM LINES ESCOM 014 ELECTRICITY TOWNSHIP OVERHEAD 015 ELECTRICRTY TOWNSHIP CABLES 016 VACANT TopoCAD GLOBAL LAYER 017 TELEPHONE LINES OVERHEAD 018 TELEPHONE LINES CABLES 019 VACANT TopoCAD GLOBAL LAYER 020 SE 3E MAIN LINES 021 SE SE TOWNSHIP LINES 022 VACANT TopoCAD GLOBAL LAYER When Displaying the above Current Layer Set All other Occupied Layers as being Active Set All other Occupied Layers as being Non Active C Background Display Options ee Abort gt lt Show All Non Active Layer Information in pale Grey X Also Show All Non Active Layer Images in pale Grey x oK Layer Active Property A Layer may be defined as being either Active or Non Active The Current Layer is always Active Any of the other Defined Layers may be set as Active via the Change Layers and or Active Settings menu item found under the Layers menu heading The keyboard short cut key to this function is F3 the F3 Special Function Key Using this function you can Change the Curr
435. r select a direction from the list of directions displayed or enter a new one If you have used the Calculator as described above then the required area will be shown on the form If not enter the required area Finally enter the number of new Polygons stands required and Click the Proceed button For the example select the direction 126 00 00 the area of 132 2625m and the number 3 N Note that although the total number of stands in the block will be 4 we are only calculating 3 new stands The remaining portion of the original block will form the 4 stand and will have the same are as the 3 new stands Shown below are the co ordinates for the Points in this example Name Y Co ord X Co ord E8 215 647 520 765 E9 220 628 521 201 E10 231 550 513 265 E13 212 948 487 496 Page 104 of 312 Modified The General CAD Programme The number of selectable Pen Line Colours has now been increased to 14 Since any Pen Line Colour may be switched to Active or Non Active this feature effectively provides 14 Layers for a CAD Sheet When any Pen Line Colour is set to non Active by selecting the Set the Active Pens Layers menu item any Line Text or Hatch item drawn with that Pen Colour is hidden from the Sheet until that Pen Line Colour is reset to Active e Anew Command has been added to the Draw menu which allows for the calculation of new stands erven by means of Fixed Area Calculations See Pages 2 3 Straight Lines co
436. raverse information For the Graphic CAD programmes this function is taken one step further If you double click a Menu Heading of a Graphic programme then press F1 the Help Page display will show the Help information for the menu items available under that Heading Page 1 of 312 SURPAC CAD Programmes The various Graphic CAD programmes of SURPAC CAD Plotting Contour Plotting General Plan Data Sheet Working Plan Diagram and Sectional Title programmes have been substantially modified and now include a number of new features Toolbars With the exception of the Contour CAD programme these programmes now include Fixed Toolbars on the right hand side of the screen These Toolbars which may be personalized allow for rapid Command selection when carrying out graphic construction or editing The Contour CAD programme has a Floating Toolbar which is also used for rapid Command usage Help Information If you double click a Menu Heading of any Graphic programme except the File Heading then press F1 the Help Page display will show Help information for the menu items available under that Heading If you double click the File Heading the overall Help information for the current CAD programme will be displayed Edit facilities All CAD programmes except the Contour CAD programme now include an Erasure Polygon function You can define a polygon up to 200 sides covering any portion of the Sheet in which either Lin
437. raverse or Triangulation network be calculated using the appropriate Least squares Network adjustment programme or Field Traverse programme prior to reducing the Observation File Diagram CAD Programme Automatic Data and Consistency function This function automatically scans the Diagram s Data Blocks and uses the found Directions Distances and Co ordinates to carry out and display a consistency check between the Polar data and the Co ordinate data Areas are also computed using both the Polar and Co ordinate data The function is called by either simultaneously pressing the CTRL D keys or by selecting from the Figure menu In the previous Upgrade Release 01 the Right Hand Data Box was increased in width by 5mm to conform with SG requirements This unfortunately caused an interference in the Programme s Automatic Data and Consistency function This has now been corrected Page 30 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 05 Release 03 1 New Contour Labelling function Contour CAD Programme Contours may be Labelled at the start and end of the Contour lines and at User defined mid Contour positions When mid Contour Labels are required contour Gaps are created on the selected contours to accommodate the Labelling Once created Contour Label items behave as normal Text Items and may be Edited Moved Copied or Deleted When importing a Contour File into the C A D Drawing and Plotting Programme y
438. rce Data From will be left blank until you have identified the Source Data Entry Mode From the Source Data Entry Mode Option List select the required option If you select an entry mode other than from a SURPAC Co ordinate file the programme will set a default file System for the Source Data This can be modified by clicking on the From System display and modifying it If you select any entry mode other than Manual entry the programme will prompt for the name of the File from which the Source Data are to be read If you have selected a SURPAC Co ordinate file as the Source Data then the System of the selected File will be loaded into the From System display and cannot be edited If you have selected any other mode of Source Data entry then make sure that the System shown in the From System display is correct before proceeding If you have selected a SURPAC Co ordinate file an ASCII co ordinate file or an ASCII Lat Long file as being the Source Data then after an appropriate file has been selected the Compute File Button will become active If you have selected Manual Data Entry for the Source Data the Add a Point Button will become active Now check and modify if necessary the selections in the Point Weighting Option the Control Points and the Data Storing Options List Boxes Finally check that any active Options the ones shown in black at the bottom of the form are correctl
439. rdinate element Co ordinate File Editing File to File transfer using the Copy and Paste functions When using the Copy and Paste functions in order to transfer a set of Points from one Co ordinate file to another some of the Point data was missing such as Text Labels and or Descriptions This has now been corrected When using the Copy and Paste functions to transfer data between two Co ordinate files make sure that both file are using the same element column display structure otherwise descriptive data can end up in the incorrect columns Printing Setting out Sheets In some cases the programme was retrieving incorrect co ordinates for the Set Up Point s This only appeared to happen in a limited number of cases but in order to prevent this from re occurring the co ordinate location routine for this programme has now been modified Point Off Line Calculations This programme has been causing intermittent problems for some time When moving Off Line Points to their On Line positions the programme would sometimes and without any pattern allocate incorrect co ordinates to one or more of the Points moved This now appears to have been fixed up but please let me know if you still experience a problem in this regard Page 159 of 312 All SURPAC CAD Programmes New Text Item Length SURPAC Version 5 33 Release 01 Programme Modifications Changing CAD programme Text items to maximum of 160 characters After receiving
440. re Trig Beacons and TSMs Working Stations Beacons Adopted Beacons not Adopted Beacons Found Beacons Placed Calculated Points Reference Marks lf Show Categories is set to No then the listing will be shown as a continuous listing regardless of any Beacon categories lf Show Categories is set to Yes then the listing will be separated into the categories for which Beacons exist in the current Co ordinate File lf Show Categories is set to Select then the listing will be separated into the User selected categories for which Beacons exist in the current Co ordinate File The default option for Cadastral format is to partition the listing into the various Beacon and Station categories For Engineering format files Show Categories is set to No and may not be User modified 4 Modifying the SURPAC Security File location NB This facility should only be employed if essentially required by a Network security setting When running SURPAC from a Work Station or a Terminal which is a part of a Windows NT or Windows 2000 Local Area Network the default location of the SURPAC security files can be problematical if the system Administrator has blocked read write access to certain network folders Theses folders would generally be the C WinNT folders containing the Windows installation files etc Since SURPAC uses these folders as default locations for its security files the lack of read write acce
441. re Dotted Background Broad Stripes and Narrow Stripes All Hatching options can be found by clicking the Hatch menu heading As for all the other SURPAC CAD programmes the General CAD programme now has the two Undo functions included in the Edit menu refer to Page 2 Page 80 of 312 Modification Using the Esc Key to Exit from programmes It appears that some Users have not as yet managed to fully come to grips with the way Windows based programmes work and some are clinging to the MS DOS style of programme operation In the past couple of months have had two Users who have phoned with the following type of query I selected the Geographical Lo transformation programme When this programme displayed its Option Setting form decided to abort the calculation and wanted to return to the Co ordinate Editing programme but the transformation programme had no Exit button so had to re boot the PC in order to do this to navigate around applications such as SURPAC Whilst it is true that not all SURPAC programmes have explicit Exit buttons getting back to say the Co ordinate Editing programme is simply a matter of clicking on the General main menu heading and then selecting the Co ordinate File Editing menu item two clicks of the Mouse In spite of the simplicity of programme navigation with a Mouse have now set up the Esc key as a method to enable Users to abort a
442. re and Print Stand Number Yes NoC Centre and Print Stand Area Yes No Add Sub Areas to this Area YesO No Select Accuracies for Area calculation Directions To the nearest PO vO 10 TO 0 1 C Distances To the nearest im O 01mO 001m 1mm 0 1mm C Display the Point Definition Information Form GP Stand Area form showing Shape Polygon File option Each General Plan Sheet has its own Shape Polygon file The information held in a Sheet s Shape Polygon file may be listed and or edited using the facility provided under the General Plan s Edit menu heading Click on the Edit menu heading and then select the item Edit the Page 227 of 312 Sheet Shape Polygon File Data Polygons maybe deleted from the file or their Name Number and or Area may be edited The Point co ordinates used to define the Polygon cannot be edited When exporting Polygons to a Shapefile SURPAC adds the following attributes to each Polygon by means of the associated dbf file attribute format data base file STAND_NAME The Stand Name of the Polygon Stand Erf STAND_AREA The Area in square metres or Hectares of the Polygon Stand Erf amp oP Sheet Shape Polygon File Listing Editing Sheet 6 Polygon Stand No Area x Edit 1001 567 54 T 1001 567 54 A 1002 531 45 1003 464 62 1004 420 12 1005 428 15 1006 578 59 1007 482 71 1008 466 49 1009 403 02 1010 399 89 1011 407 09 1012 598 01 1013 67
443. re deleted This has been fixed Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons 1 The SURPAC Trig data base for the Hartebeeshoek94 WG system issued in June this year inadvertently had areas in the Western Cape missing This SURPAC Upgrade includes an amended data base that now has all areas covered 2 There was a problem when sorting a displayed list of nearest Trig Beacons When changing the display form Distance to Direction or Name the names of the Trig Beacons were not being sorted correctly This has now been rectified Point Off Line Calculations When Moving Points On Line the programme was not re storing the moved Points This has now been corrected Page 181 of 312 General Plan Section Title and Working Plan Programmes A new option has been included in these programmes that allows for the Deletion of User Selected Sheets This option can be found by clicking the programme s File menu heading and then selecting the menu item Delete Selected Plan Sheets The programme will then display a list of the existing Sheets Select tic the Sheets required to be Deleted and then click the Proceed button Google Earth Version 5 1 For some reason know only to the Google boffins the newest version of Google Earth installs itself in a different folder location than that of previous versions This had the effect of making this version of Google Earth invisible to SURPAC The new location for Goog
444. rea The second Point entered is the Point that is approximately diagonally opposite to the first Point These two Points along with the entered Mesh Orientation will define the rectangle to be covered by the Mesh The rectangular area does not need to have its boundaries running North South and or East West When a Point Name is entered SURPAC will search for the Point in the current Co ordinate file If no Point can be found the co ordinate values must be entered manually It is advisable to select and add using the Point Add PA Command the two Points on the Sheet before running this function The second Point chosen should be approximately diagonally opposite the first Point Hence for a Mesh oriented NS and EW the second Point needs to be approximately SE of the first Point However for a Mesh oriented at about 225 for UTM 453 i e The Mesh lines running NW to SE and SW to NE the second Point needs to be approximately due East of the first Point Enter the required Mesh Orientation and Mesh Interval The Orientation of the Mesh is set by providing the required Direction of the primary Mesh axis This value should be greater or equal to 180 and less than 270 for UTM Systems use be greater or equal to 0 and less than 909 However SURPAC will automatically adjust entered values that are outside these limits The direction of the secondary Mesh axis will automatically be set perpendicular to the primary Mesh axis If Points
445. red an possibly modified for the Underground Peg Calculation programmes Set Limit security feature The default security code is ABCD1234 Supervisors are advised to change this security code to their own required value after installing the software Any alphanumeric code of up to 8 characters may be used 3 Diagram CAD Programme Improved Diagram Creation Options When creating a New Diagram by defining Points or Line Terminals and the surrounding data from a General CAD Sheet or on a Working Plan Sheet a new form is now shown at the bottom left hand corner of the screen This form displays the currently selected Points for the Diagram along with their co ordinates and figural polar data Apart from the Diagram designation of a Point A B C etc the Point s actual Name will also be displayed allowing you to verify that the correct Point has been selected In the event of an incorrect Point selection use the Mouse RHB to de select the last Point from the Diagram figure This option may be repeated for as many times as there are Points selected In summary when defining Points for a Diagram on a CAD Sheet or a WP Sheet e Clicking the Mouse LHB will select the Point closest to the cursor as the next Diagram figure Point e Clicking the Mouse RHB will de select the last displayed Point from the Diagram figure Page 50 of 312 e Pressing the keyboard Esc key will provide the option of de selecting the last
446. red Symbol Use the Mouse Middle Button to repeat a previous Symbol selection The following actions will then be required For the Tree Line Slope Indicator and Gate Symbols You need to identify two positions on the Sheet These two positions are the limits between which the Symbol will be drawn Move to the required first position and Left Click the mouse move to the second position and Right Click the mouse For example if a Gate is required to be displayed this Symbol will be stretched between the defined first and second positions on the Sheet For the Single Tree You need to specify a Tree Radius Enter the required value on the form provided and the Tree Symbol will be shown at the cursor position For all other Symbols No further action is required and the selected Symbol will be displayed at the cursor position SURPAC Topo Symbols Tree Line Single Tree Marsh or Swamp Bush Symbol Cultivated Land Rocky Outcrop Slope Indicator Gate Symbo Grave Symbol Windmill Symbol Electricity Pole Telephone Pole Page 86 of 312 From the Topo Symbols menu you can select the Set Symbol Options item to set the Symbol Size Orientation Line Thickness Outline Colour and Background Colour To Erase Rub a Symbol Right Click on the Symbol then select the Erase Current Symbol menu item found under the Topo Symbol main menu To Erase a group of Symb
447. repeat this action this time highlighting and using the Base DTM file Once again you will get a Console message such as Page 269 of 312 V 298440 cube units for the Base DTM To determine the net volume between the two surfaces subtract the Base DTM volume from the Surface DTM volume or the other way around for an excavation survey and finally divide the result by the Vertical Exaggeration e g Net Volume 1 624 210 298 440 2 662 885 m survey unit for this example is metres This result presumes that both DTMs have the same minimum Height value which is used as the base height for both Volume calculations Comparing the CloudCompare Volume with the SURPAC Volume The same volume can be calculated in SURPAC albeit following simpler steps In the Digital Terrain Modelling programme click on the Volumes button at the left of the display On the Volume Options form that will be shown select the item Cut and Fill Volumes Between the Figural and Base DTMs and then click the Proceed button 7 DTM Volume Calculation Options Volume Options Cut and Fill Volumes Between the Figural and Base DIMs Cut and Fill Volumes from Figural DTM and a given Horizontal Plane C Location of a Cut and Fill Balance Plane through the Figural DTM C Display Cut and Fill Volumes between two separate Figural DTMs FIGURE CUT VOLUME 303 Cu m FIGURE FILL VOLUME 662220 Cu m
448. rig Town Survey Marks headings etc as described in the previous section Once this is complete click the Proceed Button to return to the main Diagram Graphic Editing Programme Apart from the Data Block information and the Main Figure plot all the located Line and Text Items on the CAD Plot Sheet will be displayed These obviously may be edited moved deleted etc in the normal way 3 Create Diagram Information using the current Working Plan On selecting this option SURPAC will display the current Working Plan Sheet If no Working Plan Sheet has been defined during the current session a Working Plan Sheet will have to be SetUp before proceeding If you want to use a Working Plan Sheet other than the default Sheet normally Sheet No 1 then you must select the required Sheet number once the Working Plan programme is running The cursor will be set to the SURPAC digitize cursor indicating that the programme is waiting for you to identify the Points to be used for the Diagram Whilst in this mode you are free to Zoom or Pan about the Working Plan Sheet Once you have located and displayed the are containing the required figure click the cursor close to the top left hand Point of the figure The cursor will snap onto this Point and use it as Point A for the Diagram Go around the figure in a clockwise direction clicking onto all Points making up the figure Finally again click onto the first Point Point A to indic
449. riginally downloaded from Booker Thanks to Jaco Bruwer of Cape Town for the original idea Page 99 of 312 New Sending SURPAC Data to Microsoft Excel Most of SURPAC s programmes are now able to send information directly to a Microsoft Excel Worksheet When printing a calculation or a listing this is normally sent to the SURPAC Print Form before sending to the Printer At the bottom of this Print Form are a number of User selectable options for the actual output target of the information These have always included the Printer an ASCII file and the Windows Clipboard Added to this list you will now find the option MS Excel File Clicking this option will send the listing to a Microsoft Excel Worksheet am sure that many SURPAC Users could find this a convenient way of exporting information to other applications Page 100 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 22 Release 02 Modified All CAD Programmes All SURPAC CAD programmes except the Diagram programme have been modified to allow the plotting of defined portions of AO A3 size plans on A4 graphic enabled printers For example to plot an A4 portion of a sheet do the following 1 On screen display the required sheet area at the required scale Move the Cursor to position that you would like to use as the centre of the A4 plotting sheet With the Cursor in the above position Click the Mouse RHB The Cursor will move up into the Menu ar
450. rm displayed when the Print File command has been selected Before creating General Plans it is advisable to apply an X constant to the Co ordinate file in order to bring the displayed X values to below 1 000 000 X values higher than this can cause the GP and GP Data sheet X values for Text items to be inaccurate This becomes apparent when displaying lists of Text items that need to be uniformly spaced Page 280 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 8 Version 5 64 The SURPAC AutoPlan GP Creation function This form of a General Plan is normally used for existing townships villages and other rural residential developments that have not been laid out according to a prescribed Town Planning manifesto but which have been physically occupied in random positions Some Stands may be contiguous and others free standing These types of developments need to be surveyed and registered in order to provide the land dwellers with a Title Deed thereby legalizing their ownership of the property and providing them with a physical non movable asset that can be leased sold or passed on to their heirs This function allows for the automatic generation of such a General Plan This is possible as long as the structure of surveyed Points in the current Co ordinate file complies with certain rules as is described below Note that this function may also be used for the generation of more standard pre designed townships as long as the required rules
451. robat readstep2 html Applications that create and or edit PDF files however are not all free Scouting through the Internet have found an excellent and relatively cheap application that performs a number of PDF creation operations including the creation of PDF files directly out of the SURPAC CAD programmes This application is called deskPDF Standard and it only costs US 19 95 about ZAR200 Some SURPAC Users have let me know that there are other free applications that do the same thing as deskPDF such as CutePDF Writer available However have stuck to using deskPDF as it works well and provides good software support If you are interested in purchasing the deskPDF software please visit http www docudesk com desk_pdf_standard shtml and follow the screen instructions You will need a credit card to make the required payment Creating PDF files for SURPAC CAD Sheets Once installed this application will set itself up as a Printer device and will be displayed in the list of available Printers To create a PDF file of your document directly from SURPAC run the appropriate SURPAC programme to display the required CAD Sheet GP Diagram etc then select the usual Output to a Printer Plotter menu option Then select the printer called deskPDF out of the list of available printers You will need to set the required size for the document A4 AO the required sheet orientation Portrait or Landscape
452. rom interfering with the programme s graphic boundary selection process L SURPAC Ver 5 63 for Windows XP Vista 7 B General CAD Programme CO File General Conversions LeastSquares Topographical Engineering Mining Cadastral Help Eee SS e eee ENS ieee hint a Meet nears Lies Mk a mt het Tere Semele Lee te 7 l F a 5 n m Scale Plot Scale Swing 00 24737 Y 34344 63 X _2765771 68 Z Click on the Figure menu heading and then select the Auto diagram Creation Mode This should now be shown as ON and the top information line should also indicate this In this mode the display of Points is suppressed All that should be visible on the screen should be the boundary Lines and the Stand Number Text items Now simply click near to the bottom left corner of the required Stand Number In this example Page 291 of 312 the chosen Stand is 24735 The screen will flicker for about a second as the programme locates the Stand polygon boundaries plus the surrounding Line and Text data It will then load the Diagram CAD programme and display the diagram for the chosen Stand in this case Stand 24735 SIDES ANGLES OF CO ORDINATES Metres DIRECTION Y System Lo 25 X 000 2765 675 36 2765 670 41 2765 707 51 2765 706 97 Director of 111 2764 806 52 Surveys and 222 2765 278
453. rrent DIM 1494 53 Lowest Elevation for the Current DTM 1467 29 p J e J The resultant net Volume from SURPAC is 661 917 m3 Hence the difference in net Volume between SURPAC and CloudCompare for this survey is Volume Difference 661 917 661 903 14 m or 0 002 Other SURPAC Modifications or Additions 1 General CAD and General Plan CAD Importing General CAD Sheet data into another General CAD Sheet or into a General Plan Sheet has been improved The Line data imported is now restricted to the area within the margins of the new Sheet Lines that extend Page 310 of 312 beyond the margins are clipped so as to show only those line portions that lie within the sheet margins General CAD Sub Sheet created by Importing Data from a General CAD Main Sheet 2 Observation files Observation files may now be printed in either Field Book or Raw Data mode showing either Horizontal Distances or Slope distances In the former case the Horizontal distances are computed from the Slope distance and the Vertical Angle Other values affecting the distance such as Sea Level and Scale Enlargement are not applied A new option has been added for Observation files under the File Options button that allows for the addition of Prism constant to User selected observations The required observations can be selected by either Point Description s or Target Height T amp Apply Add a
454. rsor to the Bottom Right corner of the required area and Click the Mouse RHB The Grid Mesh will now be constructed at the User defined interval within the defined area Page 93 of 312 Using the Windows XP Extended Graphics facility Users of the Microsoft Windows XP operating system should be aware of SURPAC s Windows XP Extended Graphics facility employed when running any of the CAD programmes This facility is selected or deselect as follows e Inthe Co ordinate File Editing programme Click on the File Options button e On the displayed Co ordinate File Options form Click on the option Use Windows XP Extended Graphics facility to select or deselect the option When SURPAC is run for the first time on a PC using Windows XP it will set this facility as being active selected This facility provides for a far greater panning area for CAD Sheets whilst still allowing zooming for an on screen viewing scale of up to 10 times greater than the designated Plotting Scale However if you need to zoom to viewing scales greater than 10 times you can do this by deselecting the Extended Graphics facility Once this is done you will be able to zoom to much larger scales but the panning area will be correspondingly reduced In other words the increased zooming ability is a trade off against the decreased panning ability Users should therefore set this facility according to their requirements Modified M
455. s Yes for the L I R No to be displayed Page 65 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 10 Release 01 1 Modifications for the Microsoft Windows XP Operating System Modifications have been made to SURPAC in order to make it fully compatible with the new Microsoft Windows XP Operating System These modifications do not alter SURPAC s prior compatibility with the Microsoft Windows 98 NT and 2000 Operating systems Whilst many of these modifications are purely cosmetic in nature there are some important changes due to inherent differences between the Windows 98 and the Windows XP Operating systems From a SURPAC point of view the important advantages of using Windows XP are 1 An improvement in the operating speed 2 Better handling of RAM for both the PC motherboard and the Graphic Card 3 The out of resources problem has been removed This old bug bear of Windows 95 and Windows 98 has thankfully disappeared in Windows XP mainly since Windows XP is a derivative of the Windows NT Operating System rather than Windows 98 4 Windows XP appears to be a more stable and polite platform that the old Windows 95 98 versions and the need to re boot the PC due to an application crash for example has virtually disappeared As a result SURPAC Users running Windows XP will find enhanced performance and features especially in the SURPAC graphic applications For example when running Windows XP i
456. s e The two Systems must have a minimum of 4 common Points There are two methods that can be used for carrying out an Auto Transformation The first is based on Name matching and should be used if the corresponding common control Points in the two files use the same Names This is by far the quicker of the two methods Secondly for files in which the corresponding common control Points use different Names an Auto Transformation can be carried out by letting the programme locate a Shape match The programme locates a shape in system 2 that extends over the limit of the area covered by the common Points It then does a search in the System 1 file for a matching Shape Obviously the two Shapes could be of different size orientation and or position but the programme is able to factor in these variables when matching Shapes lt is nevertheless a fairly complex procedure involving a large number of re cursive calculations For example a System 1 file having just 500 Points the number of possible Shapes is 6 250 000 000 so don t try this method with your hand calculator Page 97 of 312 Using the Auto Transformation method based on Point Names If the two files use the same Names for corresponding common control Points then the fastest way to carry out an Auto Transformation is by using the Point Names method Once this has been defined as the required method the programme will simply locate the matching Points between the tw
457. s Contour files and Centre Line files The SURPAC Clarke 1880 Modified to from WGS 84 Transformation programme This programme incorporates the same mathematical procedures as developed for the SURPAC Weighted Helmert Transformation programme This uses the in house Weighted Least Squares adjustment technique employing the rigorous least squares adjustment of residuals The residuals are determined from the weighted centres of gravity of the two sets of Control Stations for each Point to be transformed This approach allows for full system to system transformation flexibility The number crunching requirements of this technique are not a real problem for the modern PC For example running a Pentium IV 1 9Ghz PC and opting for a point by point weighted transformation using the programme selected 8 nearest control Stations for each point from a list of 250 common control Stations it takes SURPAC about 0 4 to transform check and store a 1500 point co ordinate file This programme allows the User to make their own decisions on how to convert any survey from one of the two systems to the other Page 44 of 312 Requirements for carrying out a Transformation Clarke 1880 Modified to from WGS 84 1 The two SURPAC files called LoLatLonList sur and WGLatLonList sur must exist in the folder in which SURPAC Software is installed usually the folder C Surpac98 These files are each about 1 1Mb in size These files c
458. s as being either Y X system files or E N system files This choice has been extended with the addition of the N E system This has been added mainly so as to comply with Co ordinate File layouts as used in New Zealand Point Comparison using Different Files This programme will now compare Height values in the two files if the Point Height element column has been set to be visible To set this value as visible Click the File main Menu heading and then select the Set the Co ordinate File Elements menu item If the Height value is not made visible this programme will only compare the Y X or E N or N E values Thanks to Jarek Siwinski of Johannesburg for the original idea Quick Access to Point Delete and Point Copy This new function applies to the Co ordinate File Editing Observation File Editing and Tacheometric File Editing programmes When a file Point or Line is Clicked there is normally 1 of 3 actions that can take place namely Editing Deleting or Copying When a Point is Clicked the Cursor jumps to the Checkbox at the end of the Edit line assuming that Editing will take place However if Editing is not required you can now Click the Mouse RHB whilst the cursor is in the Checkbox and a small pop up menu will appear allowing you to select either of the Delete or Copy functions Co ordinate File Listing Previously this programme was not correctly transferring the listed data to an Excel file if
459. s been added In the Working Plan the problem of Line drawing through non co ordinated points has been fixed Page 82 of 312 SURPAC Programmes Modifications for Version 5 20 Release 02 New SURPAC Project Files SURPAC Project Files This version of SURPAC software introduces the concept of a SURPAC Project File SPF Simply an SPF file contains the Path and Name information of all the files associated with any given Co ordinate File Every Co ordinate File has its own SPF which is associated by the file s Name i e for a co ordinate file called Ptn 107 Broeder wcr there will be an associated SPF called Ptn 107 Broeder spf The information stored in an SPF is automatically accumulated as you work Whenever you open an Observation File Diagram File Tacheometric File etc the relevant file s Path and Name are recorded in the SPF of the current Co ordinate File When you next use the Co ordinate File the SPF will search for all associated files and open them ready for use should they be required This prevents the vexing problem of trying to remember the names of the associated files for a Co ordinate File that has not been used for some time for example Cadastral files such as General Plans Working Plans Sectional Title Sheets and Data Sheets have always been uniquely linked or associated to their parent Co ordinate File This is necessary as the drawing information contained in these Plans or She
460. s between Windows XP and Windows Vista that make this impossible If you need a SURPAC for Windows Vista XP Version 5 31 installation CD and you have a current SURPAC Software Maintenance Contract then please let me know and will courier one to you The price for this CD is R150 00 to cover costs and postage At this time would not advise anyone to rush into switching from Windows XP to Windows Vista There obviously needs to be a settling in time for Vista SURPAC itself appears to be running well under Vista for those Users who have currently opted for the Vista operating system However you may well find that Vista does not support some of your other software and there may not be Vista drivers available for your printers or plotters etc All CAD Programmes Line Drawing whilst changing Scale It is now possible to change the screen scale of a drawing Sheet whilst in the Line Drawing mode This enables Zooming normally using the mouse scroll wheel into a congested area for example to ensure that the Point Line used as the line terminal is the correct one It is also possible to Pan about a screen display of a drawing Sheet whilst in the Line Drawing mode This is done by holding down the mouse LHB panning to the required area and then continuing to move the mouse cursor onto the required position All CAD Programmes Undo Previous Tasks This is not a new function and has been incorporated in SURPAC for the past four
461. s will Move as the Mouse Cursor is moved 2 Pressing either the lt or gt Keys will Rotate all the Lines about the Figure centre 3 Pressing either the or Keys will Scale the Figure and surrounding Lines The scales used are a logical set of scales appropriate to a Diagram display e g 1 100 1 125 1 150 1 200 etc To Abort the above and return to the original Figure Position Scale and Rotation press the Esc Key To Save changes made as per the current Figure display click the mouse LHB 3 Long Section Plotting Programme amendments Panning by using the Mouse The New Panning option has been added This option use the Mouse to control and define the Pan function without the necessity of pressing any keyboard keys Once this Mouse operation have been mastered Panning a Screen display is much simpler and quicker than using the Scroll Bars To Pan move about within the available Screen Display Press and hold the Mouse LHB and then drag the cursor in the required direction As the cursor is moved the position of the Screen Display will change in response to the cursor movement The Screen Display can be moved to any position within the limits of the Horizontal and Vertical Scroll Bars Once the required location has been reached release the Mouse LHB Either the Horizontal or the Vertical Scroll Bar position indicator or both will change in response to this Panning action Page 38 of 312 New Screen L
462. s you might need to refresh a CAD screen to show new Points added through one of the other programmes Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Running two instances of SURPAC from one Laptop Contour CAD and General Plan CAD Page 244 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 8 Version 5 60 Release 01 a Bench Marks in South Africa and their use in SURPAC Software The office of National Geo spatial Information within the Department of Rural Development and Land Reform has issued a list of Bench Marks covering the Republic of South Africa The Bench Mark heights Orthometric heights were determined using precise levelling and they represent the most accurate height reference system for relating surveys to the South African reference geoid It is long been common practise for Surveyors to determine a height reference for a survey by means of Trigonometrical levelling from national Trig beacons Whilst in general there is nothing wrong with this technique Surveyors should be aware that in some areas of the country there are height deviations between the Trig heights and the Bench Mark heights of up to several metres For Surveyors who want to connect their surveys to the national Bench Mark system SURPAC now provides a programme that locates and displays the nearest Bench Marks to the survey area and allows the loading of User selected Bench Marks into the current Co ordinate file Currently this programme is limited to the geographical area of th
463. se button to select the required Master file If the current Field file has already been used in conjunction with a Master file the previously used Master file will be shown automatically 2 Click on the down arrow next to the Layer Description for the Search and select the required Field file Layer to be used for the search and comparison It is a good idea as in the example above to label each Layer in the Field file according to the date of the check Survey 3 Once a Layer has been selected the above form will display all the surveyed beacons in that Layer and allow you to enter any Offset distances that might have been used for any of those surveyed beacons 4 Finally set the required Search Distance to be used from each of the Field file beacons The default value is set as 0 100m 5 Once all the required setting have been made Click the Compute button The programme will then list all found measurements between the Field file Points Beacons and the Master file Theoretical Grid Lines Intersections that are within the specified Search distance Some Field file Beacons can be listed up to three times If the Beacon is close to a Theoretical Grid Line Intersection its distances from both Grid Lines as well as its distance from the Grid Line intersection will be listed separately Finally by Clicking the Print button the obtained results can be printed using the SURPAC data print format From this display the results may
464. selecting the appropriate Button on this form it is possible to send the displayed data to the Printer or to a defined ASCII file To Abort the calculation at any stage press the Esc Key or click the Abort Button on the Point Definition Information form To cancel the last selected Point click the Mouse RHB or click the appropriate Button on the Point Definition Information form In summary when defining Points for an Area calculation by Point Definition Clicking the Mouse LHB will select the Point closest to the cursor as the next Stand Erf Point Clicking the Mouse RHB will de select the last displayed Point from the Stand Erf Pressing the keyboard Esc key will provide the option of de selecting the last Stand Erf Point or of Aborting the Area calculation Page 53 of 312 Modifications made to SURPAC Version 5 06 Release 01 1 Diagram CAD Programme Support for AO A1 and A2 Sheet sizes The Diagram programme now allows for the construction of Diagrams ranging in size from an A4 Portrait orientation only a double sheet A3 Landscape orientation only plus A2 A1 and AO sheets The latter three sheet sizes may have the orientation set as either Portrait or Landscape Creating a New Diagram From the programme s File menu heading select the Generate Diagram Figure amp Information menu item From the form that will then be displayed it can be seen that there are 5 ways in which a
465. sfer Comp Deg Square D S M No Registrar of Deeds The above is an example of an A4 Diagram for Botswana The Diagram might still need some editing such as filling in the Stand numbers of surrounding properties re positioning of Beacon Names etc Page 290 of 312 Diagram Creation Method 5 Clicking on a Stand Number on the General CAD Sheet This is a fully automated method of Diagram creation With reference to the last three options mentioned under Method 4 above this method presumes that all three of the options are selected Therefore if you have a number of Diagrams to compile from a single township for example then it is best to use any of the previous Methods 1 4 to set up the necessary Country Province Headings and Signature to compile the initial Diagram Using Method 5 will then automatically adopt these values changing only the Area and Stand Number for each Diagram Programme Operation Load the General CAD programme Refer to the setting up of the General CAD Sheet from a GP Sheet as discussed under Method 4 above Display the portion of the Sheet where the Diagram compilation is to begin For the display use a reasonably large scale such as the plotting scale to allow the programme to identify all Stand boundaries All Text data other than the Stand Numbers should be moved to Layer 3 Layer 3 should then be made non visible This is to prevent the distance and direction Text items f
466. should such Points exist Using this method provides the User the flexibility of setting up their own Layer Description List rather than making their surveyed Points comply with the built in default values used in SURPAC There are one or more Points in the Co ordinate file whose Layer ID or Point Description does not exist in the associated Layer Description List Select one of the Options below to either Add New Layers to the Existing Layer set Delete the Existing Layers and create a New Layer set or select Cancel to ignore the situation for the time being NB Any Point whose Layer ID cannot be matched to any Layer can not be displayed and therefore will not be accessible Keep Existing Layers and Add New Layers Delete Existing Layers and Create New Layers Keep Existing Layers and Ignore these Points Importing and Exporting Layer information on a General CAD Sheet When importing information from an AutoCAD DXF or DWG file the Layer Headings and Colours as used in the DXF or DWG file will be replicated for the CAD Sheet if this is required Other options allow all imported Layer information to be put into the Current Layer The Layer Colours in the DXF or DWG file can also be overridden and the existing Layer colours in the CAD Sheet maintained A CAD Sheet s Layer Headings and Colours may be exported to DXF or DWG files When exporting information only data on the Active Layers will be exported No Layer informati
467. sired size is reached During this process the aspect ratio width to height ratio will not change Once the required size has been reached click either the Left or the Right hand Mouse button The Image will now become a part if the Sheet information The aspect ratio of the Image can be changed by selecting the Resize a Sheet Image Menu item 5 Rotating Images in the CAD Plotting and General Plan Programmes Rotating Images in these two programmes has been improved The display and plotting of rotated Images is a now much faster and of better quality Note When an Image is Added Imported it by default appears in a vertically aligned rectangular area The Image automatically adopts the orientation of the Sheet at the time the Image was loaded Hence if a Sheet has an orientation swing of 30 when an Image is Imported that Image will only be displayed as a vertically aligned Image when the Sheet s orientation is 30 Changing the Sheet s orientation will cause the Image to be displayed as a rotated Image 7 Single Point Fix Point Trilateration by Least Squares This programme has been modified so that it now uses any combination of Forward and or Backward measured Distances to Trilaterate the defined Point The minimum number of distances is 3 The programme will search through the current Observation file or defined portion of the Observation file by setting the start and end Lines and extract all measured lines to a
468. software will first ask you to confirm that you want to set SURPAC for a Limited account and then proceed to modify the necessary files to enable this option 3 You can now close down SURPAC and then log off from the Full Administrator account When you next log on using the Limited account you will be able to run SURPAC General modifications made to SURPAC Software Observation File Loading Editing programme Field Book printing The left hand margin of the printed Field Book sheets for both output methods has been widened to approximately 15mm to allow left hand page binding Importing Beacon Descriptions when Merging data from another Co ordinate File When using the option to Merge data from another SURPAC Co ordinate File the source file it is now possible to set the Beacon Description lists Cadastral and Engineering for the current Co ordinate File to be the same as those of the source file Diagram CAD Creating Editing Plotting programme The two functions Data Line Insert and Data Line Delete were not working correctly This problem has now been rectified When entering information for defining a Connection or Indicatory Point the co ordinates for the first figural Point were not being picked up correctly by the programme if the Point definition was by means of entering the Diagram letter as opposed to Clicking the Point Name in the File Name listing This has now been rectified Page 118 of 312 General Plan CAD
469. sor is at this stage The Cursor should then be positioned near to the Point or Line terminal from which the new Line is to be drawn and the Mouse LHB clicked Next move the Cursor close to any position of the Line to which the perpendicular Line is to be drawn and again click the Mouse LHB Page 132 of 312 If the new Line meets the existing Line at a position outside the limits of the existing Line then the existing Line will automatically be extended to this new junction position Improvement to the UnDo function all CAD Programmes The UnDo function used by all the SURPAC CAD programmes has been improved Basically this function allows you to UnDo up to 9 of the last changes made to the current CAD sheet as long as these changes were made during the current session A change can be anything from for example a simple Text item edit or up to a complete import of data from another sheet or DXF file Whilst this function has been performing correctly it did cause a slow down in programme speed on large CAD sheets The larger the amount of data on the sheet the more noticeable was the slowdown The new method of retrieving and storing a CAD sheet s data for the purpose of the UnDo function has now been changed and this slowdown effect has been eliminated General modifications made to SURPAC Software Using N E Co ordinate Values Historically SURPAC have been able to define Co ordinate File
470. sor is moved When the Line terminal is at the desired position Click the Mouse LHB Modified Cadastral General Plan Construction Edit Programme The following Commands have been added to the programme s Line menu LB Line Bisect This will create a new Line perpendicular to and at the centre of the current Line Move the Cursor close to the Line through which a bisector is required Click the Mouse RHB and then Click the Line Bisect menu item The keyboard equivalent Command is LB LE Line Extend This will extend an existing Line from either terminal If the Line is Extended to a position that is closer than the current Snap Radius distance to another Line then the new terminal for the Extended Line will be Trimmed Snapped onto this Page 101 of 312 Line Move the Cursor close to the Line terminal of the Line that is to be Extended Click the Mouse RHB and then Click the Line Extend menu item The keyboard equivalent Command is LE Move the Cursor in the desired direction and you will see the Line extend or shrink as the Cursor is moved When the Line terminal is at the desired position Click the Mouse LHB LI Line Intersect This Command Provides for three different types of Line Intersection plus a Line Parallel checking facility Intersection and Parallel Options can be User defined This Command has the following Options LIA Arc Intersection Two non parallel User identifie
471. ss available to SURPAC would cause the application to terminate Page 64 of 312 If you are experiencing this type of problem then carry out the following steps which will only work using SURPAC Version 5 06 Release 03 or higher Copy the files Sec ure Sec usr and Surpac5 ini from the C WinNT folder to the folder in which SURPAC has been installed normally C Surpac98 Do not delete these files from their original C WinNT location as this will cause SURPAC to terminate Read access to the C WinNT folder must be maintained but the Write access is no longer required Use any word processor to load and display the file called SurpaclniFolder txt found in the folder in which SURPAC has been installed normally C Surpac98 Change the contents of this file from C WinNT or C Windows to read C Surpac98 or the name of the folder in which SURPAC is installed and safe the changed file The next time SURPAC is run it will read write to the security files stored in the defined folder e g C Surpac98 instead of the C WinNT folder thus preventing any clash with the network Administrator security settings 5 Diagram CAD Programme Botswana only The display order for information in the bottom right hand information box has been changed Note that the Lease Diagram ITO the Tribal Land Act option must be set a
472. t In order to display a large number of columns or elements simultaneoulsy in a Co ordinate file such as the example shown on the previous page you will need to make sure that the PC Screen Resolution is set to a sufficently high level For example if you have a 19 or larger monitor set the Screen Resolution to 1280 x 1024 pixels However If you are unable to set your monitor to a resolution of higher than 1024 x 768 which is the the minimum requirement for SURPAC SURPAC will display a horizontal scroll bar that will allow you to scroll between different display areas of the Co ordinate file NB If you are running Windows XP and you re set the Screen Resolution make sure that the Color Quality is set back to 16 bit and not 32 bit before accepting the new setting The two new Label Field items of a Co ordinate file are held in a file called CRL Therefore if you are Copyng a Co ordinate file WCR to another location remember to also Copy the file WCL General Modifications made to SURPAC Software Setting Out Data Line Running This function sometimes displayed the Points to be placed or checked in the incorrect order This resulted in some distances being shown as negative This has now been corrected Point Comparisons using different files Height values and displayed Directions The Height values for File 2 were not being displayed or compared correctly This has now been fixed up
473. t Gre Steps 256 4 i r e g erg fw 2 k EAT c Colouriz display of a large area Lidar surface scan Colourized display of a scan of mine underground shafts Page 273 of 312 PBeEvaX Sk Or Akar see Smt eZ SCQRMO G rwem woe MM EL SS EG D Tree e 4 Z Mount St Helens Oct 4 2004 la w 4 2 Mount St Helens Oct 4200 ia T Mount St Helens Oct 4 ga 4 E Q oO E 8 ii a g Camera Unk Propertes 8 Property State Value gt Name Mount St Helens Visible Nox z Show name in30 EI Colors RGB vie 262324 Box dimensions Y 359927 2513869 X 13162 Box center Y 179963 Z25934 Info Object ID 21 C Current Display 30Viewl gt Faces 13 486 303 Wireframe a Stippling Matrix Axis Angle gru U Colourized display of a Point Cloud of Mount St Helens after the eruption The last three samples are typical large Point Cloud files imported and viewed in CloudCompare This function can be used by following the SURPAC menu path Mining View a Point Cloud CloudCompare is able to load display and edit Point Cloud files of the following types Page 274 of 312 Supported file formats format J CloudCompare own ASCII point cloud file X Y Z etc a mirae cone i FARO formats DotProduct DPI 7 format Point Cloud Library format Stanford 3D geometry format NIK file format triangular mesh or cloud only STereoLithography fil
474. t Cloud s using CloudCompare The displayed options are self explanatory Each DTM can be displayed separately or both at the same time If the Contour Point Cloud exists see above then the DTM s and the Contours can be displayed simultaneously Also you should bear in mind that CloudCompare is able to display multiple screens simultaneously and that files can be dragged and dropped onto the display area to create multiple displays of Contours and DTMs from different viewpoints To start with take a typical example of Surface and Base DTMs created for the purpose of visualization and volume calculation In SURPAC the Surface DTM looks as follows Page 263 of 312 z SURPAC Ver 5 63 for Windows XP Vista 7 8 Digital Terrain Modelling Sch Gece Ss EE Mae eet eel ela be AB atl Me anaw Horizontal Scale 1 1000 Verticatexag 20 Elevation 20 Orientation 235 x File C Surpac Software Samples Broeder boundary wa 27 _ DTM File CSurpac Software Samples Polifin 1 56 12 26 03 2015 L Displaying the Surface DTM in SURPAC Software When creating the Point Cloud files in SURPAC it is important to remember that the Vertical Exaggeration Colour and Luminance as used for the SURPAC display will be transferred to the CloudCompare display Further if Contours are also to be displayed simultaneously with t
475. t had been previously set on a Sheet suddenly being removed This typically occurred when a Point had been Named on one or more Sheets that were subsequently deleted SURPAC now includes a small routine for the GP and WP Sheets that when Naming a Point checks to make sure that if a Point has been previously Named on a Sheet other than the current Sheet that that Sheet still exists If the Point in question had been previously Named on a Sheet that was subsequently deleted then that Name reference is removed General Plan CAD Previously the Ctrl Y Command was not working correctly This has now been fixed Diagram CAD The maximum number of Line and Text items has again been increased to help accommodate large and complex AO and A1 size Diagrams Previously when using the automatic Area Data amp Consistency generation selected either from the Figure menu or by using the Ctrl D Command the routine failed if key words such as Servitude Excluded etc where written in the top margin of the Diagram This has now been corrected Page 187 of 312 SURPAC Version 5 36 Release 01 Programme Modifications Modification to all DXF and DWG Import Routines Before this Upgrade SURPAC was only able to import DXF and or DWG files up to the version AutoCAD 2000 This has now been changed and SURPAC is now able to import Line Arc Text Point and Hatch information from all versions of AutoCAD compatible DXF and
476. t is possible to generate a graphic image to be stored in a file or copied to the Windows Clipboard which may be up to twice the width and height of an AO sheet This can be carried out for example on a PC having 256Mb on board RAM plus a graphic card with 64Mb RAM Suggested setting for the Screen Display parameters of Windows XP for SURPAC 1 Do a Right Button Click when the cursor is anywhere on the Desktop display On the displayed menu Click the Properties item This will bring up the Windows Display Properties form 2 On this form click the Settings Tag 3 Set the Color quality option to Medium 16 bit 4 If you have a screen that is 15 or more in diagonal measurement set the Screen resolution to 1024 by 768 pixels 5 Click the Appearance Tag 6 Leave the Windows and buttons as Windows XP style the Color Scheme as Default blue and the Font size as Normal 7 Click the Advanced Button 8 From the Item list select Active Title Bar and set its size to 20 9 From the Item list select Menu and set its size to 18 Set its Color 1 to the standard form colour beige Set its Font to Arial Font Size to 10 Font Color as Black and set the Bold option to on i e the Bold option should be highlighted 10 From the Item list select Message Box and set i
477. t menu heading and then select the item Import from a General Plan Sheet e When prompted select the appropriate GP Sheet from which data are to be imported e On the subsequent form select Both Lines and Text All Pens and Use Line Colour option e The GP Pen 1 data will be allocated to Layer 1 Pen 2 data to Layer 2 etc e Use the Layer to Layer Data exchange function under the Layers menu heading to move all Layer 1 Text items to Layer 3 e Finally restrict Layer visibility to Layers 1 and 2 The last two actions are to ensure that the data Text items such as distances and directions do not interfere with the polygon boundary location function required for both Method 4 and Method 5 Page 288 of 312 Programme Operation Load the Diagram CAD programme and open a new file using the required Stand Number In this example Stand Number 24764 is used Select Diagram Creation method Set Margin Widths mm Create Diagram Information using Co ordinate File Points Sheet Left Margin mm Create Diagram Information using the General CAD Options Sheet Right Margin mm Create Diagram Information using the current Working Plan Generate Diagram from an AutoCAD DWG File see ee Aea Generate Diagram from an AutoCAD DXF File C Sheet Bottom Margin mm Select Sheet Size ISO Select Standard Text Size mm AQC A1 A2 Portrait Select the Standard Text Size as 2 5mm A3C A4 Landscape C Select the
478. t the PDF printer is set for SURPAC printing e Right click on the SURPAC Current File Printed Pages form and then from the displayed pop up menu select the menu item Re Print All Pages e Before printing takes place a small form will prompt you to set the Number of Lines per Page have tested a few of the PDF writers available and the number of lines per A4 page seems to vary As an example using the Monospace 821 font and a font size of 10 the deskPDF uses 70 lines per page e The PDF printer will prompt for the required file Name and then create the PDF document New Image Manipulation Routines All CAD Programmes The loading manipulating and printing of Images in the SURPAC CAD programmes have been extended and improved as follows 6 Much larger Images can now be imported For example running Windows Vista on a PC having a 2GB RAM the General CAD programme is able to load and use TIF or JPG images of up to 400Mb This facilitates importing 1 10 000 orthophoto sheets for example 7 The positioning and scaling of non geo referenced Images has been made a lot easier Once the file has been identified positioning and scaling the image is done by clicking on the Top Left and then Bottom Right positions required for the Image Geo referenced Images TIF or JPG format use the associated TWF text file to position and scale the Image 8 Once positioned the Image may then be Moved Re sized Re scaled Shifte
479. t to Trig Names in the Co ordinate File Editing programme then when the Trig Beacons are imported their Descriptive Names will be included Page 167 of 312 For existing WGS 84 System Co ordinate files that already contain Trig Beacons the Trig Beacons Descriptive Names may be added by clicking on the Co ordinate File Editing System heading and setting either Point Label Field 1 or Point Label Field 2 to Trig Names New Total Stations Supported by SURPAC Two new instruments have been added to list of Total Stations supported by SURPAC for the direct downloading of both Observations and Co ordinates These are The Topcon GPT 3100 Series Apart from adding this instrument to the list of supported Total Stations modifications have also been made to SURPAC to allow support for Mining underground observations taken using the VI Instruments TopComm format for the fixing of Pegs using either the Double Set Up or Double Button methods The Pentax W 825NX Series At this stage the uploading i e SURPAC to Instrument of co ordinate data is not supported General SURPAC Modifications SURPAC On Line License Security checking The validation of SURPAC Licenses is now carried out by verifying the User License against a data base located on the Internet The advantage of this method is that any de registered License can be quickly re instated by simply updating the internet data base When your computer is of
480. ta with Master file Data Z j Grid Master File C AlbertMasterllGrdPoints SOSOSCS Layer Description for the Search 001 Field Work 25 07 2014 X Compute x Enter the required Search Distance from each Field File Point m 0 100m 5 Offset Distance for Field File Point 2507EM1 v m 0 000m Field File Grid Line Grid Inter Offset DY DX DZ DS JA Point Position Point m m m m m B1LN1 B1 0 000 0 0056 0 0000 0 0056 B1LN2 B1 0 000 0 0011 0 0000 0 0011 B2LN1 B2 0 000 0 0047 0 0000 0 0047 B2LN1 B13 0 000 0 0045 0 0000 0 0045 B2LN2 B2 0 000 0 0053 0 0000 0 0053 B2LN2 B13 0 000 0 0039 0 0000 0 0039 B4LN1 B4 0 000 0 0037 0 0000 0 0037 B4LN2 B4 0 000 0 0039 0 0000 0 0039 B6LN1 B6 0 000 0 0018 0 0000 0 0018 B6LN2 B6BI 0 000 0 0032 0 0689 2 2627 0 0689 B6LN2 B6 0 000 0 0026 0 0000 0 0026 B6LN2 B10 0 000 0 0004 0 0691 0 0691 B10LN1 BA 0 000 0 0000 0 0027 0 0027 B10LN2 BA 0 000 0 0000 0 0015 0 0015 B11LN3 B11 0 000 0 0031 0 0000 0 0031 B11LN4 B11 0 000 0 0051 0 0000 0 0051 B13LN3 B2 0 000 0 0106 0 0001 0 0106 B13LN3 B13 0 000 0 0014 0 0000 0 0014 B13LN4 B2 0 000 0 0113 0 0001 0 0113 B13LN4 B13 0 000 0 0021 0 0000 0 0021 B15LN3 B15 0 000 0 0025 0 0000 0 0025 Page 258 of 312 3 The Field file must be loaded as the current Co ordinate file then from the Conversions menu heading select the menu item Grid Line comparisons Field Data with Master Data 1 Click on the Brow
481. tand polygon These Lines will be displayed in purple If the incorrect Lines are selected then cancel the routine The form for selecting Image Files Headings Link Files etc will be displayed If the incorrect Lines figure stand polygon have been selected then cancel the routine and retry Refer to the above explanations on how to select information for the 7160 Image Polygon KML and how to l l create a A osna ripiie Codecken ur onl al eandis Combined_Image_Polygon KML Polygon Info File 7160 Data File tt Displaying an Image Polygon KML on Google Earth Once an Image Polygon has been created SURPAC will transfer the KML file Google Earth assuming that Google Earth has been installed You should see the figure stand polygon shown on Google Earth as a half transparent a cyan polygon To display the Polygon s Name Number headings Link Files and Image Files Click anywhere inside this displayed polygon NB The hyperlink Link File called Data_File txt where is the given Name Number for the Image Polygon will automatically be included in the list of Link Files This Link File consists of System and Geographical co ordinates for all the polygon points plus the polygon area 1920 Hilger amp Watts Vernier Theodolite To display the contents of a hyperlink Link Files right Click on the hyperlink Google Earth will then switch to its display page and display the contents of the file If
482. tation has been Deleted it can only be replaced by Adding it from the appropriate Co ordinate File as described above Click the Print List Button to send all those located and selected Stations to the SURPAC printing form From this form this list may then be sent to the current Printer to a User defined ASCII file to an Excel file or to the Windows Clipboard NB Due to the width of the information data lines for the Stations it is best to send the display to an Excel where the full display information data is included The display of Stations can be switched to show the entire data set of Stations in the My Stations file by Clicking the View All Button This Button s caption will then be changed to View Nearest and by again Clicking this Button you will be returned to the previously displayed list of the nearest Stations When in the View All mode you cannot sort by Distance or Direction and you cannot change search items such as Range Number and Search Centre When the Store and Exit Button is clicked all located Stations displayed in the list and having the green tick symbol next to them will be added to the current Co ordinate File As long as Google Earth is installed on the computer the selected list of Stations may be sent to Google Earth via a generated KML file to provide a spatial view of the set of Stations This function is only applicable if the current Co ordinate File uses a System based on th
483. ted If the observed Point does exist then the Code 3 data used to fix the Set Up Point will be allocated If the observed Point does not exist a Code 5 Polar or Tacheometric fixing data will be allocated Page 55 of 312 When using a Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Total Station the Comms Settings should be BAUD 9600 BPS May be any value 19200 to 4800 PARITY NONE DATA BITS 78 STOP BITS 21 And the Data Transfer method must be set to NIKON and RAW Accessing this Data Transfer facility in SURPAC e In the Main Menu Bar Click the Heading Topographical Then from the displayed Menu click the Item General Observation File Load Edit e Load the required General Observation File or Open a new File e At the Top Left corner of the displayed Programme form click the LOAD Data Button The displayed downloading form allows for the setting of the logger s data transfer parameters when the Set Parameters Button is clicked or selected Downloading Observations from the Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800_ to SURPAC e Make sure that the instrument is correctly connected to the PC via an RS232C cable and plugged into the correct port e In SURPAC select the required Nikon NPL 300 350 500 800 Total Station from the list of available Loggers Total Stations e Use the Set Parameters Button to set or check the transfer parameters These should be Connection Port COM2 or the appropriate Port number Baud Rate BPS 9600 BPS May
484. ted Point to the values of the Primary Point or to the Mean of all Points in the Point Group e You can have the programme work in Automatic mode or Manual mode Using the Auto Locate or Automatic Mode Once the Start Searching the File Button is clicked the Automatic mode Auto Locate Process and Display all Existing Point Groups will cause the programme to compute all Point Groups determine the Selected Point for each Point Group based on the current Option settings and Search Radius Save the Selected Points if requested Delete other Point Group Points if requested and finally to display the results of the Search At this stage a Print out of these results can be done if required While this method is obviously a lot faster than using the Manual method it does not allow for User intervention other than the setting up of the required Options before the File Searching function is started Using the Display and wait or Manual Mode In the Manual mode Display one Group at a time and then wait for User Activity clicking the Start Searching the File Button will cause the programme to Locate and display all Points on the first Point Group and then wait The values displayed for the Selected Point will depend on the Option chosen for the initial default values either the Primary Point s values or the Point Group mean values These values of the Selected Point may be changed by either clicking a Line
485. tem or the WG WGS 84 Ellipsoid System also referred to as the Cape Datum and the Hartebeesthoek94 Datum systems respectively It is not necessary of the User to define any source file for the location of the Trig Beacons or TSMs SURPAC has two built in Source Files called LoLatLonList sur and WGLatLonList sur which must exist in the folder in which SURPAC Software is installed usually the folder C Surpac98 NB These are the same two files as used by the SURPAC Lo to from WG transformation programme Each of the above Source Files contains the double precision geographical positions Latitude and Longitude of about 38 000 Points throughout the Republic of South Africa in the Lo Clarke 1880 Modified Ellipsoid and WG WGS 84 Ellipsoid respectively Should you not have these Source Files already loaded on your PC or Laptop you may download them from the Upgrade section of the SURPAC Internet site This programme will automatically search and extract the Lo or WG Point information from the appropriate Source File Important notes The above mentioned SURPAC Source Files are random binary files and as such the data they contain are not printable or accessible to Users Further the data contained in these files have had variable false origin shifts applied to them making the data unusable even to someone who is able to hack their way into the f
486. than as a DXF file or HPGL file When selecting this menu item you will have up to 5 options for selecting the image to be created 1 Windows XP only This allows for the creation of a Bitmap file of the entire sheet up to AO in size plotted at the User defined Plot Scale The resulting Bitmap image will therefore be the same size as the User defined Sheet size Windows XP only This allows for the creation of a Bitmap file of the entire sheet up to AO in size plotted at twice the User defined Plot Scale i e if the defined Plot Scale is 1 1000 then a bitmap image will be created at a scale of 1 500 The resulting Bitmap image will therefore be twice as wide and twice as high as the User defined Sheet size For non Windows XP Operating systems the User may select the Extended Screen View option This will generate a Bitmap image at the current screen scale covering the panning limits currently available The User may select the Current Screen View option This will generate a Bitmap image of the Sheet at the current screen scale covering the currently visible screen area The User may select the Screen View by using the Mouse LHB and Mouse RHB to define the required area This will generate a Bitmap image of the Sheet at the current screen scale covering this screen area Users also have the option of storing the generated Bitmap image to a permanent disk File or to the Windows Clipboard Notes The PC
487. the on screen keyboard application is C Windows System32 OSK exe In my opinion the T100 would make a very useful field computer as it can be slipped into a jacket pocket and can be used for carrying out on the spot calculations It can also be used in the office attached to an HDMI compatible monitor to carry out normal SURPAC computation and CAD work It is not as fast as an Intel i5 or i7 based computer but much more flexible This is by no means a promotion for this particular computer there are other similar ones on the market just wanted SURPAC Users to be aware that these types of computer running Windows 8 1 are currently available The price for the T100 is in the region of R5 000 00 New Grid Line comparisons Field Data with Master Data General Information NB This new programme is listed under the Conversions main menu heading You need to have the Conversions Module loaded in your License in order to use this programme The Construction Grid Lines referred to here are the theoretical Grid Lines normally used to control earthworks and or construction works for the erection of large buildings such as factory complexes or shopping mall complexes These theoretical Construction Grid Lines need to be transferred from the design plans to the ground normally under the auspices of a Surveyor This can entail establishing on site beacons at the Grid Line intersection points beacons near to Grid Line terminals be
488. the Nearest Trig Beacons and or TSMs This option will now compare and display the Y X Z values of any imported Trig or TSM point with the values of an existing point that has the same name The User will then be able to select either of the two sets of values or select the means of the two sets Printing Calculation Pages to VPG text files When printing calculation pages to a VPG file the programmes was omitting the page headings This has now been rectified Observation Files After importing or downloading an Observation File two blank lines were inserted at the end of the file This has now been fixed up General CAD and General Plan CAD programmes A new facility has been added which allows for the calculation of Points Off Line between two defined terminals or along a line of best fit This programme has always been available under the General main menu heading but now the calculation can be carried out whilst working in the either of these two CAD programmes The required line terminals are defined graphically To call this function click on the Point menu heading and then select the menu item Point off Line Calculations Move the cursor onto the first required line terminal and click the mouse LHB Then move the cursor onto the second required line terminal and again click the mouse LHB The Off Line form will then be displayed and will show the two terminals selected Proceed by selecting the required tolera
489. the file does not display and the loading bar F stays on the form then just click the refresh button at the top of the screen To display an Image in full size right Click on the Image Google Earth will then switch to its display page and display the full size Image Page 242 of 312 Running multiple Instances of SURPAC Software on one computer This is a reminder that you are able to run multiple SURPAC sessions or instances on the same computer This is especially applicable to modern Laptops equipped with flat screen LED monitors Previously running two monitors from one computer usually meant having two graphic cards installed and even then this type of set up often proved problematical The image on the next page shows an example of a dual monitor set up with both monitors running from the same Laptop The equipment used is a Hewlett Packard Pavilion dv7 Laptop running Microsoft Windows 7 The laptop is equipped with the normal 12 pin monitor cable output port plus an HDMI cable output port The monitors are both Samsung 24 screens having both a 12 pin monitor cable input port and an HDMI input port Monitor 1 is attached via the 12 pin cable and Monitor 2 is attached via the HDMI cable e gt Control Panel All Control Panel items Display Screen Resolution File Edit View Tools Help Change the appearance of your displays Detect Display 2 24B370 Resolution 1
490. the list as an Excel CSV file the information can quickly be imported into a GPS or Total Station device Page 144 of 312 When running this programme the last two options shown at the bottom of the form allow for either a normal output of the results of the Point Group search or an output of all Points not forming a part of any Point Group Thanks to Michael van Niekerk of Welkom for the original suggestion Converting Merging Data from a Tacheometric File into a Co ordinate File This function now offers the option of merging data of specific Description s When calling this function a listing of all Descriptions used in the defined Tacheometric file will be shown including a blank description You may then select all Descriptions if you want to merge the entire file or just select highlight the required Description s On Merging only those Points having one of the selected Description s will be merged into the Co ordinate file Thanks to Michael van Niekerk of Welkom for the original suggestion Co ordinate File Editing Point Description Problem When editing Point data in this programme a problem occurred in the following situation If a Point Description existed for a Point but the Descriptions column was not currently displayed then if any item on that Point s data line was edited the Point Description would be deleted This has now been rectified All CAD Programmes Plotting of Arcs Arcs on a drawing w
491. the resolution dots per inch and deskPDF will then create and save the PDF file The PDF file can then be viewed via Adobe Reader or any other PDF reader and also e mailed as an attachment to a client or any other interested person deskPDF is also able to carry out conversations of Microsoft Word Excel Access files etc into PDF format files Creating a PDF file for SURPAC Printed Pages SURPAC has always had the facility of printing calculation pages to either a physical printer or to a virtual printer Virtual printer pages can be loaded and printed through any text printing software such as WordPad etc Page 165 of 312 Regardless of which printing method is used SURPAC also keeps a back up record of all printed pages These are the pages that can be viewed in the Current File Printed Pages form shown at the top right of the SURPAC screen Unless paper copies of calculation pages are specifically required physical printing is not really necessary Once the survey has been completed all printed calculation pages to a physical printer the virtual printer or both can be combined into a single multi page PDF document To create a PDF file of all printed pages do the following e Via the Windows Control Panel or any other route set the PDF printer as the Default printer e Click on the SURPAC menu heading File and then select the menu item Printer Set Up for calculations to verify tha
492. them on the current Co ordinate File Before Digitization takes place the Sheet Image should first be correctly Positioned and Sized according the current Co ordinate System being used for the Sheet To do this use the Transform a Sheet Image IT and or the Shift a Sheet Image IS Commands Place the Cursor anywhere within the area of the Sheet Image and then give the Il Command or select the option from the Image menu The Programme will display a Form displaying various Digitizing Options for the new Points As the digitization process will determine the Y X or E N co ordinates the Point Heights if required must be either defined by the User very slow or if a DTM exists interpolated from the defined DTM much faster For Points lying on Contours or positions of constant Height that Height may be given and used for all subsequent Point digitization There is also an Option to display the Points on Screen as they are added to the Co ordinate File via the Digitization Finally if a sequence of Points is required enter a Point Starting Name making sure that this Name ends with a numeric Value The Programme will then increment the Point Names as new Points are digitized For example if a Starting Name of MY1 is given then the first Point will be named MY1 and the subsequent Points will be named MY2 MY3 Once the required Options have been set and the OK Button clicked any position on the Sh
493. then Click the mouse MB Page 135 of 312 The Diagram CAD programme Servitude Data When displaying User defined Servitude data the programme was leaving out the co ordinates of the last Point in then Servitude This has now been corrected All SURPAC CAD programmes The use of the Up Down Left and Right keyboard arrow keys has been re instated Pressing any of these keys move the cursor in the appropriate direction The amount of movement made per key stroke in mms is set by using the Set Arrow Key Movements menu item found under the Edit menu heading Using the Joins Polars and the Road Apex programmes Switching between this group of programmes could sometimes cause SURPAC to lock up requiring an Alt Ctrl Del action to close down the application This has now been rectified Merging Co ordinate File data from another Co ordinate File This routine was sometimes leaving out 2 or 3 Points from the defined Source file This has now been corrected The Co ordinate File Observation File and Tacheometric Editing programmes After Editing a data Line in these programmes instead of defaulting to the next Line the new data Line selected would be offset from the previous position by a few lines This has now been rectified The Co ordinate File Listing programme When sending a SURPAC Co ordinate File listing to a Microsoft Excel file and when the Co ordinate File was set up as being in the Cadastral Mode the res
494. this programme The old HPGL output has been removed Page 296 of 312 Some handy Tips for SURPAC Cadastral Users Tip 1 Determining a Sheet Layout for General Plans Sometimes a Sheet Layout for the General Plan Sheets of a large township or development can be quite complex This task can be made a lot easier by uses available functions in the General CAD programme as follows Step 1 Carry out the Line drawing for the entire Township or Development area in a General CAD Sheet at any appropriate scale These Lines can be imported into one or more General Plan Sheets once their positions and swings have been determined Step 2 Display the General CAD Sheet at a scale which shows coverage of the entire area Step 3 Before proceeding the Scale for the General Plan Sheets needs to be known This is normally determined by the sizes of the Stands in the Township bearing in mind that the Sides and Directions of each Stand need to be written on the General Plan Sheets within the Stand limits Step 4 Using the LG Line Generate Command create a rectangle in any vacant area of the General CAD Sheet such that the size of the rectangle represents an AO sheet size at the Plotting Scale of the General Plan Sheets For example if the General Plan sheets are going to be plotted at a scale of 1 250 the rectangle will need to have Length 297 25m and Height 210 0m assuming that the sheets are in
495. ti Colour option the DTM display or Print out will use the three basic colours Red Green and Blue to show DTM height differentiation instead of the single colour used with the other solid model colour options 3 The General CAD Plotting and the General Plan CAD Programmes Active Pen Both of these applications now provide the Active Pen option This option works as a Layering function allowing the User to switch on or off the display of information allocated to a given Pen The programmes have available 8 Pen options Pen1 to Pen8 for standard Line Arc Circle and Text item display By default these Pens are represented as the colours Black Red Blue Green Cyan Brown Purple and Grey respectively Apart from one of these colours an individual line may have a Line Thickness and or a Line Style attributed to it The new Set Active Pen function found under the Draw menu for the General CAD Plotting programme and under the Line menu for the General Plan programme allows the User to select which of the 8 standard Pens or Layers are to be visible for both screen displays and Plotter outputs Theses values may be redefined at any future time One useful application of this function in the General CAD Plotting programme is to suppress the display of Pen8 once its use as a BackGround Layer has been completed See below Using Pen 8 Grey as a BackGround Layer General CAD Plotting Programme only All d
496. tions Some new features have been added to the General CAD Programme viz Line Arc Junction This Command has three variations namely Trim Line Only Trim Arc Only and Trim Line and Arc They are used to identify and or trim either the Line or the Arc for an existing Line Arc intersection The Commands provides for three different Line Arc Junction Intersection calculations The intersecting Line or Arc or both may be trimmed to the junction point These Commands may be activated from the Menu system by Clicking the Draw main menu heading selecting the Line Arc Junctions item and then selecting the required sub menu item Alternatively the Commands may be activated by using a three Key keyboard Command with the following Options Trim Intersecting Line LJL After giving this Command Click close to the intersecting Line in the vicinity of the Arc Then Click close to the intersecting Arc The programme will trim the identified Line at the Line Arc junction intersection position Trim Intersecting Arc LJA After giving this Command Click close to the intersecting Line in the vicinity of the Arc Then Click close to the intersecting Arc The Arc point selected will indicate which side of the Arc is to be trimmed The programme will trim the identified portion of the Arc at the Line Arc junction intersection position Trim both Intersecting Line and Arc LJB After giving this Command Click close t
497. tions contour visualization and image file outputs CloudCompare can handle Point Clouds in excess of 50 million points However the processing of data is memory intensive and for smooth operation of the software the following minimum requirements are advised 1 Installed Memory RAM of 8Gb 2 A fast middle class 3D Graphics Card such as an AMD Radeon 6770M or GeForce GT555M or similar Creating CloudCompare files in SURPAC To create CloudCompare Point Cloud files in SURPAC the Topographical Module must be installed and be active The Contour Creation Plotting CAD programme found under the Topographical main menu heading allows for the creation and export of a pseudo DXF Contour file which can be read and displayed by CloudCompare The Digital Terrain Modelling programme also found under the Topographical main menu heading allows for the creation and export of Point Cloud ASCII asc format files for the Surface Figural DTM and the Base DTM When sending these Point Cloud files they may be displayed singularly both together or both together with the corresponding Contour file Creating a Contour file for display in CloudCompare Once the creation of the Contours in the SURPAC Contour Creation Plotting CAD programme has been completed using the normal techniques these can be exported to CloudCompare in a pseudo D F file format To do this select the menu item File Create the Contour Point Cloud File Ben ee ee amp
498. tisfy the criteria selected on the form Leaving all options as default i e no changes will cause the programme to apply the entered Scale Factor to all Text items This applies to all CAD programmes 5 The bug found in the AutoPlan GP Creation function in the General Plan CAD programme has been fixed Page 312 of 312
499. titude Longitude Y xX Height Antenna Direction Distance OK 1 EUL 30 40 47 3146 26 42 57 6705 27211 59 3395510 27 1315 20 ASH701941 B 699097 58 mi 3 2 BWES Beaufort Wes 32 20 50 5770 22 34 24 8183 416861 24 3588999 82 908 16 LEIAT504 29 25 09 1014931 97 3 BENI Benoni 26 11 43 1788 28 20 28 7921 134075 68 2899167 67 1643 63 ASH701941 B 344 53 58 201170 87 4 BETH Bethlehem 28 14 59 1770 28 20 02 9850 130933 46 3126843 40 1688 70 LEIAT504 353 20 23 424766 79 5 BISO Bisho 32 51 49 3426 27 25 44 7048 40161 04 3637714 23 563 67 TRM55971 00 2 32 52 933693 96 6 BFTA Bioemfontein 29 06 40 7977 26 12 17 2844 77401 44 3221870 40 1409 77 ASH701941 B 17 06 15 540848 02 7 BFIN Bioemfontein 29 06 13 2599 26 17 52 1272 68352 84 3220964 96 1349 81 ASH701941 B 16 12 38 537386 72 8 BRIT Brits 25 38 08 7230 27 46 35 7907 77991 98 2836710 46 1142 22 TRM55971 00 1 35 52 131818 42 9 BRNK Bronkhorstsp 25 48 12 0773 28 43 57 8118 173780 89 2856192 98 1389 17 ASH701941 B 328 39 29 177091 31 10 CALV Calvinia 31 28 55 4679 19 45 43 0347 688591 81 3507212 86 976 89 LEIAT504 43 50 02 1112176 23 11 CPNT Cape Point 34 21 11 8415 18 29 22 9312 783980 11 3835850 50 227 37 TRM55971 00 37 25 55 1424182 93 12 CTWN Cape Town 33 57 05 1786 18 28 06 7730 789703 96 3791257 47 52 91 TRM59800 00 38 44 04 1392611 52 1
500. to display the Text Items correctly The Point Circles Layer s The Point Circles and Names of User Named Points are put on the Layer called Point_Circles This allows for the display of the Point Circles and the Point Names to be switched on or off in AutoCAD For the Working Plan CAD programme there are three Layers used for Point Circles These are P01 Point Circles P02 Point Circles and P04 Point Circles These three Layers cater for the three different Pens that are used for Point Circling in the Working Plan The Optional Inclusion of the Co ordinated Points Layer When creating a DXF or DWG file you can now specify whether or not the Co ordinate Point values of the User Named Points are to be included as POINT information in the AutoCAD Layer called Named_Co ord_Points General modifications made to SURPAC Software Using complex Path names for Importing or Exporting DWG files All CAD Programmes When using a Path name for the Import or Export of a DWG file that was too complex the programme would respond with an Error 53 message indicating that the file location could not be found This problem has now been corrected Setting the Scale Factor when Importing DXF and DWG files All CAD Programmes When Importing either a DXF or a DWG file into SURPAC the User can specify a Scale Factor that is to be applied to the incoming data This is done by specifying a value for the A
501. truction 4 4 In the previous versions the area totals were not always adding up to 100 0000 on a Participation Quota Sheet On some Sheets a manual addition actually showed totals of for example 100 0002 or 99 9999 This has now been rectified Page 59 of 312 5 Tacheometric Files modifications A new option has been added to prevent the duplication of data in a Tacheometric file It can happen that when two or more files are merged for example the resulting file can contain a duplicate set of information In other words assume a group of Points is merged into a file and given numbers say 25 48 Subsequently another file is merged with their number being from 389 to 524 If the second file merged happens to already contain the previously mentioned Points 25 48 but with different numbers this would result in two sets of Points having different numbers but containing the identical Y X Z data A file like this causes serious problems when trying to use the file for the generation of surface triangles for contouring and or a DTM You can now use the Options button in the Tacheometric Editing programme to Locate and Delete Duplicate Points The programme allows you to set a search limit default 0 05m and then Delete any duplicate Points found in the file 6 General CAD Drawing Programme modifications 6 1 The function for setting up links between Mark Points and Point Descriptions has been improved For example i
502. ts Font to Arial Font Size to 10 Font Color as Black and the Bold option to on i e the Bold option should be highlighted The above settings provide colour and menu settings that provide easy and comfortable displays when running the various SURPAC applications Page 66 of 312 2 Digital Terrain Modelling Programme extensions Improved display functions are now available for 1 Cut and Fill Volumes from a given horizontal plane 2 Location of the horizontal Cut and Fill Volume balance plane and 3 Cut and Fill Volumes between two separate Surface DTMs These displays now show a 2D colour display of the resultant Cut and Fill Volumes This dispersal plan shows areas of Cut and Fill using a colour gradient from bright Red for areas of large Cut through Red Orange Green to bright Green for areas of large Fill Moving the cursor around the display provides the ground Y X Z or E N H co ordinates for the cursor position plus the position s Cut or Fill Volume per grid square The dimensions of the grid square are the same as the Grid Interval chosen by the User when the DTM was created The colour dispersal displays may be printed to a Plotter Printer device at any suitable scale When using the Solid Model Display option of a Surface or Base DTM a new colour option has been added These is referred to as the Multi Colour option Using this Mul
503. ues to System Co ordinates Use Shapefile Values for CAD Sheet Centering SE Change the Sign of the Y X co ordinates Min Y Value 7040295 MinX Value 290491466 Max Y Value 7110235 Max X Value 290535410 E C Importing Lines and Text from a SURPAC Shapefile Importing Lines and Text from a SURPAC format Shapefile into a SURPAC CAD Sheet If the Shapefile s prj file the data projection format is missing or it is incorrectly created the above form will show the Ellipsoid System and Central Meridian as being undefined In this case you might need to ascertain more information regarding these values from the company or person who issued the Shapefile When importing Lines and Text from a SURPAC created Shapefile or a Shapefile created by an application using the same data protocols as SURPAC see Pages 4 and 5 all Line and Text attributes will be read from the associated dbf file and applied to the incoming data v 3328667 X _ 2861168 16 Z Page 14 of 19 Example of a Help information display for the General CAD programme The CAD programmes have all the Help files under the Help menu heading Other programmes have a Help button normally near the top left of the form 11 An option has been added that allows Co ordinate files to be printed with a plus sign in front of positive Y and or X values This option is shown at the bottom of the Option fo
504. uired maximum number or a required maximum search radius e The display of located Bench Marks may be in order of Distance Direction or Point Name or Height Difference If the Google Earth DTM height values are displayed e Any of the located Bench Marks in the displayed list may be tagged as not required to prevent them from being added to the Co ordinate file or displayed on Google Earth Located Bench Marks in the displayed list will have their Degree Square values shown An output of the displayed list of located Bench Marks may be made to the Printer an ASCII file an Excel file or the Clipboard e The located Bench Marks in the displayed list marked as required i e the selected Bench Marks may be added to the current Co ordinate File e The list of Bench Marks may also be displayed on Google Earth The Google Earth DTM may also be used to import and display the Google Earth heights of the located Bench Marks In this case the differences between the actual Bench Mark heights and their Google Earth DTM values will be displayed These height differences may be Page 245 of 312 used to adjust raise or lower a set of imported grid heights from the Google Earth DTM for contouring purposes The Bench Mark Y X co ordinates are those supplied by the NGI and unfortunately their positions are only approximate having an accuracy in the order of only 15 metres We have requested from the NGI images of the locality sketc
505. ultant Excel File had the last 7 8 Points excluded from its listing This has now been corrected The Co ordinate File Editing programme When in the Point Add mode and entering the Name of a Point that already exists the programme now displays a warning before attempting to overwrite the existing Point Setting the Co ordinate File System For projections having multiple belts such as the Lo WG and UTM projections a drop down list of the available belts or systems is provided Users can select the required system by Clicking the appropriate value in the list Locate and Mean Point Groups in a File programme This programme has additional options when selecting the Mean Values for a Point Group These options are Mean the Y X and Z values or N E and H values Mean the Y X values or N E values only or Mean only the non zero Z or H values Using these options various position and or height means may now be selected for the Mean Values of a located Point Group Page 136 of 312 Extended Control File Data Base for WG values The SURPAC Control Files used for automatic transformations between Lo and WG have been extended by the addition of the WG values of all TSM s in the Centurion Midrand area Unfortunately we do not have the Lo values for this area as yet so the TSM s cannot be used for any system transformations However these TSM values can be used in the Loc
506. urrent Co ordinate File This is necessary in order for the transformation parameters to be correctly applied to the data to be transformed 2 Underground Peg Calculations Displaying Peg Historical Information For certain computation routines SURPAC will record a short history of the multiple determinations of a Point s co ordinates and fixing data These data may be displayed or edited using the Edit Multi Polar Peg File programme found under the General main menu These routines supported are Polars Line Running Splay Points Apex Points Intersections Traversing and now the Underground Peg Calculations Up to 4 determinations of a Point s co ordinates may be recorded along with the Name of the Fixing Point the Distance and Direction used the Field Book Page the Calculation Page and the Date Over and above the calculated co ordinate values for each determination the programme will display the currently adopted co ordinate values for the Point The Multi Polar Peg File for a Co ordinate File is given the name wdp where represents the name of the current Co ordinate File There is also a smaller file having the extension wdx which contains extended information Apart from showing a history of multiple determinations of a Point the Multi Polar Peg File is used to ensure that the mean values of a Point are the correctly weighted averages determined by using all of the available determinations of a P
507. urrently not available for use by any of the SURPAC Programmes A Non Active Observation will have a Red Cross displayed in its Obs Active column and the Observation information will be displayed in Red Italic text An Observations Active status can be changed using a single mouse click For all new Observation Files and for all Observation Files existing before the installation of SURPAC Version 5 05 all Observations will be shown as being Active This is indicated by a Green Tick in the Obs Active column To change an Observation s Active status click the Mouse LHB in the column marked Obs Active in the appropriate display Line If the Observation clicked is a Set Up Point all Observations made TO and FROM that Point will have its Active status changed Under the Options button will be found an Option which queries whether all Observations made to that same Point if others exist should also have their Active status changed If not required this Option can be disabled However in large Networks where multiple arcs are observed it is advisable to leave this Option enabled 5 Least Squares Single Point Fix Programmes new Active Non Active function The Least Squares Single Point Fix Programmes now include an Active column which is applicable to all data lines displayed for a Single Point Fix calculation Page 20 of 312 A Data Line that is defined as Active is available will be used in the
508. using the Peg ASCII Files Mining The use and flexibility of the SURPAC Peg ASCII Files has again been extended by the addition of a Peg Index programme which uses data taken from these Peg ASCII Files as opposed to the Co ordinate File Users of the three Mining Peg Fixing programmes will know that when fixing or re fixing an underground Peg an option for creating a Peg ASCII File containing both the entered and calculated information for the fix is offered These Peg ASCII Files may then be used at any future time to recall the entered information into the appropriate Peg Fixing programme By default the name given to a Peg ASCII File consists of the Peg Name followed by the date of calculation plus the file extension For example the file called A3925 07 31 02 PG2 would contain the ASCII data for the Peg Fix of Peg A3925 calculated on 31 07 02 using the Double Button programme Programme Description This new programme provides a listing of the Peg Index information derived from information held in the SURPAC ASCII Peg Files that exist in the current Data Folder i e the Folder containing the currently loaded Co ordinate File Data relative to both the Peg fixed in the SURPAC Peg ASCII File and the Back Peg used for the Fix are displayed in this Peg Index In the case of multiple Fixes of the same Peg all Fixes will be shown in the Peg Index This differs from the Printing a Co ordinate File programme which will only
509. ve not been trimmed or snapped to intersect another Line lying close to the Terminal Line Trimming implies that the Line under consideration terminates at the true intersection of this Line and any other Line where the graphical intersection is less than 1 00m The function will scan the entire Sheet checking all Lines for non Trimmed Terminals Any other Line that lies within 1 00m of the Terminal will be checked for Line Trimming If the current intersection position is found to be within this limit of 1 00m but exceeds 0 001m then this Line Terminal will be highlighted by displaying a purple dot over it All such highlighted Line Terminals can then be investigated and or corrected using the LT Line Trim Snap command for example For the General CAD Programme only Lines lying in Active Layers i e visible and non greyed Lines are considered for this function Delete Duplicate Lines Arcs This new function will search the Sheet s Line file and check for and remove any Line duplication Line duplication is defined by any two Lines having the same Terminal values within a tolerance of 0 005m The Line colours Style and Thickness are immaterial to this function The function applies to both Lines and Arcs After running this function the number of Deleted Duplicate Lines if any will be displayed Transformations to from Clarke 1880 Modified and WGS 1984 Ellipsoids South Africa Nothing has changed for this country The
510. want the programme to automatically select the closest two Trig Beacons or TSMs then select this option e f you have standard headings for this township which were created or used in the previous Page 289 of 312 Diagram then select this option For the current Diagram the Area and the Stand number will be changed to the current values All other headings will be adopted from those saved from the previous Diagram e f you want to use the same signature as was used in the previous Diagram then select this option If either the first or the second of the above three options are de selected the programme will allow you to manually enter these values Finally click on the Create button The programme will momentarily switch to the General CAD programme display the Sheet data locate the Stand identified form the given Stand Number determine the polygon boundaries making up the Stand and then return to the Diagram CAD programme SIDES ANGLES OF CO ORDINATES Metres DIRECTION Y System Lo 25 X Constants 000 296 06 20 2765 814 99 19 37 20 2765 31 79 105 52 50 2765 855 59 2765 845 28 Director of 2764 306 52 Surveys and 2766 278 35 Mapping Scale 1 1000 The figure AB C DA repres ents 1093 square metres of land being 24764 of the Village Kingray Estate Gaborone Surveyed in July 2015 by me W A van Vuuren Land Surveyor This diagram is annexed to The parent diagram is GP SR File Tran
511. when you change the Horizontal Scale of a display the Vertical Exaggeration value will remain constant and does not need to be re set for every change of scale 5 The Luminance of a model display can now be varied from 50 up to 100 This is basically a colour saturation control and can be so as to best suit the display of the model SFR Ver 5 35 toe Windows ta Opi Tora Mogg tal Ga p pa a poets Dewey be Ques Be oO AX AXP LA 4426S eo ABM Re 2 ome DOK Doo Horizontal Scala 3 2000 VertealExag 2 5 Elevation 25 Oriestation 225 Colour MumColour tumisance 00 1690 E Coordinate File CsSerpac SoniwarmiSampies Damp text DIM Fite CASurpac Software Samplon Dumnp Test ostas 03 03 2000 i A DTM model showing both the Base DTM and Figural DTM on the same display Page 183 of 312 Least Squares Network Plotting of Observations and Error Ellipses After computing a Least Squares Network Adjustment programme it is now possible to view and or plot a sheet showing the Observed Directions and Measured Distances used in the network along with the network Points and their associated Error EllipseS This feature is also available for The Least Squares Single Point Fix routines in SURPAC The display of Distances and Directions follows the normal survey conventions i e Measured Distances are displayed in red If the line is measured in both directions two red lines will be shown Observed Dire
512. whereby the Google Earth display option can be set or viewed The options may also be set by clicking the File options button when in the Co ordinate File Editing programme Page 169 of 312 Displaying the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons beacons on Google Earth First run the Locate and Add Nearest Trig TSM Beacons programme from the Conversions main menu heading if your SURPAC License has this Module Set the search options at the bottom of the form so as to display the required number and type of beacons From the displayed list of beacons remove any unwanted beacons by clicking on the green tic shown at the end of each display line The green tic will change to a red cross This point will remain dormant and will not be displayed until clicked again Click on the View List on Google Earth button at the bottom right of the form SURPAC will open and run Google Earth and the selected beacons will be displayed at their surface positions on the satellite imagery Either a Trig Beacon or a TSM symbol icon will be used to mark the displayed beacons To obtain a beacon s information click on the beacon required A balloon text display will then appear showing The Beacon Name The Degree Square Trig Beacons only The Co ordinate System e g WG299 The Beacon Y X and Z values or E N and H values The Beacon Latitude and Longitude A gt Example of a 3D View of Trig Beacons
513. y 2 2 3 Define a required Surface DTM File to be included in the Sheet display This will allow for the display of the Cursor Height value plus the ability to use Commands such as the Height Lines from DTM Command 2 2 4 When starting a New Sheet options exist to select required Default Point Name Position and Default Mark Point Type A further Option exists that allows for the automatic allocation of the appropriate Working Plan Mark Point Symbols to the Points displayed on the Sheet This only applies for Co ordinate Files using the Cadastral Format 2 3 Heighting Lines from the defined DTM Digital Terrain Model If a DTM File has been selected in the Sheet Setup Information function and if this DTM covers a portion or all of the current Plot Sheet then you can select the Draw menu item Height Lines from DTM This option will allocate DTM interpolated heights to Line terminals falling within the area covered by the defined DTM file A further option exists that will restrict the Heighting to those Line terminals which have a null zero height value l e Line terminals that are already Heighted will not be changed Page 25 of 312 This option is handy if you want to view a 3D display of the file by transferring it to a CAD application such as TopoCAD or AutoCAD Further when you use the Convert Line Terminals to Points Option under the Point menu heading the generated Points will be allocat
514. y match the original DXF DWG colours The Locate Point function was not working correctly when the Co ordinate file was set in the Engineering format This has now been corrected Locate and Mean Point Groups in a file The available comparison options now also include the facility to include the Z Height values in the comparisons General Observation Files There was a problem when Meaning Horizontal Angles in an Observation file This has now been fixed Namibian Bessel 1841 System This system has now been expanded to include the Lo 22 25 system Page 260 of 312 SURPAC for Windows XP Vista 7 8 Version 5 63 Upgrade CloudCompare is a powerful open source point cloud processing software that has been developed by Daniel Girardeau Montaut for a variety of uses including topographical surface analysis and comparison for Engineering Surveyors Mine Surveyors Civil Engineers and Architects It is an open source 3D point cloud and mesh processing software project It is most powerful in processing and comparing dense point cloud data visualizing data and data analysis CloudCompare makes use of the OpenGL 3D Software Development Kit which provides real time rotation in the 3 axes zooming and panning of a visualized model Linking CloudCompare with SURPAC Software provides a seamless and powerful tool for SURPAC Users It not only provides real time model visualization but also enables volume and surface area calcula
515. y selected or deselected If CAD files exist and you want these CAD files to be transformed then select the Transform any Associated CAD Files Check Box Once all the Options have been set click the Add a Point Button in the case of Manual Point Entry for the Source Data or click the Compute File Button for all other Source Data entry options The transformation of the file or the entered Point will be carried out and the results displayed in the co ordinate Grid The Display Current Point Parameters Button and the Print Button will become Page 48 of 312 active If you have selected the current Co ordinate file for the Data Storage the transformed Points will be added to the current Co ordinate file Displaying the Transformation Parameters for any Point The Transformation Parameters for any Point transformed can be displayed by either double clicking the required Point in the Grid display or by highlighting the required Point and then clicking the Display Current Point Parameters Button Transforming Associated CAD Files On completion of the Co ordinate File transformation the programme will proceed to transform all CAD Files associated to the Source File if this Option has been selected and to create corresponding transformed CAD Files for the current Co ordinate File Dimensional Data Due to possible Scale and or Orientation differences between the Source File and the Current File it is possible t
516. y applications CloudCompare can be used for a variety of other applications and would advise users to refer to the CloudCompare v2 61 User Manual which can be found in either the SURPAC installation folder usually C Surpac Software or in the sub folder if it exists called C Surpac Software Surpac Manuals Some further display taken from files imported into CloudCompare are shown below 2 6 Lbeta 32 bits 3 i pi Zog 4 G reme orc MM ES 30 View aloja wviews TEE Page 272 of 312 e ut a Z amp A02 Hs laz C Surpa IZ A02Hs Cloud la 4 Q El Camera Link Properties Property Name A02 Hs Visible a Showname in3D E a Colors RGB 90 8113 Box dimensions Y 130309 Z 109267 X 6 75805 Box center Y 42 2831 2 312375 Info Object ID Current Display 3D View Points 32 832 224 Global shift 0 00 0 004 Global scale 1 000000 Point size Default Scalar Field a Count 1 z F 4 Z amp Serpent Mound Mod 4 7 Serpent Mound T Serpent Mou hk Current Display 3D View Camera Link Properties ag Property State Valu Name Serpent M Visible ica f Normals w Show name in 3D F Colors R X 1085 12 Box dimensions Y 2698 96 Z974 X 236 54 Box center Y 1392 09 Z191 13 Info Object ID Faces 6 528 462 Wireframe al Stippling aj calar Fields Count 7 Active Point Sour Current Blue g
517. ybe set at a reduced size or an enlarged size The reduced size uses less screen area but the text is more difficult to read The enlarged size is much easier to read but takes up more screen area It is advisable therefore to toggle between these two sizes as is required The Printed Pages data are held in an ASCII File A Printed Pages File therefore may be loaded into any Text Viewer or Word Processing software application SURPAC Colour Scheme You can now set your own personalized colour scheme for the display of lists of co ordinates observations point names etc Apart from looking better than bland white displays this facility makes it visually easier to locate items along a line of data You can also set a Set Up high light colour which helps to more easily identify Set Up lines in an Observation file listing The SURPAC Main Menu System The SURPAC menu system has been modified to display Icons for the individual menu items Once the Icons have become familiar to you you will find that menu item selection becomes easier when looking for an Icon rather than a line of text SURPAC Help Pages This facility has been improved in that when the F1 key special function key F1 is pressed the Help Page displayed will be the Help information for the programme currently being run If you are running the Field Traverse programme for example pressing the F1 Key will bring up the Help Pages listing set at the Field T
518. yed on the current General Plan Sheet that represent Directions or Distances Sides applicable to a defined Stand Erf Once the required GP Sheet has been loaded set the GP Sheet to a reasonable scale and in a position such that the required Stands Erven are or can be displayed To activate the function first move the mouse cursor into the centre of the Stand Erf whose Area and Consistency is to be checked and then either Click the mouse RHB or simultaneously press the Ctrl C Keys If the former method is used then click the programme s Data main Menu heading and then select the Menu Item called Data amp Co ord Checking Page 116 of 312 On the displayed Area amp Consistency form enter the Stand Erf Number for the Stand Erf that is to be calculated NB If the Select the Stand Erf Number nearest Cursor option on the form is selected and the Stand Erf number exists on the GP Sheet then this number will be shown automatically The Area amp Consistency form will display the instruction Click on the required Starting Point Before the programme can begin co ordinate comparisons it requires that you indicate the Point from which the comparative data will begin To do this on the GP Sheet move the Cursor close to any Point pertaining to the Stand Erf being checked and Click the mouse LHB The Name and co ordinates of this Point will now be displayed in the first line on the Area amp Consistency form
519. your current Screen display is at a relatively large scale and you now want to move to new position which is a long way from the current position then use the Home Zoom to Full Sheet Command to display the entire Sheet on the Screen then use the Insert Zoom to a Window Command to define a Zoom Window covering the required new location End Zoom to the Sheet Plot Scale Selecting this Command from the General or F Key Main Menu or pressing the End keyboard key will cause the Screen display to be re plotted at a Scale that allows for the entire Sheet to be displayed on the Screen This is a useful Command when you need to see how the Sheet layout appears at the defined Plotting Scale Appropriate Icons have been included in the various Menu Bars to enable quick access to these Zoom Commands The relevant Keyboard alternatives Insert Home etc also provide quick access 5 Data downloading from the Sokkia SDL30 Power Level Electronic Line levelling data captured on the Sokkia SDL30 Power Level may now be downloaded directly into SURPAC via the Level Observation File Load Edit Programme When in the Level Observation File Load Edit Programme click the Load Data Button and select the Sokkia SDL30 Power Level option Refer to the appropriate SURPAC Help Pages for detailed information on using the Sokkia SDL30 Power Level when downloading into SURPAC My thanks to Mr Lourens Van Vuuren and Sokkia RSA for the l
520. ype files that require re orientation and Text scaling and the more normal SURPAC type DXF file s which conform more closely to the standard AutoCAD layout Users would need to know the origin of the DXF file before importing in order to decide which option to use If uncertain use the SURPAC format When SURPAC imports these DXF files the data items are identified as individual items and placed in appropriate data containers This allows for the use of the automatic Data and Consistency function Ctrl D and the Figure Move Scale Rotate function Ctrl M function Refer to the Figure Move Scale Rotate topic further on in this letter For the AllyCAD type DXF files the fixed width default Font of Monospac821 is used For the SURPAC type DXF files the variable width default Font of Arial is used 2b Diagram CAD Programme Sizing Positioning and Rotating the Figure The Figure may be Moved and or Scaled Resized and or Rotated as follows From the Programme s Main Menu click the Figure Heading then click the Move Scale Swing Figure menu item Alternatively you can simultaneously press the Ctrl and M keys All Lines in the Figure Area donated by the surrounding grey dashed lines will now be displayed in purple and the cursor will be located at the Figure centre The Text Items will be hidden during any Figure Move Scale Rotate activities 1 All Figural and surrounding Line

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Alimentos y Bebidas  Mode d`emploi Compléter des suites de nombres 0 à 999    For Firmware Version V1.0 Check www.allen  manual de instalación tanque S-1.ai  Manual - Lynx Pro Audio  取扱説明書 - 日立の家電品  Supermicro C2SBX+ motherboard  eRetail Cybertech Pvt. Ltd. Page 1 of 48 INDEX 1. MASTERS 1.1  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file